Form No.8DV2-EA-14K - Mazda Canada

Copy and paste this link to your website, so they can see this document directly without any plugins.



Keywords

vehicle, with, system, plate, 2015, Black, CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3, Thursday,, February, Form, No.8DV2-EA-14K, when, When, your, light, Mazda, will, from, seat, button, could, switch, front, NOTE, that, engine, warning, page, tire, Driving

Transcript

Black plate (1,1)
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page1
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (2,1)
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page2
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (3,1)
Thank you for choosing a Mazda. We at Mazda design and build vehicles with complete
customer satisfaction in mind.
To help ensure enjoyable and trouble-free operation of your Mazda, read this manual
carefully and follow its recommendations.
An Authorized Mazda Dealer knows your vehicle best. So when maintenance or service is
necessary, that's the place to go.
Our nationwide network of Mazda professionals is dedicated to providing you with the best
possible service.
We assure you that all of us at Mazda have an ongoing interest in your motoring pleasure
and in your full satisfaction with your Mazda product.
Mazda Motor Corporation
HIROSHIMA, JAPAN
Important Notes About This Manual
Keep this manual in the glove box as a handy reference for the safe and enjoyable use of your Mazda. Should you
resell the vehicle, leave this manual with it for the next owner.
All specifications and descriptions are accurate at the time of printing. Because improvement is a constant goal at
Mazda, we reserve the right to make changes in specifications at any time without notice and without obligation.
Air Conditioning and the Environment
Your Mazda's genuine air conditioner is filled with a refrigerant that has been found not to damage the earth's
ozone layer. If the air conditioner does not operate properly, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Perchlorate
Certain components of this vehicle such as [air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, lithium batteries, ···] may contain Perchlorate Material- - Special handling
may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Please be aware that this manual applies to all models, equipment and options. As a result, you may find
some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
©2014 Mazda Motor Corporation
Apr. 2015 (Print3)
AWord to Mazda Owners
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page3
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (4,1)
We want to help you get the most driving
pleasure from your vehicle. Your owner's
manual, when read from cover to cover,
can do that in many ways.
Illustrations complement the words of the
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
Mazda. By reading your manual, you can
find out about the features, important
safety information, and driving under
various road conditions.
The symbol below in this manual means
“Do not do this” or “Do not let this
happen”.
Index: A good place to start is the Index,
an alphabetical listing of all information
in your manual.
You'll find several WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTEs in the manual.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which bodily injury or damage to
your vehicle, or both, could result if
the caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE provides information and sometimes
suggests how to make better use of your
vehicle.
The symbol below, located on some parts
of the vehicle, indicates that this manual
contains information related to the part.
Please refer to the manual for a detailed
explanation.
How to Use This Manual
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page4
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (5,1)
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page5
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Table of Contents
Pictorial Index
Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.
1
Essential Safety Equipment
Important information about safety equipment, including seats, seat belt
system, child-restraint systems and SRS air bags.
2
Before Driving
Use of various features, including keys, doors, mirrors and windows.
3
When Driving
Information concerning safe driving and stopping.
4
Interior Features
Use of various features for ride comfort, including air-conditioning and audio
system.
5
Maintenance and Care
How to keep your Mazda in top condition.
6
If Trouble Arises
Helpful information on what to do if a problem arises with the vehicle.
7
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Important consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.
8
Specifications
Technical information about your Mazda.
9
Index 10
Black plate (6,1)
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page6
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (7,1)
1 Pictorial Index
Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.
Interior Overview .......................................................................... 1-2
Interior Equipment (View A) .................................................... 1-2
Interior Equipment (View B) .................................................... 1-4
Interior Equipment (View C) .................................................... 1-5
Exterior Overview ......................................................................... 1-6
1-1
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page7
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (8,1)
Interior Equipment (View A)
Door-lock knob .................................................................................................. page 3-18
Turn and lane-change signal .............................................................................. page 4-63
Lighting control ................................................................................................. page 4-58
Wiper and washer lever ..................................................................................... page 4-64
TCS OFF switch ................................................................................................ page 4-82
Tire pressure monitoring system set switch ..................................................... page 4-150
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch ............................................................. page 4-107
LDWS switch .................................................................................................... page 4-99
Outside mirror switch ........................................................................................ page 3-29
Door-lock switch ............................................................................................... page 3-15
Power window lock switch ................................................................................ page 3-34
Power window switches .................................................................................... page 3-32
1-2
Pictorial Index
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
Interior Overview
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page8
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (9,1)
Audio control switches ...................................................................................... page 5-51
Instrument cluster .............................................................................................. page 4-10
Cruise control switches ........................................................................ page 4-120, 4-144
Dashboard illumination knob ............................................................................ page 4-14
Seat warmer switches .......................................................................................... page 2-7
Hazard warning flasher switch .......................................................................... page 4-70
Push button start .................................................................................................. page 4-2
Lock release lever .............................................................................................. page 3-28
Hood release handle .......................................................................................... page 6-24
Pictorial Index
Interior Overview
1-3The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page9
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (10,1)
Interior Equipment (View B)
SRS air bags ...................................................................................................... page 2-44
Climate control system ........................................................................................ page 5-2
Rear window defogger switch ........................................................................... page 4-69
Audio system ..................................................................................................... page 5-13
Glove compartment ......................................................................................... page 5-134
Accessory socket ............................................................................................. page 5-130
External input terminal ...................................................................................... page 5-52
Shift lever/Selector lever .......................................................................... page 4-47, 4-49
Electric parking brake switch ............................................................................ page 4-75
Drive selection switch ....................................................................................... page 4-86
Fuse block .......................................................................................................... page 6-58
1-4
Pictorial Index
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
Interior Overview
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page10
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (11,1)
Interior Equipment (View C)
Seat belts ............................................................................................................ page 2-17
SRS air bag ........................................................................................................ page 2-44
Remote fuel-filler lid release ............................................................................. page 3-26
Bottle holder .................................................................................................... page 5-133
Sunvisor ........................................................................................................... page 5-127
Vanity mirror .................................................................................................... page 5-127
Moonroof switch ............................................................................................... page 3-35
Overhead lights ................................................................................................ page 5-128
Rearview mirror ................................................................................................. page 3-30
Commander switch ............................................................................................ page 5-32
Cup holders ...................................................................................................... page 5-132
Front seat ............................................................................................................. page 2-5
Center console ................................................................................................. page 5-135
Rear seat ............................................................................................................ page 2-10
Pictorial Index
Interior Overview
1-5The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page11
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (12,1)
Hood .................................................................................................................. page 6-24
Windshield wiper blades .................................................................................... page 6-33
Moonroof ........................................................................................................... page 3-35
Doors and keys .................................................................................................. page 3-12
Fuel-filler lid ...................................................................................................... page 3-26
Wheels and Tires ............................................................................................... page 6-41
Exterior lights .................................................................................................... page 6-46
Rear window wiper blade .................................................................................. page 6-34
Liftgate .............................................................................................................. page 3-19
Child safety locks .............................................................................................. page 3-19
Outside mirror .................................................................................................... page 3-29
1-6
Pictorial Index
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
Exterior Overview
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page12
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (13,1)
2 Essential Safety Equipment
Important information about safety equipment, including seats, seat belt
system, child-restraint systems and SRS air bags.
Seats ............................................................................................... 2-2
Seat Precaution .......................................................................... 2-2
Front Seat .................................................................................. 2-5
Rear Seat ................................................................................. 2-10
Head Restraints ....................................................................... 2-14
Seat Belt Systems ........................................................................ 2-17
Seat Belt Precautions .............................................................. 2-17
Seat Belt .................................................................................. 2-20
Seat Belt Warning Systems ..................................................... 2-21
Front Seat Belt Pretensioner and Load Limiting Systems ....... 2-21
Center-Rear Position Seat Belt ................................................ 2-23
Seat Belt Extender ................................................................... 2-24
Child Restraint ............................................................................ 2-26
Child Restraint Precautions ..................................................... 2-26
Child-Restraint System Installation ........................................ 2-31
Installing Child-Restraint Systems .......................................... 2-32
SRS Air Bags ............................................................................... 2-44
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions ................ 2-44
Supplemental Restraint System Components ......................... 2-51
How the SRS Air Bags Work .................................................. 2-53
SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria .......................................... 2-57
Limitations to SRS Air Bag .................................................... 2-58
Front Passenger Occupant Classification Systemí ................ 2-60
Constant Monitoring ............................................................... 2-66
2-1íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page13
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (14,1)
Seat Precaution
WARNING
Make sure the adjustable components of a seat are locked in place:
Adjustable seats and seatbacks that are not securely locked are dangerous. In a
sudden stop or collision, the seat or seatback could move, causing injury. Make sure
the adjustable components of the seat are locked in place by attempting to slide the
seat forward and backward and rocking the seatback.
Never allow children to adjust a seat:
Allowing children to adjust a seat is dangerous as it could result in serious injury if a
child's hands or feet become caught in the seat.
Do not drive with the seatback unlocked:
All of the seatbacks play an important role in your protection in a vehicle. Leaving
the seatback unlocked is dangerous as it can allow passengers to be ejected or
thrown around and baggage to strike occupants in a sudden stop or collision,
resulting in severe injury. After adjusting the seatback at any time, even when there
are no other passengers, rock the seatback to make sure it is locked in place.
Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is stopped:
Adjusting the driver's seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The driver could
lose control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Do not modify or replace the front seats:
Modifying or replacing the front seats such as replacing the upholstery or loosening
any bolts is dangerous. The front seats contain air bag components essential to the
supplemental restraint system. Such modifications could damage the supplemental
restraint system and result in serious injury. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer if
there is any need to remove or reinstall the front seats.
Do not drive with damaged front seats:
Driving with damaged front seats is dangerous. A collision, even one not strong
enough to inflate the air bags, could damage the front seats which contain essential
air bag components. If there was a subsequent collision, an air bag may not deploy
which could lead to injuries. Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect the
front seats, front seat belt pretensioners and air bags after a collision.
Do not drive with either front seats reclined:
Sitting in a reclined position while the vehicle is moving is dangerous because you do
not get the full protection from seat belts. During sudden braking or a collision, you
can slide under the lap belt and suffer serious internal injuries. For maximum
protection, sit well back and upright.
2-2
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page14
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (15,1)
Do not place an object such as a cushion between the seatback and your back:
Putting an object such as a cushion between the seatback and your back is
dangerous because you will be unable to maintain a safe driving posture and the
seat belt cannot function at its full capacity in a collision, which could result in a
serious accident, injury or death.
Do not place objects under the seat:
The object could get stuck and cause the seat to not be fixed securely, and result in
an accident.
Do not stack cargo higher than the seatbacks:
Stacking luggage or other cargo higher than the seatbacks is dangerous. During
sudden braking or a collision, objects can fly around and become projectiles that
may hit and injure passengers.
Make sure luggage and cargo is secured before driving:
Not securing cargo while driving is dangerous as it could move or be crushed during
sudden braking or a collision and cause injury.
Never allow a passenger to sit or stand on the folded seatback while the vehicle is
moving:
Driving with a passenger on the folded seatback is dangerous. Allowing a child to sit
up on the folded seatback while the vehicle is moving is particularly dangerous. In a
sudden stop or even a minor collision, a child not in a proper seat or child-restraint
system and seat belt could be thrown forward, back or even out of the vehicle
resulting in serious injuries or death. The child in the baggage area could be thrown
into other occupants and cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Ø When operating a seat, be careful not to put your hands or fingers near the
moving parts of the seat or on the side trim to prevent injury.
Ø When moving the seats, make sure there is no cargo in the surrounding area. If
the cargo gets caught it could damage the cargo.
Ø (Manual Seat)
When returning a rear-reclined seatback to its upright position, make sure you
hold onto the seatback with your other hand while operating the lever. If the
seatback is not supported, it will flip forward suddenly and could cause injury.
Ø (Power Seat)
The seat-bottom power adjustment is operated by motors. Avoid extended
operation because excessive use can damage the motors.
Ø To prevent the battery from running down, avoid using the power adjustment
when the engine is stopped. The adjuster uses a large amount of electrical
power.
Ø Do not use the switch to make more than one adjustment at a time.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
2-3
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page15
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (16,1)
NOTE
When returning a rear seat to its original position, also replace the seat belt to its normal position.
Verify that the seat belt pulls out and retracts.
2-4
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page16
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (17,1)
Front Seat
qSeat Operation
Power operation
Seat Slide
(Manual Seat)
To move a seat forward or backward, raise the lever and slide the seat to the desired
position and release the lever.
Make sure the lever returns to its original position and the seat is locked in place by
attempting to push it forward and backward.
(Power Seat)
To slide the seat, move the slide lifter switch on the outside of the seat to the front or back
and hold it. Release the switch at the desired position.
Height Adjustment
(Manual Seat)
To adjust the seat height, move the lever up or down.
(Power Seat)
To adjust the seat height, move the switch up or down.
Front Height Adjustment of Seat Bottom (Driver's Power Seat)í
To adjust the front height of the seat bottom, raise or lower the front of the slide lifter
switch.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
2-5íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page17
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (18,1)
Seat Recline
(Manual Seat)
To change the seatback angle, lean forward slightly while raising the lever. Then lean back
to the desired position and release the lever.
Make sure the lever returns to its original position and the seatback is locked in place by
attempting to push it forward and backward.
(Power Seat)
To change the seatback angle, press the front or rear side of the reclining switch. Release
the switch at the desired position.
Lumbar Support Adjustment (Driver's Seat)í
(Manual Operation)
To increase the seat firmness, push the lever forward. Pull the lever backward to decrease
firmness.
(Power Operation)
To increase the seat firmness, press and hold the front part of the switch to the desired
position, then release it.
Press the rear part of the switch to decrease firmness.
2-6
Essential Safety Equipment
íSome models.
Seats
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page18
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (19,1)
qSeat Warmerí
The front seats are electrically heated. The
ignition must be switched ON.
Press the seat warmer switch to illuminate
the indicator light while the ignition is
switched ON. The mode changes as
follow each time the seat warmer switch is
pressed.
Fully Automatic Type Climate Control
OFF
High
Mid
Low
Manual Type Climate Control
OFF
High
Mid
Low
WARNING
Be careful when using the seat warmer:
The heat from the seat warmer may
be too hot for some people, as
indicated below, and could cause a
low-temperature burn.
Ø Infants, small babies, elderly
people, and physically challenged
people
Ø People with delicate skin
Ø People who are excessively
fatigued
Ø People who are intoxicated
Ø People who have taken sleepinducing medicine such as
sleeping pills or cold medicine
Do not use the seat warmer with
anything having high moistureretention ability such as a blanket or
cushion on the seat:
The seat may be heated excessively
and cause a low-temperature burn.
Do not use the seat warmer even when
taking a short nap in the vehicle:
The seat may be heated excessively
and cause a low-temperature burn.
Do not place heavy objects with sharp
projections on the seat, or insert
needles or pins into it:
This could cause the seat to become
excessively heated and result in injury
from a minor burn.
CAUTION
Do not use organic solvents to clean
the seat. It may damage the seat
surface and the heater.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
2-7íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page19
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (20,1)
NOTE
l If the ignition is switched off while the seat
warmer is operating (High, Mid or Low)
and then switched ON again, the seat
warmer will automatically operate at the
temperature set before switching off the
ignition.
l Use the seat warmer when the engine is
running. Leaving the seat warmer on for
long periods with the engine not running
could cause the battery power to be
depleted.
l The temperature of the seat warmer cannot
be adjusted beyond High, Mid and Low
because the seat warmer is controlled by a
thermostat.
qSeat Position Memory (Driver's
seat)í
The seat position memory function allows
you to program the driver's seat to a
desired seat position and to call up a
programmed position with the simple
touch of a button.
CAUTION
Do not place fingers or hands around
the bottom of the seat while the seat
memory function is operating. The
seat moves automatically while the
seat memory function is operating
and fingers or hands could get
pinched and injured.
SET button
The seat position can be programmed or
operated using the following operations.
l Operation of the buttons on the side of
the seat.
l Operation using the key.
NOTE
l Individual seat positions can be
programmed to the two available
programming buttons on the side of the
driver's seat, plus one seat position for each
registered key.
l If the vehicle has been serviced and the
battery cables disconnected, the
programmed seat positions will have been
erased. Re-program the seat positions.
Programming
1. Switch the ignition OFF.
2. Adjust the seat to the desired position
using the slide lifter and reclining
switches.
Refer to Seat Operation on page 2-5.
3. Press and hold the memory SET button
until a beep sound is heard.
2-8
Essential Safety Equipment
íSome models.
Seats
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page20
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (21,1)
4. Perform one of the following settings
within 5 seconds of completing step 3
above:
l To program memory button 1 or 2,
press and hold the button until a
beep sound is heard.
l To program a key, press and hold
the key switch until a beep sound
is heard.
Adjusting a programmed position
(Programming to a button on the seat
side)
1. While the vehicle is stopped, press the
programming button for the seat
position you want to call up (button 1
or 2).
2. A beep sound is heard when the seat
position adjustment is completed.
NOTE
l If seat movement is not required, only the
beep sounds.
l When the ignition is switched ON, the seat
position memory function does not operate
unless the selector lever is in the P position
(Automatic transaxle) or the parking brake
is applied (Manual transaxle).
l When the ignition is switched OFF, the seat
position memory function is operable while
the selector lever is in a position other than
P position (Automatic transaxle) or the
parking brake is not applied (Manual
transaxle), however, if the ignition is
switched ON while the seat position
memory function is operating, the operation
is stopped.
l The seat position adjustment is canceled in
the following cases:
l Any of the seat adjustment switches is
operated.
l The SET button is pressed.
l Programming button 1 or 2 is pressed.
l The key lock switch or unlock switch is
operated.
l The vehicle starts moving.
(When programming to the key)
1. Unlock the doors by pressing a request
switch or the key switch.
2. After unlocking the doors, the seat
position adjustment begins within 40
seconds of opening the driver's door,
and a beep sounds when the operation
is finished.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
2-9
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page21
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (22,1)
NOTE
l If there is no seat position movement, a
beep is not heard.
l When the ignition is switched ON, the seat
position memory function does not operate
unless the selector lever is in the P position
(Automatic transaxle) or the parking brake
is applied (Manual transaxle).
l When the ignition is switched OFF, the seat
position memory function is operable while
the selector lever is in a position other than
P position (Automatic transaxle) or the
parking brake is not applied (Manual
transaxle), however, if the ignition is
switched ON while the seat position
memory function is operating, the operation
is stopped.
l The seat position adjustment is canceled in
the following cases:
l Any of the seat adjustment switches is
operated.
l The SET button is pressed.
l Programming button 1 or 2 is pressed.
l The key switch or switch is
operated.
l The vehicle starts moving.
Erasing programmed seat positions
(Erasing the seat positions programmed
to the key)
1. Switch the ignition OFF.
2. Continue pressing the seat SET button
until a beep sound is heard.
3. After the beep sounds, press the key
switch continuously within 5 seconds
until the beep sounds.
Rear Seat
qSplit Folding
The seatbacks can be folded down to
provide more space in the luggage
compartment.
WARNING
Tightly secure cargo in the luggage
compartment when it is transported
with the seatbacks folded down:
Driving without tightly securing
cargo and luggage is dangerous as it
could move and become an
obstruction to driving during
emergency braking or a collision
resulting in an unexpected accident.
Always remove the child-restraint
system from the rear seat before
operating the remote handle levers for
the rear seat:
Operating the remote handle levers
while a rear-facing child-restraint
system is in the rear seat is
dangerous. It could cause injury to a
child seated in the child-restraint
system when the seatback suddenly
flips forward.
2-10
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page22
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (23,1)
Make sure there is nobody in the rear
seat area before operating (pulling) the
remote handle levers (Vehicles with
remote handle):
Not checking the rear seat area for
persons before folding the seatbacks
with the strap/remote handle levers
is dangerous. The rear seat area is
difficult to see from the rear of the
vehicle. Operating (pulling) the
remote handle levers without
checking could cause injury to a
person when a seatback suddenly
flips forward.
CAUTION
Ø When operating the rear seatback
knob, make sure you support the
seatback with your hand. If the
seatback is not supported with
your hand, it will flip forward
suddenly and could cause injury to
the finger that pushes the rear
seatback knob down.
Ø (Vehicles with remote handle)
Before folding the seatbacks down
with the remote handle levers,
make sure there is no cup in a rear
cup holder. Folding the seatbacks
with the remote handle levers
while a cup is in the cup holder
could soil or damage the seat
bottom and seatback.
Ø (Vehicles with remote handle)
Be careful of the following when
using the remote handle levers:
Ø On a downward slope, the
seatback could flip forward
faster than on a flat surface.
Ø On an upward slope, the
seatback may not fold down.
When the seatbacks cannot be
folded down with levers, pull
the rear seatback forward from
inside the vehicle.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
2-11
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page23
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (24,1)
Folding both seatbacks down
CAUTION
Check the position of a front seat
before folding a rear seatback.
Depending on the position of a front
seat, it may not be possible to fold a
rear seatback all the way down
because it may hit the seatback of
the front seat which could scratch or
damage the front seat or its pocket.
Lower or remove the head restraint
on the rear outboard seat if
necessary.
Using remote handleí
After checking that the rear seats are clear,
open the liftgate and lower the seatback
you want to fold down using the remote
handle.
When folding the left side, operate the
outer part of the remote handle.
CAUTION
(Folding the left seatback)
Be careful when operating the remote
handle with the center seat folded
down. If a person sitting in the right
rear seat places a hand on the center
seat, it could be pinched by a
seatback or seat component causing
injury.
Using push knob
Push the rear seatback knob down.
Folding only center seatí
Using remote handle
1. If the center head restraint is in the
position for use, store it.
2-12
Essential Safety Equipment
íSome models.
Seats
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page24
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (25,1)
2. After checking that the center seat is
clear, open the liftgate and pull the
inside remote handle levers on the left
side of the liftgate compartment.
Using strap
1. If the center head restraint is in the
position for use, store it.
2. Pull the strap on the back of the
seatback to fold the seatback forward.
To return the seatbacks to the upright
position
1. Lift the seatbacks upright.
2. Pull on the top of the seatbacks from
inside the vehicle to make sure they are
locked.
WARNING
Always make sure the seat belts are
fully pulled out from under the
seatbacks:
A seat belt caught under a seatback
after the seatback is returned to its
upright position is dangerous. In a
collision or sudden stop, the seat belt
cannot provide adequate protection.
When returning the seatback to the
upright position, make sure there is no
red indication:
A rear seatback not fully returned
and locked in the upright position is
dangerous. Sudden stops or
maneuvering could cause a seatback
to flip forward suddenly resulting in
injury. If the red indicator is visible on
the back of the rear seatback knob,
the seatback is not locked in the
upright position.
Locked position
Unlocked position
Red indicator
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
2-13
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page25
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (26,1)
qArmrestí
The rear armrest in the center of the rear
seatback can be used (no occupant in the
center seat) or placed upright.
WARNING
Never put your hands and fingers
around the moving parts of the seat
and armrest:
Putting your hands and fingers
around the moving parts of the seat
and armrest is dangerous as they
could get injured.
Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints on all outboard seats and the
rear center seat. The head restraints are
intended to help protect you and the
passengers from neck injury.
WARNING
Always drive with the head restraints
installed when seats are being used
and make sure they are properly
adjusted.:
Driving with the head restraints
adjusted too low or removed is
dangerous. With no support behind
your head, your neck could be
seriously injured in a collision.
qHeight Adjustment
Adjust the head restraint so that the center
is even with the top of the passenger's
ears.
To raise a head restraint, pull it up to the
desired position.
To lower the head restraint, press the stopcatch release, then push the head restraint
down.
2-14
Essential Safety Equipment
íSome models.
Seats
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page26
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (27,1)
Front outboard seat
Rear outboard seat
Rear center seat
qRemoval/Installation
To remove the head restraint, pull it up
while pressing the stop-catch.
To install the head restraint, insert the legs
into the holes while pressing the stopcatch.
WARNING
Always drive with the head restraints
installed when seats are being used
and make sure they are properly
installed:
Driving with the head restraints not
installed is dangerous. With no
support behind your head, your neck
could be seriously injured in a
collision.
After installing a head restraint, try
lifting it to make sure that it does not
pull out:
Driving with an unsecured head
restraint is dangerous as the
effectiveness of the head restraint will
be compromised which could cause it
to unexpectedly detach from the seat.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
2-15
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page27
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (28,1)
CAUTION
Ø When installing a head restraint,
make sure that it is installed
correctly with the front of the head
restraint facing forward. If the
head restraint is installed
incorrectly, it could detach from
the seat during a collision and
result in injury.
Ø The head restraints on each of the
front and rear seats are
specialized to each seat. Do not
switch around the head restraint
positions. If a head restraint is not
installed to its correct seat
position, the effectiveness of the
head restraint during a collision
will be compromised which could
cause injury.
2-16
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page28
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (29,1)
Seat Belt Precautions
Seat belts help to decrease the possibility of severe injury during accidents and sudden
stops. Mazda recommends that the driver and all passengers always wear seat belts.
All of the seat belt retractors are designed to keep the lap/shoulder belts out of the way
when not in use.
The driver's seat belt has no provisions for child-restraint systems and has only an
emergency locking mode. The driver may wear it comfortably, and it will lock during a
collision.
However, in some models (with automatic locking mode) the front passenger's seat and all
rear lap/shoulder belt retractors operate in two modes: emergency locking mode, and for
child-restraint systems, automatic locking mode. While we recommend you put all children
in the rear seats, if you must use the front passenger seat for a child, slide the front
passenger seat as far back as possible and make sure any child-restraint system is secured
properly.
WARNING
Always wear your seat belt and make sure all occupants are properly restrained:
Not wearing a seat belt is extremely dangerous. During a collision, occupants not
wearing seat belts could hit someone or things inside the vehicle or even be thrown
out of the vehicle. They could be seriously injured or even killed. In the same
collision, occupants wearing seat belts would be much safer.
Do not wear twisted seat belts:
Twisted seat belts are dangerous. In a collision, the full width of the belt is not
available to absorb the impact. This puts more force on the bones beneath the belt,
which could cause serious injury or death. So, if your seat belt is twisted, you must
straighten the seat belt to remove any twists and to allow the full width of the belt to
be used.
Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:
Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt
used in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers
could be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for
more than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant
properly restrained.
Do not operate a vehicle with a damaged seat belt:
Using a damaged seat belt is dangerous. An accident could damage the belt
webbing of the seat belt in use. A damaged seat belt cannot provide adequate
protection in a collision. Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect all seat belt
systems in use during an accident before they are used again.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
2-17
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page29
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (30,1)
Have your seat belts changed immediately if the pretensioner or load limiter has
been expended:
Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately inspect the front seat belt
pretensioners and air bags after any collision. Like the air bags, the front seat belt
pretensioners and load limiters will only function once and must be replaced after
any collision that caused them to deploy. A seat belt with an expended pretensioner
or load limiter is still better than wearing no seat belt at all; however, if the front
seat belt pretensioners and load limiters are not replaced, the risk of injury in a
collision will increase.
Positioning the Shoulder Portion of the Seat Belt:
Improper positioning of the shoulder portion of the seat belt is dangerous. Always
make sure the shoulder portion of the seat belt is positioned across your shoulder
and near your neck, but never under your arm, on your neck, or on your upper arm.
Positioning the Lap Portion of the Seat Belt:
The lap portion of the seat belt worn too high is dangerous. In a collision, this would
concentrate the impact force directly on the abdominal area, causing serious injury.
Wear the lap portion of the belt snugly and as low as possible.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt.
CAUTION
Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and rings are soiled, so try to keep
them clean. For more details about cleaning the seat belts, refer to “Cleaning the
Lap/Shoulder Belt Webbing” (page 6-70).
Ring
2-18
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page30
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (31,1)
qPregnant Women and Persons with Serious Medical Conditions
Pregnant women should always wear seat belts. Ask your doctor for specific
recommendations.
The lap belt should be worn SNUGLYAND AS LOWAS POSSIBLE OVER THE HIPS.
The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder properly, but never across the
stomach area.
Persons with serious medical conditions also should wear seat belts. Check with your
doctor for any special instructions regarding specific medical conditions.
qEmergency Locking Mode
When the seat belt is fastened, it will always be in the emergency locking mode.
In the emergency locking mode, the belt remains comfortable on the occupant and the
retractor will lock in position during a collision.
If the belt is locked and cannot be pulled out, retract the belt once, and then try pulling it
out slowly. If this fails, pull the belt strongly one time and loosen, then pull it out again
slowly.
(Seat Belt with Automatic Locking Mode)
When the seat belt is fastened, it will always be in the emergency locking mode until it is
switched to automatic locking mode by pulling it all the way out to its full length. If the
belt feels tight and hinders comfortable movement while the vehicle is stopped or in
motion, it may be in the automatic locking mode because the belt has been pulled too far
out. To return the belt to the more comfortable emergency locking mode, wait until the
vehicle has stopped in a safe, level area, retract the belt fully to convert it back to
emergency locking mode and then extend it around you again.
qAutomatic Locking Mode
Always use the automatic locking mode to keep the child-restraint system from shifting to
an unsafe position in the event of an accident. To enable seat belt automatic locking mode,
pull it all the way out and connect it as instructed on the child-restraint system. It will
retract down to the child-restraint system and stay locked on it. See the section on child
restraint (page 2-26).
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
2-19
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page31
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (32,1)
Seat Belt
qFastening the Seat Belt
Seat belt
buckle
Seat belt tongue
Position the lap belt as low as possible,
not on the abdominal area, then adjust the
shoulder belt so that it fits snugly against
your body.
Keep low on
hip bone
Too high
Take up slack
qUnfastening the Seat Belt
Depress the button on the seat belt buckle.
If the belt does not fully retract, pull it out
and check for kinks or twists. Then make
sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.
Button
NOTE
If a belt does not fully retract, inspect it for
kinks and twists. If it is still not retracting
properly, have it inspected at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
qFront Shoulder Belt Adjuster
To raise To lower
Make sure the adjuster is locked.
2-20
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page32
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (33,1)
Seat Belt Warning Systems
If it detects that the driver's seat belt is
unfastened, the warning light or beep
alerts the driver.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-20.
Front Seat Belt Pretensioner
and Load Limiting Systems
For optimum protection, the driver and
front passenger seat belts are equipped
with pretensioner and load limiting
systems. For both these systems to work
properly you must wear the seat belt
properly.
Pretensioners:
In moderate or severe frontal or nearfrontal accidents, the front air bag and
pretensioner systems deploy
simultaneously.
For deployment details, refer to the SRS
Air Bag Deployment Criteria (page 2-57).
The front seat belt retractors remove slack
quickly as the air bags are expanding.
Any time the air bags and seat belt
pretensioners have fired they must be
replaced.
A system malfunction or operation
conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-20.
Refer to Air Bag/Front Seat Belt
Pretensioner System Warning Beep on
page 7-35.
(With Front Passenger Occupant
Classification System)
In addition, the pretensioner system for
the front passenger, like the front and side
passenger air bag, is designed to only
deploy when the front passenger occupant
classification sensor detects a passenger
sitting on the front passenger's seat.
For details, refer to the front passenger
occupant classification sensor (page
2-60).
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
2-21
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page33
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (34,1)
Load limiter:
The load limiting system releases belt
webbing in a controlled manner to reduce
belt force on the occupant's chest. While
the most severe load on a seat belt occurs
in frontal collisions, the load limiter has
an automatic mechanical function and can
activate in any accident mode with
sufficient occupant movement.
Even if the pretensioners have not fired,
the load limiting function must be
checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Wear seat belts only as recommended
in this owner's manual:
Incorrect positioning of the driver and
front passenger seat belts is
dangerous. Without proper
positioning, the pretensioner and
load limiting systems cannot provide
adequate protection in an accident
and this could result in serious injury.
For more details about wearing seat
belts, refer to “Fastening the seat
belts” (page 2-20).
Have your seat belts changed
immediately if the pretensioner or load
limiter has been expended:
Always have an Authorized Mazda
Dealer immediately inspect the front
seat belt pretensioners and air bags
after any collision. Like the air bags,
the front seat belt pretensioners and
load limiters will only function once
and must be replaced after any
collision that caused them to deploy.
A seat belt with an expended
pretensioner or load limiter is still
better than wearing no seat belt at
all; however, if the front seat belt
pretensioners and load limiters are
not replaced, the risk of injury in a
collision will increase.
Do not modify the components or
wiring, or use electronic testing devices
on the pretensioner system:
Modifying the components or wiring
of the pretensioner system, including
the use of electronic testing devices is
dangerous. You could accidentally
activate it or make it inoperable
which would prevent it from
activating in an accident. The
occupants or repairers could be
seriously injured.
Properly dispose of the pretensioner
system:
Improper disposal of the pretensioner
system or a vehicle with nondeactivated pretensioners is
dangerous. Unless all safety
procedures are followed, injury could
result. Have an Authorized Mazda
Dealer safely dispose of the
pretensioner system or scrap a
pretensioner system equipped vehicle.
2-22
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page34
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (35,1)
NOTE
l The pretensioner system will activate in a
moderate or greater frontal or near-frontal,
or a severe side collision. It will not
activate in most rollovers, rear impacts.
(With Front Passenger Occupant
Classification System)
The pretensioner system will activate in a
severe roll-over accident.
In addition, the pretensioner system for the
front passenger is designed to only deploy
when the front passenger occupant
classification sensor detects a passenger
sitting on the front passenger's seat.
l Some smoke (non-toxic gas) will be
released when the air bags and
pretensioners deploy. This does not indicate
a fire. This gas normally has no effect on
occupants, however, those with sensitive
skin may experience light skin irritation. If
residue from the deployment of the air bags
or the front pretensioner system gets on the
skin or in the eyes, wash it off as soon as
possible.
Center-Rear Position Seat
Belt
Before using the center-rear lap/shoulder
belt make sure tongue (A) and anchor
buckle (B) are fastened.
(A)
(B)
qFastening the Seat Belt
1. Grasp the seat belt tongue (C).
2. Slowly pull out the lap/shoulder belt.
3. Insert the seat belt tongue (C) into the
seat belt buckle (D) until you hear a
click sound.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
2-23
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page35
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (36,1)
WARNING
Fastening the Center-Rear Seat Belt
with Only One Buckle:
Fastening the center-rear seat belt
with only one buckle is dangerous. If
only one pair of seat belt tongues
and buckles is fastened (either seat
belt tongue (C) and seat belt anchor
buckle (D) or seat belt tongue (A) and
seat belt buckle (B)), then the seat
belt cannot provide full protection. In
a sudden stop or collision, the user
could slide under the belt and suffer
serious injuries. Always make sure
that both pairs of seat belt tongues
and buckles are fastened properly.
Seat Belt Extender
If your seat belt is not long enough, even
when fully extended, a seat belt extender
may be available to you at no charge from
your Authorized Mazda Dealer.
This extender will be only for you and for
the particular vehicle and seat. Even if it
plugs into other seat belts, it may not hold
in the critical moment of a crash.
When ordering an extender, only order
one that provides the necessary additional
length to fasten the seat belt properly.
Please contact your Authorized Mazda
Dealer for more information.
WARNING
Do not use a seat belt extender unless
it is necessary:
Using a seat belt extender when not
necessary is dangerous. The seat belt
will be too long and not fit properly.
In an accident, the seat belt will not
provide adequate protection and you
could be seriously injured. Only use
the extender when it is required to
fasten the seat belt properly.
2-24
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page36
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (37,1)
Do not use an improper extender:
Using a seat belt extender that is for
another person or a different vehicle
or seat is dangerous. The seat belt
will not provide adequate protection
and the user could be seriously
injured in an accident. Only use the
extender provided for you and for the
particular vehicle and seat. NEVER
use the extender in a different vehicle
or seat. If you sell your Mazda, do
not leave your seat belt extender in
the vehicle. It could be used
accidentally by the new owner of the
vehicle. After removing the seat belt
extender, discard it. Never use the
seat belt extender in any other
vehicle you may own in the future.
Do not use an extender that is too
long:
Using an extender that is too long is
dangerous. The seat belt will not fit
properly. In an accident, the seat belt
will not provide adequate protection
and you could be seriously injured.
Do not use the extender or choose
one shorter in length if the distance
between the extender's buckle and
the center of the user's body is less
than 15 cm (6 in).
Do not leave a seat belt extender
connected to the buckle:
Leaving a seat belt extender
connected to the buckle without
using the seat belt is dangerous.
When the seat belt extender is
connected to the driver's seat belt
buckle (or front passenger) seat, the
SRS driver's (or front passenger's) air
bag system will determine that the
driver (or front passenger) is wearing
the seat belt even if the driver (or
front passenger) is not wearing it.
This condition could cause the
driver's (or front passenger's) air bag
to not activate correctly and result in
death or serious injury in the event of
collision. Always wear the seat belt
with the seat belt extender.
Do not use the seat belt extender when
installing a child-restraint system on
the front or rear passenger seat:
Using a seat belt extender to fasten a
child-restraint system on any seat is
dangerous. Always follow the childrestraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions and never
use a seat belt extender.
NOTE
When not in use, remove the seat belt extender
and store it in the vehicle. If the seat belt
extender is left connected, the seat belt
extender might get damaged as it will not
retract with the rest of the seat belt and can
easily fall out of the door when not in use and
be damaged. In addition, the seat belt warning
light will not illuminate and function properly.
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
2-25
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page37
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (38,1)
Child Restraint Precautions
Mazda strongly urges the use of child-restraint systems for children small enough to use
them.
You are required by law to use a child-restraint system for children in the U.S. and Canada.
Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety
of children riding in your vehicle.
Whatever child-restraint system you consider, please pick the appropriate one for the age
and size of the child, obey the law and follow the instructions that come with the individual
child-restraint system.
A child who has outgrown child-restraint systems should sit in the rear and use seat belts,
both lap and shoulder. If the shoulder belt crosses the neck or face, move the child closer to
the center of the vehicle in the outboard seats, and towards the buckle on the right if the
child is seated on the center seat.
Statistics confirm that the rear seat is the best place for all children up to 12 years of age,
and more so with a supplemental restraint system (air bags).
A rear-facing child-restraint system should NEVER be used on the front seat with the air
bag system activated. The front passenger's seat is also the least preferred seat for other
child-restraint systems.
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag, the
front passenger occupant classification sensor work as a part of the supplemental restraint
system. This system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the
front passenger seat belt pretensioner system when the front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light illuminates.
When an infant or small child sits on the front passenger seat, the system shuts off the front
passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system, so make sure the front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.
Even if the front passenger air bag is shut off, Mazda strongly recommends that children be
properly restrained and child-restraint systems of all kinds are properly secured on the rear
seats which are the best place for children.
For more details, refer to “Front passenger occupant classification sensor” (page 2-60).
2-26
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page38
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (39,1)
WARNING
Use the correct size child-restraint system:
For effective protection in vehicle accidents and sudden stops, a child must be
properly restrained using a seat belt or child-restraint system depending on age and
size. If not, the child could be seriously injured or even killed in an accident.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and always keep the child-restraint system
buckled down:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make
sure any child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the childrestraint system manufacturer's instructions. When not in use, remove it from the
vehicle or fasten it with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors
for LATCH child-restraint systems and the corresponding tether anchor.
Always secure a child in a proper child-restraint system:
Holding a child in your arms while the vehicle is moving is extremely dangerous. No
matter how strong the person may be, he or she cannot hold onto a child in a
sudden stop or collision and it could result in serious injury or death to the child or
other occupants. Even in a moderate accident, the child may be exposed to air bag
forces that could result in serious injury or death to the child, or the child may be
slammed into an adult, causing injury to both child and adult.
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that
could deploy:
Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even
though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on
the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates. The
child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently
backward resulting in serious injury or death to the child.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
2-27
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page39
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (40,1)
(Except Mexico)
Vehicles with a front passenger air bag have a warning label attached as shown
below. The warning label reminds you not to put a rear-facing child-restraint system
on the front passenger seat at any time.
(Mexico)
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE
AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Vehicles with a front passenger air bag have a warning label attached as shown
below. The warning label reminds you not to put a rear-facing child-restraint system
on the front passenger seat at any time.
Do not install a front-facing child-restraint system on the front passenger seat unless
it is unavoidable:
Installing a front-facing child-restraint system on the front passenger seat is
dangerous. In the event of a collision, the force of a deploying air bag could cause
serious injury or death to the child. If installing a front-facing child-restraint system
on the front passenger seat is unavoidable, move the front passenger seat as far
back as possible.
2-28
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page40
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (41,1)
When installing a child-restraint system on the front passenger's seat, adjust the seat
bottom to the highest position at which the seat belt securing the child-restraint
system is securely tightened (Vehicles with height adjustment on front passenger's
seat):
Installing a child-restraint system on the front passenger's seat with the seat bottom
at a low position is dangerous. The seat belt cannot securely fasten the childrestraint system which may result in death or injury to the child in the event of a
collision.
Seating a child in a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat is dangerous
under certain conditions (With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System):
Your vehicle is equipped with front passenger occupant classification sensor. Even
with the front passenger occupant classification sensor, if you must use the front
passenger seat to seat a child, using a child-restraint system on the front passenger
seat under the following conditions increases the danger of the front passenger air
bag deploying and could result in serious injury or death to the child.
Ø The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate when
seating a child in the child-restraint system.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint
system.
Ø A rear passenger or luggage pushing or pulling down on the front passenger
seatback.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.
Ø The seat is washed.
Ø Liquids are spilled on the seat.
Ø The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items
placed behind it.
Ø The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver
seat.
Ø An electric device is put on the front passenger's seat.
Ø An additional electrical device, such as a seat warmer is installed to the surface of
the front passenger seat.
The designated positions with seat belts on the rear seats are the safest places for
children. Always use seat belts and child restraints.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
2-29
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page41
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (42,1)
Do not allow a child or anyone to lean over or against the side window of a vehicle
with side and curtain air bags:
It is dangerous to allow anyone to lean over or against the side window, the area of
the front passenger seat, the front and rear window pillars and the roof edge along
both sides from which the side and curtain air bags deploy, even if a child-restraint
system is used. The impact of inflation from a side or curtain air bag could cause
serious injury or death to an out of position child. Furthermore, leaning over or
against the front door could block the side and curtain air bags and eliminate the
advantages of supplemental protection. With the front air bag and the additional
side air bag that comes out of the front seat, the rear seat is always a better location
for children. Take special care not to allow a child to lean over or against the side
window, even if the child is seated in a child-restraint system.
Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:
Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt
used in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers
could be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for
more than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant
properly restrained.
Always remove the child-restraint system from the rear seat before operating the
remote handle levers for the rear seat (Vehicles with remote handle):
Operating the remote handle levers while a rear-facing child-restraint system is in
the rear seat is dangerous. It could cause injury to a child seated in the childrestraint system when the seatback suddenly flips forward.
CAUTION
A seat belt or child-restraint system can become very hot in a closed vehicle during
warm weather. To avoid burning yourself or a child, check them before you or your
child touches them.
NOTE
Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed LATCH
child-restraint systems in the rear seats. When using these anchors to secure a child-restraint system,
refer to “Using LATCH Lower Anchor ” (page 2-40).
2-30
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page42
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (43,1)
Child-Restraint System
Installation
qChild-Restraint System Types
In this owner's manual, explanation of
child-restraint systems is provided for the
following three types of popular childrestraint systems: infant seat, child seat,
booster seat.
NOTE
l Installation position is determined by the
type of child-restraint system. Always read
the manufacturer's instructions and this
owner's manual carefully.
l Due to variations in the design of childrestraint systems, vehicle seats and seat
belts, all child-restraint systems may not fit
all seating positions. Before purchasing a
child-restraint system, it should be tested in
the specific vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it is intended to be used. If
a previously purchased child-restraint
system does not fit, you may need to
purchase a different one that will.
Infant seat
An infant seat provides restraint by
bracing the infant's head, neck and back
against the seating surface.
Child seat
A child seat restrains a child's body using
the harness.
Booster seat
A booster seat is a child restraint
accessory designed to improve the fit of
the seat belt system around the child's
body.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
2-31
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page43
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (44,1)
Installing Child-Restraint
Systems
Accident statistics reveal that a child is
safer in the rear seat. The front passenger's
seat is clearly the worst choice for any
child under 12, and with rear-facing childrestraint systems it is clearly unsafe due to
air bags.
NOTE
Even if your vehicle is equipped with front
passenger occupant classification sensor (page
2-60), which automatically deactivates the
front passenger air bag, a rear seat is the
safest place for a child of any age or size.
Some child-restraint systems now come
with tethers and therefore must be
installed on the seats that take tethers to
be effective. In your Mazda, tethered
child-restraint systems can only be
accommodated in the three positions on
the rear seat.
Some child-restraint systems also employ
specially designed LATCH attachments;
refer to “Using LATCH Lower Anchor”
(page 2-40).
WARNING
Tethered Child-Restraint Systems Work
Only on Tether-Equipped Rear Seats:
Installation of a tether equipped
child-restraint system in the front
passenger's seat defeats the safety
design of the system and will result in
an increased chance of serious injury
if the child-restraint system goes
forward without benefit of being
tethered.
Place tether equipped child-restraint
systems where there are tether
anchors.
qAnchor Bracket
Anchor brackets for securing childrestraint systems are equipped in the
vehicle. Locate each anchor position
using the illustration.
To install a child-restraint system, always
follow the instruction manual
accompanying the child-restraint system.
Anchor bracket location
Use the indicated anchor bracket locations
when installing a child-restraint system
equipped with a tether.
For center
For left
For right
2-32
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page44
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (45,1)
WARNING
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the childrestraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
Always route the tether strap between
the head restraint and the seatback:
Routing the tether strap on top of the
head restraint is dangerous. In a
collision the tether strap could slide
off the head restraint and loosen the
child-restraint system. The childrestraint system could move which
may result in death or injury to the
child.
Tether strap
Forward
Tether strap
Forward
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
2-33
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page45
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (46,1)
qUsing Automatic Locking Mode
Follow these instructions when using a
child-restraint system, unless you are
attaching a LATCH-equipped childrestraint system to the rear LATCH lower
anchors. Refer to “Using LATCH Lower
Anchor” (page 2-40).
NOTE
Follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions carefully. If you
are not sure whether you have a LATCH
system or tether, check in the child-restraint
system manufacturer's instructions and follow
them accordingly. Depending on the type of
child-restraint system, it may use LATCH
system instead of seat belts or if the belt goes
across the child's chest, may recommend
against using automatic locking mode.
1. Make sure the seatback is securely
latched by pushing it back until it is
fully locked.
2. Raise the head restraint to the top
locked position.
Refer to Head Restraints on page 2-14.
3. Secure the child-restraint system with
the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
See the manufacturer's instructions on
the child-restraint system for belt
routing instructions.
4. To get the retractor into the automatic
locking mode, pull the shoulder belt
portion of the seat belt until the entire
length of the belt is out of the retractor.
5. Push the child-restraint system firmly
into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt
retracts as snugly as possible. A
clicking noise from the retractor will be
heard during retraction if the system is
in the automatic locking mode. If the
belt does not lock the seat down tight,
repeat this step.
2-34
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page46
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (47,1)
NOTE
Inspect this function before each use of the
child-restraint system. You should not be able
to pull the shoulder belt out of the retractor
while the system is in the automatic locking
mode. When you remove the child-restraint
system, be sure the belt fully retracts to return
the system to emergency locking mode before
occupants use the seat belts.
6. If your child-restraint system requires
the use of a tether strap, refer to the
manufacturer's instructions to hook and
tighten the tether strap.
WARNING
Use the tether and tether anchor only
for a child-restraint system:
Using the tether or tether anchor to
secure anything but a child-restraint
system is dangerous. This could
weaken or damage the tether or
tether anchor and result in injury.
Always route the tether strap between
the head restraint and the seatback:
Routing the tether strap on top of the
head restraint is dangerous. In a
collision the tether strap could slide
off the head restraint and loosen the
child-restraint system. The childrestraint system could move which
may result in death or injury to the
child.
Tether strap
Forward
Tether strap
Forward
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the childrestraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
2-35
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page47
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (48,1)
qIf You Must Use the Front Seat
for Children
If you cannot put all children in the rear
seat, at least put the smallest children in
the rear and be sure the largest child up
front uses the shoulder belt over the
shoulder.
NEVER put a rear-facing child-restraint
system on the front passenger seat
whether your vehicle is equipped with a
occupant classification sensor or not.
This seat is also not set up for tethered
child-restraint systems, put them in one of
the rear seat positions set up with tether
anchors.
Likewise the LATCH child-restraint
system cannot be secured in the front
passenger's seat and should be used in the
rear seat.
Do not allow anyone to sleep against the
side window since your vehicle has side
and curtain air bags, it could cause serious
injuries to an out of position occupant. As
children more often sleep in cars, it is
better to put them in the rear seat. If
installing the child-restraint system on the
front seat is unavoidable, follow these
instructions when using a front-facing
child-restraint system in the front
passenger's seat.
NOTE
l To check if your front seats have side air
bags:
Mazda vehicles equipped with side air bag
will have a “SRS AIRBAG” tag on the
outboard shoulder of the front seats.
l To check if your vehicle has curtain air
bags:
Mazda vehicles equipped with curtain air
bag will have an “SRS AIRBAG” marking
on the window pillars along the roof edge.
WARNING
Always move the front passenger seat
as far back as possible if installing a
front-facing child-restraint system on it
is unavoidable:
As your vehicle has front air bags
and doubly so because your vehicle
has side air bags, a front-facing
child-restraint system should be put
on the front passenger seat only
when it is unavoidable.
Even if the front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light
illuminates, always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the
force of a deploying air bag could
cause serious injury or death to the
child.
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint
system in the front seat with an air bag
that could deploy:
Rear-facing child-restraint systems
on the front seat are particularly
dangerous.
Even in a moderate collision, the
child-restraint system can be hit by a
deploying air bag and moved
violently backward resulting in
serious injury or death to the child.
Even though you may feel assured
that the front passenger air bag will
not deploy based on the fact that the
front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light illuminates, you
should not use a rear-facing childrestraint system in the front seat.
2-36
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page48
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (49,1)
Do not allow a child or anyone to lean
over or against the side window of a
vehicle with side and curtain air bags:
It is dangerous to allow anyone to
lean over or against the side window,
the area of the front passenger seat,
the front and rear window pillars and
the roof edge along both sides from
which the side and curtain air bags
deploy, even if a child-restraint
system is used. The impact of
inflation from a side or curtain air
bag could cause serious injury or
death to an out of position child.
Furthermore, leaning over or against
the front door could block the side
and curtain air bags and eliminate
the advantages of supplemental
protection. With the front air bag and
the additional side air bag that
comes out of the front seat, the rear
seat is always a better location for
children. Take special care not to
allow a child to lean over or against
the side window, even if the child is
seated in a child-restraint system.
Front Passenger's Seat Child-Restraint
System Installation (With automatic
locking mode seat belt)
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off.
2. Slide the seat as far back as possible.
3. (Vehicles with height adjustment on
front passenger's seat)
Adjust the seat bottom to the highest
position.
4. Place the child-restraint system on the
seat without putting your weight on the
seat and fasten the seat belt. See the
manufacturer's instructions on the
child-restraint system for belt routing
instructions.
5. To get the retractor into the automatic
locking mode, pull the shoulder belt
portion of the seat belt until the entire
length of the belt is out of the retractor.
6. Push the child-restraint system firmly
into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt
retracts as snugly as possible. A
clicking noise from the retractor will be
heard during retraction if the system is
in automatic locking mode. If the belt
does not lock the seat down tight,
repeat the previous step and also this
one.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
2-37
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page49
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (50,1)
NOTE
l Inspect this function before each use of the
child-restraint system. You should not be
able to pull the shoulder belt out of the
retractor while the system is in the
automatic locking mode. When you remove
the child-restraint system, be sure the belt
fully retracts to return the system to
emergency locking mode before occupants
use the seat belts.
l Follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions carefully.
Depending on the type of child-restraint
system, it may not employ seat belts which
are in automatic locking mode.
7. Seat your child safely in the childrestraint system and secure the child
according to the instructions from the
child-restraint system manufacturer.
8. (With Front Passenger Occupant
Classification System)
Switch the ignition ON and make sure
the front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light illuminates after
installing a child-restraint system on
the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light does not
illuminate, remove the child-restraint
system, switch the ignition to OFF, and
then re-install the child-restraint system
(page 2-60).
Climate control
Fully Automatic
Type
Manual Type
2-38
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page50
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (51,1)
WARNING
Do not seat a child in a child-restraint
system on the front passenger seat if
the front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light does not
illuminate (With Front Passenger
Occupant Classification System):
While it is always better to install any
child-restraint system on the rear
seat, it is imperative that a childrestraint system ONLY be used on the
front passenger seat if the
deactivation indicator light
illuminates when the child is seated
in the child-restraint system (page
2-60). Seating a child in a childrestraint system installed on the front
passenger seat with the front
passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light not illuminated is
dangerous. If this indicator light does
not illuminate, this means that the
front passenger front and side air
bags, and seat belt pretensioner are
ready for deployment. If an accident
were to deploy an air bag, a child in
a child-restraint system sitting in the
front passenger seat could be
seriously injured or killed. If the
indicator light does not illuminate
after seating a child in a childrestraint system on the front
passenger seat, seat a child in a
child-restraint system on the rear
seat and consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
2-39
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page51
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (52,1)
qUsing LATCH Lower Anchor
Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed
LATCH child-restraint systems in the rear seats. Both anchors must be used, otherwise the
seat will bounce around and put the child in danger. Most LATCH child-restraint systems
must also be used in conjunction with a tether to be effective. If they have a tether you
must use it to better assure your child's safety.
WARNING
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the use of the child-restraint system:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make
sure the child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the childrestraint system manufacturer's instructions.
Never attach two child-restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor:
Attaching two child-restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor is dangerous.
In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child-restraint
system attachments, and it may break, causing serious injury or death. If you use the
seat position for another child-restraint system when an outboard LATCH position is
occupied, use the center seat belts instead, and the tether if tether-equipped.
Make sure the child-restraint system is properly secured:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Follow
the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions on belt routing to secure the
seat just as you would with a child in it so that nobody is tempted to put a child in
an improperly secured seat later on. When not in use, remove it from the vehicle or
fasten it with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors for LATCH
child-restraint systems.
Make sure there are no seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH childrestraint system:
Not following the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions when installing
the child-restraint system is dangerous. If seat belts or a foreign object prevent the
child-restraint system from being securely attached to the LATCH lower anchors and
the child-restraint system is installed improperly, the child-restraint system could
move in a sudden stop or collision causing serious injury or death to the child or
other occupants. When installing the child-restraint system, make sure there are no
seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH lower anchors. Always follow
the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions.
2-40
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page52
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (53,1)
Installation on rear outboard seats
1. First, adjust the front seat to allow
clearance between the child-restraint
system and the front seat (page 2-5).
2. Make sure the seatback is securely
latched by pushing it back until it is
fully locked.
3. Expand the area between the seat
bottom and the seatback slightly to
verify the locations of the LATCH
lower anchors.
NOTE
The markings above the LATCH lower anchors
indicate the locations of the LATCH lower
anchors for the attachment of a child-restraint
system.
4. Raise the head restraint to the top
locked position.
Refer to Head Restraints on page 2-14.
5. Secure the child-restraint system using
BOTH LATCH lower anchors,
following the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instruction. Pull on the
child-restraint to be sure both anchors
are engaged.
6. If your child-restraint system came
equipped with a tether, that means it is
very important to properly secure the
tether for child safety. Please carefully
follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions when
installing tethers.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
2-41
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page53
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (54,1)
WARNING
Use the tether and tether anchor only
for a child-restraint system:
Using the tether or tether anchor to
secure anything but a child-restraint
system is dangerous. This could
weaken or damage the tether or
tether anchor and result in injury.
Always route the tether strap between
the head restraint and the seatback:
Routing the tether strap on top of the
head restraint is dangerous. In a
collision the tether strap could slide
off the head restraint and loosen the
child-restraint system. The childrestraint system could move which
may result in death or injury to the
child.
Tether strap
Forward
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the childrestraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
Installation on rear center seat
The LATCH lower anchors at the center
of the rear seat are much further apart than
the sets of LATCH lower anchors for
child-restraint system installation at other
seating positions. Child-restraint systems
with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be
installed on the center seating position.
Some LATCH equipped child-restraint
systems can be placed in the center
position and will reach the nearest
LATCH lower anchors which are 420 mm
(16.5 in) apart. LATCH compatible childrestraint systems (with attachments on belt
webbing) can be used at this seating
position only if the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions state that the
child-restraint system can be installed to
LATCH lower anchors that are 420 mm
(16.5 in) apart. Do not attach two childrestraint systems to the same LATCH
lower anchor. If your child-restraint
system has a tether, it must also be used
for your child's optimum safety.
The procedure for installation on the rear
outboards seats is the same.
LATCH lower anchor location
2-42
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page54
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (55,1)
WARNING
Always route the tether strap between
the head restraint and the seatback:
Routing the tether strap on top of the
head restraint is dangerous. In a
collision the tether strap could slide
off the head restraint and loosen the
child-restraint system. The childrestraint system could move which
may result in death or injury to the
child.
Tether strap
Forward
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the childrestraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
2-43
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page55
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (56,1)
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions
The front and side supplemental restraint systems (SRS) include up to 6 air bags. Please
verify which kinds of air bags are equipped on your vehicle by locating the “SRS
AIRBAG” location indicators. These indicators are visible in the area where the air bags
are installed.
The air bags are installed in the following locations:
l The steering wheel hub (driver air bag)
l The front passenger dashboard (front passenger air bag)
l The outboard sides of the front seatbacks (side air bags)
l The front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge along both sides (curtain air bags)
Vehicles with the Front Passenger Occupant Classification System have a sensor which
detects an impending roll-over accident.
The air bag supplemental restraint systems are designed to provide supplemental protection
in certain situations so seat belts are always important in the following ways:
Without seat belt usage, the air bags cannot provide adequate protection during an accident.
Seat belt usage is necessary to:
l Keep the occupant from being thrown into an inflating air bag.
l Reduce the possibility of injuries during an accident that is not designed for air bag
inflation, such as rear impact.
l Reduce the possibility of injuries in frontal, near frontal or side collisions or roll-over
accidents that are not severe enough to activate the air bags.
l Reduce the possibility of being thrown from your vehicle.
l Reduce the possibility of injuries to lower body and legs during an accident because the
air bags provide no protection to these parts of the body.
l Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle.
2-44
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page56
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (57,1)
If your vehicle is also equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system,
refer to the Front Passenger Occupant Classification System (page 2-60) for details.
If your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system, the front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates for a specified time after the
ignition is switched ON.
Climate control
Fully Automatic
Type
Manual Type
Small children must be protected by a child-restraint system as stipulated by law in every
state and province. In certain states and provinces, larger children must use a child-restraint
system (page 2-26).
Carefully consider which child-restraint system is necessary for your child and follow the
installation directions in this Owner's Manual as well as the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
Seat belts must be worn in air bag equipped vehicles:
Depending only on the air bags for protection during an accident is dangerous.
Alone, air bags may not prevent serious injuries. The appropriate air bags can be
expected to inflate only in the first accident, such as frontal, near frontal or side
collisions or roll-over accident that are at least moderate. Vehicle occupants should
always wear seat belts.
Children should not ride in the front passenger seat:
Placing a child, 12 years or under, in the front seat is dangerous. The child could be
hit by a deploying air bag and be seriously injured or even killed. A sleeping child is
more likely to lean against the door and be hit by the side air bag in moderate
collision to the front-passenger side of the vehicle. Whenever possible, always secure
a child 12 years and under on the rear seats with an appropriate child-restraint
system for the child's age and size.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
2-45
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page57
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (58,1)
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that
could deploy:
Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even
though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on
the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates. The
child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently
backward resulting in serious injury or death to the child.
Do not sit too close to the driver and front passenger air bags:
Sitting too close to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing hands
or feet on them is extremely dangerous. The driver and front passenger air bags
inflate with great force and speed. Serious injuries could occur if someone is too
close. The driver should always hold onto only the rim of the steering wheel. The
front seat passenger should keep both feet on the floor. Front seat occupants should
adjust their seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the
seatbacks with seat belts worn properly.
Sit in the center of the seat and wear seat belts properly:
Sitting too close to the side air bag modules or placing hands on them, or sleeping
up against the door or hanging out the windows is extremely dangerous. The side
and curtain air bags inflate with great force and speed directly expanding along the
door on the side the car is hit. Serious injury could occur if someone is sitting too
close to the door or leaning against a window, or if rear seat occupants grab the
sides of the front seatbacks. Give the side and curtain air bags room to work by
sitting in the center of the seat while the vehicle is moving with seat belts worn
properly.
Do not attach objects on or around the area where driver and front passenger air
bags deploy:
Attaching an object to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing
something in front of them is dangerous. In an accident, an object could interfere
with air bag inflation and injure the occupants.
2-46
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page58
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (59,1)
Do not attach objects on or around the area where a side air bag deploys:
Attaching objects to the front seat in such a way as to cover the outboard side of the
seat in any way is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the side
air bag, which inflates from the outboard side of the front seats, impeding the added
protection of the side air bag system or redirecting the air bag in a way that is
dangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut open releasing the gas.
Do not hang net bags, map pouches or backpacks with side straps on the front
seats. Never use seat covers on the front seats. Always keep the side air bag modules
in your front seats free to deploy in the event of a side collision.
Do not attach objects on or around the area where a curtain air bag deploys:
Attaching objects to the areas where the curtain air bag activates such as on the
windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear window pillars and along the roof
edge and assist grips is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the
curtain air bag, which inflates from the front and rear window pillars and along the
roof edge, impeding the added protection of the curtain air bag system or redirecting
the air bag in a way that is dangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut open
releasing the gas.
Do not place hangers or any other objects on the assist grips. When hanging clothes,
hang them on the coat hook directly. Always keep the curtain air bag modules free
to deploy in the event of a side collision or roll-over accident.
Do not touch the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags
have inflated:
Touching the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags
have inflated is dangerous. Immediately after inflation, they are very hot. You could
get burned.
Never install any front-end equipment to your vehicle:
Installation of front-end equipment, such as frontal protection bar (kangaroo bar,
bull bar, push bar, or other similar devices), snowplow, or winches, is dangerous. The
air bag crash sensor system could be affected. This could cause air bags to inflate
unexpectedly, or it could prevent the air bags from inflating during an accident.
Front occupants could be seriously injured.
Do not modify the suspension:
Modifying the vehicle suspension is dangerous. If the vehicle's height or the
suspension is modified, the vehicle will be unable to accurately detect a collision or
roll-over accident resulting in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the
possibility of serious injuries.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
2-47
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page59
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (60,1)
To prevent false detection by the air bag sensor system, heed the following:
Ø Do not use tires or wheels other than those specified for your Mazda:
Use of any tire or wheel other than those specified for your Mazda (page 9-8) is
dangerous. Use of such wheels will prevent the vehicle's accident detections
system from accurately detecting a collision or roll-over accident resulting in
incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries.
Ø Do not overload your vehicle:
Overloading your vehicle is dangerous as it could prevent the air bag crash sensor
system from accurately detecting a collision or roll-over accident resulting in
incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries.
The gross axle weight rating (GAWR) and the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)
for your vehicle are on the Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label on the driver's
door frame. Do not exceed these ratings.
Ø Do not drive the vehicle off-road:
Driving your Mazda off-road is dangerous because the vehicle has not been
designed to do so. Driving the vehicle off-road could prevent the air bag crash
sensor system from accurately detecting a collision or roll-over accident resulting
in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious
injuries.
Do not modify a front door or leave any damage unrepaired. Always have an
Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect a damaged front door:
Modifying a front door or leaving any damage unrepaired is dangerous. Each front
door has a side crash sensor as a component of the supplemental restraint system. If
holes are drilled in a front door, a door speaker is left removed, or a damaged door is
left unrepaired, the sensor could be adversely affected causing it to not detect the
pressure of an impact correctly during a side collision. If a sensor does not detect a
side impact correctly, the side and curtain air bags and the front seat belt
pretensioner may not operate normally which could result in serious injury to
occupants.
Do not modify the supplemental restraint system:
Modifying the components or wiring of the supplemental restraint system is
dangerous. You could accidentally activate it or make it inoperable. Do not make
any modifications to the supplemental restraint system. This includes installing trim,
badges, or anything else over the air bag modules. It also includes installing extra
electrical equipment on or near system components or wiring. An Authorized Mazda
Dealer can provide the special care needed in the removal and installation of front
seats. It is important to protect the air bag wiring and connections to assure that the
bags do not accidentally deploy and that the seats retain an undamaged air bag
connection.
2-48
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page60
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (61,1)
Do not place luggage or other objects under the front seats:
Placing luggage or other objects under the front seats is dangerous. The components
essential to the supplemental restraint system could be damaged, and in the event of
a side collision, the appropriate air bags may not deploy, which could result in death
or serious injury. To prevent damage to the components essential to the
supplemental restraint system, do not place luggage or other objects under the front
seats.
Do not operate a vehicle with damaged air bag/seat belt pretensioner system
components:
Expended or damaged air bag/seat belt pretensioner system components must be
replaced after any collision which caused them to deploy or damage them. Only a
trained Authorized Mazda Dealer can fully evaluate these systems to see that they
will work in any subsequent accident. Driving with an expended or damaged air bag
or pretensioner unit will not afford you the necessary protection in the event of any
subsequent accident which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not remove interior air bag parts:
Removing any components such as the front seats, front dashboard, the steering
wheel or parts on the front and rear window pillars and along the roof edge,
containing air bag parts or sensors is dangerous. These parts contain essential air
bag components. The air bag could accidentally activate and cause serious injuries.
Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer remove these parts.
Properly dispose of the air bag system:
Improper disposal of an air bag or a vehicle with live air bags in it can be extremely
dangerous. Unless all safety procedures are followed, injury could result. Have an
Authorized Mazda Dealer safely dispose of the air bag system or scrap an air bag
equipped vehicle.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
2-49
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page61
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (62,1)
NOTE
l If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary restraint
system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in accordance with a
certified physician, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to “Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)”
(page 8-2).
l When an air bag deploys, a loud inflation noise can be heard and some smoke will be released.
Neither is likely to cause injury, however, the texture of the air bags may cause light skin injuries
on body parts not covered with clothing through friction.
l Should you sell your Mazda, we urge you to tell the new owner of its air bag systems and that
familiarization with all instructions about them, from the Owner's Manual, is important.
l This highly-visible label is displayed which warns against the use of rear-facing child-restraint
systems on the front passenger seat.
(Except Mexico)
(Mexico)
2-50
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page62
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (63,1)
Supplemental Restraint System Components
With front passenger occupant classification system
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
2-51
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page63
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (64,1)
Without front passenger occupant classification system
Driver/Front passenger inflators and air bags
Roll-over sensorí, crash sensors, and diagnostic module (SAS unit)
Front seat belt pretensioners (page 2-21)
Front air bag sensors
Side crash sensors
Air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light (page 4-20)
Side and curtain inflators and air bags
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light (page 2-60)
Front passenger occupant classification sensor (page 2-60)
Front passenger occupant classification module
2-52
Essential Safety Equipment
íSome models.
SRS Air Bags
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page64
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (65,1)
How the SRS Air Bags Work
Your Mazda is equipped with the following types of SRS air bags. SRS air bags are
designed to work together with the seat belts to help to reduce injuries during an accident.
The SRS air bags are designed to provide further protection for passengers in addition to
the seat belt functions. Be sure to wear seat belts properly.
qFront Seat Belt Pretensioners
The front seat belt pretensioners are designed to deploy in moderate or severe frontal, near
frontal collisions. In addition, during a side collision, the pretensioner operates on the side
in which the collision occurs. The pretensioners operate differently depending on what
types of air bags are equipped. For details on the seat belt pretensioner operation, refer to
“SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria” (page 2-57).
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
The front seat belt pretensioners are also designed to deploy in a roll-over accident.
qDriver Air Bag
The driver's air bag is mounted in the steering wheel.
When air bag crash sensors detect a frontal impact of greater than moderate force, the
driver's air bag inflates quickly helping to reduce injury mainly to the driver's head or chest
caused by directly hitting the steering wheel.
For more details about air bag deployment, refer to “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria”
(page 2-57).
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
The driver's dual-stage air bag controls air bag inflation in two energy stages. During an
impact of moderate severity the driver's air bag deploys with lesser energy, whereas during
more severe impacts, it deploys with more energy.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
2-53
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page65
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (66,1)
qFront Passenger Air Bag
The front passenger air bag is mounted in the front passenger dashboard.
The inflation mechanism for the front passenger air bag is the same as the driver's air bag,
as mentioned above.
For more details about air bag deployment, refer to “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria”
(page 2-57).
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
In addition, the front passenger air bag is designed to only deploy when the front passenger
occupant classification sensor detects a passenger sitting on the front passenger's seat. For
details, refer to the front passenger occupant classification system (page 2-60).
qSide Air Bags
The side air bags are mounted in the outboard sides of the front seatbacks.
When the air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, the
system inflates the side air bag only on the side in which the vehicle was hit. The side air
bag inflates quickly to reduce injury to the driver or front passenger's chest caused by
directly hitting interior parts such as a door or window.
For more details about air bag deployment, refer to “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria”
(page 2-57).
2-54
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page66
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (67,1)
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
In addition, the front passenger side air bag is designed to only deploy when the front
passenger occupant classification sensor detects a passenger sitting on the front passenger's
seat. For details, refer to the front passenger occupant classification system (page 2-60).
qCurtain Air Bags
The curtain air bags are mounted in the front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge
along both sides.
When the air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, the
curtain air bag inflates quickly and helps to reduce injury mainly to the rear outboard
passenger's head caused by directly hitting interior parts such as a door or window.
For more details about air bag deployment, refer to “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria”
(page 2-57).
In a side impact:
Greater than moderate impact to one side of the vehicle will cause the curtain air bag on
that side only to inflate.
Only one side curtain air bag will deploy on the
side of the vehicle that receives the force of an
impact.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
2-55
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page67
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (68,1)
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
In a roll-over:
In response to a vehicle roll-over, both curtain air bags inflate.
Both curtain air bags will deploy after
the roll-over accident is detected.
qWarning Light/Beep
A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-20.
Refer to Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Beep on page 7-35.
2-56
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page68
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (69,1)
SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria
This chart indicates the applicable SRS equipment that will deploy depending on the type
of collision.
(The illustrations are the representative cases of collisions.)
SRS
equipment
Types of collision
A severe frontal/near frontal
collision
A severe side
collision
A roll-over/near
roll-over*2
A rear collision
Front seat
belt
pretensioner
X*1 (both sides) X*1 (impact side only) X*1 (both sides)
No air bag and front
seat belt
pretensioner will be
activated in a rear
collision.
Driver air
bag
X
Front
passenger air
bag
X*1
Side air bag X*1 (impact side only)
Curtain air
bag
X (impact side only) X (both sides)
X: The SRS air bag equipment is designed to deploy in a collision.
*1 (With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
The front passenger front and side air bags and the seat belt pretensioner are designed
to deploy when the front passenger occupant classification sensor detects a passenger
sitting on the front passenger's seat.
*2 (With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
In a roll-over accident, the seat belt pretensioners and the curtain air bags deploy.
NOTE
In a frontal offset collision, the equipped air bags and pretensioners may all deploy depending on the
direction, angle, and rate of impact.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
2-57
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page69
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (70,1)
Limitations to SRS Air Bag
In severe collisions such as those described previously in “SRS Air Bag Deployment
Criteria”, the applicable SRS air bag equipment will deploy. However, in some accidents,
the equipment may not deploy depending on the type of collision and its severity.
Limitations to front/near front collision detection:
The following illustrations are examples of front/near front collisions that may not be
detected as severe enough to deploy the SRS air bag equipment.
Impacts involving trees or poles Frontal offset impact to the vehicle
Rear-ending or running under a truck's tail gate
Limitations to side collision detection:
The following illustrations are examples of side collisions that may not be detected as
severe enough to deploy the SRS air bag equipment.
Side impacts involving trees or poles Side impacts with two-wheeled vehicles
2-58
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page70
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (71,1)
Roll-over (Without Driver and Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
Limitations to roll-over detection:
The following illustration is an example of an accident that may not be detected as a rollover accident. Therefore, the front seat belt pretensioners and curtain air bags may not
deploy.
Pitch end over end
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
2-59
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page71
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:31 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (72,1)
Front Passenger Occupant Classification Systemí
First, please read “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions” (page 2-44)
carefully.
qFront Passenger Occupant Classification Sensor
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification sensor as a part of
the supplemental restraint system. This sensor is equipped in the front passenger's seat
cushion. This sensor measures the electrostatic capacity of the front passenger's seat. The
SAS unit is designed to prevent the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt
pretensioner system from deploying if the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator
light turns on.
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag, the
system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the seat belt
pretensioner system when the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light turns on.
Refer to the following table for the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
illumination conditions.
This system shuts off the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner
system, so make sure the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light turns on
according to the following table.
The air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light flashes and the front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates if the sensors have a possible
malfunction. If this happens, the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt
pretensioner system will not deploy.
2-60
Essential Safety Equipment
íSome models.
SRS Air Bags
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page72
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (73,1)
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
This indicator light turns on to remind you that the front passenger front and side air bags
and seat belt pretensioner will not deploy during a collision.
Fully Automatic Type climate controlManual Type climate control
If the front passenger occupant classification sensor is normal, the indicator light turns on
when the ignition is switched ON. The light turns off after a few seconds. Then, the
indicator light turns on or is off under the following conditions:
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light on/off condition chart
Condition detected by the front
passenger occupant classification
system
Front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator
light
Front passenger front
and side air bags
Front passenger seat
belt pretensioner
system
Empty (Not occupied) On Deactivated Deactivated
A child less than 1 year old is
seated in a child-restraint system
On Deactivated Deactivated
Child*1 On or off Deactivated or ready Deactivated or ready
Adult*2 Off Ready Ready
*1 The occupant classification sensor may not detect a child seated on the seat, in a child-restraint system, or a
junior seat depending on the child's physical size and seated posture.
*2 If a smaller adult sits on the front passenger seat, the sensors might detect the person as being a child
depending on the person's physique.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
2-61
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page73
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (74,1)
The curtain air bag is ready for inflating regardless of what the front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light on/off condition chart indicates.
If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not turn on when the ignition
is switched ON and does not turn on as indicated in the front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light on/off condition chart, do not allow an occupant to sit in the front passenger
seat and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. The system may not
work properly in an accident.
WARNING
Do not allow an occupant in the front passenger's seat to sit with a posture which
makes it difficult for the front passenger occupant classification sensor to detect the
occupant correctly:
Sitting in the front passenger's seat with a posture which makes it difficult for the
front passenger occupant classification sensor to detect the occupant correctly is
dangerous. If the front passenger occupant classification sensor cannot detect the
occupant sitting on the front passenger's seat correctly, the front passenger front
and side air bags and pretensioner system may not operate (deploy) or they may
operate (deploy) accidentally. The front passenger will not have the supplementary
protection of the air bags or the accidental operation (deployment) of the air bags
could result in serious injury or death.
Under the following conditions, the front passenger occupant classification sensor
cannot detect a passenger sitting on the front passenger's seat correctly and the
deployment/non-deployment of the air bags cannot be controlled as indicated in the
front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light on/off condition chart. For
example:
2-62
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page74
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (75,1)
Ø A front passenger is seated as shown in the following figure:
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
2-63
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page75
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (76,1)
Ø A rear passenger pushes up on the front passenger seat with their feet.
Ø Luggage or other items placed under the front passenger seat or between the
front passenger seat and driver seat that push up the front passenger seat
bottom.
Ø An object, such as a seat cushion, is put on the front passenger's seat or between
the passenger's back and the seatback.
Ø A seat cover is put on the front passenger's seat.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint
system.
Ø A rear passenger or luggage push or pull down on the front passenger seatback.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.
Ø The seat is washed.
Ø Liquids are spilled on the seat.
Ø The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items
placed behind it.
Ø The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver
seat.
Ø An electric device is put on the front passenger's seat.
Ø An additional electrical device, such as a seat warmer is installed to the surface of
the front passenger seat.
The front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner systems will
deactivate if the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light turns on.
CAUTION
Ø To assure proper deployment of the front air bag and to prevent damage to the
sensor in the front seat cushion:
Ø Do not place sharp objects on the front seat cushion or leave heavy luggage on
them.
Ø Do not spill any liquids on the front seats or under the front seats.
Ø To allow the sensors to function properly, always perform the following:
Ø Adjust the front seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the
seatbacks with seat belts worn properly.
Ø If you place your child on the front passenger seat, secure the child-restraint
system properly and slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible (page
2-34).
2-64
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page76
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (77,1)
NOTE
l The system requires about 10 seconds to alternate between turning the front passenger front and
side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system on or off.
l The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may turn on repeatedly if luggage or
other items are put on the front passenger seat, or if the temperature of the vehicle's interior
changes suddenly.
l The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may turn on for 10 seconds if the
electrostatic capacity on the front passenger seat changes.
l The air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light might turn on if the front passenger
seat receives a severe impact.
l If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not turn on after installing a childrestraint system on the front passenger seat, first, re-install your child-restraint system according
to the procedure in this owner's manual. Then, if the front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light still does not turn on, install the child-restraint system on the rear seat and consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
l If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light turns on when an occupant is seated
directly in the front passenger seat, have the passenger re-adjust their posture by sitting with their
feet on the floor, and then re-fastening the seat belt. If the front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light remains turned on, move the passenger to the rear seat. If sitting in the rear seat is
not possible, slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible. Consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible.
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
2-65
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page77
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (78,1)
Constant Monitoring
The following components of the air bag systems are monitored by a diagnostic system:
l Crash sensors, and diagnostic module (SAS unit)
l Front air bag sensors
l Air bag modules
l Side crash sensors
l Air bag/Front seat belt pretensioner system warning light
l Front seat belt pretensioners
l Related wiring
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
l Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
l Front passenger occupant classification sensor
l Front passenger occupant classification control module
The diagnostic module continuously monitors the system's readiness. This begins when the
ignition is switched ON and continues while the vehicle is being driven.
2-66
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page78
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (79,1)
3 Before Driving
Use of various features, including keys, doors, mirrors and windows.
Keys .......................................................... 3-2
Keys .................................................... 3-2
Keyless Entry System ......................... 3-4
Advanced Keyless Entry System ............ 3-9
Advanced Keyless Entry Systemí ..... 3-9
Operational Range ............................ 3-10
Doors and Locks .................................... 3-11
Door Locks ....................................... 3-11
Liftgate .............................................. 3-19
Fuel and Emission ................................. 3-23
Fuel and Engine Exhaust
Precautions ........................................ 3-23
Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap ..................... 3-26
Steering Wheel ....................................... 3-28
Steering Wheel .................................. 3-28
Mirrors ................................................... 3-29
Mirrors .............................................. 3-29
Windows ................................................. 3-32
Power Windows ................................ 3-32
Moonroofí ....................................... 3-35
Security System ..................................... 3-37
Modification and Add-On
Equipment ......................................... 3-37
Immobilizer System .......................... 3-37
Theft-Deterrent Systemí .................. 3-39
Driving Tips ........................................... 3-41
Break-In Period ................................. 3-41
Saving Fuel and Protection of the
Environment ...................................... 3-41
Hazardous Driving ............................ 3-42
Floor Mat .......................................... 3-43
Rocking the Vehicle .......................... 3-43
Winter Driving .................................. 3-44
Driving In Flooded Area ................... 3-45
Overloading ...................................... 3-46
Driving on Uneven Road .................. 3-47
Towing .................................................... 3-48
Trailer Towing (U.S.A. and
Canada) ............................................. 3-48
Recreational Towing ......................... 3-56
3-1íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page79
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (80,1)
Keys
WARNING
Do not leave the key in your vehicle
with children and keep them in a place
where your children will not find or
play with them:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
key is dangerous. This could result in
someone being badly injured or even
killed. Children may find these keys
to be an interesting toy to play with
and could cause the power windows
or other controls to operate, or even
make the vehicle move.
CAUTION
Ø Because the key (transmitter) uses
low-intensity radio waves, it may
not function correctly under the
following conditions:
Ø The key is carried with
communication devices such as
cellular phones.
Ø The key contacts or is covered
by a metal object.
Ø The key is near electronic
devices such as personal
computers.
Ø Non-Mazda genuine electronic
equipment is installed in the
vehicle.
Ø There is equipment which
discharges radio waves near the
vehicle.
Ø The key (transmitter) may
consume battery power excessively
if it receives high-intensity radio
waves. Do not place the key near
electronic devices such as
televisions or personal computers.
Ø To avoid damage to the key
(transmitter), DO NOT:
Ø Drop the key.
Ø Get the key wet.
Ø Disassemble the key.
Ø Expose the key to high
temperatures on places such as
the dashboard or hood, under
direct sunlight.
Ø Expose the key to any kind of
magnetic field.
Ø Place heavy objects on the key.
Ø Put the key in an ultrasonic
cleaner.
Ø Put any magnetized objects
close to the key.
3-2
Before Driving
Keys
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page80
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (81,1)
A code number is stamped on the plate
attached to the key set; detach this plate
and store it in a safe place (not in the
vehicle) for use if you need to make a
replacement key (auxiliary key).
Also write down the code number and
keep it in a separate safe and convenient
place, but not in the vehicle.
If your key (auxiliary key) is lost, consult
your Authorized Mazda Dealer and have
your code number ready.
NOTE
l The driver must carry the key to ensure the
system functions properly.
l Always keep a spare key in case one is lost.
If a key is lost, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Operation indicator light Auxiliary key
Key code number plate
Transmitter
To use the auxiliary key, press the knob
and pull out the key (transmitter).
Knob
Before Driving
Keys
3-3
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page81
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (82,1)
Keyless Entry System
This system uses the key buttons to
remotely lock and unlock the doors and
the liftgate.
The system can start the engine without
having to take the key out of your purse
or pocket.
It can also help you signal for attention.
Operating the theft-deterrent system is
also possible on theft-deterrent systemequipped vehicles.
Press the buttons slowly and carefully.
System malfunctions or warnings are
indicated by the following warning lights
or beeps.
For vehicles with the type A instrument
cluster, check the displayed message for
more information and, if necessary, have
the vehicle inspected at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer, according to the indication.
l KEY Warning Light (Red)
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on
page 4-20.
l Ignition Not Switched Off (STOP)
Warning Beep
Refer to Ignition Not Switched Off
(STOP) Warning Beep on page 7-36.
l Key Removed from Vehicle Warning
Beep
Refer to Key Removed from Vehicle
Warning Beep on page 7-36.
If you have a problem with the key,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If your key is lost or stolen, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible for a replacement and to make
the lost or stolen key inoperative.
CAUTION
Radio equipment like this is governed
by laws.
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
l The keyless entry system operation may
vary due to local conditions.
l The keyless entry system is fully operational
(door/liftgate lock/unlock) when the push
button start is switched off. The system does
not operate if the push button start is
switched to any position other than off.
l If the key does not operate when pressing a
button or the operational range becomes
too small, the battery may be dead. To
install a new battery, refer to Replace
Electrical Battery(page 6-39).
l Battery life is about one year. Replace the
battery with a new one if the KEY indicator
light (green) flashes in the instrument
cluster. Replacing the battery about once a
year is recommended because the KEY
warning light/indicator light may not
illuminate or flash depending on the rate of
battery depletion.
l Additional keys can be obtained at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer. Up to 6 keys can
be used with the keyless functions per
vehicle. Bring all keys to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer when additional keys are
required.
3-4
Before Driving
Keys
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page82
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (83,1)
qTransmitter
Operation buttons
Operation indicator light
NOTE
l The headlights turn on/off by operating the
transmitter.
Refer to Leaving Home Light System on
page 4-62.
l (With theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights flash when the
theft-deterrent system is armed or turned
off.
Refer to Theft-Deterrent System on page
3-39.
l (With the advanced keyless function)
A beep sound can be heard for confirmation
when the doors and liftgate are locked/
unlocked using the key. If you prefer, the
beep sound can be turned off.
The volume of the beep sound can also be
changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
Use the following procedure to change the
setting.
1. Switch the ignition off and close all of the
doors and the liftgate.
2. Open the driver's door.
3. Within 30 seconds of opening the driver's
door, press and hold the LOCK button on
the key for 5 seconds or longer.
All of the doors and the liftgate lock and the
beep sound activates at the currently set
volume. (If the beep sound is currently set
to not activate, it will not activate.) The
setting changes each time the LOCK button
on the key is pressed and the beep sound
activates at the set volume. (If the beep
sound has been set to not activate, it will
not activate.)
4. The setting change is completed by doing
any one of the following:
l Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
l Close the driver's door.
l Open the liftgate.
l The key is not operated for 10 seconds.
l Press any button except the LOCK
button on the key.
l A request switch is pressed.
The operation indicator light flashes when
the buttons are pressed.
Lock button
To lock the doors and the liftgate, press
the lock button and the hazard warning
lights will flash once.
(With the advanced keyless function)
A beep sound will be heard once.
To confirm that all doors and the liftgate
have been locked, press the lock button
again within 5 seconds. If they are closed
and locked, the horn will sound.
Before Driving
Keys
3-5
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page83
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (84,1)
NOTE
l The doors and the liftgate can be locked by
pressing the lock button while any other
door or the liftgate is open. The hazard
warning lights will not flash.
When the lock button is pressed while any
door is open and then the door is closed, all
the doors and the liftgate are locked.
l Confirm that all doors and the liftgate are
locked visually or audibly by use of the
double click.
l Make sure all doors and the liftgate are
locked after pressing the button.
l (With theft-deterrent system)
When the doors are locked by pressing the
lock button on the key while the theftdeterrent system is armed, the hazard
warning lights will flash once to indicate
that the system is armed.
Unlock button
To unlock the driver's door, press the
unlock button and the hazard warning
lights will flash twice.
(With the advanced keyless function)
A beep sound will be heard twice.
To unlock all doors and the liftgate, press
the unlock button again within 3 seconds
and two more beep sounds will be heard.
NOTE
l The system can be set to unlock all doors by
performing a single operation.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
Use the following procedure to change the
setting.
1. Switch the ignition off and close all of the
doors and the liftgate.
2. Open the driver's door.
3. Within 30 seconds of opening the driver's
door, press and hold the UNLOCK button
on the key for 5 seconds or longer. The
sound of the doors locking/unlocking can
be heard.
After this, the system switches the setting
each time the UNLOCK button is pressed
(the sound of the doors locking/unlocking
can be heard).
4. The setting change is completed by doing
any one of the following:
l Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
l Close the driver's door.
l Open the liftgate.
l The key is not operated for 10 seconds.
l Press any button except the UNLOCK
button on the key.
l A request switch is pressed.
l (Auto re-lock function)
After unlocking with the key, all doors and
the liftgate will automatically lock if any of
the following operations are not performed
within about 60 seconds. If your vehicle has
a theft-deterrent system, the hazard
warning lights will flash for confirmation.
The time required for the doors to lock
automatically can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
l A door or the liftgate is opened.
l The push button start is switched to any
position other than off.
3-6
Before Driving
Keys
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page84
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (85,1)
l (With theft-deterrent system)
When the doors are unlocked by pressing
the unlock button on the key while the theftdeterrent system is turned off, the hazard
warning lights will flash twice to indicate
that the system is turned off.
Panic button
If you witness from a distance someone
attempting to break into or damage your
vehicle, press and hold the panic button to
activate the vehicle's alarm.
NOTE
The panic button will work whether any door
or the liftgate is open or closed.
(Turning on the alarm)
Pressing the panic button for 1 second or
more will trigger the alarm for about 2
minutes and 30 seconds, and the
following will occur:
l The horn sounds intermittently.
l The hazard warning lights flash.
(Turning off the alarm)
The alarm stops by pressing any button on
the key.
qOperational Range
The system operates only when the driver
is in the vehicle or within operational
range while the key is being carried.
Starting the Engine
NOTE
l Starting the engine may be possible even if
the key is outside of the vehicle and
extremely close to a door and window,
however, always start the engine from the
driver's seat.
If the vehicle is started and the key is not in
the vehicle, the vehicle will not restart after
it is shut off and the push button start is
switched to off.
l The luggage compartment is out of the
assured operational range, however, if the
key (transmitter) is operable the engine will
start.
With the advanced keyless function
Interior antenna
Operational range
Before Driving
Keys
3-7
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page85
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (86,1)
Without the advanced keyless function
Interior antenna
Operational range
NOTE
The engine may not start if the key is placed in
the following areas:
l Around the dashboard
l In the storage compartments such as the
glove compartment
qKey Suspend Function
If a key is left in the vehicle, the functions
of the key left in the vehicle are
temporarily suspended to prevent theft of
the vehicle.
To restore the functions, press the unlock
button on the functions-suspended key in
the vehicle.
3-8
Before Driving
Keys
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page86
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (87,1)
Advanced Keyless Entry
Systemí
WARNING
Radio waves from the key may affect
medical devices such as pacemakers:
Before using the key near people who
use medical devices, ask the medical
device manufacturer or your
physician if radio waves from the key
will affect the device.
The advanced keyless function allows you
to lock/unlock the doors and liftgate, or
open the liftgate while carrying the key
without using the key.
System malfunctions or warnings are
indicated by the following warning beeps.
l Request switch Inoperable Warning
Beep
Refer to Request Switch Inoperable
Warning Beep (With the advanced
keyless function) on page 7-36.
l Key Left-in-luggage Compartment
Warning Beep
Refer to Key Left-in-luggage
Compartment Warning Beep (With the
advanced keyless function) on page
7-37.
l Key Left-in-vehicle Warning Beep
Refer to Key Left-in-vehicle Warning
Beep (With the advanced keyless
function) on page 7-37.
NOTE
The advanced keyless entry system functions
can be deactivated to prevent any possible
adverse effect on a user wearing a pacemaker
or other medical device. If the system is
deactivated, you will be unable to start the
engine by carrying the key. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer for details. If the
advanced keyless entry system has been
deactivated, you can start the engine by
following the procedure indicated when the key
battery goes dead.
Refer to Engine Start Function When Key
Battery is Dead on page 4-6.
Before Driving
Advanced Keyless Entry System
3-9íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page87
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (88,1)
Operational Range
The system operates only when the driver
is in the vehicle or within operational
range while the key is being carried.
NOTE
When the battery power is low, or in places
where there are high-intensity radio waves or
noise, the operational range may become
narrower or the system may not operate. For
determining battery replacement, Refer to
Keyless Entry System on page 3-4.
qLocking, Unlocking the Doors
and the Liftgate
Exterior antenna
Locking
only
Operational range
80cm (31in)
80cm (31in)
NOTE
The system may not operate if you are too
close to the windows, door handles, or liftgate.
qOpening the Liftgate
Exterior antenna
Operational range
80cm (31in)
3-10
Before Driving
Advanced Keyless Entry System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page88
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (89,1)
Door Locks
WARNING
Always take all children and pets with
you or leave a responsible person with
them:
Leaving a child or a pet unattended
in a parked vehicle is dangerous. In
hot weather, temperatures inside a
vehicle can become high enough to
cause brain damage or even death.
Do not leave the key in your vehicle
with children and keep them in a place
where your children will not find or
play with them:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
key is dangerous. This could result in
someone being badly injured or even
killed.
Keep all doors locked when driving:
Unlocked doors in a moving vehicle
are dangerous. Passengers can fall
out if a door is accidentally opened
and can more easily be thrown out in
an accident.
Always close all the windows and
moonroof, lock the doors and take the
key with you when leaving your vehicle
unattended:
Leaving your vehicle unlocked is
dangerous as children could lock
themselves in a hot vehicle, which
could result in death. Also, a vehicle
left unlocked becomes an easy target
for thieves and intruders.
After closing the doors, always verify
that they are securely closed:
Doors not securely closed are
dangerous, if the vehicle is driven
with a door not securely closed, the
door could open unexpectedly
resulting in an accident.
Always confirm the safety around the
vehicle before opening a door:
Suddenly opening a door is
dangerous. A passing vehicle or a
pedestrian could be hit and cause an
accident.
CAUTION
Always confirm the conditions
around the vehicle before opening/
closing the doors and use caution
during strong winds or when parked
on an incline. Not being aware of the
conditions around the vehicle is
dangerous because fingers could get
caught in the door or a passing
pedestrian could be hit, resulting in
an unexpected accident or injury.
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
3-11
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page89
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (90,1)
NOTE
l When the ignition is switched to ACC or
ON, the vehicle lock-out prevention feature
prevents you from locking yourself out of
the vehicle.
All doors and the liftgate will automatically
unlock if they are locked using the power
door locks with any door or the liftgate
open.
The vehicle lock-out prevention feature
does not operate while the ignition is
switched off.
When any door is opened from the outside
while the key is inside the vehicle, the
closed doors are locked. All the doors are
automatically unlocked by closing the open
door.
(With the advanced keyless function)
The beep sound is heard for about 10
seconds to notify the driver that the key has
been left in the vehicle.
(Without the advanced keyless function)
The horn sound is heard twice to notify the
driver that the key has been left in the
vehicle.
l (Door unlock (control) system with
collision detection)
This system automatically unlocks the
doors in the event the vehicle is involved in
an accident to allow passengers to get out
of the vehicle immediately and prevent
being trapped inside. While the ignition is
switched ON and in the event the vehicle
receives an impact strong enough to inflate
the air bags, all the doors are automatically
unlocked after about 6 seconds have
elapsed from the time of the accident.
The doors may not unlock depending on
how an impact is applied, the force of the
impact, and other conditions of the
accident.
If door-related systems or the battery is
malfunctioning, the doors will not unlock.
qLocking, Unlocking with Key
All doors and the liftgate lock
automatically when the driver's door is
locked with the key.
All doors and the liftgate unlock when the
driver's door is unlocked and the key is
held in the unlock position for one second
or longer.
Turn the key toward the front to lock,
toward the back to unlock.
Lock Unlock
NOTE
Holding the key in the unlocked position in the
driver's door lock for about a second unlocks
all doors and the liftgate. To unlock only the
driver's door, insert the key into the driver's
door lock and turn the key briefly to the unlock
position and then immediately return it to the
center position.
qLocking, Unlocking with Request
Switch (With the advanced
keyless function)
All doors and the liftgate can be locked/
unlocked by pressing the request switch
on the front doors while the key is being
carried.
The request switch on the liftgate can only
be used to lock all doors and the liftgate.
3-12
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page90
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (91,1)
Front doors
Request switch
Liftgate (Lock only)
Request switch
To lock
To lock the doors and the liftgate, press
the request switch and the hazard warning
lights will flash once.
A beep sound will be heard once.
To unlock
Driver's door request switch
To unlock the driver's door, press the
request switch. A beep sound will be
heard twice and the hazard warning lights
will flash twice.
To unlock all doors and the liftgate, press
the request switch again within 3 seconds
and two more beep sounds will be heard.
Front passenger door request switch
To unlock all doors and the liftgate, press
the request switch. A beep sound will be
heard twice and the hazard warning lights
will flash twice.
NOTE
l The system can be set to unlock all doors by
performing a single operation.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
Use the following procedure to change the
setting.
1. Switch the ignition off and close all of the
doors and the liftgate.
2. Open the driver's door.
3. Within 30 seconds of opening the driver's
door, press and hold the UNLOCK button
on the key for 5 seconds or longer. The
sound of the doors locking/unlocking can
be heard.
After this, the system switches the setting
each time the UNLOCK button is pressed
(the sound of the doors locking/unlocking
can be heard).
4. The setting change is completed by doing
any one of the following:
l Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
l Close the driver's door.
l Open the liftgate.
l The key is not operated for 10 seconds.
l Press any button except the UNLOCK
button on the key.
l A request switch is pressed.
l Confirm that all doors and the liftgate are
securely locked.
For the liftgate, move it without pressing
the electric liftgate opener to verify that the
liftgate has not been left ajar.
l All doors and the liftgate cannot be locked
when any door or the liftgate is open.
l It may require a few seconds for the doors
to unlock after the request switch is
pressed.
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
3-13
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page91
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (92,1)
l A beep sound is heard for confirmation
when the doors and the liftgate are locked/
unlocked using the request switch. If you
prefer, the beep sound can be turned off.
The volume of the beep sound can also be
changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
Use the following procedure to change the
setting.
1. Switch the ignition off and close all of the
doors and the liftgate.
2. Open the driver's door.
3. Within 30 seconds of opening the driver's
door, press and hold the LOCK button on
the key for 5 seconds or longer.
All of the doors and the liftgate lock and the
beep sound activates at the currently set
volume. (If the beep sound is currently set
to not activate, it will not activate.) The
setting changes each time the LOCK button
on the key is pressed and the beep sound
activates at the set volume. (If the beep
sound has been set to not activate, it will
not activate.)
4. The setting change is completed by doing
any one of the following:
l Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
l Close the driver's door.
l Open the liftgate.
l The key is not operated for 10 seconds.
l Press any button except the LOCK
button on the key.
l A request switch is pressed.
l (With theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights flash when the
theft-deterrent system is armed or turned
off.
Refer to Theft-Deterrent System on page
3-39.
l The setting can be changed so that the
doors and the liftgate are locked
automatically without pressing the request
switch.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
(Auto-lock function)
A beep sound is heard when all doors and
the liftgate are closed while the advanced
key is being carried. All doors and the
liftgate are locked automatically after about
three seconds when the advanced key is out
of the operational range. Also, the hazard
warning lights flash once. (Even if the
driver is in the operational range, all doors
and the liftgate are locked automatically
after about 30 seconds.) If you are out of
the operational range before the doors and
the liftgate are completely closed or
another key is left in the vehicle, the autolock function will not work. Always make
sure that all doors and the liftgate are
closed and locked before leaving the
vehicle. The auto-lock function does not
close the power windows.
l (Auto re-lock function)
After unlocking with the request switch, all
doors and the liftgate will automatically
lock if any of the following operations are
not performed within about 60 seconds. If
your vehicle has a theft-deterrent system,
the hazard warning lights will flash for
confirmation.
The time required for the doors to lock
automatically can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
l A door or the liftgate is opened.
l The ignition is switched to any position
other than off.
3-14
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page92
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (93,1)
qLocking, Unlocking with Transmitter
All doors and the liftgate can be locked/
unlocked by operating the keyless entry
system transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry
System (page 3-4).
qLocking, Unlocking with DoorLock Switch
All doors and the liftgate lock
automatically when lock side is pressed.
They all unlock when unlock side is
pressed.
Driver's door
Unlock
Lock
Front passenger's door
Unlock
Lock
To lock all the doors/liftgate from an open
front door, press the lock side of the door
lock switch and then close the door.
NOTE
When locking the doors this way, be careful
not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
qAuto Lock/Unlock Function
WARNING
Do not pull the inner handle on a front
door:
Pulling an inner handle on a front
door while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. Passengers can fall out of
the vehicle if a front door accidentally
opens, which could result in death or
serious injury.
l When the vehicle speed exceeds 20
km/h (12 mph), all doors and the
liftgate lock automatically.
l When the ignition is switched off, all
doors and the liftgate unlock
automatically.
These functions can also be disabled so
that they do not operate.
Auto lock/unlock function setting
change using door-lock switch
The doors and the liftgate can set to lock
or unlock automatically by selecting any
one of the functions from the following
table and using the driver's door-lock
switch on the interior door panel to
perform the setting change as indicated in
the procedure which follows.
Settings can be changed using the
following operation.
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
3-15
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page93
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (94,1)
NOTE
l Function number 3 is the factory setting for
your vehicle.
l There are only a total of six auto lock/
unlock settings available for automatic
transaxle vehicles, and three for manual
transaxle vehicles. Be sure to press the
unlock side of the driver's door-lock switch
the correct number of times according to
the selected function number. If the switch
is mistakenly pressed seven times on an
automatic transaxle vehicle or four times
on a manual transaxle, the procedure will
be invalidated. If this occurs, start the
procedure from the beginning.
Function number Function*1
1
The auto door-lock
function is disabled.
2
All the doors and the
liftgate lock automatically
when the vehicle speed is
about 20 km/h (12 mph) or
more.
3
All the doors and the
liftgate lock automatically
when the vehicle speed is
about 20 km/h (12 mph) or
more. All the doors and the
liftgate unlock when the
ignition is switched from
ON to Off.
4
(Automatic transaxle
vehicles only)
When the ignition is
switched ON and the shift
lever is shifted from park
(P) to any other gear
position, all the doors and
the liftgate lock
automatically.
Function number Function*1
5
(Automatic transaxle
vehicles only)
When the ignition is
switched ON and the shift
lever is shifted from park
(P) to any other gear
position, all the doors and
the liftgate lock
automatically.
When the shift lever is
shifted to park (P) while the
ignition is switched ON, all
the doors and the liftgate
unlock automatically.
6
(Automatic transaxle
vehicles only)
All the doors and the
liftgate lock automatically
when the vehicle speed is
about 20 km/h (12 mph) or
more.
When the shift lever is
shifted to park (P) while the
ignition is switched ON, all
the doors and the liftgate
unlock automatically.
*1 Other settings for the auto door lock function are
available at an Authorized Mazda Dealer. For
details consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
1. Safely park the vehicle. All doors must
remain closed.
2. Switch the ignition ON.
3. Press and hold the lock side of the
driver's door-lock switch within 20
seconds of switching the ignition ON,
and make sure a beep sound is heard
about eight seconds afterwards.
3-16
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page94
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (95,1)
4. Referring to the auto lock/unlock
function setting table and determine the
function number for the desired setting.
Press the unlock side of the driver's
door-lock switch the same number of
times as the selected function number
(Ex. If you select function 2, press the
unlock side of the switch only 2 times).
5. Three seconds after the function setting
has been changed, a beep sound will
beep in the amount of the selected
function number. (Ex. Function
number 3 = 3 beep sounds)
(Manual transaxle vehicles)
Press 2 times
Press 3 times
Current Function Number
Function Number 1
Function Number 2
Function Number 3
Press 4 times
Press unlock side of
lock switch once
Cancel setting
Cancel setting
Function set (The
number of beeps
heard is the same as
the selected function
number)
Press lock side of
lock switch
Wait for 3 second
(Automatic transaxle vehicles)
Press unlock side of
lock switch once
Press 2 times
Press 3 times
Current Function Number
Function Number 1
Function Number 2
Press 4 times
Function Number 3
Press 5 times
Function Number 4
Press 7 times
Function Number 5
Press 6 times
Function Number 6
Cancel setting
Cancel setting
Function set (The
number of beeps
heard is the same as
the selected function
number)
Press lock side of
lock switch
Wait for 3 second
NOTE
l The doors cannot be locked or unlocked
while the setting function is being
performed.
l The procedure can be cancelled by pressing
the lock side of the driver's door-lock
switch.
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
3-17
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page95
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (96,1)
qLocking, Unlocking with DoorLock Knob
Operation from inside
To lock any door from the inside, press
the door-lock knob.
To unlock, pull it outward.
This does not operate the other door
locks.
Lock
Unlock
NOTE
The red indication can be seen when the doorlock knob is unlocked.
Red indication
Operation from outside
To lock the front passenger door with the
door-lock knob from the outside, press the
door-lock knob to the lock position and
close the door (holding the door handle
pulled is not required).
This does not operate the other door
locks.
Door-lock knob
NOTE
When locking the door this way, be careful not
to leave the key inside the vehicle.
3-18
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page96
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (97,1)
qRear Door Child Safety Locks
These locks are intended to help prevent
children from accidentally opening the
rear doors. Use them both whenever a
child rides in the vehicle.
If you slide the child safety lock to the
lock position before closing that door, the
door cannot be opened from the inside.
The door can be opened only by pulling
the outside handle.
Lock
Unlock
Liftgate
WARNING
Never allow a person to ride in the
luggage compartment:
Allowing a person to ride in the
luggage compartment is dangerous.
The person in the luggage
compartment could be seriously
injured or killed during sudden
braking or a collision.
Do not drive with the liftgate open:
Exhaust gas in the cabin of a vehicle
is dangerous. An open liftgate in a
moving vehicle will cause exhaust
gas to be drawn into the cabin. This
gas contains CO (carbon monoxide),
which is colorless, odorless, and
highly poisonous, and it can cause
loss of consciousness and death.
Moreover, an open liftgate could
cause occupants to fall out in an
accident.
Do not stack or leave loaded luggage
unsecured in the luggage
compartment:
Otherwise, the luggage may move or
collapse, resulting in injury or an
accident. In addition, do not load
luggage higher than the seatbacks. It
may affect the side or rear field of
view.
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
3-19
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page97
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (98,1)
CAUTION
Ø Before opening the liftgate,
remove any snow and ice
accumulation on it. Otherwise, the
liftgate could close under the
weight of the snow and ice
resulting in injury.
Ø Be careful when opening/closing
the liftgate during strong winds. If
a strong gust blows against the
liftgate, it could close suddenly
resulting in injury.
Ø Fully open the liftgate and make
sure that it stays open. If the
liftgate is only opened partially, it
could slam shut by vibration or
wind gusts resulting in injury.
Ø When loading or unloading
luggage in the luggage
compartment, turn off the engine.
Otherwise, you could get burned
by the heat of the exhaust gas.
Ø Be careful not to apply excessive
force to the damper stay on the
liftgate such as by putting your
hand on the stay. Otherwise, the
damper stay may bend and affect
the liftgate operation.
Damper stay
qOpening and Closing the Liftgate
Opening the liftgate with Electric
liftgate opener
Unlock the doors and liftgate, press the
electric liftgate opener on the liftgate, and
then raise the liftgate when the latch
releases.
Electric liftgate
opener
3-20
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page98
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (99,1)
NOTE
(With the advanced keyless function)
l A locked liftgate can also be opened while
the key is being carried.
l When opening the liftgate with the doors
and the liftgate locked, it may require a few
seconds for the liftgate latch to release after
the electric liftgate opener is pressed.
l The liftgate can be closed when the doors
are locked with the key left in the vehicle.
However, to prevent leaving the key in the
vehicle, the liftgate can be opened by
pressing the electric liftgate opener. If the
liftgate cannot be opened despite doing this
procedure, press the electric liftgate opener
to fully open the liftgate after pushing the
liftgate completely closed.
l When the liftgate latch is released by
pressing the electric liftgate opener, the
liftgate raises slightly to allow it to be
opened. If the liftgate is not operated for a
certain period of time after the electric
liftgate opener has been pressed, the
liftgate cannot be raised any more from its
slightly raised position. Press the electric
liftgate opener again to fully open the
liftgate. To close the liftgate from its slightly
raised position, open it first by pressing the
electric liftgate opener, and waiting for 1
second or longer then close it.
If the liftgate is not fully closed, the driver
is notified by a warning indicated in the
instrument cluster.
l If the vehicle battery is dead or there is a
malfunction in the electrical system and the
liftgate cannot be unlocked, the liftgate can
be opened by performing the emergency
procedure.
Refer to When Liftgate Cannot be Opened
on page 7-39.
Closing the liftgate
To close, lower the liftgate slowly using
the liftgate grip recess, and then push the
liftgate closed using both hands.
Do not slam it. Pull up on the liftgate to
make sure it is secure.
Liftgate grip
recess
qLuggage Compartment
Loading golf bags
Golf bags can be carried in the luggage
compartment.
Up to four golf bags can be carried in the
luggage compartment.
Place each of the first three golf bags into
the luggage compartment with the bottom
of each bag pointed to the right, and then
set the top of each bag so that it is pointed
to the left.
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
3-21
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page99
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (100,1)
Place the fourth golf bag with its top
pointed to the left, and then set the bottom
of the bag so that it is pointed to the right.
NOTE
Some golf bags cannot fit depending on their
size.
3-22
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page100
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (101,1)
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions
qFuel Requirements
Vehicles with catalytic converters or oxygen sensors must use ONLY UNLEADED FUEL,
which will reduce exhaust emissions and keep spark plug fouling to a minimum.
Your Mazda will perform best with fuel listed in the table.
Fuel Octane Rating* (Anti-knock index)
Regular unleaded fuel 87 [ (R M)/2 method] or above (91 RON or above)
* U.S. federal law requires that octane ratings be posted on gasoline station pumps.
Fuel with a rating lower than 87 octane (91 RON) could cause the emission control system
to lose effectiveness. It could also cause engine knocking and serious engine damage.
CAUTION
Ø USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.
Leaded fuel is harmful to the catalytic converter and oxygen sensors and will lead
to deterioration of the emission control system and or failures.
Ø Your vehicle can only use oxygenated fuels containing no more than 10 % ethanol
by volume. Damage to your vehicle may occur when ethanol exceeds this
recommendation, or if the gasoline contains any methanol. Stop using gasohol of
any kind if your vehicle engine is performing poorly.
Ø Never add fuel system additives. Otherwise, the emission control system could be
damaged. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details.
Gasoline blended with oxygenates such as alcohol or ether compounds are generally
referred to as oxygenated fuels. The common gasoline blend that can be used with your
vehicle is ethanol blended at no more than 10 %. Gasoline containing alcohol, such as
ethanol or methanol, may be marketed under the name “Gasohol”.
Vehicle damage and drivability problems resulting from the use of the following may not
be covered by the Mazda warranty.
l Gasohol containing more than 10 % ethanol.
l Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol.
l Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
3-23
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page101
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (102,1)
qEmission Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system (the catalytic converter is part of
this system) that enables your vehicle to comply with existing exhaust emissions
requirements.
WARNING
Never park over or near anything flammable:
Parking over or near anything flammable, such as dry grass, is dangerous. Even with
the engine turned off, the exhaust system remains very hot after normal use and
could ignite anything flammable. A resulting fire could cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Ignoring the following precautions could cause lead to accumulate on the catalyst
inside the converter or cause the converter to get very hot. Either condition will
damage the converter and cause poor performance.
Ø USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.
Ø Do not drive your Mazda with any sign of engine malfunction.
Ø Do not coast with the ignition switched off.
Ø Do not descend steep grades in gear with the ignition switched off.
Ø Do not operate the engine at high idle for more than 2 minutes.
Ø Do not tamper with the emission control system. All inspections and adjustments
must be made by a qualified technician.
Ø Do not push-start or pull-start your vehicle.
NOTE
l Under U.S. federal law, any modification to the original-equipment emission control system before
the first sale and registration of a vehicle is subject to penalties. In some states, such modification
made on a used vehicle is also subject to penalties.
l While the engine is off, the sound of a valve opening and closing can be heard at the rear of the
right side of the vehicle, however this does not indicate an abnormality. Your vehicle has a selfchecking device and it operates while the engine is off.
3-24
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page102
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (103,1)
qEngine Exhaust (Carbon monoxide)
WARNING
Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle:
Engine exhaust gas is dangerous. This gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless, odorless, and poisonous. When inhaled, it can cause loss of consciousness
and death. If you smell exhaust gas inside your vehicle, keep all windows fully open
and contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately.
Do not run the engine when inside an enclosed area:
Running the engine inside an enclosed area, such as a garage, is dangerous. Exhaust
gas, which contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could easily enter the cabin. Loss
of consciousness or even death could occur.
Open the windows or adjust the heating or cooling system to draw fresh air when
idling the engine:
Exhaust gas is dangerous. When your vehicle is stopped with the windows closed
and the engine running for a long time even in an open area, exhaust gas, which
contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could enter the cabin. Loss of consciousness or
even death could occur.
Clear snow from underneath and around your vehicle, particularly the tail pipe,
before starting the engine:
Running the engine when a vehicle is stopped in deep snow is dangerous. The
exhaust pipe could be blocked by the snow, allowing exhaust gas to enter the cabin.
Because exhaust gas contains poisonous carbon monoxide, it could cause loss of
consciousness or even death to occupants in the cabin.
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
3-25
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page103
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (104,1)
Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap
WARNING
When removing the fuel-filler cap,
loosen the cap slightly and wait for any
hissing to stop. Then remove it:
Fuel spray is dangerous. Fuel can
burn skin and eyes and cause illness
if ingested. Fuel spray is released
when there is pressure in the fuel
tank and the fuel-filler cap is
removed too quickly.
Before refueling, stop the engine, and
always keep sparks and flames away
from the filler neck:
Fuel vapor is dangerous. It could be
ignited by sparks or flames causing
serious burns and injuries.
Additionally, use of the incorrect fuelfiller cap or not using a fuel-filler cap
may result in fuel leak, which could
result in serious burns or death in an
accident.
Do not continue refueling after the fuel
pump nozzle shuts off automatically:
Continuing to add fuel after the fuel
pump nozzle has shut off
automatically is dangerous because
overfilling the fuel tank may cause
fuel overflow or leakage. Fuel
overflow and leakage could damage
the vehicle and if the fuel ignites it
could cause a fire and explosion
resulting in serious injury or death.
CAUTION
(U.S.A. and Canada)
Always use only a genuine Mazda
fuel-filler cap or an approved
equivalent, available at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer. The wrong
cap can result in a serious
malfunction of the fuel and emission
control systems. It may also cause
the check engine light in the
instrument cluster to illuminate.
qFuel-Filler Lid
To open, pull the remote fuel-filler lid
release.
To close, press the fuel-filler lid until it
locks securely.
Remote fuel-filler
lid release
qFuel-Filler Cap
To remove the fuel-filler cap, turn it
counterclockwise.
Attach the removed cap to the inner side
of the fuel lid.
3-26
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page104
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (105,1)
To close the fuel-filler cap, turn it
clockwise until a click is heard.
Open
Close
CAUTION
(U.S.A. and Canada)
If the check fuel cap warning light
illuminates, the fuel-filler cap may
not be properly installed. If the
warning light illuminates, park your
vehicle safely off the right-of-way,
remove the fuel-filler cap and
reinstall it correctly. After the cap has
been correctly installed, the fuel cap
warning light may continue to
illuminate until a number of driving
cycles have been completed. A drive
cycle consists of starting the engine
(after four or more hours with the
engine off) and driving the vehicle on
city and highway roads.
Continuing to drive with the check
fuel cap warning light illuminated
could cause the check engine light to
illuminate as well.
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
3-27
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page105
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (106,1)
Steering Wheel
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel while
the vehicle is moving:
Adjusting the steering wheel while
the vehicle is moving is dangerous.
Moving it can very easily cause the
driver to abruptly turn to the left or
right. This can lead to loss of control
or an accident.
qSteering Wheel Adjustment
To change the angle or length of the
steering wheel:
1. Stop the vehicle, and then pull down
the lock release lever under the steering
column.
Lock release lever
2. Tilt the steering wheel and/or adjust the
steering column length to the desired
positions, and then push the lever up to
lock the column.
3. Attempt to push the steering wheel up
and down to make sure it's locked
before driving.
3-28
Before Driving
Steering Wheel
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page106
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (107,1)
Mirrors
Before driving, adjust the inside and
outside mirrors.
qOutside Mirrors
WARNING
Be sure to look over your shoulder
before changing lanes:
Changing lanes without taking into
account the actual distance of the
vehicle in the convex mirror is
dangerous. You could have a serious
accident. What you see in the convex
mirror is closer than it appears.
Mirror type
Flat type (driver's side)
Flat surface mirror.
Convex type (front passenger side)
The mirror has single curvature on its
surface.
Power mirror adjustment
The ignition must be switched to ACC or
ON position.
To adjust:
1. Rotate the mirror switch to the left ( )
or right ( ) to choose the left or right
side mirror.
2. Press the mirror switch in the
appropriate direction.
Mirror switch Center position
After adjusting the mirror, lock the control
by rotating the switch in the center
position.
Folding mirror
WARNING
Always return the outside mirrors to
the driving position before you start
driving:
Driving with the outside mirrors
folded in is dangerous. Your rear view
will be restricted, and you could have
an accident.
Fold the outside mirror rearward until it is
flush with the vehicle.
Before Driving
Mirrors
3-29
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page107
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (108,1)
qRearview Mirror
WARNING
Do not stack cargo or objects higher
than the seatbacks:
Cargo stacked higher than the
seatbacks is dangerous. It can block
your view in the rearview mirror,
which might cause you to hit another
car when changing lanes.
Rearview mirror adjustment
Before driving, adjust the rearview mirror
to center on the scene through the rear
window.
NOTE
For the manual day/night mirror, perform the
adjustment with the day/night lever in the day
position.
Reducing glare from headlights
Manual day/night mirror
Push the day/night lever forward for day
driving. Pull it back to reduce glare of
headlights from cars at the rear.
Night
Day
Day/Night lever
Auto-dimming mirror
The auto-dimming mirror automatically
reduces glare of headlights from cars at
the rear when the ignition is switched ON.
(With Homelink wireless control
system)
Press the OFF button ( ) to cancel the
automatic dimming function. The
indicator light will turn off.
To reactivate the automatic dimming
function, press the ON button ( ). The
indicator light will illuminate.
Indicator light OFF button
ON button
3-30
Before Driving
Mirrors
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page108
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (109,1)
(Without Homelink wireless control
system)
Press the ON/OFF button to cancel the
automatic dimming function. The
indicator light will turn off.
To reactivate the automatic dimming
function, press the ON/OFF button .
The indicator light will illuminate.
ON/OFF buttonIndicator light
NOTE
l Do not use glass cleaner or suspend objects
on or around the light sensor. Otherwise,
light sensor sensitivity will be affected and
may not operate normally.
(With Homelink wireless control system)
Light sensor
(Without Homelink wireless control system)
Light sensor
l (With Homelink wireless control system)
For information regarding the 3 buttons
( , , ) on the auto-dimming
mirror.
Refer to HomeLink Wireless Control System
on page 4-71.
l The auto-dimmer function is canceled when
the ignition is switched ON and the shift
lever is in reverse (R).
Before Driving
Mirrors
3-31
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page109
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (110,1)
Power Windows
The ignition must be switched ON for the
power windows to operate.
WARNING
Make sure the opening is clear before
closing a window:
Closing power windows are
dangerous. A person's hands, head,
or even neck could be caught by the
window and result in serious injury
or even death. This warning applies
especially to children.
Never allow children to play with
power window switches:
Power window switches that are not
locked with the power window lock
switch would allow children to
operate power windows
unintentionally which could result in
serious injury if a child's hands, head
or neck becomes caught by the
window.
CAUTION
To prevent burning out the fuse and
damaging the power window system,
do not open or close more than three
windows at once.
NOTE
A power window may no longer open/close if
you continue to press the switch after fully
opening/closing the power window. If the
power window does not open/close, wait a
moment and then operate the switch again.
qOperating the Driver's Side
Power Window
Normal opening/closing
To open the window to the desired
position, lightly hold down the switch.
To close the window to the desired
position, lightly pull up the switch.
Driver's window
Open
Close
Master control switches
Auto-opening/closing
To fully open the window automatically,
press the switch completely down, then
release. The window will fully open
automatically.
To fully close the window automatically,
pull the switch completely up, then
release. The window will fully close
automatically.
To stop the window partway, pull or press
the switch in the opposite direction and
then release it.
3-32
Before Driving
Windows
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page110
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (111,1)
Power window system initialization
procedure
If the battery was disconnected during
vehicle maintenance, or for other reasons
(such as a switch continues to be operated
after the window is fully open/closed), the
window will not fully open and close
automatically.
The power window auto function will
only resume on the power window that
has been reset.
1 Switch the ignition ON.
2 Make sure that the power window lock
switch located on the driver's door is
not depressed.
3 Press the switch and fully open the
window.
4 Pull up the switch to fully close the
window and continue holding the
switch for about 2 seconds after the
window fully closed.
Jam-safe window
If a person's hands, head or an object
blocks the window during the autoclosing operation, the window will stop
and open halfway.
WARNING
Make sure nothing blocks the window
just before it reaches the fully closed
position or while holding up the power
window switch:
Blocking the power window just
before it reaches the fully closed
position or while holding up the
power window switch is dangerous.
In this case, the jam-safe function
cannot prevent the window from
closing all the way. If fingers are
caught, serious injuries could occur.
NOTE
l Depending on driving conditions, a closing
power window could stop and start opening
when the window feels a shock that is
similar to something blocking it.
In the event the jam-safe function activates
and the power window cannot be closed
automatically, pull and hold the switch and
the window will close.
l The jam-safe window function does not
operate until the system has been reset.
Engine-off power window operation
The power window can be operated for
about 40 seconds after the ignition is
switched from ON to off with all doors
closed. If any door is opened, the power
window will stop operating.
NOTE
For engine-off operation of the power window,
the switch must be held up firmly throughout
window closure because the auto-closing
function will be inoperable.
qOperating the Passenger Power
Windows
To open the window to the desired
position, hold down the switch.
To close the window to the desired
position, pull up the switch.
Close
Open
Before Driving
Windows
3-33
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page111
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (112,1)
NOTE
l The power windows may be operated when
the power window lock switch on the
driver's door is in the unlocked position.
l The passenger windows may be opened or
closed using the master control switches on
the driver's door.
Left rear
window
Right rear window
Front
passenger's
window
Driver's window
Master control switches
qPower Window Lock Switch
This feature prevents all power windows
from operating, except the driver's power
window. Keep this switch in the locked
position while children are in the vehicle.
Locked position (button depressed):
Only the driver's power window can be
operated.
Unlocked position (button not
depressed):
All power windows on each door can be
operated.
Locked position
Unlocked position
3-34
Before Driving
Windows
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page112
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (113,1)
Moonroofí
The moonroof can be opened or closed
electrically only when the ignition is
switched ON.
Tilt/Slide switch
WARNING
Do not let passengers stand up or
extend part of the body through the
open moonroof while the vehicle is
moving:
Extending the head, arms, or other
parts of the body through the
moonroof is dangerous. The head or
arms could hit something while the
vehicle is moving. This could cause
serious injury or death.
Make sure the opening is clear before
closing the moonroof:
A closing moonroof is dangerous. The
hands, head, or even neck of a
person, especially a child, could be
caught in it as it closes, causing
serious injury or even death.
NOTE
Before washing your Mazda, make sure the
moonroof is completely closed so that water
does not get inside the cabin area. After
washing your Mazda or after it rains, wipe the
water off the moonroof before operating it to
avoid water penetration which could cause
rust and water damage to your headliner.
qTilt Operation
The rear of the moonroof can be tilted
open to provide more ventilation.
To fully tilt automatically, momentarily
press the tilt/slide switch.
To stop tilting partway, press the tilt/slide
switch.
To close to the desired position, press the
tilt/slide switch in the forward direction.
Close (Tilt down)
Tilt up
qSlide Operation
To fully open automatically, momentarily
press the tilt/slide switch in the backward
direction.
To stop sliding partway, press the tilt/slide
switch.
Before Driving
Windows
3-35íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page113
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (114,1)
To close to the desired position, press the
tilt/slide switch in the forward direction.
Close
Open
qPower Moonroof Re-set Procedure
If the battery is disconnected, the
moonroof will not operate. The moonroof
will not operate correctly until it is re-set.
Carry out the following procedure to reset the moonroof and resume operation:
1. Switch the ignition ON.
2. Press the tilt switch, to partially tilt
open the rear of the moonroof.
3. Repeat Step 2. The rear of the
moonroof tilts open to the fully open
position, then closes a little.
NOTE
If the re-set procedure is performed while the
moonroof is in the slide position (partially
open) it will close before the rear tilt opens.
qSunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed
by hand.
The sunshade opens automatically when
the moonroof is opened, but must be
closed by hand.
Sunshade
CAUTION
Ø The sunshade does not tilt. To
avoid damaging the sunshade, do
not push up on it.
Ø Do not close the sunshade while
the moonroof is opening. Trying to
force the sunshade closed could
damage it.
3-36
Before Driving
Windows
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page114
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (115,1)
Modification and Add-On
Equipment
Mazda cannot guarantee the immobilizer
and the theft-deterrent systems' operation
if the system have been modified or if any
add-on equipment has been installed.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to your vehicle, do
not modify the system or install any
add-on equipment to the immobilizer
and the theft-deterrent systems or
the vehicle.
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system allows the engine
to start only with a key the system
recognizes.
If someone attempts to start the engine
with an unrecognized key, the engine will
not start, thereby helping to prevent the
theft of your vehicle.
If you have a problem with the
immobilizer system or the key, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
CAUTION
Ø Radio equipment like this is
governed by laws.
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Ø To avoid damage to the key, do
not:
Ø Drop the key.
Ø Get the key wet.
Ø Expose the key to any kind of
magnetic field.
Ø Expose the key to high
temperatures on places such as
the dashboard or hood, under
direct sunlight.
Ø If the engine does not start with
the correct key, and the security
indicator light keeps illuminating
or flashing, the system may have
a malfunction. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Before Driving
Security System
3-37
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page115
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (116,1)
NOTE
l The keys carry a unique electronic code.
For this reason, and to assure your safety,
obtaining a replacement key requires some
waiting time. They are only available
through an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l Always keep a spare key in case one is lost.
If a key is lost, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
l If you lose a key, an Authorized Mazda
Dealer will reset the electronic codes of
your remaining keys and immobilizer
system. Bring all the remaining keys to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to reset.
Starting the vehicle with a key that has not
been reset is not possible.
qOperation
NOTE
l The engine may not start and security
indicator light may illuminate or flash if the
key is placed in an area where it is difficult
for the system to detect the signal, such as
on the dashboard or in the glove
compartment. Move the key to a location
within the signal range, switch the ignition
off, and then restart the engine.
l Signals from a TVor radio station, or from
a transceiver or mobile telephone could
interfere with your immobilizer system. If
you are using the proper key and the engine
fails to start, check the security indicator
light.
Arming
The system is armed when the push
button start is pressed from ON to off.
The security indicator light in the
instrument cluster flashes every 2 seconds
until the system is disarmed.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-20.
Disarming
The system is disarmed when the ignition
is switched ON with the correct
programmed key. The security indicator
light illuminates for about 3 seconds and
then turns off. If the engine does not start
with the correct key, and the security
indicator light remains illuminated or
flashing, try the following:
Make sure the key is within the
operational range for signal transmission.
Switch the ignition off, and then restart
the engine. If the engine does not start
after 3 or more tries, contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
l If the security indicator light flashes
continuously while you are driving, do not
shut off the engine. Go to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer and have it checked. If the
engine is shut off while the indicator light is
flashing, you will not be able to restart it.
l Because the electronic codes are reset when
the immobilizer system is repaired, the keys
are needed. Make sure to bring all the keys
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer so that they
can be programmed.
3-38
Before Driving
Security System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page116
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (117,1)
Theft-Deterrent Systemí
If the theft deterrent system detects an
inappropriate entry into the vehicle, which
could result in the vehicle or its contents
being stolen, the alarm alerts the
surrounding area of an abnormality by
sounding the horn and flashing the hazard
warning lights.
The system will not function unless it's
properly armed. So when you leave the
vehicle, follow the arming procedure
correctly.
qOperation
System triggering conditions
The horn sounds intermittently and the
hazard warning lights flash for about 30
seconds when the system is triggered by
any one of the following:
l Unlocking a door with the key, door
lock switch, or an inside door-lock
knob.
l Forcing open a door, the hood or the
liftgate.
l Opening the hood by operating the
hood release handle.
l Switching the ignition ON without
using the push button start.
If the system is triggered again, the lights
and horn will activate until the driver's
door or the liftgate is unlocked with the
transmitter.
(With advanced key)
The lights and horn can also be
deactivated by pressing the request switch
on a door.
NOTE
l If the battery goes dead while the theftdeterrent system is armed, the horn will
activate and the hazard warning lights will
flash when the battery is charged or
replaced.
l The liftgate does not open while the horn is
sounding and the hazard warning lights are
flashing.
qHow to Arm the System
1. Close the windows and the moonroofí
securely.
2. Press the push button start off.
3. Make sure the hood, the doors, and the
liftgate are closed.
4. Press the lock button on the transmitter
or lock the driver's door from the
outside with the auxiliary key.
The hazard warning lights will flash
once.
The following method will also arm the
theft-deterrent system:
Press the door-lock switch “ ” while
any door is open and then close all of
the doors.
(With the advanced keyless function)
Press a request switch.
The security indicator light in the
instrument panel flashes twice per
second for 20 seconds.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on
page 4-20.
Before Driving
Security System
3-39íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page117
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (118,1)
5. After 20 seconds, the system is fully
armed.
NOTE
l The theft deterrent system can also be
armed by activating the auto relock
function with all the doors, the liftgate and
the hood closed.
Refer to Transmitter on page 3-5.
l The system will disarm if one of the
following operations takes place within 20
seconds after pressing the lock button:
l Unlocking a door.
l Any door or the liftgate is opened.
l The hood is opened.
l The ignition is switched on.
l (With the advanced keyless function)
Press the electric liftgate opener while
the key is being carried.
To rearm the system, do the arming
procedure again.
l When the doors are locked by pressing the
lock button on the transmitter or using the
auxiliary key while the theft-deterrent
system is armed, the hazard warning lights
will flash once to indicate that the system is
armed.
qTo Turn Off an Armed System
An armed system can be turned off using
any one of the following methods:
l Press the unlock button on the
transmitter.
l Switch the ignition ON.
l (With the advanced keyless function)
Press a request switch on the doors.
The hazard warning lights will flash
twice.
NOTE
When the doors are unlocked by pressing the
unlock button on the transmitter while the
theft-deterrent system is turned off, the hazard
warning lights will flash twice to indicate that
the system is turned off.
qTo Stop the Alarm
A triggered alarm can be turned off using
any one of the following methods:
l Press the unlock button on the
transmitter.
l The engine is started with the push
button start.
l (With the advanced keyless function)
l Press a request switch on the doors.
l Press the electric liftgate opener
while the key is being carried.
The hazard warning lights will flash
twice.
qTheft-Deterrent Labels
A label indicating that your vehicle is
equipped with a Theft-Deterrent System is
in the glove compartment.
Mazda recommends that you affix it to the
lower rear corner of a front door window.
3-40
Before Driving
Security System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page118
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (119,1)
Break-In Period
No special break-in is necessary, but a few
precautions in the first 1,000 km (600
miles) may add to the performance,
economy, and life of your Mazda.
l Do not race the engine.
l Do not maintain one constant speed,
either slow or fast, for a long period of
time.
l Do not drive constantly at full-throttle
or high engine rpm for extended
periods of time.
l Avoid unnecessary hard stops.
l Avoid full-throttle starts.
l Do not tow a trailer.
Saving Fuel and Protection
of the Environment
How you operate your Mazda determines
how far it will travel on a tank of fuel. Use
these suggestions to help save fuel and
reduce CO2.
l Avoid long warm-ups. Once the engine
runs smoothly, begin driving.
l Avoid fast starts.
l Drive at lower speeds.
l Anticipate when to apply the brakes
(avoid sudden braking).
l Follow the maintenance schedule (page
6-4) and have an Authorized Mazda
Dealer perform inspections and
servicing.
l Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
l Slow down on rough roads.
l Keep the tires properly inflated.
l Do not carry unnecessary weight.
l Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving.
l Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
l Keep windows closed at high speeds.
l Slow down when driving in crosswinds
and headwinds.
WARNING
Never stop the engine when going
down a hill:
Stopping the engine when going
down a hill is dangerous. This causes
the loss of power steering and power
brake control, and may cause
damage to the drivetrain. Any loss of
steering or braking control could
cause an accident.
Before Driving
Driving Tips
3-41
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page119
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (120,1)
Hazardous Driving
WARNING
Be extremely careful if it is necessary to
downshift on slippery surfaces:
Downshifting into lower gear while
driving on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. The sudden change in tire
speed could cause the tires to skid.
This could lead to loss of vehicle
control and an accident.
Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and
abrupt maneuvers when driving this
vehicle:
Sharp turns, excessive speed and
abrupt maneuvering of this vehicle
are dangerous as it could result in
the increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle roll-over, personal
injury or death.
This vehicle has a higher center of
gravity. Vehicles with a higher center
of gravity such as utility vehicles
handle differently than vehicles with
a lower center of gravity.
Utility vehicles are not designed for
cornering at high speeds any more
than low profile sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily
under off-road conditions.
In addition, utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt.
When driving on ice or in water, snow,
mud, sand, or similar hazards:
l Be cautious and allow extra distance
for braking.
l Avoid sudden braking and sudden
maneuvering.
l Do not pump the brakes. Continue to
press down on the brake pedal.
Refer to Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-80.
l If you get stuck, select a lower gear and
accelerate slowly. Do not spin the front
wheels.
l For more traction in starting on
slippery surfaces such as ice or packed
snow, use sand, rock salt, chains,
carpeting, or other nonslip material
under the front wheels.
NOTE
Use snow chains only on the front wheels.
3-42
Before Driving
Driving Tips
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page120
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (121,1)
Floor Mat
WARNING
Make sure the floor mats are hooked
on the retention pins to prevent them
from bunching up under the foot
pedals:
Using a floor mat that is not secured
is dangerous as it will interfere with
the accelerator and brake pedal
operation, which could result in an
accident.
Do not install two floor mats, one on
top of the other, on the driver's side:
Installing two floor mats, one on top
of the other, on the driver's side is
dangerous as the retention pins can
only keep one floor mat from sliding
forward.
If using a heavy duty floor mat for
winter use always remove the
original floor mat.
Loose floor mat(s) will interfere with
the foot pedal and could result in an
accident.
When setting a floor mat, position the
floor mat so that its grommets are inserted
over the pointed end of the retention
posts.
Rocking the Vehicle
WARNING
Do not spin the wheels at more than 56
km/h (35 mph), and do not allow
anyone to stand behind a wheel when
pushing the vehicle:
When the vehicle is stuck, spinning
the wheels at high speed is
dangerous. The spinning tire could
overheat and explode. This could
cause serious injuries.
CAUTION
Too much rocking may cause engine
overheating, transaxle failure, and
tire damage.
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand or mud, depress the
accelerator slightly and slowly move the
shift lever from 1 (D) to R.
Before Driving
Driving Tips
3-43
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page121
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (122,1)
Winter Driving
Carry emergency gear, including tire
chains, window scraper, flares, a small
shovel, jumper cables, and a small bag of
sand or salt.
Ask an Authorized Mazda Dealer to
perform the following precautions:
l Have the proper ratio of antifreeze in
the radiator.
Refer to Engine Coolant on page 6-29.
l Inspect the battery and its cables. Cold
reduces battery capacity.
l Use an engine oil appropriate for the
lowest ambient temperatures that the
vehicle will be driven in (page 6-27).
l Inspect the ignition system for damage
and loose connections.
l Use washer fluid made with
antifreeze―but do not use engine
coolant antifreeze for washer fluid
(page 6-31).
l Snow left on the windshield is
dangerous as it could obstruct vision.
Remove snow before driving.
l Do not apply excessive force to a
window scraper when removing ice or
frozen snow on the mirror glass and
windshield.
l Never use warm or hot water for
removing snow or ice from windows
and mirrors as it could result in the
glass cracking.
l Braking performance can be adversely
affected if snow or ice adheres to the
brake components. If this situation
occurs, drive the vehicle slowly,
releasing the accelerator pedal and
lightly applying the brakes several
times until the brake performance
returns to normal.
qSnow Tires
Use snow tires on all four wheels
Do not go faster than 120 km/h (75 mph)
while driving with snow tires. Inflate
snow tires 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2, 4.3 psi)
more than recommended on the tire
pressure label (driver's door frame), but
never more than the maximum cold-tire
pressure shown on the tires.
Except Mexico
The vehicle is originally equipped with all
season radials designed to be used all year
around. In some extreme climates you
may find it necessary to replace them with
snow tires during the winter months to
further improve traction on snow and ice
covered roads.
Mexico
The vehicle is originally equipped with
summer tires designed for optimum
traction on wet and dry roads. If your
vehicle is to be used on snow and ice
covered roads, Mazda recommends that
you replace the tires originally equipped
on your vehicle with snow tires during the
winter months.
WARNING
Use only the same size and type tires
(snow, radial, or non-radial) on all four
wheels:
Using tires different in size or type is
dangerous. Your vehicle's handling
could be greatly affected and result
in an accident.
CAUTION
Check local regulations before using
studded tires.
3-44
Before Driving
Driving Tips
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page122
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (123,1)
qTire Chains
Check local regulations before using tire
chains.
CAUTION
Ø Chains may affect handling.
Ø Do not go faster than 50 km/h (30
mph) or the chain manufacturer's
recommended limit, whichever is
lower.
Ø Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, and sharp turns.
Ø Avoid locked-wheel braking.
Ø Do not use chains on a temporary
spare tire; it may result in damage
to the vehicle and to the tire.
Ø Do not use chains on roads that
are free of snow or ice. The tires
and chains could be damaged.
Ø Chains may scratch or chip
aluminum wheels.
NOTE
The tire pressure monitoring system may not
function correctly when using tire chains.
Install the chains on the front tires only.
Do not use chains on the rear tires.
Please consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Installing the chains
1. Secure the chains on the front tires as
tightly as possible.
Always follow the chain
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Retighten the chains after driving 1/2
―1 km (1/4―1/2 mile).
Driving In Flooded Area
WARNING
Dry off brakes that have become wet
by driving slowly, releasing the
accelerator pedal and lightly applying
the brakes several times until the brake
performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is
dangerous. Increased stopping
distance or the vehicle pulling to one
side when braking could result in a
serious accident. Light braking will
indicate whether the brakes have
been affected.
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle on flooded
roads as it could cause short
circuiting of electrical/electronic
parts, or engine damage or stalling
from water absorption. If the vehicle
has been immersed in water, consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Before Driving
Driving Tips
3-45
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page123
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (124,1)
Overloading
WARNING
Be careful not to overload your vehicle:
The gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
and the gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR) of your vehicle are on the
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label
on the driver's door frame. Exceeding
these ratings can cause an accident
or vehicle damage. You can estimate
the weight of your load by weighing
the items (or people) before putting
them in the vehicle.
3-46
Before Driving
Driving Tips
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page124
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (125,1)
Driving on Uneven Road
Your vehicle's suspension and underbody can be damaged if driven on rough/uneven roads
or over speed bumps at excessive speeds. Use care and reduce speed when traveling on
rough/uneven roads or over speed bumps.
Use care not to damage the vehicle's underbody, bumpers or muffler(s) when driving under
the following conditions:
l Ascending or descending a slope with a sharp transition angle
l Ascending or descending a driveway or trailer ramp with a sharp transition angle
Your vehicle is equipped with low profile tires allowing class-leading performance and
handling. As a result, the sidewall of the tires are very thin and the tires and wheels can be
damaged if driven through potholes or on rough/uneven roads at excessive speeds. Use
care and reduce speed when traveling on rough/uneven roads or through potholes.
Before Driving
Driving Tips
3-47
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page125
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (126,1)
Trailer Towing (U.S.A. and Canada)
Your Mazda was designed and built primarily to carry passengers and cargo.
If you tow a trailer, follow these instructions because driver and passenger safety depends
on proper equipment and safe driving habits. Towing a trailer will affect handling, braking,
durability, performance, and fuel economy.
Never overload vehicle or trailer. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer if you need further
details.
CAUTION
Do not tow a trailer during the first 1,000 km (600 miles) of your new Mazda. If you
do, you may damage the engine, transaxle, differential, wheel bearings, and other
power train components.
qWeight Limits
TTW and GCWR
The total trailer weight (TTW), gross combination weight rating (GCWR), gross axle
weight rating (GAWR), trailer load, and trailer tongue load must be within the
prescribed limits.
l The total trailer weight (TTW) is the sum of the weights of the trailer load (trailer
weight plus cargo), trailer hitch, 2 passengers, and vehicle load (baggage, food,
camp gear, etc.). Never allow the total trailer weight (TTW) to exceed specifications
in the Trailer Towing-Load Table.
l The maximum GCWR is the combination weight of the trailer and load plus the
towing vehicle (including trailer hitch, vehicle passengers, and load). It must not
exceed specifications in the load table.
GAWR and GVWR
Do not exceed front and rear GAWR (gross axle weight rating) and GVWR (gross vehicle
weight rating). If you do, vehicle handling, braking, and performance will be affected.
These values are also on the Motor Vehicle Safety Certification Label posted on the driver's
door frame.
High-altitude operation
CAUTION
Be aware of the towing load weight differences when towing at high altitudes. For
altitudes exceeding 1,000 m, always reduce the towing load by 10% for every 1,000
m increase in altitude from the load indicated under the maximum GCWR heading in
the trailer towing-load table. If the determined maximum total towing load weight is
exceeded, the engine and other power train parts may be damaged.
3-48
Before Driving
Towing
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page126
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (127,1)
TRAILER TOWING-LOAD TABLE
Because vehicle weights vary, adjustments must be made to meet the requirements in this
table.
Item
Model
SKYACTIV-G 2.0 SKYACTIV-G 2.5
2WD AWD 2WD AWD
Manual
transaxle
Automatic transaxle Automatic transaxle
MAX.
FRONTAL
AREA
2.97 m2 (32 ft2)
MAX. TTW 907 kg (2,000 lb)
MAX. GCWR
2,620 kg
(5,776.0 lb)
2,655 kg
(5,853.2 lb)
2,723 kg
(6,003.1 lb)
2,680 kg
(5,908.3 lb)
2,751 kg
(6,064.8 lb)
MAX. GAWR
Front
972 kg
(2,143 lb)
1,009 kg
(2,224 lb)
1,026 kg
(2,262 lb)
1,035 kg
(2,282 lb)
1,056 kg
(2,328 lb)
Rear
971 kg
(2,141 lb)
969 kg
(2,136 lb)
1,020 kg
(2,249 lb)
968 kg
(2,134 lb)
1,018 kg
(2,244 lb)
MAX. GVWR
1,940 kg
(4,277 lb)
1,975 kg
(4,354 lb)
2,043 kg
(4,504 lb)
2,000 kg
(4,409 lb)
2,071 kg
(4,566 lb)
TRAILER-
TONGUE
LOAD
Tongue load
Tongue load/Trailer load × 100 = 10 % to 15 %
Trailer load
DISTRIBU-
TION OF
TRAILER
LOAD
Front 60 %
Rear 40 %
Before Driving
Towing
3-49
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page127
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (128,1)
WARNING
Always keep tow loads within specified limits as indicated in the Trailer Towing-Load
Table:
Attempting to tow loads greater than those specified is dangerous as it may cause
serious handling and performance problems that could result in personal injury or
vehicle damage, or both.
Load your trailer with the weight about 60 % toward the front and 40 % toward the
rear:
Loading the trailer with more weight in the rear than in the front is dangerous.
Doing so could cause you to lose control. The trailer tongue load must be 10 %―15
% of the total trailer load (sum of the weights of the trailer and cargo).
Always have the total trailer weight and tongue load determined prior to departure:
Attempting to tow loads without determining the total trailer weight and tongue
load is dangerous. Trailer sway from crosswinds, rough roads or other causes could
result in loss of control and a serious accident.
CAUTION
The total trailer weight and tongue load can be determined by weighing the trailer
on platform scales at a highway weight station or a trucking company.
qTrailer Hitch
Use only a hitch ball recommended by the trailer manufacturer that conforms to the gross
trailer weight requirement.
When not towing a trailer, remove the trailer hitch (if detachable) to reduce the possibility
of damage as a result of the vehicle being rear-ended.
3-50
Before Driving
Towing
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page128
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (129,1)
WARNING
Always make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached before departure:
An unsecured trailer hitch is dangerous as it causes greater trailer sway from
crosswinds, rough roads or other causes, resulting in loss of control and a serious
accident.
Examine all trailer-hitch mounting bolts regularly and tighten any that are loose. If
the hitch is removed, seal any open mounting holes to prevent exhaust, dust, water,
dirt and other foreign elements from filtering in, possibly endangering personal
safety and damaging your vehicle.
Do not install a hitch that stiffens the bumper as it will reduce the bumper's
performance.
Make sure there are no exhaust gas leaks into the passenger compartment if any
mounting bolts are connected to the body:
Modifying your vehicle exhaust system is dangerous. Exhaust gas entering the
vehicle could cause loss of consciousness or even death.
When mounting the trailer hitch, make no modifications to the vehicle exhaust
system.
CAUTION
Ø Make all hitch adjustments with actual loads. Do not load and unload vehicle
while adjusting hitch. This action will change the vehicle height.
Ø Do not use an axle-mounted hitch. This may damage the axle and related parts.
qTires
When towing a trailer, make sure all tires are inflated to the recommended cold-tire
pressure, as indicated on the tire pressure chart on the driver's door frame. Trailer tire size,
load rating, and inflation pressures should conform to tire manufacturer specifications.
WARNING
Never use the temporary spare tire when towing:
Using the temporary spare tire on your vehicle when towing a trailer is dangerous as
it could result in tire failure, loss of control, and injury to vehicle occupants.
Before Driving
Towing
3-51
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page129
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (130,1)
qSafety Chains
Safety chains must be used as a precautionary measure should the trailer become
unintentionally unhitched. They should cross under the trailer tongue and attach to the
hitch. Leave enough slack to allow full turns. Consult literature published by your trailer or
hitch manufacturer for more details.
WARNING
Make sure the safety chain is securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle
prior to departure:
Towing a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer
and the vehicle is dangerous. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, the
trailer could wander into another lane and cause a collision.
qTrailer Lights
Trailer lights must comply with all federal, state, and local regulations. Equip your trailer
as required before towing it day or night.
CAUTION
Do not connect a trailer lighting system directly to the lighting system of your
Mazda. This may damage your vehicle's electrical system and lighting systems. Have
a recreational vehicle dealer or trailer rental agency connect the system, and inspect
the brake lights and turn signals yourself before each trip.
qTrailer Brakes
If the total trailer weight exceeds 450 kg (1,000 lb), trailer brakes are required. If your
trailer has brakes, make sure they comply with all federal, state, and local regulations.
WARNING
Do not connect a hydraulic trailer-brake system to your vehicle's brake system:
Connecting a hydraulic trailer-brake system directly to the vehicle brake system is
dangerous and will result in inadequate braking and possible injury.
qTrailer Towing Tips
l Verify that your Mazda maintains a near-normal attitude when a loaded or unloaded
trailer is connected. Do not drive if it has an abnormal front-up or front-down position.
Inspect for incorrect tongue load, worn suspension parts, and trailer overloading.
l Make sure the trailer is properly loaded and the cargo is secure to prevent it from
shifting.
l Make sure the mirrors conform to all government regulations. If they do not, install
required rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.
3-52
Before Driving
Towing
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page130
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (131,1)
The three main causes of vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed, and
improper trailer loading.
Before driving
l Have your cooling and braking system checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l Before starting out, inspect the operation of all vehicle and trailer lights and all vehicleto-trailer connections. Stop and re-inspect all lights and connections after driving a short
distance.
Driving
l Your Mazda will handle differently with a trailer in tow, so practice turning, backing,
and stopping in a traffic-free area.
l Take time to get accustomed to the extra weight and length.
l Allow more room between your vehicle and the one in front because braking distance
increases with a trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of speed, allow at least one vehicle
and trailer length between your Mazda and the vehicle ahead.
l Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
l Avoid sudden braking. It may cause loss of control and result in jackknifing, especially
so on wet or slippery roads.
l Shift the shift lever to the D position when towing a trailer in hilly terrain or when
heavily loaded.
The D position will allow operating the vehicle without frequent shifting.
Lane changes and turning
Avoid quick lane changes, sudden turns, and tight turns. Slow down before turning to
avoid the need of sudden braking.
A turning trailer will make a tighter arc than the tow vehicle. Compensate with turns that
are larger than normal.
Passing
Plan well ahead to pass other vehicles, and provide plenty of room before changing lanes.
Crosswinds from passing vehicles, especially larger ones, and the effects of rough roads
will affect handling.
If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel and reduce speed immediately, but
gradually.
Steer straight ahead. If no extreme correction of steering or braking is made, the
combination of less speed and firm steering will result in stability.
Backing up
Backing a vehicle with a trailer requires practice and patience. Back slowly, and have a
helper outside at the rear of the trailer to reduce the risk of an accident.
To turn the trailer, place your hand at the bottom of the steering wheel and turn it in the
direction you want the trailer to go. Make only slight movements to prevent sharp or
prolonged turning.
Before Driving
Towing
3-53
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page131
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (132,1)
Ascending a hill
Shift into a lower gear to reduce the possibility of overloading or overheating the engine, or
both.
Descending a hill
Shift into a lower gear and use engine compression as a braking effect.
WARNING
Always use lower gears to reduce speed:
Holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently is dangerous as it could
cause the brakes to overheat and lose power, resulting in loss of control and a
serious accident. Use lower gears to help reduce speed. Pull off the road and allow
brakes to cool down whenever braking performance feels reduced.
Overheated engine
The extra weight of the trailer may strain the engine on hot days and on long or steep
upgrades.
If the temperature gauge indicates overheating, turn off the air conditioner, drive safely to
the side of the road, park off the right-of-way and wait for engine to cool. Refer to
Overheating (page 7-18).
Parking
Always make sure the tires of the trailer and the tow vehicle are blocked while parked.
Apply the parking brake firmly and put the transaxle in P.
Avoid parking on an incline, but if you must, follow these instructions:
1. Depress and hold down the brake pedal.
2. Have a helper put wheel blocks against the downhill side of all vehicle and trailer tires.
3. Then release the brake pedal slowly until the blocks bear the load.
l If the grade is downhill, turn the steering wheel so that the front of the front tires face
the curb.
l If it is uphill, face the rear of the front tires against the curb.
4. Firmly apply the parking brake.
5. Shift the transaxle into P, and stop the engine.
To restart after parking on an incline:
1. With the transaxle in P, start the engine. (Be sure to depress and hold the brake pedal.)
2. Shift into gear.
3-54
Before Driving
Towing
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page132
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (133,1)
3. Release the parking brake (also the foot brake) and pull away from the wheel blocks.
Stop; apply the parking brake and shift into P.
4. Have a helper retrieve the wheel blocks.
Fuel consumption
Trailer towing causes higher fuel consumption.
Maintenance
If you tow a trailer frequently, have your vehicle serviced as shown in Scheduled
Maintenance (page 6-4).
Before Driving
Towing
3-55
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page133
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (134,1)
Recreational Towing
An example of “recreational towing” is
towing your vehicle behind a motorhome.
The transaxle is not designed for towing
this vehicle on all 4 wheels.
When doing recreational towing refer to
“Towing Description” (page 7-20) and
“Tiedown Hooks” (page 7-21) and
carefully follow the instructions.
3-56
Before Driving
Towing
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page134
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (135,1)
4 When Driving
Information concerning safe driving and stopping.
Start/Stop Engine .................................... 4-2
Ignition Switch .................................... 4-2
Starting the Engine .............................. 4-3
Turning the Engine Off ....................... 4-8
Instrument Cluster and Display ........... 4-10
Meters and Gauges ............................ 4-10
Warning/Indicator Lights .................. 4-20
Transaxle ................................................ 4-47
Manual Transaxle Operation ............. 4-47
Automatic Transaxle Controls .......... 4-49
Switches and Controls ........................... 4-58
Lighting Control ............................... 4-58
Fog Lightsí ...................................... 4-63
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ......... 4-63
Windshield Wipers and Washer ........ 4-64
Rear Window Wiper and Washer ...... 4-68
Rear Window Defogger .................... 4-69
Horn .................................................. 4-70
Hazard Warning Flasher .................... 4-70
HomeLink Wireless Control
Systemí ............................................ 4-71
Brake ...................................................... 4-74
Brake System .................................... 4-74
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) ................. 4-78
ABS/TCS/DSC ....................................... 4-80
Antilock Brake System (ABS) .......... 4-80
Traction Control System (TCS) ........ 4-81
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) ..... 4-82
Fuel Economy Monitor ......................... 4-84
Fuel Economy Monitor ..................... 4-84
Drive Selection ....................................... 4-86
Drive Selection (Automatic
Transaxle) ......................................... 4-86
AWD ....................................................... 4-87
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Operation... 4-87
Power Steering ....................................... 4-89
Power Steering .................................. 4-89
i-ACTIVSENSE ..................................... 4-90
i-ACTIVSENSEí ............................. 4-90
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)í ... 4-92
High Beam Control System (HBC)í ... 4-93
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS)í ......................................... 4-96
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Systemí ... 4-102
Distance Recognition Support System
(DRSS)í ......................................... 4-108
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)í ... 4-111
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)í ... 4-116
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)í... 4-126
Smart Brake Support (SBS)í ......... 4-131
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)í ... 4-134
Radar Sensor (Front)í .................... 4-137
Laser Sensor (Front)í ..................... 4-140
Radar Sensors (Rear)í ................... 4-142
Cruise Control ..................................... 4-144
Cruise Controlí .............................. 4-144
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ...... 4-148
Tire Pressure Monitoring System .... 4-148
Rear View Monitor .............................. 4-152
Rear View Monitorí ...................... 4-152
4-1íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page135
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (136,1)
Ignition Switch
qPush Button Start Positions
The system operates only when the driver
is in the vehicle or within operational
range while the key is being carried.
Each time the push button start is pressed,
the ignition switches in the order of off,
ACC, and ON. Pressing the push button
start again from ON switches the ignition
off.
Indicator light
Push button start
NOTE
l The engine starts by pressing the push
button start while depressing the clutch
pedal (manual transaxle) or the brake
pedal (automatic transaxle). To switch the
ignition position, press the push button start
without depressing the pedal.
l Do not leave the ignition switched ON
while the engine is not running. Doing so
could result in the battery going dead. If the
ignition is left in ACC (For automatic
transaxle, the shift lever is in the P position,
and the ignition is in ACC), the ignition
switches off automatically after about 25
minutes.
Off
The power supply to electrical devices
turns off and the push button start
indicator light (amber) also turns off.
WARNING
Before leaving the driver's seat, always
switch the ignition off, set the parking
brake, and make sure the shift lever is
in P (automatic transaxle) or in 1st gear
or R (manual transaxle):
Leaving the driver's seat without
switching the ignition off, setting the
parking brake, and shifting the shift
lever to P (automatic transaxle) or to
1st gear or R (manual transaxle) is
dangerous. Unexpected vehicle
movement could occur which could
result in an accident.
In addition, if your intention is to
leave the vehicle for even a short
period, it is important to switch the
ignition off, as leaving it in another
position will disable some of the
vehicle's security systems and run the
battery down.
ACC (Accessory)
Some electrical accessories will operate
and the indicator light (amber)
illuminates.
NOTE
The keyless entry system does not function
while the push button start has been pressed to
ACC, and the doors will not lock/unlock even
if they have been locked manually.
4-2
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page136
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (137,1)
ON
This is the normal running position after
the engine is started. The indicator light
(amber) turns off. (The indicator light
(amber) illuminates when the ignition is
switched ON and the engine is not
running.)
Some indicator lights/warning lights
should be inspected before the engine is
started (page 4-20).
NOTE
When the push button start is pressed to ON,
the sound of the fuel pump motor operating
near the fuel tank can be heard. This does not
indicate an abnormality.
Starting the Engine
WARNING
Radio waves from the key may affect
medical devices such as pacemakers:
Before using the key near people who
use medical devices, ask the medical
device manufacturer or your
physician if radio waves from the key
will affect the device.
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
4-3
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page137
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (138,1)
NOTE
l The key must be carried because the key
carries an immobilizer chip that must
communicate with the engine controls at
short range.
l The engine can be started when the push
button start is pressed from off, ACC, or
ON.
l The push button start system functions
(function which can start the engine by only
carrying the key) can be deactivated to
prevent any possible adverse effect on a
user wearing a pacemaker or other medical
device. If the system is deactivated, you will
be unable to start the engine by carrying
the key. Consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer for details. If the push button start
system functions have been deactivated, you
can start the engine by following the
procedure indicated when the key battery
goes dead.
Refer to Engine Start Function When Key
Battery is Dead on page 4-6.
l After starting a cold engine, the engine
speed increases and a whining sound from
the engine compartment can be heard.
This is for improved exhaust gas
purification and does not indicate defect of
the parts.
l Engine-starting is controlled by the spark
ignition system.
This system meets all Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
requirements regulating the impulse
electrical field strength of radio noise.
1. Make sure you are carrying the key.
2. Occupants should fasten their seat
belts.
3. Make sure the parking brake is on.
4. Continue to press the brake pedal
firmly until the engine has completely
started.
5. (Manual transaxle)
Continue to press the clutch pedal
firmly until the engine has completely
started.
(Automatic transaxle)
Put the vehicle in park (P). If you must
restart the engine while the vehicle is
moving, shift into neutral (N).
NOTE
(Manual transaxle)
The starter will not operate if the clutch pedal
is not depressed sufficiently.
(Automatic transaxle)
The starter will not operate if the shift lever is
not in P or N and the brake pedal is not
depressed sufficiently.
6. Verify that the KEY indicator light
(green) (if equipped) in the instrument
cluster and the push button start
indicator light (green) illuminate.
Indicator light
Push button start
4-4
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page138
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (139,1)
NOTE
l If the push button start indicator light
(green) flashes, make sure that the key is
being carried (for vehicles with a type A
meter (page 4-20), messages are displayed
in the instrument cluster).
l If the push button start indicator light
(green) flashes with the key being carried,
touch the key to the push button start and
start the engine (for vehicles with a type A
meter (page 4-20), messages are displayed
in the instrument cluster). Refer to Engine
Start Function When Key Battery is Dead
on page 4-6.
CAUTION
If the KEY warning light (red)
illuminates, or the push button start
indicator light (amber) flashes, this
could indicate a problem with the
engine starting system and the
inability to start the engine or switch
the ignition to ACC or ON (for
vehicles with a type A meter (page
4-20), messages are displayed in the
instrument cluster). Have your
vehicle inspected at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
l Under the following conditions, the KEY
warning light (red) flashes after the push
button start is pressed to inform the driver
that the push button start will not switch to
ACC even if it is pressed from off (for
vehicles with a type A meter (page 4-20),
messages are displayed in the instrument
cluster).
l The key battery is dead.
l The key is out of operational range.
l The key is placed in areas where it is
difficult for the system to detect the
signal (page 3-7).
l A key from another manufacturer similar
to the key is in the operational range.
l (Forced engine starting method)
If the KEY warning light (red) illuminates,
or the push button start indicator light
(amber) flashes, this could indicate that the
engine may not start using the usual
starting method (for vehicles with a type A
meter, messages are displayed in the
instrument cluster). Have your vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer
as soon as possible. If this occurs, the
engine can be force-started. Press and hold
the push button start until the engine starts.
Other procedures necessary for starting the
engine such as having the key in the cabin,
and depressing the clutch pedal (manual
transaxle) or the brake pedal (automatic
transaxle) are required.
l When the engine is force-started, the KEY
warning light (red) (if equipped) remains
illuminated and the push button start
indicator light (amber) remains flashing.
l (Automatic transaxle)
When the shift lever is in the neutral (N)
position, the KEY indicator light (green) (if
equipped) and the push button start
indicator light (green) do not illuminate.
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
4-5
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page139
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (140,1)
7. Press the push button start after both
the KEY indicator light (green) (if
equipped) in the instrument cluster and
the push button start indicator light
(green) illuminate.
NOTE
l After starting the engine, the push button
start indicator light (amber) turn off and
the ignition is in the ON position.
l After pressing the push button start and
before the engine starts, the operation
sound of the fuel pump motor from near the
fuel tank can be heard, however, this does
not indicate a malfunction.
8. After starting the engine, let it idle for
about ten seconds.
NOTE
l Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without the use of the
accelerator.
l If the engine does not start the first time,
refer to Starting a Flooded Engine under
Emergency Starting. If the engine still does
not start, have your vehicle inspected by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer (page 7-17).
qEngine Start Function When Key
Battery is Dead
CAUTION
When starting the engine by holding
the transmitter over the push button
start due to a dead key battery or a
malfunctioning key, be careful not to
allow the following.
Otherwise the signal from the key
will not be received correctly and the
engine may not start.
Ø Metal parts of other keys or metal
objects touch the key.
Ø Spare keys or keys for other
vehicles equipped with an
immobilizer system touch or come
near the key.
Ø Devices for electronic purchases, or
security passage which touch or
come near the key.
If the engine cannot be started due to a
dead key battery, the engine can be started
using the following procedure:
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
4-6
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page140
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (141,1)
2. (Manual transaxle)
Continue to depress the clutch pedal
firmly until the engine has completely
started.
3. Verify that the push button start
indicator light (green) flashes.
NOTE
The push button start indicator light (green)
will flash even if the push button start is
pressed before depressing the brake pedal
(automatic transaxle) or the clutch pedal
(manual transaxle). If the clutch pedal is
depressed (manual transaxle) or the brake
pedal is depressed (automatic transaxle) under
this condition, the engine can be started by
resuming the procedure following this.
4. Touch the push button start using the
backside of the key (as shown) while
the push button start indicator light
(green) flashes.
Key
Indicator light
Push button start
NOTE
When touching the push button start using the
backside of the key as shown in the
illustration, touch the push button start with
the lock switch side of the key facing up.
5. Verify that the push button start
indicator light (green) turns on.
6. Press the push button start to start the
engine.
NOTE
l The engine cannot be started unless the
clutch pedal is fully depressed (manual
transaxle) or the brake pedal is fully
depressed (automatic transaxle).
l If there is a malfunction with the push
button start function, the push button start
indicator light (amber) flashes. In this case,
the engine may start, however, have the
vehicle checked at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible.
l If the push button start indicator light
(green) does not illuminate, perform the
operation from the beginning again. If it
does not illuminate, have the vehicle
checked at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l To switch the ignition position without
starting the engine, perform the following
operations after the push button start
indicator light (green) turns on.
1. Release the brake pedal (automatic
transaxle) or the clutch pedal (manual
transaxle).
2. Press the push button start to switch the
ignition position. The ignition switches
in the order of ACC, ON, and off each
time the push button start is pressed. To
switch the ignition position again,
perform the operation from the
beginning.
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
4-7
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page141
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (142,1)
qEmergency Operation for
Starting the Engine
If the KEY warning light (red)
illuminates, or the push button start
indicator light (amber) flashes, this could
indicate that the engine may not start
using the usual starting method (for
vehicles with a type A meter, messages
are displayed in the instrument cluster).
Have your vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible. If this occurs, the engine can be
force-started. Press and hold the push
button start until the engine starts. Other
procedures necessary for starting the
engine such as having the key in the
cabin, and depressing the clutch pedal
(manual transaxle) or the brake pedal
(automatic transaxle) are required.
Turning the Engine Off
WARNING
Do not stop the engine while the
vehicle is moving:
Stopping the engine while the vehicle
is moving for any reason other than
in an emergency is dangerous.
Stopping the engine while the vehicle
is moving will result in reduced
braking ability due to the loss of
power braking, which could cause an
accident and serious injury.
1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. (Manual transaxle)
Shift into neutral.
(Automatic transaxle)
Shift the shift lever to the P position.
3. Press the push button start to turn off
the engine. The ignition position is off.
CAUTION
When leaving the vehicle, make sure
the push button start is pressed to
off.
4-8
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page142
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (143,1)
NOTE
l The cooling fan in the engine compartment
could turn on for a few minutes after the
ignition is switched from ON to OFF,
whether or not the A/C is on or off, to cool
the engine compartment quickly.
l If the system detects that the remaining
battery power of the key is low when the
ignition is switched from ON to ACC or
OFF, the following is indicated.
Replace with a new battery before the key
becomes unusable.
Refer to Key Battery Replacement on page
6-39.
(Vehicle equipped with Type A*1
instrument cluster)
A message is indicated in the display of the
instrument cluster.
*1 Refer to Type A on page 4-20.
(Vehicle equipped with Type B*2
instrument cluster)
The KEY indicator light (green) flashes for
approximately 30 seconds.
*2 Refer to Type B on page 4-24.
l (Automatic transaxle)
If the engine is turned off while the shift
lever is in a position other than P, the
ignition switches to ACC.
qEmergency Engine Stop
Continuously pressing the push button
start or quickly pressing it any number of
times while the engine is running or the
vehicle is being driven will turn the
engine off immediately. The ignition
switches to ACC.
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
4-9
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page143
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (144,1)
Meters and Gauges
Type A
Type B
Speedometer ....................................................................................................... page 4-11
Odometer, Trip Meter and Trip Meter Selector .................................................. page 4-11
Tachometer ........................................................................................................ page 4-12
Fuel Gauge ........................................................................................................ page 4-13
Dashboard Illumination ..................................................................................... page 4-14
Outside Temperature Display ............................................................................. page 4-14
Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed Display (Type A instrument cluster) ............ page 4-15
Maintenance Monitor (Type A instrument cluster) ............................................ page 4-15
Trip Computer and INFO Switch ...................................................................... page 4-16
4-10
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page144
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (145,1)
qSpeedometer
The speedometer indicates the speed of
the vehicle.
qOdometer, Trip Meter and Trip
Meter Selector
The display mode can be changed
between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the selector while one of them is
displayed. The selected mode will be
displayed.
Type A
Press the selector
Press the selector
Trip meter A
Odometer
Trip meter B
Odometer
Type B
Press the selector
Press the selector
Trip meter A
Odometer
Trip meter B
Odometer
NOTE
When the ignition is switched to ACC or OFF,
the odometer or trip meters cannot be
displayed, however, pressing the selector can
inadvertently switch the trip meters or reset
them during an approximate ten-minute period
in the following cases:
l After the ignition is switched to OFF from
ON.
l After the driver's door is opened.
Odometer
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter
The trip meter can record the total
distance of two trips. One is recorded in
trip meter A, and the other is recorded in
trip meter B.
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
4-11
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page145
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (146,1)
For instance, trip meter A can record the
distance from the point of origin, and trip
meter B can record the distance from
where the fuel tank is filled.
When trip meter A is selected, pressing
the selector again within one second will
change to trip meter B mode.
When trip meter A is selected, TRIPA
will be displayed. When trip meter B is
selected, TRIP B will be displayed.
The trip meter records the total distance
the vehicle is driven until the meter is
again reset. Return it to “0.0” by holding
the selector depressed for 1 second or
more. Use this meter to measure trip
distances and to compute fuel
consumption.
NOTE
l (Vehicles with type B audio)
If the fuel economy data is reset using the
fuel economy monitor, or trip A is reset
using the trip meter when the function
which synchronizes the fuel economy
monitor and the trip meter is on, the fuel
economy data and trip A are reset
simultaneously.
Refer to Fuel Economy Monitor on page
4-84.
l Only the trip meters record tenths of
kilometers (miles).
l The trip record will be erased when:
l The power supply is interrupted (blown
fuse or the battery is disconnected).
l The vehicle is driven over 9999.9 km
(mile).
qTachometer
The tachometer shows engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute
(rpm).
CAUTION
Do not run the engine with the
tachometer needle in the RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
*1 The range varies depending on the type
of gauge.
*1 Striped zone
*1 Red zone
NOTE
When the tachometer needle enters the
STRIPED ZONE, this indicates to the driver
that the gears should be shifted before entering
the RED ZONE.
4-12
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page146
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (147,1)
qFuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows approximately how
much fuel is remaining in the tank when
the ignition is switched ON. We
recommend keeping the tank over 1/4 full.
Type A
Full
Empty
1/4 Full
Type B
Full
Empty
1/4 Full
If the low fuel warning light illuminates or
the fuel level is very low, refuel as soon as
possible.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-20.
NOTE
l After refueling, it may require some time for
the indicator to stabilize. In addition, the
indicator may deviate while driving on a
slope or curve since the fuel moves in the
tank.
l The display indicating a quarter or less
remaining fuel has more segments to show
the remaining fuel level in greater detail.
l The direction of the arrow ( ) indicates
that the fuel-filler lid is on the left side of
the vehicle.
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
4-13
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page147
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (148,1)
qDashboard Illumination
Rotate the knob to adjust the brightness of
the instrument cluster and other
illuminations in the dashboard.
NOTE
l The brightness of dashboard illuminations
can be adjusted when the headlights and
Parking lights are turned on.
l When the dashboard illumination
brightness cannot be adjusted any more, a
beep sound will be heard.
Dim
Bright
Canceling the illumination dimmer
When the headlight switch is in the
or position, the illumination of the
instrument cluster dims.
When driving on snowy or foggy roads,
or in other situations when the instrument
cluster's visibility is reduced due to glare
from surrounding brightness, cancel the
illumination dimmer and increase the
illumination intensity.
To cancel the illumination dimmer, rotate
the knob clockwise fully. You will hear a
beep sound and the illumination dimmer
will be canceled.
NOTE
l This symbol ( ) indicates the knob to
adjust the brightness of the dashboard
illumination.
l If the dashboard illumination knob is kept
at the illumination dimmer cancel position,
the instrument cluster will not dim when the
headlight switch is turned to the or
position again. Rotate the dashboard
illumination knob counterclockwise to
activate the illumination dimmer.
qOutside Temperature Display
When the ignition is switched ON, the
outside temperature is displayed.
Type A
Type B
NOTE
Under the following conditions, the outside
temperature display may differ from the actual
outside temperature depending on the
surroundings and vehicle conditions:
l Significantly cold or hot temperatures.
l Sudden changes in outside temperature.
l The vehicle is parked.
l The vehicle is driven at low speeds.
4-14
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page148
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (149,1)
(Vehicles with type A audio)
The outside temperature unit can be
switched between Celsius and Fahrenheit
using the following procedure.
1. Press the INFO button with the ignition
switched off and continue pressing the
INFO button for 5 seconds or longer
while switching the ignition ON. The
outside temperature display flashes.
2. Press the up or down part of the
INFO switch to change the outside
temperature unit.
3. Press and hold the INFO button for 3
seconds or longer while the outside
temperature display is flashing. The
outside temperature display
illuminates.
qCruise Control Set Vehicle Speed
Display (Type A instrument cluster)
The vehicle speed preset using the cruise
control is displayed.
qMaintenance Monitor (Type A
instrument cluster)
The following maintenance period
notifications can be displayed by turning
the Maintenance Monitor on.
l Scheduled Maintenance
l Tire Rotation
l Oil Change
For the setting method and indications for
the maintenance monitor, refer to the
Maintenance Monitor.
Refer to Maintenance Monitor on page
6-20.
The maintenance monitor displays the
information when the ignition is switched
ON.
NOTE
This function is inoperable while the vehicle is
being driven.
Message display
When the remaining time or the distance
approaches 0, a message is displayed each
time the ignition is switched ON.
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
4-15
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page149
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (150,1)
NOTE
l If any of the INFO switches (up , down
, or INFO button) is pressed while a
message is displayed, it will no longer be
displayed the next time the ignition is
switched ON.
l After the vehicle is serviced and the
remaining time/distance is reset, the
message for the next maintenance period
will be displayed when the remaining
distance or time to the next maintenance
period approaches 0 (displays when engine
is started).
l If there are multiple messages, they are
displayed according to their order.
l If OFF is set for Messages, messages are
not displayed.
qTrip Computer and INFO Switch
The following information can be selected
by pressing the up or down part of
the INFO switch with the ignition
switched ON.
l Approximate distance you can travel
on the available fuel
l Average fuel economy
l Current fuel economy
l Average vehicle speed
l Lane departure warning system
(LDWS) display (Type A instrument
cluster)í
l Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
display (Type A instrument cluster)í
l Distance Recognition Support System
(DRSS) display (Type A instrument
cluster)í
l Warning (Type A instrument cluster)
If you have any problems with your trip
computer, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Distance-to-empty mode
This mode displays the approximate
distance you can travel on the remaining
fuel based on the fuel economy.
The distance-to-empty will be calculated
and displayed every second.
Type A
Type B
4-16
When Driving
íSome models.
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page150
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (151,1)
NOTE
l Even though the distance-to-empty display
may indicate a sufficient amount of
remaining driving distance before refueling
is required, refuel as soon as possible if the
fuel level is very low or the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
l The display will not change unless you add
more than approximately 10 L (2.6 US gal,
2.2 Imp gal) of fuel.
l The distance-to-empty is the approximate
remaining distance the vehicle can be
driven until all the graduation marks in the
fuel gauge indicating the remaining fuel
supply disappear.
l If there is no past fuel economy information
such as after first purchasing your vehicle
or the information is deleted when the
battery cables are disconnected, the actual
distance-to empty/range may differ from the
amount indicated.
Average fuel economy mode
This mode displays the average fuel
economy by calculating the total fuel
consumption and the total traveled
distance since purchasing the vehicle, reconnecting the battery after disconnection,
or resetting the data. The average fuel
economy is calculated and displayed
every minute.
Type A
Type B
To clear the data being displayed, press
the INFO button for more than 1.5
seconds.
After pressing the INFO button, - - - L/
100 km (- - - mpg) will be displayed for
about 1 minute before the fuel economy is
recalculated and displayed.
Current fuel economy mode
This mode displays the current fuel
economy by calculating the amount of
fuel consumption and the distance
traveled.
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
4-17
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page151
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (152,1)
Current fuel economy will be calculated
and displayed every 2 seconds.
Type A
Type B
When you've slowed to about 5 km/h (3
mph), - - - L/100 km (- - - mpg) will be
displayed.
Average vehicle speed mode
This mode displays the average vehicle
speed by calculating the distance and the
time traveled since connecting the battery
or resetting the data.
Average vehicle speed will be calculated
and displayed every 10 seconds.
Type A
Type B
To clear the data being displayed, press
the INFO button for more than 1.5
seconds. After pressing the INFO button,
- - - km/h (- - - mph) will be displayed for
about 1 minute before the vehicle speed is
recalculated and displayed.
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) display (Type A instrument
cluster)í
Information regarding the Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS) is displayed.
4-18
When Driving
íSome models.
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page152
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (153,1)
Refer to Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) on page 4-96.
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
display (Type A instrument cluster)í
Information regarding the Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC) is displayed.
Refer to Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) on page 4-116.
Distance Recognition Support System
(DRSS) display (Type A instrument
cluster)í
Information regarding the Distance
Recognition Support System (DRSS) is
displayed.
Refer to Distance Recognition Support
System (DRSS) on page 4-108.
Warning (Display Indication) (Type A
instrument cluster)
A message is displayed to notify the user
of the system operation status and
malfunctions or abnormalities.
Check the indicated message.
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
4-19íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page153
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (154,1)
Warning/Indicator Lights
qType A
Warning/Indicator lights will appear in any of the highlighted areas
(Display example)
Displays as follows:
Master
warning
light
Indication in display and master warning light in instrument cluster are illuminated
at same time
This indicates a malfunction with the vehicle system. Check the message indicated in the
display and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer. For details, refer to the explanations for
the warning/indicator lights, in the warning/indicator lights section, which match the
symbol in the upper part of the display. If a message is not indicated in the display, operate
the INFO switch to display the “Warning” screen.
Multi-information display
A message such as the system operation status, a malfunction, or an abnormality is
indicated.
l (When a symbol and message are indicated in the display)
For details on the symbols indicated in the upper part of the screen, check the indication
and method for taking action list.
4-20
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page154
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (155,1)
l (When only a message is indicated in the display)
Follow the instructions indicated in the display.
If any of the content in the following illustrations is indicated, there may be a problem with
the vehicle. The method for taking action differs depending on the indication.
Check the following illustrations below.
Action: Park the vehicle immediately, view the symbol indicated in the upper part of
the screen and then refer to the “Indication and method for taking action list”
containing the symbol to see what action should be taken.
Indication on display
Action: Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have your vehicle inspected. View the
symbol indicated in the upper part of the screen and refer to the “Indication and
method for taking action list” containing the symbol to see what action should be
taken.
Indication on display
Action: Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have your vehicle inspected.
Indication on display
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
4-21
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page155
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (156,1)
Indication and method for taking action list
Signal Warning/Indicator Lights Page
Master Warning Light 4-27
Brake System Warning Light 4-27
ABS Warning Light 4-28
Electric Parking Brake Warning Light 4-29
Charging System Warning Indication/Warning Light 4-29
Engine Oil Warning Light 4-30
Check Engine Light 4-30
High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light (Red) 4-31
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) Indication 4-31
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) OFF Indication 4-32
AWDWarning Indication 4-32
Automatic Transaxle Warning Indication 4-33
Power Steering Malfunction Indication 4-33
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light 4-34
Low Fuel Warning Light 4-35
4-22
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page156
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (157,1)
Signal Warning/Indicator Lights Page
Check Fuel Cap Warning Indication 4-35
Seat Belt Warning Light 4-35
Door-Ajar Warning Indication 4-36
Liftgate-Ajar Warning Indication 4-37
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Indication 4-37
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light 4-37
KEY Warning Indication 4-39
High Beam Control System (HBC) Warning Light (Amber)/Indicator Light
(Green)
4-41
Wrench Indication 4-41
TCS/DSC Indicator Light 4-41
TCS OFF Indicator Light 4-42
Smart Brake Support/Smart City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS) OFF Indicator
Light
4-42
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) Warning Indication 4-42
Low Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light (Blue) 4-42
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
4-23
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page157
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (158,1)
Signal Warning/Indicator Lights Page
Shift Position Indication 4-43
Headlight High-Beam Indicator Light 4-43
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator Lights 4-43
Security Indicator Light 4-44
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Warning Light (Amber)/Indicator
Light (Green)
4-44
Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green) 4-44
Select Mode Indication 4-43
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF Indication 4-45
Lights-On Indicator Light 4-45
LED Headlight Warning Light 4-46
qType B
Warning/Indicator lights will appear in any of the highlighted areas
4-24
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page158
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (159,1)
Signal Warning/Indicator Lights Page
Master Warning Light 4-27
Brake System Warning Light 4-27
ABS Warning Light 4-28
Electric Parking Brake Warning Light 4-29
Brake Pedal Operation demand Indicator Light 4-29
Charging System Warning Light 4-29
Engine Oil Warning Light 4-30
Check Engine Light 4-30
High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light (Red) 4-31
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) Warning Light 4-31
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) OFF Indicator Light 4-32
AWDWarning Light 4-32
Automatic Transaxle Warning Light 4-33
Power Steering Malfunction Indicator Light 4-33
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light 4-34
Low Fuel Warning Light 4-35
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
4-25
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page159
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (160,1)
Signal Warning/Indicator Lights Page
Check Fuel Cap Warning Light 4-35
Seat Belt Warning Light 4-35
Door-Ajar Warning Light 4-36
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light 4-37
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light 4-37
KEY Warning Light (Red)/Indicator Light (Green) 4-39
High Beam Control System (HBC) Warning Light (Amber)/Indicator Light
(Green)
4-41
Wrench Indicator Light 4-41
TCS/DSC Indicator Light 4-41
TCS OFF Indicator Light 4-42
Low Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light (Blue) 4-42
Shift Position Indication 4-43
Headlight High-Beam Indicator Light 4-43
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator Lights 4-43
Security Indicator Light 4-44
Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green) 4-44
4-26
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page160
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (161,1)
Signal Warning/Indicator Lights Page
Select Mode Indication 4-43
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF Indicator Light 4-45
Lights-On Indicator Light 4-45
LED Headlight Warning Light 4-46
qMaster Warning Light
This warning light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON.
Type A
Displays when notification of the system
malfunctions is required.
Check the message indicated in the
display and consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Type B
The light illuminates continuously if any
one of the following occurs. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l There is a malfunction in the battery
management system.
l There is a malfunction in the brake
switch.
qBrake System Warning Light
This warning light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON.
This warning has the following functions:
When the light turns on
The light turns on when the electric
parking brake is applied and the light
turns off when the brake is released.
If the brake system warning light remains
turned on even though the electric parking
brake is released, the brake fluid may be
low or there could be a problem with the
brake system. Park the vehicle in a safe
place immediately and contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
4-27
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page161
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (162,1)
When the light is flashing
The light flashes if the electric parking
brake has a malfunction.
If the light remains flashing even if the
electric parking brake switch is operated,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as
soon as possible.
WARNING
Do not drive with the brake system
warning light illuminated. Contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the
brakes inspected as soon as possible:
Driving with the brake system
warning light illuminated is
dangerous. It indicates that your
brakes may not work at all or that
they could completely fail at any
time. If this light remains
illuminated, after checking that the
parking brake is fully released, have
the brakes inspected immediately.
CAUTION
In addition, the effectiveness of the
braking may diminish so you may
need to depress the brake pedal more
strongly than normal to stop the
vehicle.
qABS Warning Light
The warning light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON.
If the ABS warning light stays on while
you're driving, the ABS control unit has
detected a system malfunction. If this
occurs, your brakes will function normally
as if the vehicle had no ABS.
Should this happen, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
l When the engine is jump-started to charge
the battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABS
warning light may illuminate. If this occurs,
it is the result of the weak battery and does
not indicate an ABS malfunction.
Recharge the battery.
l The brake assist system does not operate
while the ABS warning light is illuminated.
qElectronic Brake Force
Distribution System Warning
If the electronic brake force distribution
control unit determines that some
components are operating incorrectly, the
control unit may illuminate the brake
system warning light and the ABS
warning light simultaneously. The
problem is likely to be the electronic
brake force distribution system.
4-28
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page162
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (163,1)
WARNING
Do not drive with both the ABS warning
light and brake warning light
illuminated. Have the vehicle towed to
an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have
the brakes inspected as soon as
possible:
Driving when the brake system
warning light and ABS warning light
are illuminated simultaneously is
dangerous.
When both lights are illuminated, the
rear wheels could lock more quickly
in an emergency stop than under
normal circumstances.
qElectric Parking Brake Warning
Light
This warning light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON.
The warning light illuminates when the
system has a malfunction. Have your
vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
qBrake Pedal Operation Demand
Indicator Light (Type B)
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON.
The light turns on when the electric
parking brake is released using the electric
parking brake switch without depressing
the brake pedal.
qCharging System Warning
Indication/Warning Light
This warning light illuminates when the
ignition is switched ON and turns off
when the engine is started.
If the warning light/indication illuminates
while driving, it indicates a malfunction
of the alternator or of the charging system.
Drive to the side of the road and park off
the right-of-way. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
4-29
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page163
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (164,1)
CAUTION
Do not continue driving when the
charging system warning light is
illuminated because the engine could
stop unexpectedly.
qEngine Oil Warning Indication/
Warning Light
The warning light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON.
This warning light indicates low engine
oil pressure.
CAUTION
Do not run the engine if the oil
pressure is low. Otherwise, it could
result in extensive engine damage.
If the light illuminates while driving:
1. Drive to the side of the road and park
off the right-of-way on level ground.
2. Turn off the engine and wait 5 minutes
for the oil to drain back into the oil
pan.
3. Inspect the engine oil level (page 6-28).
If it's low, add the appropriate amount
of engine oil while being careful not to
overfill.
CAUTION
Do not run the engine if the oil level
is low. Otherwise, it could result in
extensive engine damage.
4. Start the engine and check the warning
light.
If the light remains illuminated even
though the oil level is normal or after
adding oil, stop the engine immediately
and have your vehicle towed to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qCheck Engine Light
This indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is switched ON and turns off
when the engine is started.
If this light illuminates while driving, the
vehicle may have a problem. It is
important to note the driving conditions
when the light illuminated and consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The check engine light may illuminate in
the following cases:
l The fuel tank level being very low or
approaching empty.
l The engine's electrical system has a
problem.
l The emission control system has a
problem.
l (U.S.A. and Canada)
The fuel-filler cap is missing or not
tightened securely.
4-30
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page164
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (165,1)
If the check engine light remains on, do
not drive at high speeds and consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
qHigh Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light (Red)
When the ignition is switched ON, the
light illuminates momentarily and then
turns off.
The light flashes when the engine coolant
temperature is extremely high, and
illuminates when the engine coolant
temperature increases further.
Handling Procedure
Flashing light
Drive slowly to reduce engine load until
you can find a safe place to stop the
vehicle and wait for the engine to cool
down.
Illuminated light
This indicates the possibility of
overheating. Park the vehicle in a safe
place immediately and stop the engine.
Refer to Overheating (page 7-18).
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle with the high
engine coolant temperature warning
light illuminated. Otherwise, it could
result in damage to the engine.
qLane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) Indication (Type A)í
When the Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS) is turned on the LDWS
indication is displayed.
qLane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) Warning Light (Type B)í
This warning light illuminates for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON.
The indicator flashes when the system
determines that the vehicle may be
deviating from its lane.
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
4-31íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page165
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (166,1)
qLane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) OFF Indication/
Indicator Lightí
Type A
Press the LDWS switch to cancel the
LDWS. The LDWS OFF indication is
displayed.
If the indication remains displayed even
though the LDWS switch has been
operated, it indicates a problem in the
system. Have your vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Type B
This indicator light illuminates for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON.
A problem in the system may be indicated
under the following conditions. Have your
vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
l The light does not turn on when the
ignition is switched ON.
l It remains illuminated even though the
LDWS switch has been switched off.
CAUTION
Ø Always use tires for all wheels that
are of the specified size, and the
same manufacture, brand, and
tread pattern. In addition, do not
use tires with significantly
different wear patterns on the
same vehicle. If such improper
tires are used, the LDWS may not
operate normally.
Ø When an emergency spare tire is
used, the system may not operate
normally.
qAWDWarning Indication/
Warning Lightí
Type A
The warning indication will display under
the following conditions;
l There is an abnormality with the AWD
system.
l There is too much difference in tire
radius between the front and rear
wheels.
l The differential oil temperature is
abnormally high.
l There is a continuous large difference
between front and rear wheel rotation,
such as when trying to pull away from
an icy surface or when trying to
remove the vehicle from mud, sand or
similar conditions.
4-32
When Driving
íSome models.
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page166
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (167,1)
When “ 4WD system malfunction ” is
indicated
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
When “ 4WD system high-load” is
indicated
Park the vehicle in a safe place. After a
few moments, if the indication disappears,
you can resume driving. If the indication
does not disappear, contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Type B
This warning light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON.
The warning light will illuminate or flash
under the following conditions:
l Illuminates when there is an
abnormality with the AWD system.
l Illuminates if there is too much
difference in tire radius between the
front and rear wheels.
l Flashes when the differential oil
temperature is abnormally high.
l Flashes when there is a continuous
large difference between front and rear
wheel rotation, such as when trying to
pull away from an icy surface or when
trying to remove the vehicle from mud,
sand or similar conditions.
When illuminated
If the AWD warning light illuminates,
contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
When flashing
Park the vehicle in a safe place. After a
few moments, if the warning light stops
flashing, you can resume driving. If the
light does not stop flashing, contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qAutomatic Transaxle Warning
Indication/Warning Light
Type B
This warning light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON.
Type A/Type B
The light/indication illuminates when the
transaxle has a problem.
CAUTION
If the automatic transaxle warning
light/warning indication illuminates,
the transaxle has an electrical
problem. Continuing to drive your
Mazda in this condition could cause
damage to your transaxle. Consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon
as possible.
qPower Steering Malfunction
Warning Indication/Indicator Light
Type B
This indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is switched ON, and turns off
when the engine is started.
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
4-33
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page167
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (168,1)
Type A/Type B
The power steering malfunction indicator
light/warning indication illuminates or
flashes if there is a malfunction with the
power steering while the engine is
running.
If the indicator light/warning indication
illuminates or flashes, park the vehicle in
a safe place immediately and stop the
engine.
If the indicator light/warning indication
does not turn off even if the engine is
restarted afterwards, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
l If the indicator light/warning indication
illuminates or flashes, the power steering
will not operate normally. If this happens,
the steering wheel can still be operated,
however, the operation may feel heavy
compared to normal, and the steering
wheel could vibrate when turning.
l Repeatedly jerking the steering wheel left
and right while the vehicle is stopped or
moving extremely slowly will cause the
power steering system to go into protective
mode which will make the steering feel
heavy, but this does not indicate a problem.
If this occurs, park the vehicle safely and
wait several minutes for the system to
return to normal.
qAir Bag/Front Seat Belt
Pretensioner System Warning Light
If the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner
system is working properly, the warning
light illuminates when the ignition is
switched ON or after the engine is
cranked. The warning light turns off after
a specified period of time.
A system malfunction is indicated if the
warning light constantly flashes,
constantly illuminates or does not
illuminate at all when the ignition is
switched ON. If any of these occur,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as
soon as possible. The system may not
operate in an accident.
WARNING
Never tamper with the air bag/
pretensioner systems and always have
an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform
all servicing and repairs:
Self-servicing or tampering with the
systems is dangerous. An air bag/
pretensioner could accidentally
activate or become disabled causing
serious injury or death.
4-34
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page168
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (169,1)
qLow Fuel Warning Light
This warning light signals that the fuel
tank will soon be empty.
Refuel as soon as possible.
qCheck Fuel Cap Warning
Indication/Indicator Lightí
Type B
This warning light illuminates for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON.
Type A/Type B
If the check fuel cap warning light
illuminates/indication while driving, the
fuel-filler cap may not be installed
properly. Stop the engine and reinstall the
fuel-filler cap.
Refer to Fuel-Filler Cap on page 3-26.
qSeat Belt Warning Light
Driver's seat
Front passenger's seat
Climate control Fully Automatic
Type
Manual Type
Except Mexico
The seat belt warning light turns on if the
driver or front passenger's seat is occupied
and the seat belt is not fastened with the
ignition switched ON.
If the driver or front passenger's seat belt
is unfastened (only when the front
passenger's seat is occupied) and the
vehicle is driven at a speed faster than
about 20 km/h (12 mph), the warning
light flashes. After a short time, the
warning light stops flashing, but remains
illuminated.
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
4-35íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page169
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (170,1)
NOTE
l The warning light flashes for about 6
seconds if the driver's seat belt is not
fastened when the ignition is switched ON.
l To allow the front passenger occupant
classification sensor to function properly,
do not place and sit on an additional seat
cushion on the front passenger's seat. The
sensor may not function properly because
the additional seat cushion could cause
sensor interference.
l If a small child is seated on the front
passenger's seat, the warning light may not
operate.
Mexico
The seat belt warning light turns on if the
driver or front passenger's seat is occupied
and the seat belt is not fastened with the
ignition switched ON.
If the driver or front passenger's seat belt
is unfastened (only when the front
passenger's seat is occupied) and the
vehicle is driven at a speed faster than
about 20 km/h (12 mph), the warning
light flashes. After a short time, the
warning light stops flashing, but remains
illuminated. If a seat belt remains
unfastened, the warning light flashes
again for a given period of time.
NOTE
l Placing heavy items on the front
passenger's seat may cause the front
passenger's seat belt warning function to
operate depending on the weight of the
item.
l To allow the front passenger seat weight
sensor to function properly, do not place
and sit on an additional seat cushion on the
front passenger's seat. The sensor may not
function properly because the additional
seat cushion could cause sensor
interference.
l If a small child is seated on the front
passenger's seat, the warning light may not
operate.
qDoor-Ajar Warning Indication/
Warning Light
Type A
Type B
Type A
This warning indication illuminates when
any door is not securely closed.
Close the door securely before driving the
vehicle.
4-36
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page170
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (171,1)
Type B
This warning light illuminates when any
door or the liftgate is not securely closed.
Close the door or the liftgate securely
before driving the vehicle.
qLiftgate-Ajar Warning Indication
(Type A instrument cluster)í
This warning indication is illuminated
when the liftgate is not securely closed.
Close the liftgate securely before driving
the vehicle.
qLow Washer Fluid Level Warning
Indication/Warning Lightí
Type A/Type B
This warning light/warning indication
indicates that little washer fluid remains.
Add fluid (page 6-31).
qTire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON.
The warning light illuminates and a beep
is heard when tire pressure is too low in
one or more tires, and flashes when there
is a system malfunction.
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
4-37íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page171
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (172,1)
WARNING
If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light illuminates or flashes, or
the tire pressure warning beep sound is
heard, decrease vehicle speed
immediately and avoid sudden
maneuvering and braking:
If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light illuminates or flashes,
or the tire pressure warning beep
sound is heard, it is dangerous to
drive the vehicle at high speeds, or
perform sudden maneuvering or
braking. Vehicle drivability could
worsen and result in an accident.
To determine if you have a slow leak
or a flat, pull over to a safe position
where you can check the visual
condition of the tire and determine if
you have enough air to proceed to a
place where air may be added and
the system monitored again by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer or a tire
repair station.
Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:
Ignoring the TPMS warning light is
dangerous, even if you know why it is
illuminated. Have the problem taken
care of as soon as possible before it
develops into a more serious
situation that could lead to tire
failure and a dangerous accident.
Warning light illuminates/Warning
beep sounds
When the warning light illuminates, and
the warning beep sound is heard (about 3
seconds), tire pressure is too low in one or
more tires.
Adjust the tire pressure to the correct tire
pressure and initialize TPMS. Refer to the
specification charts (page 9-8).
NOTE
l Perform tire pressure adjustment when the
tires are cold. Tire pressure will vary
according to the tire temperature, therefore
let the vehicle stand for 1 hour or only drive
it 1.6 km (1 mile) or less before adjusting
the tire pressures. When pressure is
adjusted on hot tires to the cold inflation
pressure, the TPMS warning light/beep may
turn on after the tires cool and pressure
drops below specification.
Also, an illuminated TPMS warning light,
resulting from the tire air pressure dropping
due to cold ambient temperature will
remain illuminated even if the ambient
temperature rises. In this case, it will also
be necessary to adjust the tire air pressures.
If the TPMS warning light illuminates due
to a drop in tire air pressure, make sure to
check and adjust the tire air pressures.
l Tires lose air naturally over time and the
TPMS cannot tell if the tires are getting too
soft over time or you have a flat. However,
when you find one low tire in a set of fourthat is an indication of trouble; you should
have someone drive the vehicle slowly
forward so you can inspect any low tire for
cuts and any metal objects sticking through
tread or sidewall. Put a few drops of water
in the valve stem to see if it bubbles
indicating a bad valve. Leaks need to be
addressed by more than simply reinflating
the tire as leaks are dangerous - take it to
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If the warning light illuminates again even
after the tire pressures are adjusted and the
TPMS initialization is performed, there
may be a tire puncture. Replace the
punctured tire with the temporary spare
tire (page 7-7).
4-38
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page172
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (173,1)
Warning light flashes
If the tire pressure monitoring system has
a malfunction, the tire pressure warning
light flashes for about 1 minute when the
ignition is switched ON and then
continues illuminating. Have your vehicle
checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer
as soon as possible.
qKEY Warning Indication/
Warning Light (Red)/KEY
Indicator Light (Green)
Type A
“Keyless System malfunction” is
displayed
This message is displayed if the advanced
keyless entry & push button start system
has a problem.
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
CAUTION
If the above message is indicated, or
the push button start indicator light
(amber) flashes, the engine may not
start. If the engine cannot be started,
try starting it using the emergency
operation for starting the engine, and
have the vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
Refer to Emergency Operation for
Starting the Engine on page 4-8.
“Ignition is on” is displayed
This message is displayed when the
driver's door is opened without switching
the ignition off.
“Key not detected” is displayed
This message is displayed when any of
the following operations is performed
with the key out of the operational range
or placed in areas inside the cabin where it
is difficult for the key to be detected.
l The push button start is pressed with
the ignition switched off
l The ignition is switched on
l The driver's door is opened or all doors
are closed without switching the
ignition off
“Key battery is weak Hold key close to
start button” is displayed
This message is displayed when any of
the following operations is performed
with the key out of the operational range
or placed in areas inside the cabin where it
is difficult for the key to be detected.
l The push button start is pressed with
the ignition switched off
l Brake pedal (Automatic transaxle
vehicle)/Clutch pedal (Manual
transaxle vehicle) is depressed with the
ignition switched off
“Key battery is low Replace soon” is
displayed
This message is displayed when the
remaining battery power of the key is low
and the ignition is switched from on to
off.
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
4-39
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page173
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (174,1)
NOTE
Because the key utilizes low-intensity radio
waves, the Key Removed From Vehicle
Warning may activate if the key is carried
together with a metal object or it is placed in a
poor signal reception area.
Type B
This indicator has two colors.
KEY Warning Light (Red)
When illuminated
If any malfunction occurs in the keyless
entry system, it illuminates continuously.
CAUTION
If the key warning indicator light
illuminates or the push button start
indicator light (amber) flashes, the
engine may not start. If the engine
cannot be started, try starting it
using the emergency operation for
starting the engine, and have the
vehicle inspected at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to Emergency Operation for
Starting the Engine on page 4-8.
When flashing
l Under the following conditions, the
KEY warning light (red) flashes to
notify the driver that the ignition
cannot be switched from off.
l The key battery is dead.
l The key is not within operational
range.
l The key is placed in areas where it is
difficult for the system to detect the
signal (page 3-7).
l A key from another manufacturer
similar to the key is in the
operational range.
l Under the following conditions, the
KEY warning light (red) will flash
continuously when the ignition has not
been switched off to notify the driver
that the key has been removed from the
vehicle. The KEY warning light (red)
will stop flashing when the key is back
inside the vehicle:
The ignition has not been switched off
and all the doors and the liftgate are
closed after removing the key from the
vehicle.
NOTE
Because the key utilizes low-intensity radio
waves, the Key Removed From Vehicle
Warning may activate if the key is carried
together with a metal object or it is placed in a
poor signal reception area.
KEY Indicator Light (Green)
When illuminated
When the brake pedal is depressed with
an automatic transaxle or the clutch pedal
is depressed with a manual transaxle, the
system confirms that the correct key is
inside the vehicle, the KEY indicator light
(green) illuminates, and the engine can be
started (page 4-3).
When flashing
When the ignition is switched from ON to
off, the KEY indicator light (green)
flashes for approximately 30 seconds
indicating that the remaining battery
power is low. Replace with a new battery
before the key becomes unusable.
Refer to Key Battery Replacement on
page 6-39.
4-40
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page174
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (175,1)
qHBC Warning Light (Amber)/
HBC Indicator Light (Green)í
HBC warning light (Amber)
When illuminated
When the ignition is switched ON, this
warning light illuminates and then turns
off after a few seconds. The warning light
illuminates if the area of the windshield in
front of the forward sensing camera (FSC)
is fogged or obstructed.
This light turns on if there is a
malfunction in the high beam control
system (HBC). Have your vehicle
inspected by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
HBC indicator light (Green)
This indicator light illuminates when the
system is operating and turns off when the
system operation is canceled.
qWrench Indication/Indicator Light
Type A
Perform maintenance in accordance with
the message.
Type B
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON.
The wrench indicator light illuminates
when the engine oil replacement period is
reached.
If the light is illuminated, replace the
engine oil.
Refer to Engine Oil on page 6-27.
qTCS/DSC Indicator Light
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON. If the TCS or DSC is operating, the
indicator light flashes.
If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC or the
brake assist system may have a
malfunction and they may not operate
correctly. Take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
l In addition to the indicator light flashing, a
slight lugging sound will come from the
engine. This indicates that the TCS/DSC is
operating properly.
l On slippery surfaces, such as fresh snow, it
will be impossible to achieve high rpm
when the TCS is on.
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
4-41íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page175
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (176,1)
qTCS OFF Indicator Light
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON.
It also illuminates when the TCS OFF
switch is pressed and TCS is switched off.
Refer to TCS OFF Switch on page 4-82.
If the light remains illuminated and the
TCS is not switched off, take your vehicle
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer. The DSC
may have a malfunction.
qSmart Brake Support/Smart City
Brake Support (SBS/SCBS) OFF
Indicator Light (Type A)í
This indicator light illuminates for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON.
When the Smart Brake Support/Smart
City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS) system
is turned off, the Smart Brake Support/
Smart City Brake Support (SBS/SCBS)
OFF indicator light turns on.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
qSmart City Brake Support (SCBS)
Warning Indication (Type A)í
The indication is displayed in the multi
information display during SCBS brake
operation or brake assist (SCBS brake
assist) operation.
qLow Engine Coolant Temperature
Indicator Light (Blue)
The light illuminates continuously when
the engine coolant temperature is low and
turns off after the engine is warm.
If the low engine coolant temperature
indicator light remains illuminated after
the engine has been sufficiently warmed
up, the temperature sensor could have a
malfunction. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
4-42
When Driving
íSome models.
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page176
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (177,1)
qShift Position Indication
The selector position is indicated when
the ignition is switched ON.
Gear position indicator
In manual shift mode, the “M” of the shift
position indicator illuminates and the
numeral for the selected gear displays.
qSelect Mode Indication
When the sport mode is selected, the
select mode Indication turns on in the
instrument cluster.
NOTE
If the mode cannot be switched to drive mode,
the select mode indication flashes to notify the
driver.
qHeadlight High-Beam Indicator
Light
This light indicates one of two things:
l The high-beam headlights are on.
l The turn signal lever is in the flash-topass position.
qTurn Signal/Hazard Warning
Indicator Lights
When operating the turn signal lights, the
left or right turn signal indicator light
flashes to indicate which turn signal light
is operating (page 4-63).
When operating the hazard warning
lights, both turn signal indicator lights
flash (page 4-70).
If an indicator light flashes abnormally,
one of the turn signal bulbs may be
burned out. Consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
4-43
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page177
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (178,1)
qSecurity Indicator Light
This indicator light starts flashing every
two seconds when the ignition is switched
from ON to OFF and the immobilizer
system is armed.
The light stops flashing when the ignition
is switched ON with the correct key.
At this time, the immobilizer system is
disarmed and the light illuminates for
about three seconds and then turns off.
If the engine does not start with the
correct key, and the security indicator
light keeps illuminating or flashing, the
system may have a malfunction. Consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qMazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) Warning Light (Amber)/
Indicator Light (Green) (Type A)í
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
Warning Light (Amber)
Illuminated
When the ignition is switched ON, the
warning light is illuminated and then turns
off after a few seconds.
The warning light turns on if there is a
malfunction in the system while the
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
system is on. Have your vehicle inspected
at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
Indicator Light (Green)
Illuminated
Illuminated when the speed for the Mazda
Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is
set.
qCruise Main Indicator Light
(Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator
Light (Green)
The indicator light has two colors.
4-44
When Driving
íSome models.
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page178
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (179,1)
Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)
The indicator light illuminates amber
when the cruise control system is
activated.
Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)
The indicator light illuminates green when
a cruising speed has been set.
qBlind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
OFF Indication/Indicator Lightí
Type A
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF
indication illuminates when the Blind
Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch is pressed
to turn off the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA) systems.
If the indication remains displayed even
though the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
switch has been operated, it indicates a
problem in the system. Have your vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Type B
This indicator light illuminates for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF
indicator light illuminates when the Blind
Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch is pressed
to turn off the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA) systems.
A problem in the system may be indicated
under the following conditions. Have your
vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
l The light does not turn on when the
ignition is switched ON.
l It remains illuminated even though the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch
has been switched off.
l It turns on while driving the vehicle.
NOTE
If the vehicle is driven on a road with less
traffic and few vehicles that the radar sensors
can detect, the system may pause (The Blind
Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indication/
indicator light in the instrument cluster
illuminates). However, it does not indicate a
malfunction.
qLights-On Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates when the
exterior lights and dashboard illumination
are on.
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
4-45íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page179
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (180,1)
The light continues to flash if the lighting
system has a malfunction. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qLED Headlight Warning Lightí
This warning light illuminates for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON.
This light illuminates if there is a
malfunction in the LED headlight. Have
your vehicle inspected by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
4-46
When Driving
íSome models.
Instrument Cluster and Display
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page180
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (181,1)
Manual Transaxle Operation
qManual Transaxle Shift Pattern
Neutral position
The shift pattern of the transaxle is
conventional, as shown.
Depress the clutch pedal all the way down
while shifting; then release it slowly.
Your vehicle is equipped with a device to
prevent shifting to R (reverse) by mistake.
Push the shift lever downward and shift to
R.
WARNING
Do not use sudden engine braking on
slippery road surfaces or at high
speeds:
Shifting down while driving on wet,
snowy, or frozen roads, or while
driving at high speeds causes sudden
engine braking, which is dangerous.
The sudden change in tire speed
could cause the tires to skid. This
could lead to loss of vehicle control
and an accident.
Be sure to leave the shift lever in 1 or R
position and set the parking brake
when leaving the vehicle unattended:
Otherwise the vehicle could move
and cause an accident.
CAUTION
Ø Keep your foot off the clutch pedal
except when shifting gears. Also,
do not use the clutch to hold the
vehicle on an upgrade. Riding the
clutch will cause needless clutch
wear and damage.
Ø Do not apply any excessive lateral
force to the shift lever when
changing from 5th to 4th gear.
This could lead to the accidental
selection of 2nd gear, which can
result in damage to the transaxle.
Ø Make sure the vehicle comes to a
complete stop before shifting to R.
Shifting to R while the vehicle is
still moving may damage the
transaxle.
NOTE
If shifting to R is difficult, shift back into
neutral, release the clutch pedal, and try
again.
When Driving
Transaxle
4-47
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page181
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (182,1)
qRecommendations for Shifting
Upshifting
For normal acceleration, we recommend
these shift points.
Gear Vehicle speed
1 to 2 24 km/h (15 mph)
2 to 3 42 km/h (26 mph)
3 to 4 60 km/h (37 mph)
4 to 5 75 km/h (46 mph)
5 to 6 79 km/h (49 mph)
For cruising
Gear Vehicle speed
1 to 2 13 km/h (8 mph)
2 to 3 29 km/h (18 mph)
3 to 4 49 km/h (30 mph)
4 to 5 63 km/h (39 mph)
5 to 6 70 km/h (43 mph)
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy
traffic or on a steep upgrade, downshift
before the engine starts to overwork. This
reduces the chance of stalling and gives
better acceleration when you need more
speed.
On a steep downgrade, downshifting
helps maintain safe speed and prolongs
brake life.
4-48
When Driving
Transaxle
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page182
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (183,1)
Automatic Transaxle Controls
Indicates the selector lever can be shifted freely into any position.
Indicates that you must hold in the lock-release button to shift.
Indicates that you must depress the brake pedal and hold in the lock-release
button to shift (The ignition must be switched ON).
Various Lockouts:
Lock-release button
NOTE
The Sport AT has an option that is not included in the traditional automatic transaxle giving the
driver the option of selecting each gear instead of leaving it to the transaxle to shift gears. Even if
you intend to use the automatic transaxle functions as a traditional automatic, you should also be
aware that you can inadvertently shift into manual shift mode and an inappropriate gear may be
retained as the vehicle speed increases. If you notice the engine speed going higher or hear the
engine racing, confirm you have not accidentally slipped into manual shift mode (page 4-52).
When Driving
Transaxle
4-49
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page183
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (184,1)
qWarning Light
A system malfunction or operation
conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-20.
qTransaxle Ranges
l The shift position indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminates.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on
page 4-20.
l The shift lever must be in P or N to
operate the starter.
P (Park)
P locks the transaxle and prevents the
front wheels from rotating.
WARNING
Always set the shift lever to P and set
the parking brake:
Only setting the shift lever to the P
position without using the parking
brake to hold the vehicle is
dangerous. If P fails to hold, the
vehicle could move and cause an
accident.
CAUTION
Ø Shifting into P, N or R while the
vehicle is moving can damage
your transaxle.
Ø Shifting into a driving gear or
reverse when the engine is running
faster than idle can damage the
transaxle.
R (Reverse)
In position R, the vehicle moves only
backward. You must be at a complete stop
before shifting to or from R, except under
rare circumstances as explained in
Rocking the Vehicle (page 3-43).
N (Neutral)
In N, the wheels and transaxle are not
locked. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or brakes are on.
WARNING
If the engine is running faster than idle,
do not shift from N or P into a driving
gear:
It's dangerous to shift from N or P
into a driving gear when the engine
is running faster than idle. If this is
done, the vehicle could move
suddenly, causing an accident or
serious injury.
Do not shift into N when driving the
vehicle:
Shifting into N while driving is
dangerous. Engine braking cannot be
applied when decelerating which
could lead to an accident or serious
injury.
CAUTION
Do not shift into N when driving the
vehicle. Doing so can cause transaxle
damage.
NOTE
Apply the parking brake or depress the brake
pedal before moving the shift lever from N to
prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
4-50
When Driving
Transaxle
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page184
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (185,1)
D (Drive)
D is the normal driving position. From a
stop, the transaxle will automatically shift
through a 6-gear sequence.
M (Manual)
M is the manual shift mode position.
Gears can be shifted up or down by
operating the shift lever.
Refer to Manual Shift Mode on page
4-52.
qActive Adaptive Shift (AAS)
Active Adaptive Shift (AAS)
automatically controls the transaxle shift
points to best suit the road conditions and
driver input. This improves driving feel.
The transaxle may switch to AAS mode
when driving up and down slopes,
cornering, driving at high elevations, or
depressing the accelerator pedal quickly
while the shift lever is in the D position.
Depending on the road and driving
conditions/vehicle operations, gear
shifting could be delayed or not occur,
however, this does not indicate a problem
because the AAS mode will maintain the
optimum gear position.
qShift-Lock System
The shift-lock system prevents shifting
out of P unless the brake pedal is
depressed.
To shift from P:
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine.
3. Press and hold the lock-release button.
4. Move the selector lever.
NOTE
l When the ignition is switched to ACC or the
ignition is switched off, the selector lever
cannot be shifted from P.
l The ignition cannot be switched to OFF if
the selector lever is not in P.
qShift-Lock Override
If the selector lever will not move from P
using the proper shift procedure, continue
to hold down the pedal.
1. Remove the shift-lock override cover
using a cloth-wrapped flat head
screwdriver.
2. Insert a screwdriver and push it down.
Cover
3. Press and hold the lock-release button.
4. Move the selector lever.
5. Take the vehicle to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer to have the system
checked.
When Driving
Transaxle
4-51
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page185
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (186,1)
qManual Shift Mode
This mode gives you the feel of driving a
manual transaxle vehicle by operating the
selector lever and allows you to control
engine rpm and torque to the drive wheels
much like a manual transaxle when more
control is desired.
To change to manual shift mode, shift the
lever from D to M.
NOTE
Changing to manual shift mode while driving
will not damage the transaxle.
To return to automatic shift mode, shift
the lever from M to D.
NOTE
l If you change to manual shift mode when
the vehicle is stopped, the gear will shift to
M1.
l If you change to manual shift mode without
depressing the accelerator pedal when
driving in D range, 5th gear/6th gear, the
gear will shift to M4/M5.
Indicators
Manual shift mode indicator
In manual shift mode, the “M” of the shift
position indicator in the instrument panel
illuminates.
Gear position indicator
The numeral for the selected gear
illuminates.
Manual shift mode indicator
Gear position indicator
NOTE
l If the gears cannot be shifted down when
driving at higher speeds, the gear position
indicator will flash twice to signal that the
gears cannot be shifted down (to protect the
transaxle).
l If the automatic transaxle fluid (ATF)
temperature becomes too high, there is the
possibility that the transaxle will switch to
automatic shift mode, canceling manual
shift mode and turning off the gear position
indicator illumination. This is a normal
function to protect the AT. After the ATF
temperature has decreased, the gear
position indicator illumination turns back
on and driving in manual shift mode is
restored.
4-52
When Driving
Transaxle
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page186
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (187,1)
Shifting
Manually Shifting up
(M1 → M2 → M3 → M4 → M5 → M6)
To shift up to a higher gear, move the
selector lever back ( ) once.
NOTE
l When driving slowly, the gears may not
shift up.
l In manual shift mode, do not run the engine
with the tachometer needle in the RED
ZONE. When the engine rpm is high, a gear
may shift up automatically to protect the
engine.
l When depressing the accelerator fully, the
transaxle will shift to a lower gear,
depending on vehicle speed (Except M2 →
M1).
Manually Shifting down
(M6 → M5 → M4 → M3 → M2 → M1)
To shift down to a lower gear, move the
selector lever forward ( ) once.
WARNING
Do not use engine braking on slippery
road surfaces or at high speeds:
Shifting down while driving on wet,
snowy, or frozen roads, or while
driving at high speeds causes sudden
engine braking, which is dangerous.
The sudden change in tire speed
could cause the tires to skid. This
could lead to loss of vehicle control
and an accident.
NOTE
l When driving at high speeds, the gear may
not shift down.
l During deceleration, the gear may
automatically shift down depending on
vehicle speed.
l When depressing the accelerator fully, the
transaxle will shift to a lower gear,
depending on vehicle speed (Except M2 →
M1).
When Driving
Transaxle
4-53
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page187
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (188,1)
Second gear fixed mode
When the selector lever is moved back
( ) while the vehicle speed is about 10
km/h (6 mph) or less, the transaxle is set
in the second gear fixed mode. The gear is
fixed in second while in this mode for
easier acceleration from a stop and driving
on slippery roads such as snow-covered
roads.
If the selector lever is moved back ( ) or
forward ( ) while in the second gear
fixed mode, the mode will be canceled.
4-54
When Driving
Transaxle
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page188
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (189,1)
Shift gear (shifting) speed limit
For each gear position while in the manual mode, the speed limit is set as follows: When
the selector lever is operated within the range of the speed limit, the gear is shifted.
Shift up
The gear does not shift up while the vehicle speed is lower than the speed limit.
Shift down
The gear does not shift down while the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit.
If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit and the gear does not shift down, the gear
position indication flashes 2 times to notify the driver that the gear cannot be shifted.
Kickdown
When the accelerator pedal is depressed fully while driving, the gear shifts down.
NOTE
The gear also shifts down using kickdown while in the second gear fixed mode.
Auto-shift down
The gear shifts down automatically depending on the vehicle speed during deceleration.
NOTE
If the vehicle comes to a stop while in the second gear fixed mode, the gear remains in second.
When Driving
Transaxle
4-55
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page189
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (190,1)
Recommendations for shifting (U.S.A. and Canada)
Upshifting
For normal acceleration and cruising, we recommend these shift points.
Gear Vehicle speed*1
M1 to M2 24 km/h (15 mph)
M2 to M3 40 km/h (25 mph)
M3 to M4 65 km/h (40 mph)
M4 to M5 73 km/h (45 mph)
M5 to M6 81 km/h (50 mph)
*1: Always observe local speed limit regulations.
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy traffic or on a steep upgrade, downshift before the
engine starts to overwork. This gives better acceleration when you need more speed.
On a steep downgrade, downshifting helps maintain safe speed and prolongs brake life.
qDriving Tips
WARNING
Do not allow the vehicle to move in
reverse on an up-slope while the
selector lever is in a forward gear
position, or move forward on a downslope while the selector lever is in the
reverse position:
Otherwise, the engine will stop,
causing the loss of the power brake
and power steering functions, and
make it difficult to control the vehicle
which could result in an accident.
Passing
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing steep grades, depress
the accelerator fully. The transaxle will
shift to a lower gear, depending on vehicle
speed.
NOTE
The accelerator pedal feels heavy as it is being
depressed, but then lightens as it is fully
depressed. This change in pedal force aids the
engine control system in determining how
much the accelerator pedal has been
depressed for performing kickdown, and
functions to control whether or not kickdown
should be performed.
Climbing steep grades from a stop
To climb a steep grade from a stopped
position:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift to D or M1, depending on the
load weight and grade steepness.
3. Release the brake pedal while
gradually accelerating.
4-56
When Driving
Transaxle
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page190
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (191,1)
Descending steep grades
When descending a steep grade, shift to
lower gears, depending on load weight
and grade steepness. Descend slowly,
using the brakes only occasionally to
prevent them from overheating.
When Driving
Transaxle
4-57
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page191
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (192,1)
Lighting Control
qHeadlights
l Turn the headlight switch to turn the headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard
illumination on or off.
l For vehicles with the type A instrument cluster, check the vehicle condition or have the
vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer according to the indication.
l A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-20.
NOTE
l If the light switch is left on, the lights will automatically switch off (if equipped) approximately 30
seconds after switching the ignition off.
The time setting can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
l To prevent discharging the battery, do not leave the lights on while the engine is off unless safety
requires them.
Without auto-light control
Switch Position
Ignition Position ON
ACC or
OFF
ON
ACC or
OFF
ON
ACC or
OFF
Headlights Off Off Off Off On Off
Daytime running lights On*1 Off On*1 Off Off Off
Taillights
Parking lights
License lights
Side-marker lights
Dashboard illumination
Off Off On On On Off/On*2
*1 It turns on while driving the vehicle.
*2 While the lights are turned on, they will remain on even if the ignition is switched to a position other than ON.
If the driver's door is opened or 30 s have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off.
4-58
When Driving
Switches and Controls
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page192
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (193,1)
With auto-light control
Switch Position
Ignition Position ON
ACC or
OFF
ON
ACC or
OFF
ON
ACC or
OFF
ON
ACC or
OFF
Headlights Off Off Auto*1 Off Off Off On Off
Daytime running lights On*2 Off Auto*1 Off On*2 Off Off Off
Taillights
Parking lights
License lights
Side-marker lights
Dashboard illumination
Off Off Auto*1 Off/On*3 On On On Off/On*3
*1 The headlight and other light settings switch automatically depending on the surrounding brightness detected
by the sensor.
*2 It turns on while driving the vehicle.
*3 While the lights are turned on, they will remain on even if the ignition is switched to a position other than ON.
If the driver's door is opened or 30 s have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off.
When Driving
Switches and Controls
4-59
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page193
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (194,1)
Auto-light control
When the headlight switch is in the position and the ignition is switched ON, the
light sensor senses the surrounding lightness or darkness and automatically turns the
headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard illumination on or off (see chart above).
CAUTION
Ø Do not shade the light sensor by adhering a sticker or a label on the windshield.
Otherwise the light sensor will not operate correctly.
Ø The light sensor also works as a rain sensor for the auto-wiper control. Keep
hands and scrapers clear of the windshield when the wiper lever is in the
position and the ignition is switched ON as fingers could be pinched or the wipers
and wiper blades damaged when the wipers activate automatically. If you are
going to clean the windshield, be sure the wipers are turned off completely ― this
is particularly important when clearing ice and snow ― when it is particularly
tempting to leave the engine running.
NOTE
l The headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard illumination may not turn off immediately
even if the surrounding area becomes well-lit because the light sensor determines that it is
nighttime if the surrounding area is continuously dark for several minutes such as inside long
tunnels, traffic jams inside tunnels, or in indoor parking lots.
In this case, the lights turn off if the light switch is turned to the position.
l The dashboard illumination can be adjusted by rotating the knob in the instrument cluster. Also,
the day/night mode can be changed by rotating the knob until a beep sound is heard. To adjust the
brightness of the dashboard illumination:
Refer to Dashboard Illumination on page 4-14.
l The sensitivity of the AUTO lights may be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
4-60
When Driving
Switches and Controls
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page194
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (195,1)
qHeadlight High-Low Beam
Press the lever forward to turn on the high
beams.
Pull the lever back to its original position
for the low beams.
The headlight high-beam indicator light in
the instrument cluster illuminates while
the high beams are turned on.
High beam
Low beam
qFlashing the Headlights
Can be used when the ignition is switched
ON.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever fully
towards you (the headlight switch does
not need to be on). The headlight highbeam indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates simultaneously. The
lever will return to the normal position
when released.
OFF
Flashing
qComing Home Light System
The coming home light system turns on
the headlights (low beams) when the lever
is operated.
To turn on the system
When the lever is pulled with the ignition
switched to ACC or OFF, the low beam
headlights turn on.
The headlights turn off after a certain
period of time has elapsed after the doors
are closed.
NOTE
l The time until the headlights turn off after
all of the doors are closed can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
l If no operations are done for 3 minutes
after the lever is pulled, the headlights turn
off.
l The headlights turn off if the lever is pulled
again while the headlights are illuminated.
When Driving
Switches and Controls
4-61
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page195
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (196,1)
qLeaving Home Light System
The leaving home light system turns on
the lights when the key unlock button is
pressed while away from the vehicle.
To turn on the system
When the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are as indicated below,
the lights will illuminate when the
transmitter unlock button is pressed and
the vehicle receives the transmitter signal.
The lights turn off after a certain period of
time has elapsed (30 seconds).
l Ignition switch: off
l Headlight switch: or
The following lights turn on when the
leaving home light system is operated.
Low beams, Parking lights, Taillights,
License lights
Unlock button
Lock button
NOTE
l Operation of the leaving home light system
can be turned on or off.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
l When the transmitter lock button is pressed
and the vehicle receives the transmitter
signal, the lights turn off.
l When the headlight switch is in a position
other than or , the lights turn off.
qHeadlight Levelingí
The number of passengers and weight of
cargo in the luggage compartment change
the angle of the headlights.
The angle of the headlights will be
automatically adjusted when turning on
the headlights.
A system malfunction or operation
conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-20.
qDaytime Running Lights
Some countries require moving vehicles
to have their lights on (daytime running
lights) during the daytime.
The daytime running lights turn on
automatically when the vehicle starts
moving.
They turn off when the parking brake is
operated or the shift lever is shifted to the
P position (automatic transaxle vehicle).
NOTE
(Except Canada)
The daytime running lights can be deactivated.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
4-62
When Driving
íSome models.
Switches and Controls
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page196
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (197,1)
Fog Lightsí
Can be used when the ignition is switched
ON.
Use this switch to turn on the fog lights.
The fog lights will improve visibility at
night and during foggy conditions.
To turn the fog lights on, rotate the fog
light switch to the position.
The headlight switch must be in the
position before turning on the fog lights.
Fog light switch
To turn the fog lights off, rotate the fog
light switch to the position or turn
the headlight switch to the or
position.
NOTE
l The fog lights will turn off when the
headlights are set at high beams.
l (With auto-light control)
If the fog light switch is in the position
and the headlight switch is in the
position, the fog lights will turn on when
the headlights, the exterior lights and
dashboard illumination turn on.
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
NOTE
l If an indicator light flashes abnormally, one
of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out.
l A personalized function is available to
change the turn indicator sound volume.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
qTurn Signals
Move the signal lever down (for a left
turn) or up (for a right turn) to the stop
position. The signal will self-cancel after
the turn is completed.
If the indicator light continues to flash
after a turn, manually return the lever to
its original position.
Right turn
Left turn
Right lane change
Left lane change
OFF
Green indicators on the dashboard show
which signal is working.
qLane-Change Signals
Move the lever halfway toward the
direction of the change ―until the
indicator flashes― and hold it there. It
will return to the off position when
released.
When Driving
Switches and Controls
4-63íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page197
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (198,1)
qThree-Flash Turn Signal
After releasing the turn signal lever, the
turn signal indicator flashes three times.
The operation can be cancelled by moving
the lever in the direction opposite to
which it was operated.
NOTE
The three-flash turn signal function can be
switched to operable/inoperable using the
personalization function.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
Windshield Wipers and
Washer
The ignition must be switched ON.
WARNING
Use only windshield washer fluid or
plain water in the reservoir:
Using radiator antifreeze as washer
fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the
windshield, it will dirty the
windshield, affect your visibility, and
could result in an accident.
Only use windshield washer fluid
mixed with anti-freeze protection in
freezing weather conditions:
Using windshield washer fluid
without anti-freeze protection in
freezing weather conditions is
dangerous as it could freeze on the
windshield and block your vision
which could cause an accident.
In addition, make sure the
windshield is sufficiently warmed
using the defroster before spraying
the washer fluid.
4-64
When Driving
Switches and Controls
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page198
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (199,1)
NOTE
Because heavy ice and snow can jam the wiper
blades, the wiper motor is protected from
motor breakdown, overheating and possible
fire by a circuit breaker. This mechanism will
automatically stop operation of the blades, but
only for about 5 minutes.
If this happens, turn off the wiper switch and
park off the right-of-way, and remove the snow
and ice.
After 5 minutes, turn on the switch and the
blades should operate normally. If they do not
resume functioning, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. Drive to
the side of the road and park off the right-ofway. Wait until the weather clears before trying
to drive with the wipers inoperative.
qWindshield Wipers
Turn the wipers on by pressing the lever
up or down.
With intermittent wiper
Switch
Position
Wiper operation
MIST Operation while pulling up lever
INT Intermittent
LO Low speed
HI High speed
Variable-speed intermittent wipers
Set the lever to the intermittent position
and choose the interval timing by rotating
the ring.
INT ring Fast
Slow
With auto-wiper control
Switch
Position
Wiper operation
MIST Operation while pulling up lever
AUTO Auto control
LO Low speed
HI High speed
When Driving
Switches and Controls
4-65
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page199
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (200,1)
Auto-wiper control
When the wiper lever is in the
position, the rain sensor senses the
amount of rainfall on the windshield and
turns the wipers on or off automatically
(off―intermittent―low speed―high
speed).
The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be
adjusted by turning the switch on the
wiper lever.
From the center position (normal), rotate
the switch downward for higher
sensitivity (faster response) or rotate it
upward for less sensitivity (slower
response).
Higher sensitivity
Less sensitivity
Switch
Center
position
CAUTION
Ø Do not shade the rain sensor by
adhering a sticker or a label on
the windshield. Otherwise the rain
sensor will not operate correctly.
4-66
When Driving
Switches and Controls
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page200
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (201,1)
Ø When the wiper lever is in the
AUTO position and the ignition is
switched ON, the wipers may
move automatically in the
following cases:
Ø If the windshield above the rain
sensor is touched or wiped with
a cloth.
Ø If the windshield is struck with
a hand or other object from
either outside or inside the
vehicle.
Keep hands and scrapers clear of
the windshield when the wiper
lever is in the AUTO position and
the ignition is switched ON as
fingers could be pinched or the
wipers and wiper blades damaged
when the wipers activate
automatically.
If you are going to clean the
windshield, be sure the wipers are
turned off completely―this is
particularly important when
clearing ice and snow―when it is
most likely that the engine is left
running.
NOTE
l Switching the auto-wiper lever from the
to the position while driving
activates the windshield wipers once, after
which they operate according to the rainfall
amount.
l The auto-wiper control may not operate
when the rain sensor temperature is about
_10 °C (14 °F) or lower, or about 85 °C
(185 °F) or higher.
l If the windshield is coated with water
repellent, the rain sensor may not be able to
sense the amount of rainfall correctly and
auto-wiper control may not operate
properly.
l If dirt or foreign matter (Such as ice or
matter containing salt water) adheres to the
windshield above the rain sensor or if the
windshield is iced, it could cause the wipers
to move automatically. However, if the
wipers cannot remove this ice, dirt or
foreign matter, the auto-wiper control will
stop operation. In this case, set the wiper
lever to the low speed position or high
speed position for manual operation, or
remove the ice, dirt or foreign matter by
hand to restore the auto-wiper operation.
l If the auto-wiper lever is left in the
position, the wipers could operate
automatically from the effect of strong light
sources, electromagnetic waves, or infrared
light because the rain sensor uses an
optical sensor. It is recommended that the
auto-wiper lever be switched to the
position other than when driving the vehicle
under rainy conditions.
l The auto-wiper control functions can be
turned off.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
When Driving
Switches and Controls
4-67
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page201
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (202,1)
qWindshield Washer
Pull the wiper lever toward you and hold
it to spray washer fluid.
Washer
OFF
NOTE
If the windshield washer is turned on when the
windshield wipers are not operating, the
windshield wipers operate a few times.
If the washer does not work, inspect the
fluid level (page 6-31). If it's normal,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Rear Window Wiper and
Washer
The ignition must be switched ON.
qRear Window Wiper
Turn the wiper on by turning the rear
wiper/washer switch.
Switch
Position
Wiper operation
INT Intermittent
ON Normal
qRear Window Washer
To spray washer fluid, turn the rear wiper/
washer switch to the position. After
the switch is released, the washer will
stop.
If the washer does not work, inspect the
fluid level (page 6-31). If it's normal and
the washer still does not work, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
4-68
When Driving
Switches and Controls
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page202
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (203,1)
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger clears fog from
the rear window.
The ignition must be switched ON.
Press the switch to turn on the rear
window defogger. The rear window
defogger operates for about 15 minutes
and turns off automatically.
The indicator light illuminates during
operation.
To turn off the rear window defogger
before the 15 minutes has elapsed, press
the switch again.
Fully Automatic Type Climate Control
Indicator light
Manual Type Climate Control
Indicator light
CAUTION
Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaners with abrasives to
clean the inside of the rear window
surface. They may damage the
defogger grid inside the window.
NOTE
l This defogger is not designed for melting
snow. If there is an accumulation of snow
on the rear window, remove it before using
the defogger.
l The rear window defogger setting can be
changed. After changing the setting, the
rear window defogger stops automatically
after 15 minutes have elapsed and when the
ambient temperature is high. When the
ambient temperature is low, it continues to
operate until the switch is pressed again.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
qMirror Defoggerí
To turn on the mirror defoggers, switch
the ignition ON and press the rear window
defogger switch (page 4-69).
When Driving
Switches and Controls
4-69íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page203
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (204,1)
Horn
To sound the horn, press the mark on
the steering wheel.
Hazard Warning Flasher
The hazard warning lights should always
be used when you stop on or near a
roadway in an emergency.
The hazard warning lights warn other
drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard
and that they must take extreme caution
when near it.
Depress the hazard warning flasher switch
and all the turn signals will flash. The
hazard warning indicator lights in the
instrument cluster flash simultaneously.
NOTE
l The turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning lights are on.
l Check local regulations about the use of
hazard warning lights while the vehicle is
being towed to verify that it is not in
violation of the law.
4-70
When Driving
Switches and Controls
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page204
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (205,1)
HomeLink Wireless
Control Systemí
NOTE
HomeLink and HomeLink house icon are
registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.
The HomeLink system replaces up to 3
hand-held transmitters with a single builtin component in the auto-dimming mirror.
Pressing the HomeLink button on the
auto-dimming mirror activates garage
doors, gates and other devices
surrounding your home.
HomeLink button
Indicator light
WARNING
Do not use the HomeLink system with
any garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature:
Using the HomeLink system with any
garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature as
required by federal safety standards
is dangerous. (This includes garage
doors manufactured before April 1,
1982.)
Using these garage door openers can
increase the risk of serious injury or
death. For further information,
contact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515
or www.homelink.com or your
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Always check the areas surrounding
garage doors and gates for people or
obstructions before programming or
during operation of the HomeLink
system:
Programming or operating the
HomeLink system without verifying
the safety of areas surrounding
garage doors and gates is dangerous
and could result in an unexpected
accident and serious injury if
someone were to be hit.
NOTE
The programming will not be erased even if
the battery is disconnected.
qPre-programming the HomeLink
System
NOTE
It is recommended that a new battery be
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device being programmed to HomeLink for
quicker training and accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal.
When Driving
Switches and Controls
4-71íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page205
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (206,1)
l Verify that there is a remote control
transmitter available for the device you
would like to program.
l Disconnect the power to the device.
qProgramming the HomeLink System
CAUTION
When programming a garage door
opener or a gate, disconnect the
power to these devices before
performing programming, as
continuous operation of the devices
could damage the motor.
The HomeLink system provides 3 buttons
which can be individually selected and
programmed using the transmitters for
current, on-market devices as follows:
1. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 2.5―7.5 cm (1―3 inches)
away from the HomeLink button you
wish to program while keeping the
indicator light in view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold both the
chosen HomeLink and hand-held
transmitter buttons. Do not release the
buttons until step 3 has been
completed.
NOTE
Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming
Step 2 with procedures noted in the “Gate
Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
3. After the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light, release both the
HomeLink and hand-held transmitter
buttons.
NOTE
If the HomeLink indicator light does not
change to a rapidly blinking light, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or call 1800-355-3515 for assistance.
4. Firmly press and hold the programmed
HomeLink button for five seconds, and
then release it. Perform this operation
two times to activate the door. If the
door does not activate, press and hold
the just-trained HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your
device should activate when the
HomeLink button is pressed and released.
NOTE
To program the remaining two HomeLink
buttons, begin with “Programming”― step 1.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with
“Programming” steps 5―7 to complete
the programming of a rolling code
equipped device (most commonly a
garage door opener).
5. At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
the “learn” or “smart” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motorhead unit.
6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button. (The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.)
NOTE
Complete the programming within 30 seconds.
4-72
When Driving
Switches and Controls
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page206
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (207,1)
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat
the “press/hold/release” sequence a
second time, and, depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped device),
repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming process.
HomeLink should now activate your
rolling code equipped device.
NOTE
To program the remaining two HomeLink
buttons, begin with “Programming”― step 1.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1800-355-3515.
qGate operator/Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission ―
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
by using the “Programming” procedures
(regardless of where you live), replace
“Programming HomeLink” step 2 with
the following:
NOTE
If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device
during the “cycling” process to prevent
possible overheating.
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
button while you press and release―
every two seconds (“cycle”) your handheld transmitter until the frequency signal
has successfully been accepted by
HomeLink. (The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly.)
Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to
complete.
qOperating the HomeLink System
Press the programmed HomeLink button
to operate a programmed device. The
code will continue being transmitted for a
maximum of 20 seconds.
qReprogramming the HomeLink
system
To program a device to HomeLink using a
HomeLink button previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
HomeLink button, proceed with
“Programming” - step 1.
qErasing Programmed HomeLink
Buttons
To erase the existing programming from
all three operating channels, press and
hold the two outside buttons ( , )
on the auto-dimming mirror until the
HomeLink indicator light begins to flash
after approximately 10 seconds.
Verify that the programming has been
erased when you resell the vehicle.
When Driving
Switches and Controls
4-73
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page207
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (208,1)
Brake System
qFoot Brake
Your Mazda has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
use.
Should power-assist fail, you can stop by
applying greater force than normal to the
brake pedal. But the distance required to
stop will be greater than usual.
WARNING
Do not coast with the engine stalled or
turned off, find a safe place to stop:
Coasting with the engine stalled or
turned off is dangerous. Braking will
require more effort, and the brake's
power-assist could be depleted if you
pump the brake. This will cause
longer stopping distances or even an
accident.
Shift to a lower gear when going down
steep hills:
Driving with your foot continuously
on the brake pedal or steadily
applying the brakes for long
distances is dangerous. This causes
overheated brakes, resulting in
longer stopping distances or even
total brake failure. This could cause
loss of vehicle control and a serious
accident. Avoid continuous
application of the brakes.
Dry off brakes that have become wet
by driving slowly, releasing the
accelerator pedal and lightly applying
the brakes several times until the brake
performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is
dangerous. Increased stopping
distance or the vehicle pulling to one
side when braking could result in a
serious accident. Light braking will
indicate whether the brakes have
been affected.
4-74
When Driving
Brake
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page208
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (209,1)
CAUTION
Ø Do not drive with your foot held
on the clutch pedal or brake pedal,
or hold the clutch pedal depressed
halfway unnecessarily. Doing so
could result in the following:
Ø The clutch and brake parts will
wear out more quickly.
Ø The brakes can overheat and
adversely affect brake
performance.
Ø Always depress the brake pedal
with the right foot. Applying the
brakes with the unaccustomed left
foot could slow your reaction time
to an emergency situation
resulting in insufficient braking
operation.
Ø Wear shoes appropriate for driving
in order to avoid your shoe
contacting the brake pedal when
depressing the accelerator pedal.
qElectric Parking Brake
The electric parking brake equipment
applies the parking brake using an electric
motor. The indicator light on the electric
parking brake switch turns on when the
switch is turned on.
Indicator light
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the
electric parking brake applied:
If the vehicle is driven with the
parking brake applied, the brake
parts may generate heat and the
brake system may not operate,
leading to an accident.
Before driving, release the electric
parking brake and verify that the
brake system warning light is turned
off.
When Driving
Brake
4-75
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page209
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (210,1)
NOTE
l The electric parking brake cannot be
applied or released while the vehicle
battery is dead.
l If the electric parking brake is repeatedly
applied and released it may stop operating
to prevent overheating of the motor. If this
occurs, wait approx. 1 minute before
operating the electric parking brake switch
again.
l An operation sound occurs when applying
or releasing the electric parking brake,
however, this does not indicate a
malfunction.
l If the electric parking brake is not used for
long periods, an automatic inspection of the
system is performed while the vehicle is
parked. An operation sound can be heard,
however, this does not indicate a problem.
l When the electric parking brake is applied
and the ignition is switched OFF, an
operation sound can be heard, however,
this does not indicate a problem.
l The brake pedal may move while the
electric parking brake is being applied or
released, however, this does not indicate a
problem.
l If the electric parking brake switch is
continually pulled while driving the vehicle,
the electric parking brake will be applied
and the electric parking brake warning
beep will be activated. When the switch is
released, the electric parking brake is
released and the beep stops.
l If the electric parking brake is applied with
the ignition switched off or in ACC, the
brake system warning light in the
instrument cluster and the indicator light in
the switch may turn on for 15 seconds.
l When running the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, it may be necessary to
switch the ignition off with the parking
brake released depending on the type of
automatic car wash.
When applying the electric parking
brake
The electric parking brake can be applied
regardless of the ignition switch position.
Securely depress the brake pedal and pull
up the electric parking brake switch.
The electric parking brake is applied and
the brake system warning light and the
electric parking brake switch indicator
light turn on.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-20.
When releasing the electric parking
brake
The electric parking brake can be released
while the ignition is switched ON or the
engine is running. When the electric
parking brake is released, the brake
system warning light and the electric
parking brake switch indicator light turn
off.
4-76
When Driving
Brake
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page210
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (211,1)
Electric parking brake manual release
Securely depress the brake pedal and
press the electric parking brake switch.
Electric parking brake automatic
release
If the accelerator pedal is depressed with
the electric parking brake applied and all
of the following conditions met, the
parking brake is released automatically.
l The engine is running.
l The driver's door is closed.
l The driver's seat belt is fastened.
(Manual transaxle)
l The change lever is in a position other
than neutral.
l The clutch pedal is depressed halfway
(Automatic transaxle)
l Selector lever is in the D, M, or R
position
NOTE
If something such as the driver's foot contacts
the accelerator pedal with the engine running
and the electric parking brake applied, the
parking brake may be released automatically.
If you do not intend to drive immediately, shift
the change lever (manual transmission) to the
neutral position, or shift the selector lever
(automatic transmission) to the P or N
position.
qDisplay Indication
For vehicles with the type A instrument
cluster, check the vehicle condition or
have the vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer according to
the indication.
qWarning Light
A system malfunction or operation
conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-20.
qBrake Pad Wear Indicator
When the disc brake pads become worn,
the built-in wear indicators contact the
disc plates. This causes a screeching noise
to warn that the pads should be replaced.
When you hear this noise, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
Do not drive with worn disc pads:
Driving with worn disc pads is
dangerous. The brakes could fail and
cause a serious accident. As soon as
you hear a screeching noise consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
When Driving
Brake
4-77
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page211
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (212,1)
qBrake Assist
During emergency braking situations
when it is necessary to depress the brake
pedal with greater force, the brake assist
system provides braking assistance, thus
enhancing braking performance.
When the brake pedal is depressed hard or
depressed more quickly, the brakes apply
more firmly.
NOTE
l When the brake pedal is depressed hard or
depressed more quickly, the pedal will feel
softer but the brakes will apply more firmly.
This is a normal effect of the brake assist
operation and does not indicate a
malfunction.
l When the brake pedal is depressed hard or
depressed more quickly, a motor/pump
operation noise may be heard. This is a
normal effect of the brake assist and does
not indicate a malfunction.
l The brake assist equipment does not
supersede the functionality of the vehicle's
main braking system.
Hill Launch Assist (HLA)
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) is a function
which assists the driver in accelerating
from a stop while on a slope. When the
driver releases the brake pedal and
depresses the accelerator pedal while on a
slope, the function prevents the vehicle
from rolling.
The braking force is maintained
automatically after the brake pedal is
released on a steep grade.
For vehicles with a manual transaxle, Hill
Launch Assist (HLA) operates on a
downward slope when the shift lever is in
the reverse (R) position, and on an
upward slope when the shift lever is in a
position other than the reverse (R)
position.
For vehicles with an automatic transaxle,
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) operates on a
downward slope when the shift lever is in
the reverse (R) position, and on an
upward slope when the shift lever is in a
forward gear.
4-78
When Driving
Brake
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page212
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (213,1)
WARNING
Do not rely completely on Hill Launch
Assist (HLA):
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) is an
auxiliary device for accelerating from
a stop on a slope. The system only
operates for about two seconds and
therefore, relying only on the system,
when accelerating from a stop is
dangerous because the vehicle may
move (roll) unexpectedly and cause
an accident.
The vehicle could roll depending on
the vehicle's load or if it is towing
something. In addition, for vehicles
with a manual transaxle, the vehicle
could still roll depending on how the
clutch pedal or the accelerator pedal
is operated.
Always confirm the safety around the
vehicle before starting to drive the
vehicle.
NOTE
l Hill Launch Assist (HLA) does not operate
on a gentle slope. In addition, the gradient
of the slope on which the system will
operate changes depending on the vehicle's
load.
l Hill Launch Assist (HLA) does not operate
if the parking brake is applied, the vehicle
has not stopped completely, or the clutch
pedal is released.
l While Hill Launch Assist (HLA) is
operating, the brake pedal may feel stiff
and vibrate, however, this does not indicate
a malfunction.
l Hill Launch Assist (HLA) does not operate
while the TCS/DSC indicator light is
illuminated.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-20.
l Hill Launch Assist (HLA) does not turn off
even if the TCS OFF switch is pressed to
turn off the TCS.
When Driving
Brake
4-79
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page213
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (214,1)
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS control unit continuously
monitors the speed of each wheel. If one
wheel is about to lock up, the ABS
responds by automatically releasing and
reapplying that wheel's brake.
The driver will feel a slight vibration in
the brake pedal and may hear a chattering
noise from the brake system. This is
normal ABS system operation. Continue
to depress the brake pedal without
pumping the brakes.
A system malfunction or operation
conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-20.
WARNING
Do not rely on ABS as a substitute for
safe driving:
The ABS cannot compensate for
unsafe and reckless driving, excessive
speed, tailgating (following another
vehicle too closely), driving on ice and
snow, and hydroplaning (reduced tire
friction and road contact because of
water on the road surface). You can
still have an accident.
NOTE
l Braking distances may be longer on loose
surfaces (snow or gravel, for example)
which usually have a hard foundation. A
vehicle with a normal braking system may
require less distance to stop under these
conditions because the tires will build up a
wedge of surface layer when the wheels
skid.
l The sound of the ABS operating may be
heard when starting the engine or
immediately after starting the vehicle,
however, it does not indicate a malfunction.
4-80
When Driving
ABS/TCS/DSC
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page214
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (215,1)
Traction Control System
(TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS)
enhances traction and safety by
controlling engine torque and braking.
When the TCS detects driving wheel
slippage, it lowers engine torque and
operates the brakes to prevent loss of
traction.
This means that on a slick surface, the
engine adjusts automatically to provide
optimum power to the drive wheels,
limiting wheel spin and loss of traction.
A system malfunction or operation
conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-20.
WARNING
Do not rely on the Traction Control
System (TCS) as a substitute for safe
driving:
The Traction Control System (TCS)
cannot compensate for unsafe and
reckless driving, excessive speed,
tailgating (following another vehicle
too closely), and hydroplaning
(reduced tire friction and road
contact because of water on the road
surface). You can still have an
accident.
Use snow tires or tire chains and drive
at reduced speeds when roads are
covered with ice and/or snow:
Driving without proper traction
devices on snow and/or ice-covered
roads is dangerous. The Traction
Control System (TCS) alone cannot
provide adequate traction and you
could still have an accident.
NOTE
To turn off the TCS, press the TCS OFF switch
(page 4-82).
When Driving
ABS/TCS/DSC
4-81
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page215
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (216,1)
qTCS OFF Switch
Press the TCS OFF switch to turn off the
TCS. The TCS OFF indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
Press the switch again to turn the TCS
back on. The TCS OFF indicator light
will turn off.
NOTE
l When TCS is on and you attempt to free the
vehicle when it is stuck, or drive it out of
freshly fallen snow, the TCS will activate.
Depressing the accelerator will not
increase engine power and freeing the
vehicle may be difficult. When this happens,
turn off the TCS.
l If the TCS is off when the engine is turned
off, it automatically activates when the
ignition is switched ON.
l Leaving the TCS on will provide the best
traction.
l If the TCS OFF switch is pressed and held
for 10 seconds or more, the TCS OFF
switch malfunction detection function
operates and the TCS system activates
automatically. The TCS OFF indicator light
turns off while the TCS system is operative.
Dynamic Stability Control
(DSC)
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
automatically controls braking and engine
torque in conjunction with systems such
as ABS and TCS to help control side slip
when driving on slippery surfaces, or
during sudden or evasive maneuvering,
enhancing vehicle safety.
Refer to ABS (page 4-80) and TCS (page
4-81).
DSC operation is possible at speeds
greater than 20 km/h (12 mph).
A system malfunction or operation
conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-20.
WARNING
Do not rely on the Dynamic Stability
Control as a substitute for safe driving:
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
cannot compensate for unsafe and
reckless driving, excessive speed,
tailgating (following another vehicle
too closely), and hydroplaning
(reduced tire friction and road
contact because of water on the road
surface). You can still have an
accident.
4-82
When Driving
ABS/TCS/DSC
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page216
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (217,1)
CAUTION
Ø The DSC may not operate correctly
unless the following are observed:
Ø Use tires of the correct size
specified for your Mazda on all
four wheels.
Ø Use tires of the same
manufacturer, brand and tread
pattern on all four wheels.
Ø Do not mix worn tires.
Ø The DSC may not operate correctly
when tire chains are used or a
temporary spare tire is installed
because the tire diameter changes.
When Driving
ABS/TCS/DSC
4-83
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page217
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (218,1)
Fuel Economy Monitor
For vehicles with type B audio, the Fuel Consumption are switched and displayed by
operating each icon in the display.
In addition, after completing a trip, the total energy efficiency to date is displayed in the
ending display when the ending display is turned on.
1. Select the icon on the home screen to display the applications screen.
2. Select the “Fuel Economy Monitor”.
3. Operate the commander switch or touch the screen and display the menu.
NOTE
When the menu is displayed by touching the screen, the display is hidden automatically after 6
seconds.
4. Select the icon in the menu and perform the operation. Each icon operates as follows:
Indication on display Control status
Hides the menu display.
Returns to the application screen.
Switches the Fuel Economy Monitor in the order of For
vehicles with type B audio, the Fuel Consumption are
switched and displayed by operating each icon in the
display.
Resets the fuel economy data.
Displays the following setting screen.
l Ending display on/off switching
l On/off switching for function which synchronizes reset
fuel economy data to trip meter (Trip A)
NOTE
The fuel economy monitor screen after the ignition is switched from ON to OFF is changed to the
original fuel economy monitor screen when the ignition is switched ON the next time.
4-84
When Driving
Fuel Economy Monitor
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page218
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (219,1)
qFuel Consumption Display
Information regarding the fuel economy is displayed.
Indication on display Control status
Displays the fuel economy for the past 60 minutes.
l Displays the fuel economy every minute for the past 1 to
10 minutes.
l Displays the fuel economy every 10 minutes for the past
10 to 60 minutes.
Displays the average fuel economy over the past 5
resets and after the current reset.
Calculates the average fuel economy every minute after
vehicle travel begins, and displays it.
NOTE
l The fuel economy data can be reset by doing the following operation:
l Press the reset switch from the menu screen.
l When the function which synchronizes the fuel economy monitor and the trip meter is on, reset
trip A of the trip meter.
l Delete the average fuel economy information displayed in the trip computer.
l After resetting the fuel economy data, “– -” is displayed while the average fuel economy is
calculated.
qEnding Screen Display
If the ending display on the fuel economy monitor is on when the ignition is switched from
ON to OFF, the information regarding the fuel economy is displayed.
When Driving
Fuel Economy Monitor
4-85
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page219
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (220,1)
Drive Selection (Automatic Transaxle)
Drive selection is a system to switch the vehicle's drive mode. When the sport mode is
selected, vehicle's response against accelerator operation is enhanced. This provides
additional quick acceleration which may be needed to safely make maneuvers such as lane
changes, merging onto freeways, or passing other vehicles.
CAUTION
Do not use the sport mode when driving on slippery roads such as wet or snowcovered roads. It may cause tire slipping.
NOTE
l When the sport mode is selected, driving at higher engine speeds increases and it may increase
fuel consumption. Mazda recommends to cancel the sport mode on normal driving.
l Drive mode cannot be switched in the following conditions:
l ABS/TCS/DSC is operating
l The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system/cruise control is operating.
l Steering wheel is being operated abruptly
qDrive Selection Switch
Press the drive selection switch to the
side (forward) to select the sport
mode.
Pull the drive selection switch to the
side (backward) to cancel the sport mode.
NOTE
l When the ignition is switched off, the sport
mode is canceled.
l Depending on the driving conditions when
sport mode is selected, the vehicle may
perform shift-down or slightly accelerate.
qSelect Mode Indication
When the sport mode is selected, the
select mode indication turns on in the
instrument cluster.
NOTE
If the mode cannot be switched to drive mode,
the select mode indication flashes to notify the
driver.
4-86
When Driving
Drive Selection
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page220
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (221,1)
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Operation
l AWD provides excellent drivability on
snow-covered and ice-packed roads,
sand and mud, as well as on steep
slopes and other slippery surfaces.
l A system malfunction or operation
conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on
page 4-20.
WARNING
Never spin a wheel that is off the
ground:
Spinning a wheel that is off the
ground as a result of the vehicle
being stuck or in a ditch is
dangerous. The drive assembly could
be seriously damaged which could
lead to an accident or could even
lead to overheating, oil leakage, and
a fire.
qAWD Driving
WARNING
Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and
abrupt maneuvers when driving this
vehicle:
Sharp turns, excessive speed and
abrupt maneuvering of this vehicle is
dangerous as it could result in the
increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle roll-over, personal
injury or death.
This vehicle has a higher center of
gravity. Vehicles with a higher center
of gravity such as utility and AWD
vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of
gravity.
Utility and AWD vehicles are not
designed for cornering at high speeds
any more than low profile sports cars
are designed to perform satisfactorily
under off-road conditions. In
addition, utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
Drive carefully when the vehicle is
loaded by lowering vehicle speed and
applying the brakes earlier:
Abrupt maneuvering and sudden
braking when driving a loaded
vehicle is dangerous as the driving
behavior of a vehicle with a high
center of gravity is different when it is
loaded compared to when it is not,
and could result in the loss of vehicle
control and an accident.
When Driving
AWD
4-87
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page221
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (222,1)
qTires and Tire Chains
The condition of the tires plays a large
role in the performance of the vehicle.
Moreover, to prevent adverse effects to
the drive assembly, please note the
following:
Tires
l When replacing tires, always replace
all front and rear tires at the same time.
l All tires must be of the same size,
manufacture, brand and tread pattern.
Pay particular attention when
equipping snow or other types of
winter tires.
l Do not mix tread-worn tires with
normal tires.
l Inspect tire inflation pressures at the
specified periods adjust to the specified
pressures, and initialize the tire
pressure monitoring system.
NOTE
Check the tire inflation pressure label attached
to driver's door frame for the correct tire
inflation pressure.
l Make sure to equip the vehicle with
genuine wheels of the specified size,
on all wheels. With AWD, the system
is calibrated for all four wheels being
of the same dimensions.
Tire chains
l Install tire chains to the front tires.
l Do not use tire chains on the rear
wheels.
l Do not drive the vehicle faster than 30
km/h (19 mph) with the tire chains
installed.
l Do not drive the vehicle with tire
chains on road conditions other than
snow or ice.
qTowing
If the vehicle requires towing, have it
towed with all four wheels completely off
the ground(page 7-20).
4-88
When Driving
AWD
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page222
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (223,1)
Power Steering
l Power steering is only operable when
the engine is running. If the engine is
off or if the power steering system is
inoperable, you can still steer, but it
requires more physical effort.
If the steering feels stiffer than usual
during normal driving or the steering
vibrates, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
l For vehicles with the type A instrument
cluster, check the vehicle condition or
have the vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer according to
the indication.
l A system malfunction or operation
conditions are indicated by a warning.
In addition, the buzzer may also
activate depending on the system
abnormality or operation condition.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on
page 4-20.
Refer to Warning Sound is Activated
on page 7-34.
CAUTION
Never hold the steering wheel to the
extreme left or right for more than 5
seconds with the engine running.
This could damage the power
steering system.
When Driving
Power Steering
4-89
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page223
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (224,1)
i-ACTIVSENSEí
i-ACTIVSENSE is a collective term covering a series of advanced safety and driver
support systems which make use of a Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) and radar sensors.
These systems are designed to assist the driver in safer driving by reducing the load on the
driver and helping to avert collisions or reduce their severity. However, because each
system has its limitations, always drive carefully and do not rely solely on the systems.
qActive Safety Technology
Active Safety Technology supports safer driving by helping the driver to recognize
potential hazards and avert accidents.
Driver awareness support systems
Nighttime visibility
Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) ................................................................. page 4-92
High Beam Control System (HBC) ........................................................................ page 4-93
Left/right side and rear side detection
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) ............................................................. page 4-96
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System ................................................................. page 4-102
Inter-vehicle distance recognition
Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) ................................................... page 4-108
Rear obstruction detection when leaving a parking space
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ......................................................................... page 4-111
Driver Support Systems
Inter-vehicle distance
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) ................................................................. page 4-116
qPre-Crash Safety Technology
Pre-crash safety technology is designed to assist the driver in averting collisions or reduce
their severity in situations where they cannot be avoided.
Collision damage reduction in low vehicle speed range
Forward driving
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) ....................................................................... page 4-126
Collision damage reduction in medium/high speed range
Smart Brake Support (SBS) ................................................................................. page 4-131
4-90
When Driving
íSome models.
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page224
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (225,1)
qCamera and Sensors
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) detects lane indications and recognizes headlights,
taillights and city lights during nighttime driving. The following systems also use the
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).
l High Beam Control system (HBC)
l Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
l Smart Brake Support (SBS)
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is installed at the top of the windshield near the
rearview mirror.
Refer to Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) on page 4-134.
Radar sensor (front)
The radar sensor (front) functions by detecting the radio waves reflected off a vehicle
ahead sent from the radar sensor. The following systems also use the radar sensor (front).
l Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
l Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS)
l Smart Brake Support (SBS)
The radar sensor (front) is mounted behind the radiator grille.
Refer to Radar Sensor (Front) on page 4-137.
Laser sensor (front)
The laser sensor (front) emits a near-infrared laser beam and receives the beam reflected off
the reflective surface of a vehicle in front, and the detected beam is then used for
measurement. The following systems also use the laser sensor (front).
l Smart Brake Support (SBS)
l Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
The laser sensor (front) is installed at the top of the windshield near the rearview mirror.
Refer to Laser Sensor (Front) on page 4-140.
Radar sensors (rear)
The radar sensors (rear) function by detecting the radio waves reflected off a vehicle
approaching from the rear or an obstruction sent from the radar sensors. The following
systems also use the radar sensors (rear).
l Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
l Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
The radar sensors (rear) are installed inside the rear bumper, one each on the left and right
sides.
Refer to Radar Sensors (Rear) on page 4-142.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-91
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page225
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (226,1)
Adaptive Front Lighting
System (AFS)í
The adaptive front lighting system (AFS)
automatically adjusts the headlight beams
to the left or right in conjunction with the
operation of the steering wheel after the
headlights have been turned on and the
vehicle speed is about 2 km/h (2 mph) or
higher.
A system malfunction or operation
conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-20.
NOTE
The Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)
function can be switched to operable/
inoperable using the personalization function.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
4-92
When Driving
íSome models.
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page226
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (227,1)
High Beam Control System (HBC)í
The High Beam Control System (HBC) determines the conditions in front of the vehicle
using the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) while driving in darkness to automatically
switch the headlights between high and low beams.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-20.
While driving the vehicle at a speed of about 30 km/h (18 mph), the headlights are
switched to high beams when there are no vehicles ahead or approaching in the opposite
direction.
The system switches the headlights to low beams when one of the following occurs:
l The system detects a vehicle or the headlights/lights of a vehicle approaching in the
opposite direction.
l The vehicle is driven on roads lined with streetlamps or on roads in well-lit cities and
towns.
l The vehicle is driven at less than about 20 km/h (12 mph).
Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC)
The recognition distance of the
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)
varies according to the
surrounding conditions.
The warning light illuminates or flashes when the system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-20.
CAUTION
Ø Do not adjust the vehicle height, modify the headlight units, or remove the
camera, otherwise the system will not operate normally.
Ø Do not rely excessively on the High Beam Control System (HBC) and drive the
vehicle while paying sufficient attention to safety. Switch the headlights between
the high beams and low beams manually if necessary.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-93íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page227
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (228,1)
NOTE
The timing in which the system switches the headlights changes under the following conditions. If the
system does not switch the headlights appropriately, manually switch between high and low beams
according to the visibility as well as road and traffic conditions.
l When there are sources of light in the area such as street lamps, illuminated signboards, and
traffic signals.
l When there are reflective objects in the surrounding area such as reflective plates and signs.
l When visibility is reduced under rain, snow and foggy conditions.
l When driving on roads with sharp curves or hilly terrain.
l When the headlights/rear lamps of vehicles in front of you or in the opposite lane are dim or not
illuminated.
l When there is insufficient darkness such as at dawn or dusk.
l When the luggage compartment is loaded with heavy objects or the rear passenger seats are
occupied.
l When visibility is reduced due to a vehicle in front of you spraying water from its tires onto your
windshield.
4-94
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page228
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:32 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (229,1)
qTo Operate the System
The High Beam Control System (HBC)
operates to switch the headlights
automatically between high and low
beams after the ignition is switched ON
and the headlight switch is in the AUTO
and high beam position. At the same time,
the High Beam Control System (HBC)
indicator light (green) in the instrument
cluster illuminates.
The High Beam Control System (HBC)
determines that it is dark based on the
brightness of the surrounding area.
NOTE
l When the vehicle speed is 30 km/h (18 mph)
or higher, the headlights automatically
switch to high beams when there are no
vehicles ahead or approaching in the
opposite direction.
When the vehicle speed is less than about
20 km/h (12 mph), the High Beam Control
System (HBC) switches the headlights to
low beams.
l The low beams may not switch to high
beams when cornering.
l Operation of the High Beam Control
System (HBC) function can be disabled
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
qManual Switching
Switching to low beams
Shift the lever to the low beam position.
The High Beam Control System (HBC)
indicator light (Green) turns off.
Switching to high beams
Turn the headlight switch to the
position.
The High Beam Control System (HBC)
indicator light (Green) turns off and the
is illuminated.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-95
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page229
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (230,1)
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)í
The LDWS system notifies the driver that the vehicle may be deviating from its lane.
The system detects the white or yellow lines on the traffic lane using the forward sensing
camera and if it determines that the vehicle may be deviating from its lane, it notifies the
driver using the multi-information display (vehicles with type A instrument cluster), and by
flashing the LDWS warning light (vehicles with type B instrument cluster) and activating
the LDWS warning beep.
Use the LDWS when you drive the vehicle on roads with white or yellow lines.
Refer to Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) on page 4-134.
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)
Vehicles with type A instrument cluster
The LDWS OFF indication illuminates when the system has a malfunction.
Vehicles with type B instrument cluster
The LDWS warning light illuminates when the system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-20.
4-96
When Driving
íSome models.
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page230
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (231,1)
WARNING
Do not use the LDWS under the following conditions:
The system may not operate adequately according to the actual driving conditions,
resulting in an accident.
Ø Driving on roads with tight curves.
Ø Driving under bad weather conditions (rain, fog, and snow).
The functions of the LDWS have limitations:
Always stay on course using the steering wheel and drive with care. The system is
not designed to compensate for a driver's lack of caution and if you rely too much on
the LDWS it could lead to an accident. The driver is responsible for assuring lane
changes and other maneuvers. Always pay attention to the direction in which the
vehicle is traveling and the vehicle's surroundings.
CAUTION
Do not modify the suspension. If the vehicle height or the damping force of the
suspensions is changed, the LDWS may not operate correctly.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-97
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page231
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (232,1)
NOTE
l If your vehicle deviates from its traffic lane, the LDWS operates (warning sound and indicator
light). Steer the vehicle adequately to drive the vehicle to the center of the lane.
l When the turn signal lever is operated for a lane change, the LDWS warning is automatically
canceled. The LDWS warning becomes operable when the turn signal lever is returned and the
system detects the white or yellow lines.
l If the steering wheel, accelerator pedal, or brake pedal is operated abruptly and the vehicle moves
close to a white or yellow line, the system determines that the driver is making a lane change and
the LDWS warning is automatically canceled.
l The LDWS may not operate during the period immediately after the vehicle has deviated from its
lane and the LDWS has operated, or the vehicle deviates from its lane repeatedly within a short
period of time.
l The LDWS does not operate if it does not detect the white or yellow lines of the traffic lane.
l Under the following conditions, the LDWS may not be able to detect white or yellow lines
correctly and the LDWS may not operate correctly.
l If an object placed on the dashboard is reflected in the windshield and picked up by the
camera.
l Heavy luggage is loaded in the luggage compartment or on the rear seat and the vehicle is
inclined.
l The tire pressures are not adjusted to the specified pressure.
l When the vehicle is driven on the entry and exit to or from the rest area or tollgate of a
highway.
l The white or yellow lines are less visible because of dirt or paint flaking.
l The vehicle ahead is running near a white or yellow line and the line is less visible.
l A white or yellow line is less visible because of bad weather (rain, fog, or snow).
l A misleading line is picked up on the road such as a temporary line for construction, or
because of shade, lingering snow, or grooves filled with water.
l The surrounding brightness suddenly changes such as when entering or exiting a tunnel.
l The illumination of the headlights is weakened because of dirt or the optical axis is deviated.
l The windshield is dirty or foggy.
l Back-light is reflecting from the road surface.
l The road surface is wet and shiny after rain, or there are puddles on the road.
l The shade of a guardrail parallel to a white or yellow line is on the road.
l The width of a lane is excessively narrow or wide.
l The road is excessively uneven.
l The vehicle is shaken after hitting a road bump.
l There are two or more adjacent white or yellow lines.
l There are various road markings or lane markings of various shapes near an intersection.
4-98
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page232
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (233,1)
qWhen the System Operates
1. The system goes on operation standby
when the LDWS switch is pressed and
the LDWS OFF indication/indicator
light turns off.
On the type A instrument cluster, the lane
indication (border line) is indicated in the
multi-information display.
Indication on display
2. Drive the vehicle in the center of the
driving lane while the LDWS OFF
indicator light is turned off. The system
becomes operational when all of the
following conditions are met.
l The vehicle is driven in the center of
the driving lane with the white or
yellow lines on the left and right sides,
or on either side.
l The vehicle speed is 65 km/h (41 mph)
or faster.
l The vehicle is driven on a straight road
or road with gentle curves.
On the type A instrument cluster, the lane
indication is indicated in the multiinformation display.
Indication on display
The LDWS does not operate in the
following cases:
l The system cannot detect white or
yellow lines.
l The vehicle speed is less than 60 km/h
(37 mph).
l The vehicle is making a sharp curve.
l The vehicle is making a curve at an
inadequate speed.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-99
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page233
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (234,1)
NOTE
l The LDWS does not operate until the
system detects a white or yellow line on
either the left or right.
l When the system detects a white or yellow
line on one side only, the system will
activate the warning only when the vehicle
deviates on the side where the white or
yellow line is being detected.
l The distance and warning sensitivity
(likelihood of a warning) which the system
uses to determine the possibility of a lane
departure can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
Auto cancel
In the following cases, the LDWS cancels
automatically.
l The temperature inside the camera is
high or low.
l The windshield around the camera is
foggy.
l The windshield around the camera is
blocked by an obstruction, causing
poor forward visibility.
When the LDWS cancels automatically,
the instrument cluster displays as follows.
Vehicle with type A instrument cluster
The lane indication (border line) is
indicated in the display.
The LDWS is enabled automatically when
operation conditions are met, and the lane
indication is indicated in the display.
Vehicle with type B instrument cluster
The LDWS warning light in the
instrument cluster turns on.
The LDWS warning light turns off when
the LDWS is operable.
Auto cancel warning
When the following operations are
performed, the LDWS determines that the
driver intends to make a lane change and
the LDWS warning is canceled
automatically. The LDWS is enabled
automatically after the driver performs the
operation.
l The steering wheel is operated
abruptly.
l The brake pedal is depressed abruptly.
l The accelerator pedal is depressed
abruptly.
l The turn signal lever is operated (after
the turn signal lever is returned, the
LDWS may not operate for about 3
seconds which is the period of time
required to make a lane correction).
NOTE
After about 60 seconds have elapsed with the
turn signal lever left operating, the LDWS
warning may operate if the vehicle is close to a
white or yellow line.
qCanceling the System
Press the LDWS switch to cancel the
LDWS. The LDWS OFF indication/
indicator light turns on.
The lane indication displayed in the type
A instrument cluster turns off.
4-100
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page234
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (235,1)
qLDWSWarning
If the system determines that there is the
possibility of a lane departure, the LDWS
warning beep activates and the LDWS
warning light flashes. (vehicle with type B
instrument cluster)
Vehicles with type A instrument cluster, if
there is the possibility of a lane departure,
the system indicates the direction it
determines that the vehicle is deviating in
the multi-information display.
Operate the steering wheel appropriately
and steer the vehicle to the center of the
lane.
Indication on display
NOTE
l If the LDWS warning sound is set to
rumble, the sound will be heard from the
vehicle speaker on the side which the
system determined the vehicle may be
deviating from its lane.
l It may be difficult to hear the LDWS
warning beep depending on the
surrounding conditions such as outside
noise.
l The type of warning sound and the volume
can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-101
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page235
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (236,1)
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Systemí
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is designed to assist the driver in checking the
area to the rear of the vehicle on both sides during lane changes by alerting the driver to the
presence of vehicles approaching from the rear in an adjacent lane.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system detects vehicles approaching from the rear while
traveling in the forward direction at a speed of 10 km/h (6.3 mph) or faster and turns on the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights equipped on the door mirrors depending on
the conditions. If the turn signal lever is operated to signal a lane change in the direction in
which the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light is illuminated, the system warns the
driver of a vehicle in the detection area by flashing the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
warning light and activating a beep sound.
The detection area on this system covers the driving lanes on both sides of the vehicle and
from the rear part of the front doors to about 50 m (164 ft) behind the vehicle.
Detection areas
Your vehicle
WARNING
Always check the surrounding area visually before making an actual lane change:
The system is only designed to assist you in checking for vehicles at your rear when
making a lane change. Due to certain limitations with the operation of this system,
the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light may not flash or it might be delayed
even though a vehicle is in an adjacent driving lane. Always make it your
responsibility as a driver to check the rear.
4-102
When Driving
íSome models.
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page236
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (237,1)
NOTE
l The system is only designed to assist you in checking for vehicles at your rear when making a lane
change. Due to certain limitations with the operation of this system, the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) warning light may not flash or it might be delayed even though a vehicle is in an adjacent
driving lane. Always make it your responsibility as a driver to check the rear.
l The ignition is switched ON.
l The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch is pressed and the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF
indication/indicator light in the instrument cluster is turned off.
l The vehicle speed is about 10 km/h (6.3 mph) or faster.
l The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system will not operate under the following circumstances.
l The vehicle speed falls below about 10 km/h (6.3 mph) even though the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) OFF indicator light is turned off.
l The shift lever (manual transaxle)/selector lever (automatic transaxle) is shifted to reverse (R)
and the vehicle is reversing.
l In the following cases, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator light turns on and
operation of the system is stopped. If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator light
remains illuminated, have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
l Some problem with the system including the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights is
detected.
l A large deviation in the installation position of a radar sensor (rear) on the vehicle has
occurred.
l There is a large accumulation of snow or ice on the rear bumper near a radar sensor (rear).
Remove any snow, ice or mud on the rear bumper.
l Driving on snow-covered roads for long periods.
l The temperature near the radar sensors (rear) becomes extremely hot due to driving for long
periods on slopes during the summer.
l The battery voltage has decreased.
l Under the following conditions, the radar sensors (rear) cannot detect target objects or it may be
difficult to detect them.
l A vehicle is in the detection area at the rear in an adjacent driving lane but it does not
approach. The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system determines the condition based on radar
detection data.
l A vehicle is traveling alongside your vehicle at nearly the same speed for an extended period of
time.
l Vehicles approaching in the opposite direction.
l A vehicle in an adjacent driving lane is attempting to pass your vehicle.
l A vehicle is in an adjacent lane on a road with extremely wide driving lanes. The detection
area of the radar sensors (rear) is set at the road width of expressways.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-103
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page237
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (238,1)
l In the following cases, the activation of the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights and the
warning beep may not occur or they may be delayed.
l A vehicle makes a lane change from a driving lane two lanes over to an adjacent lane.
l Driving on steep slopes.
l Crossing the summit of a hill or mountain pass.
l The turning radius is small (making a sharp curve, turning at intersections).
l When there is a difference in the height between your driving lane and the adjacent lane.
l Directly after pressing the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch and the system becomes
operable.
l If the road width is extremely narrow, vehicles two lanes over may be detected. The detection area
of the radar sensors (rear) is set according to the road width of expressways.
l The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights may turn on in reaction to stationary objects on
the road or the roadside such as guardrails, tunnels, sidewalls, and parked vehicles.
Objects such as guardrails and concrete walls
running alongside the vehicle.
Places where the width between guardrails or
walls on each side of the vehicle narrows.
The walls at the entrance and exits of tunnels,
turnouts.
l A Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light may flash or the warning beep may be activated
several times when making a turn at a city intersection.
l Turn off the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system while pulling a trailer or while an accessory
such as a bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, the radar’s radio waves
will be blocked causing the system to not operate normally.
4-104
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page238
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (239,1)
l In the following cases, it may be difficult to view the illumination/flashing of the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) warning lights equipped on the door mirrors.
l Snow or ice is adhering to the door mirrors.
l The front door glass is fogged or covered in snow, frost or dirt.
l The radar sensors of the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may be regulated under the radio
wave related laws of the country where the vehicle is driven. The sensors in this system are
approved for use in the U.S.A. (including territories), Canada, and Mexico. If a vehicle with a
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is driven in a country other than the U.S.A., Canada, or
Mexico, the system has to be turned off using the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch.
l The system switches to the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function when the shift lever (manual
transaxle) or the selector lever (automatic transaxle) is shifted to the reverse (R) position.
Refer to Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) on page 4-111.
qBlind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Warning Lights/Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) Warning Beep
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) or Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system notifies the
driver of the presence of vehicles in adjacent lanes to the rear of your vehicle using the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights and the warning beep while the systems are
operational.
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights are equipped on the left and right door
mirrors. The warning lights turn on when a vehicle approaching from the rear in an
adjacent lane is detected.
When the ignition is switched ON, the malfunction warning light turns on momentarily and
then turns off after a few seconds.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-105
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page239
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (240,1)
Forward driving (Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system operation)
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system detects vehicles approaching from the rear and
turns on the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights equipped on the door mirrors
according to the conditions. Additionally, while a Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning
light is illuminated, if the turn signal lever is operated to signal a turn in the direction in
which the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light is illuminated, the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) warning light flashes.
Reverse driving (Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system operation)
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system detects vehicles approaching from the left and
right of your vehicle and flashes the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights.
Function for cancelling illumination dimmer
When the headlight switch is in the or position, the brightness of the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) warning lights is dimmed. If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning
lights are difficult to see due to glare from surrounding brightness when traveling on snowcovered roads or under foggy conditions, press the dimmer cancellation button to cancel
the dimmer and increase the brightness of Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights
when they turn on.
Refer to Dashboard Illumination on page 4-14.
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning beep
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning beep is activated simultaneously with the
flashing of a Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light.
4-106
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page240
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (241,1)
qBlind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Switch
When the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
switch is pressed, the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA) systems are turned off and
the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF
indication/indicator light in the instrument
cluster turns on.
If the switch is pressed again, the Blind
Spot Monitoring (BSM) and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems become
operable and the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) OFF indication/indicator light
turns off.
NOTE
l When the ignition is switched off, the
condition before the system was turned off
is maintained. For example, if the ignition
is switched OFF while the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA) systems are operational, the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) and Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems remain
operational the next time the ignition is
switched ON.
l The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) and Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems are
turned off when the battery is disconnected
such as when the battery terminals or fuses
have been removed and re-installed. To turn
the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) and Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems back on,
press the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
switch.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-107
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page241
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (242,1)
Distance Recognition
Support System (DRSS)í
The Distance Recognition Support
System (DRSS) measures the distance
between your vehicle and a vehicle ahead
using a radar sensor (front) while the
vehicle speed is 30 km/h or faster (19
mph or faster), and indicates a
recommended distance to maintain
between the vehicles. Furthermore, if your
vehicle approaches a vehicle ahead more
closely than the appropriate distance to
maintain between the vehicles, the
vehicle-ahead indication in the multiinformation display is flashed to advise
the driver to keep a safer distance from
the vehicle ahead.
WARNING
Do not rely completely on the Distance
Recognition Support System (DRSS) and
always drive carefully:
The Distance Recognition Support
System (DRSS) provides advice for
safer driving and notifies the driver of
a recommended, safer distance to
maintain with a vehicle ahead. The
ability to detect a vehicle ahead is
limited depending on the type of
vehicle ahead, the weather
conditions, and the traffic conditions.
Therefore, if the accelerator and
brake pedals are not operated
correctly it could lead to an accident.
Always verify the safety of the
surrounding area and depress the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal
while keeping a safer distance from
vehicles ahead or on-coming vehicles.
NOTE
l The Distance Recognition Support System
(DRSS) operates when all of the following
conditions are met:
l The ignition is switched ON.
l The Distance Recognition Support
System (DRSS) is on.
l The selector lever is in a position other
than reverse (R).
l The vehicle speed is 30 km/h or faster
(19 mph or faster).
l The objects which activate the system are 4wheeled vehicles.
l The Distance Recognition Support System
(DRSS) may also operate in the presence of
motorcycles and bicycles.
l The Distance Recognition Support System
(DRSS) may not operate normally under the
following conditions:
l The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
has a malfunction.
l The vehicle ahead is traveling at an
extremely slow speed.
l The system does not operate with the
following objects:
l Vehicles approaching in the opposite
direction.
l Stationary objects (stopped vehicles,
obstructions)
4-108
When Driving
íSome models.
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page242
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (243,1)
qIndication on Display
The Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) operation status is displayed in the
multi-information display in the instrument cluster.
Problems are indicated in the center display (Type B audio). If there is a problem, take
appropriate action according to the displayed message.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-20.
NOTE
l When the ignition is switched off, the operation status before the system was turned off is
maintained. For example, if the ignition is switched off with the Distance Recognition Support
System (DRSS) operable, the system will be operable when the ignition is switched ON the next
time.
l The Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS) can be turned on/off and the system's sensitivity
can be changed using the INFO button on the steering switch.
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
Vehicle ahead
display
Distance between
vehicle display
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-109
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page243
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (244,1)
Distance-between-vehicles guidelines*1
Indication on display
Distance between vehicles
guidelines
(During travel at about 40km/h
(25 mph))
Distance between vehicles
guidelines
(During travel at about 80km/h
(50 mph))
About 25 m (82 ft) About 50 m (164 ft)
About 20 m (66 ft) About 40 m (131 ft)
About 15 m (49 ft) About 30 m (98 ft)
About 10 m (32 ft) About 20 m (65 ft)
About 10 m (32 ft) or less About 20 m (65 ft) or less
*1 The distance between vehicles differs depending on vehicle speed.
4-110
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page244
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (245,1)
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)í
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system is designed to assist the driver in checking the
area to the rear of the vehicle on both sides while the vehicle is reversing by alerting the
driver to the presence of vehicles approaching the rear of the vehicle.
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system detects vehicles approaching from the left and
right sides of the vehicle while the vehicle is being reversed out of a parking space, and
notifies the driver of possible danger using the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning
lights and the warning buzzer.
Detection areas
Your vehicle
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) operation
1. The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system operates when the selector lever is shifted
to the reverse (R) position.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-111íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page245
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (246,1)
2. If there is the possibility of a collision with an approaching vehicle, the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) warning light flashes and the warning beep is activated
simultaneously.
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) warning indication in the rearview monitor also
synchronizes with the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light on the door mirrors.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding area visually before actually putting the vehicle in
reverse:
The system is only designed to assist you in checking for vehicles at the rear when
putting the vehicle in reverse. Due to certain limitations with the operation of this
system, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light may not flash or it might be
delayed even though a vehicle is behind your vehicle. Always make it your
responsibility as a driver to check the rear.
4-112
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page246
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (247,1)
NOTE
l In the following cases, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indication/indicator light turns on
and operation of the system is stopped. If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indication/
indicator light remains illuminated, have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as
soon as possible.
l Some problem with the system including the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights has
occurred.
l A large deviation in the installation position of a radar sensor (rear) on the vehicle has
occurred.
l There is a large accumulation of snow or ice on the rear bumper near a radar sensor (rear).
l Driving on snow-covered roads for long periods.
l The temperature near the radar sensors becomes extremely hot due to driving for long periods
on slopes during the summer.
l The battery voltage has decreased.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-113
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page247
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (248,1)
l Under the following conditions, the radar sensors (rear) cannot detect target objects or it may be
difficult to detect them.
l The vehicle speed when reversing is about 12 km/h (7 mph) or faster.
l The radar sensor (rear) detection area is obstructed by a nearby wall or parked vehicle.
Reverse the vehicle to a position where the radar sensor detection area is no longer
obstructed.)
Your vehicle
l A vehicle is approaching directly from the rear of your vehicle.
Your vehicle
l The vehicle is parked on a slant.
Your vehicle
l Directly after pressing the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch and the system becomes
operable.
l In the following cases, it may be difficult to view the illumination/flashing of the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) warning lights equipped on the door mirrors.
l Snow or ice adheres to the door mirrors.
l The front door glass is fogged or covered in snow, frost or dirt.
l Turn off the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system while pulling a trailer or while an accessory
such as a bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, the radio waves emitted
by the radar will be blocked causing the system to not operate normally.
4-114
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page248
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (249,1)
l The radar sensors of the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system may be regulated under the
radio wave related laws of the country where the vehicle is driven. The sensors in this system are
approved for use in the U.S.A. (including territories), Canada, and Mexico. If a vehicle with a
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system is driven in a country other than the U.S.A., Canada, or
Mexico, the system has to be turned off using the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-115
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page249
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (250,1)
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)í
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is designed to maintain headway
control*1 according to the vehicle speed using a radar sensor to detect the distance to a
vehicle ahead, and by presetting the vehicle speed between 30 km/h (19 mph) and 145
km/h (90 mph), the driver is freed from having to constantly use the accelerator or brake
pedals.
*1 Headway Control: Control of the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead
detected by the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system.
Additionally, if your vehicle starts closing in on the vehicle ahead because, for example,
the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, a warning sound and a warning indication in the display
are activated simultaneously to alert you to maintain a sufficient distance between the
vehicles.
Use the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system on expressways and other highways
which do not require a lot of repeated acceleration and deceleration.
4-116
When Driving
íSome models.
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page250
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (251,1)
WARNING
Do not rely completely on the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system and
always drive carefully:
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is designed to reduce load on the
driver, and although it maintains a constant vehicle speed, or specifically, it
maintains a constant distance between your vehicle and the detected vehicle ahead
according to the vehicle speed, the system has detection limitations depending on the
type of vehicle ahead and its conditions, the weather conditions, and the road
conditions. Additionally, the system may be unable to decelerate sufficiently to avoid
hitting the vehicle ahead if the vehicle ahead applies the brakes suddenly or another
vehicle cuts into the driving lane, which could result in an accident. Always verify the
safety of the surrounding area and depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal
while keeping a safer distance from vehicles ahead or on-coming vehicles.
Do not use the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system in the following locations.
Otherwise, it could lead to an accident:
Ø Roads with sharp curves and where vehicle traffic is heavy and there is insufficient
space between vehicles. Roads where frequent and repetitive acceleration and
deceleration occur (Driving under these conditions using the Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC) system is not possible).
Ø When entering and exiting interchanges, service areas, and parking areas of
highways (If you exit a highway while headway control is in use, the vehicle
ahead will no longer be tracked and your vehicle may accelerate to the set speed).
Ø Slippery roads such as ice or snow-bound roads (The tires could spin causing you
to lose vehicle control).
Ø Long descending slopes (to maintain distance between vehicles, the system
automatically and continuously applies the brakes which could result in the loss
of brake power).
For the purposes of safety, switch the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system off
when it is not being used.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is towed or you are towing something, switch the Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC) system off to prevent an incorrect operation.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-117
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page251
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (252,1)
NOTE
l The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system operates when all of the following conditions
are met.
l The vehicle speed is about 30 km/h (19 mph) to 145 km/h (90 mph).
l The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is turned on.
l The parking brake is not applied.
l The Smart Brake Support (SBS) is not malfunctioning.
l The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is operating normally.
l The selector lever is in the drive (D) position or manual (M) position (manual mode).
l In the following cases, the warnings may not activate even if your vehicle starts closing in on the
vehicle ahead.
l You are driving at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.
l Directly after the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system has been set.
l When the accelerator pedal is depressed or directly after the accelerator pedal is released.
l Another vehicle cuts into the driving lane.
l The following are not detected as physical objects.
l Vehicles approaching in the opposite direction
l Pedestrians
l Stationary objects (stopped vehicles, obstructions)
l If a vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely low speed, the system may not detect it correctly.
l During headway control travel, do not set the system on two-wheeled vehicles such as motorcycles
and bicycles.
l Do not use the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system under conditions in which the close
proximity warnings are frequently activated.
l During headway control travel, the system accelerates and decelerates your vehicle in
conjunction with the speed of the vehicle ahead. However, if it is necessary to accelerate for a lane
change or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly causing you to close in on the vehicle rapidly,
accelerate using the accelerator pedal or decelerate using the brake pedal depending on the
conditions.
l While the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is in use, it does not cancel even if the
selector lever is operated and any intended engine braking will not occur. If deceleration is
required, lower the vehicle speed setting or depress the brake pedal.
l The brake lights are illuminated while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) automatic
braking is operating.
l The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) warning light (amber) turns on when the system has a
malfunction.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-20.
l The headway control operation can be canceled and the system can be switched to only cruise
control.
Refer to Cruise Control Function on page 4-123.
4-118
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page252
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (253,1)
qMazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Display Indication
The setting status and operation conditions of the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
system are indicated in the multi-information display.
Vehicle ahead display
MRCC Set vehicle speed
MRCC Distance between
vehicle display
qClose Proximity Warning
If your vehicle rapidly closes in on the
vehicle ahead because the vehicle applies
the brakes suddenly while you are
traveling in headway control, the warning
sound activates and the brake warning is
indicated in the display. Always verify the
safety of the surrounding area and depress
the brake pedal while keeping a safer
distance from the vehicle ahead.
Additionally, always keep a safer distance
from the vehicles behind you.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-119
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page253
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (254,1)
qSetting the System
CANCEL switch
switch
switch
RES switch
OFF switch ON switch
Cruise control
SET+/SET- switch
When the ON switch is pressed, the vehicle speed and the distance between vehicles while
in headway control can be set. The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) indication is
shown in the display of the instrument cluster.
NOTE
l When the ignition is switched to ACC or OFF while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) is
ON, the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) remains ON automatically.
l When the ON switch is pressed continuously for about 2 seconds while the Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC) system is turned on, the system switches the function to only cruise control.
4-120
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page254
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (255,1)
How to Set the Speed
1. Adjust the vehicle speed to the desired
setting using the accelerator pedal.
2. Headway control begins when the
SET or SET switch is pressed.
The set speed and the inter-vehicle
distance display filled with white lines
are displayed. The Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC) indicator light (green)
is indicated simultaneously.
Travel status Display
During travel at constant
speed
During travel under
headway control
NOTE
l If a vehicle ahead is detected while
traveling at a constant speed, the vehicleahead indication is displayed and headway
control is performed. Additionally, when a
vehicle ahead is no longer detected, the
vehicle-ahead indication turns off and the
system switches back to travel at constant
speed.
l If you are driving the vehicle at a speed
faster than the set speed, headway control
on the vehicle ahead is not possible Adjust
the system to the desired vehicle speed
using the accelerator pedal.
How to Set the Distance Between
Vehicles During Headway Control
The distance between vehicles is set to a
shorter distance each time the switch
is pressed. The distance between vehicles
is set to a longer distance by pressing the
switch. The distance-between-vehicles
can be set to 4 levels; Long, medium,
short, and extremely short distance.
Distance-between-vehicles guideline
(at 80 km/h (50 mph)
vehicle speed)
Indication on display
Long
(about 50 m (164 ft))
Medium
(about 40 m (131 ft))
Short
(about 30 m (98 ft))
Extremely short
(about 25 m (82 ft))
NOTE
l The distance between vehicles differs
depending on the vehicle speed, and the
slower the vehicle speed, the shorter the
distance.
l When the ignition is switched to ACC or
OFF and then the engine is started again,
the system automatically sets the distance
between vehicles to the previous setting.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-121
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page255
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (256,1)
Changing the Set Vehicle Speed
Changing the set vehicle speed using
the SET switch
Press the SET switch to accelerate.
Press the SET switch to decelerate.
The set vehicle speed changes as follows
each time the SET switch is pressed.
Short press 1 km/h (1 mph)
Long press 10 km/h (5 mph)
NOTE
For example, the set vehicle speed is changed
by pressing the SET switch four times as
follows:
The vehicle speed accelerates or decelerates
by 4 km/h (4 mph).
To accelerate using the accelerator
pedal
Depress the accelerator pedal and press
and release the SET or SET switch at
the desired speed. If a switch cannot be
operated, the system returns to the set
speed when you release your foot from
the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION
The warnings and brake control do
not operate while the accelerator
pedal is depressed.
NOTE
l When accelerating using the SET switch
while in headway control, the set vehicle
speed can be adjusted but acceleration is
not possible. If there is no longer a vehicle
ahead, acceleration continues until
reaching the set vehicle speed. Check the
set vehicle speed by viewing the set vehicle
speed display in the display in the
instrument cluster.
l When depressing the accelerator pedal, the
inter-vehicle distance display in the display
in the instrument cluster changes to the
white-line display.
l The minimum settable speed is 30 km/h (19
mph). If the set vehicle speed reaches 30
km/h (19 mph) using the switch operation,
constant speed travel is maintained at
about 30 km/h (19 mph) even if the SET
switch is pressed. The Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC) system is not canceled.
To Deactivate
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) is canceled when the OFF
switch is pressed.
When the system is temporarily
canceled
In the following cases, the Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC) system is
temporarily canceled and the “MRCC
Cancelled” indication is displayed in the
display in the instrument cluster. The
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
indicator light (green) turns off
simultaneously.
l The CANCEL switch is pressed.
l The brake pedal is depressed.
l The parking brake is applied.
l The selector lever is shifted to park (P),
neutral (N) or reverse (R).
4-122
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page256
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (257,1)
l In the following cases, the “MRCC
Cancelled” indication is displayed and
the beep sounds one time.
l The vehicle speed decreases to less
than 25 km (16 mph).
l The DSC has operated.
l The TCS has operated for a certain
period of time.
l The Smart City Brake Support
(SCBS) has operated.
l The Smart Brake Support (SBS) has
operated.
l When traveling on a down slope for
a long period of time.
l There is a problem with the system.
NOTE
l The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
system may be canceled during rain, fog,
snow or other inclement weather
conditions, or the front surface of the
radiator grille is dirty.
l If you have temporarily canceled the Mazda
Radar Cruise Control (MRCC), you can
return to your previously set speed by
pressing the RES switch and after all of the
operation conditions have been met.
l If the OFF switch is pressed to cancel the
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC), the
system does not return to the previously set
speed even if the RES switch is pressed.
qCruise Control Function
While this function is operating, the
headway control operation is canceled and
only the cruise control function operates.
The vehicle speed can be set more than
about 25 km/h (16 mph).
Use the cruise control function on
expressways and other highways which
do not require a lot of repeated
acceleration and deceleration.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control function
in the following locations:
Otherwise, it could lead to an
accident.
Ø Roads with sharp curves and
where vehicle traffic is heavy and
there is insufficient space between
vehicles. (Driving under these
conditions using the cruise control
function is not possible)
Ø Steep down slopes (Set speed may
be exceeded because sufficient
engine braking cannot be applied)
Ø Slippery roads such as ice or
snow-bound roads (Tires could
spin causing you to lose vehicle
control)
Always drive carefully:
The warnings and brake control will
not operate after the headway
control function is canceled and the
system is switched to only the cruise
control function. Depress the brake
pedal to decelerate according to the
surrounding conditions while keeping
a safer distance from the vehicle
ahead and always driving carefully.
Switching to cruise control function
When the ON switch is pressed
continuously for about 2 seconds while
the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
system is turned on, the system is
switched to the cruise control function.
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) indicator light (green) in the
instrument cluster turns off and a message
is displayed in the multi-information
display at the same time.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-123
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page257
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (258,1)
WARNING
Always turn off the cruise control
function when it is not in use:
Leaving the cruise control function
turned on when it is not in use is
dangerous as it could operate
unexpectedly, resulting in an
accident.
How to set the speed
Adjust the system to the desired vehicle
speed using the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control function begins when the
SET or SET switch is pressed.
NOTE
l The system may not be able to maintain the
set speed constantly depending on driving
conditions such as steep up or down slopes.
l The speed will continue increasing while
the SET switch is pressed and held. The
speed will continue decreasing while the
SET switch is pressed and held.
How to increase the set speed
The set speed can be increased using the
following operations:
To increase speed using the SET
switch
Press and hold the SET switch and
release the switch at the desired speed.
The set speed can be adjusted
incrementally (1 km/h (1 mph)
increments) by pressing the switch and
releasing it immediately. For example, if
the switch is pressed 4 times, the set speed
increases by about 4 km/h (4 mph).
To increase speed using accelerator
pedal
Depress the accelerator pedal and press
the SET or SET switch at the
desired speed.
If the switch is not operated, the system
returns to the set speed after you release
your foot from the accelerator pedal.
How to Decrease the Set Speed
Press the SET switch continuously and
release the switch at the desired speed.
The set speed can be adjusted
incrementally (1 km/h (1 mph)
increments) by pressing the switch and
releasing it immediately. For example, if
the switch is pressed 4 times, the set
vehicle speed decreases by about 4 km/h
(4 mph).
Cancelling the function
Cancelling using OFF switch
When the OFF switch is pressed, the
cruise control function is cancelled.
Cancelling using ON switch
When the ON switch is pressed
continuously for about 2 seconds, the
cruise control function is canceled and the
headway control function is made
available for operation.
The cruise control function is canceled
automatically in the following cases. If the
RESUME switch is pressed while the
vehicle speed is 25 km/h (16 mph) or
higher, the speed returns to the original set
speed.
l The CANCEL switch is pressed.
l The brake pedal is depressed.
l The parking brake is applied.
l The selector lever is shifted to P or N
position.
4-124
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page258
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (259,1)
NOTE
l If the vehicle speed decreases by about 15
km/h (9.4 mph) or more than the set speed,
the cruise control function may be
canceled.
l When the vehicle speed is less than 21 km/h
(13 mph), the cruise control function is
canceled. In this case, the vehicle speed will
not return to the original set speed even if
the vehicle is accelerated to 25 km/h (16
mph) or higher and the RES switch is
pressed. Reset the cruise control function.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-125
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page259
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (260,1)
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)í
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system is designed to reduce damage in the event of
a collision by operating the brake control (SCBS brake) when the system's laser sensor
detects a vehicle ahead and determines that a collision with a vehicle ahead is unavoidable.
It may also be possible to avoid a collision if the relative speed between your vehicle and a
vehicle ahead is less than about 20 km/h (12 mph).
In addition, when the driver depresses the brake pedal while the system is in the operation
range at about 4 to 30 km/h (2 to 18 mph), the brakes are applied firmly and quickly to
assist. (Brake Assist (SCBS brake assist))
Laser Sensor (Front)
WARNING
Do not rely on the Smart City Brake Support System (SCBS) as a substitute for safer
driving:
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system cannot compensate for unsafe and
reckless driving, excessive speed, tailgating (following another vehicle too closely),
and driving on slippery roads such as wet, snowy, and icy roads (reduced tire friction
and road contact because of water on the road surface). You can still have an
accident.
4-126
When Driving
íSome models.
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page260
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (261,1)
Do not rely completely on the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system:
Ø The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system is only designed to reduce damage in
the event of a collision. Over reliance on the system leading to the accelerator
pedal or brake pedal being mistakenly operated could result in an accident.
Ø The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) is a system which operates in response to a
vehicle ahead. The system may not be able to detect or react to two-wheeled
vehicles or pedestrians.
Ø The laser sensor for the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system is installed near
the rearview mirror. To assure the correct operation of the Smart City Brake
Support (SCBS), heed the following cautions.
Ø Do not apply stickers to the surface of the windshield near the laser sensor
(including transparent stickers). Otherwise, the laser sensor may not be able to
detect vehicles ahead which could result in an accident.
Ø Do not apply coating agent to the windshield. Otherwise, the laser sensor may
not be able to detect vehicles in front which could result in an accident.
Ø Do not disassemble the laser sensor.
Ø If cracks or damage caused by flying gravel or debris is visible near the laser
sensor, stop using the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system immediately
and have your vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer. If the vehicle
continues to be driven with cracks or scratch marks left on the windshield near
the laser sensor, the system may operate unnecessarily and cause an
unexpected accident.
Refer to Stopping the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) System Operation on
page 4-130.
Ø When replacing the windshield wipers or windshield, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Do not modify the suspension:
If the vehicle height or inclination is changed, the system will not be able to correctly
detect vehicles ahead. This will result in the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system
not operating normally or mistakenly operating, which could cause a serious
accident.
Turn off the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) when the vehicle is running on a chassis
roller or being towed:
Turn off the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system to prevent mistaken operation
when the vehicle is running on a chassis roller or being towed. See the next page on
how to turn off the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS).
Refer to Stopping the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) System Operation on page
4-130.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-127
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page261
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (262,1)
CAUTION
Ø When driving off-road in areas where there is grass or forage, it is recommended
that the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system be turned off.
Ø Always use tires for all wheels that are of the specified size, and the same
manufacturer, brand, and tread pattern. In addition, do not use tires with
significantly different wear patterns on the same vehicle as the Smart City Brake
Support (SCBS) system may not operate normally.
Ø The laser sensor includes a function for detecting a soiled windshield and
informing the driver, however, depending on the conditions, it may not detect
plastic shopping bags, ice or snow on the windshield. In such cases, the system
cannot accurately determine a vehicle ahead and may not be able to operate
normally. Always drive carefully and pay attention to the road ahead.
4-128
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page262
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (263,1)
NOTE
l The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system will not operate if the driver is deliberately
performing driving operations (accelerator pedal and steering wheel).
l The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system will operate under the following conditions.
l The engine is running.
l “SCBS Forward malfunction” is not displayed in the multi-information display.
l The vehicle speed is between about 4 to 30 km/h (2 to 18 mph).
l The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system is not turned off.
l The DSC is not malfunctioning.
l The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) detects a vehicle ahead by emitting a near-infrared laser
beam and receiving the beam reflected off the reflector of the vehicle ahead, and then using it for
the measurement. Consequently, the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) may not operate under the
following conditions:
l Reflection of the laser is poor due to the shape of the vehicle ahead.
l The vehicle ahead is significantly dirty.
l Under bad weather condition, such as rain, fog and snow.
l The window washer is being used or the windshield wipers are not used when it's raining.
l The windshield is dirty.
l The steering wheel is turned completely left or right, or the vehicle is accelerated rapidly and
comes close to the vehicle ahead.
l Trucks with low loading platforms and vehicles with an extremely low or high profile.
l Vehicles with certain shapes such as a vehicle carrier.
l Under the following conditions, the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system may not operate
normally.
l Heavy luggage is loaded in the luggage compartment or on the rear seat.
l If there is the possibility of partial contact with a vehicle ahead.
l When driving on continuously curving roads, and entering and exiting exits.
l Elongated luggage or cargo is loaded onto installed roof rails and covers the laser sensor.
l Exhaust gas from the vehicle in front, sand, snow, and water vapor rising from manholes and
grating, and water splashed into the air.
l When towing a malfunctioning vehicle.
l When driving with tires having significantly different wear.
l In the following cases, the laser sensor may inadvertently determine that there is a vehicle ahead
and the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system may operate.
l Objects on the road at the entrance to a curve.
l Vehicles passing in the opposite lane while making a curve.
l Metal objects, bumps, or protruding objects on the road.
l When passing through a toll gate equipped with a bar.
l When passing under a vinyl curtain or flag.
l Plastic objects such as pylons.
l Two-wheeled vehicles, pedestrians, animals or standing trees.
l When the system operates, the user is notified by the flashing Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
warning indication and the multi-information display.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-129
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page263
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (264,1)
qAutomatic Brake Operation Display
“Smart City Brake Support activated” is
displayed in the multi-information display
while the SCBS brakes or the brake assist
(SCBS brake assist) is operating.
NOTE
l The collision warning beep sounds
intermittently while the SCBS brake or
brake assist (SCBS brake assist) is
operating.
l If the vehicle is stopped by the SCBS
operation and the brake pedal is not
depressed, the warning beep sounds one
time after about 2 seconds and the SCBS
brake is automatically released.
qStopping the Smart City Brake
Support (SCBS) System Operation
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
system can be temporarily deactivated.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
When the Smart City Brake Support
(SCBS) system is turned off, the Smart
City Brake Support (SCBS) OFF indicator
light turns on.
When the engine is restarted, the system
becomes operational.
4-130
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page264
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (265,1)
Smart Brake Support (SBS)í
Smart Brake Support (SBS) is a system which alerts the driver of a possible collision using
an indicator and warning sound in the instrument cluster while the vehicle is being driven
at about 15 km/h or faster (10 mph or faster) and the system's radar sensor determines that
your vehicle may hit a vehicle ahead. Furthermore, if the radar sensor determines that a
collision is unavoidable, the automatic brake control is performed to reduce damage in the
event of a collision.
In addition, when the driver depresses the brake pedal, the brakes operate more quickly to
assist the driver (vehicles with brake fluid pre-fill).
WARNING
Do not rely completely on the Smart Brake Support (SBS) system and always drive
carefully:
The Smart Brake Support (SBS) is designed to reduce damage in the event of a
collision, not avoid an accident. The ability to detect an obstruction is limited
depending on the obstruction, weather conditions, or traffic conditions. Therefore, if
the accelerator pedal or brake pedal is mistakenly operated it could result in an
accident. Always verify the safety of the surrounding area and depress the brake
pedal or accelerator pedal while keeping a safer distance from vehicles ahead or oncoming vehicles.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is towed or you are towing something, switch the Smart Brake Support
(SBS) system off to prevent a mistaken operation.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-131íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page265
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (266,1)
NOTE
l The Smart Brake Support (SBS) system operates when all of the following conditions are met:
l The ignition is switched ON.
l The Smart Brake Support (SBS) system is on.
l The vehicle speed is about 15 km/h or faster (10 mph or faster).
l The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is about 15 km/h or faster (10
mph or faster).
l The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is not operating.
l The Smart Brake Support (SBS) system may not operate under the following conditions:
l If the vehicle is accelerated rapidly and it comes close to a vehicle ahead.
l The vehicle is driven at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.
l The accelerator pedal is depressed.
l The brake pedal is depressed.
l The steering wheel is being operated.
l The selector lever is being operated.
l The turn signal is being used.
l When the vehicle ahead is not equipped with taillights or the taillights are turned off.
l When warnings and messages, such as a dirty windshield, related to the Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC)/laser sensor (front) are being displayed in the multi-information display.
l Although the objects which activate the system are four-wheeled vehicles, the radar sensor could
detect the following objects, determine them to be an obstruction, and operate the Smart Brake
Support (SBS) system.
l Objects on the road at the entrance to a curve (including guardrails and snow banks).
l A vehicle appears in the opposite lane while cornering or rounding a curve.
l When crossing a narrow bridge.
l When passing under a low gate or through a tunnel or narrow gate.
l When entering an underground parking area.
l Metal objects, bumps, or protruding objects on the road.
l If you suddenly come close to a vehicle ahead.
l When driving in areas where there is high grass or forage.
l Two-wheeled vehicles such as motorbikes or bicycles.
l Pedestrians or non-metallic objects such as standing trees.
l When the system operates, the user is notified by the multi-information display.
4-132
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page266
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (267,1)
qCollision Warning
If there is the possibility of a collision
with a vehicle ahead, the beep sounds
continuously and a warning is indicated in
the multi-information display.
qStopping The Smart Brake
Support (SBS) System Operation
The Smart Brake Support (SBS) system
can be temporarily deactivated.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
When the Smart Brake Support (SBS)
system is turned off, the Smart Brake
Support (SBS) OFF indicator light turns
on.
When the engine is restarted, the system
becomes operational.
NOTE
If the Smart Brake Support (SBS) system
operation is turned off, the Smart City Brake
Support (SCBS) system operation is turned off
simultaneously.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-133
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page267
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (268,1)
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)í
Your vehicle is equipped with a Forward Sensing Camera (FSC). The Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC) is positioned near the rearview mirror and used by the following systems.
l High Beam Control System (HBC)
l Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
l Smart Brake Support (SBS)
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) determines the conditions ahead of the vehicle while
traveling at night and detects traffic lanes. The distance in which the Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC) can detect objects varies depending on the surrounding conditions.
4-134
When Driving
íSome models.
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page268
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (269,1)
CAUTION
Ø Do not apply accessories, stickers or film to the windshield near the Forward
Sensing Camera (FSC).
If the area in front of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens is obstructed, it will
cause the system to not operate correctly. Consequently, each system may not
operate normally which could lead to an unexpected accident.
Ø Do not disassemble or modify the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).
Disassembly or modification of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) will cause a
malfunction or mistaken operation. Consequently, each system may not operate
normally which could lead to an unexpected accident.
Ø Heed the following cautions to assure the correct operation of the Forward
Sensing Camera (FSC).
Ø The direction of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) has been finely adjusted,
therefore do not change the installation position or remove the Forward
Sensing Camera (FSC).
Ø Be careful not to scratch the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens or allow it to
get dirty.
Ø Do not remove the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) cover.
Ø Do not place objects on the dashboard which reflect light.
Ø Always keep the windshield glass around the camera clean by removing dirt or
fogging. Use the windshield defroster to remove fogging on the windshield.
Ø Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer regarding cleaning the interior side of the
windshield around the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).
Ø Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before performing repairs around the
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).
Ø The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is installed to the windshield. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer for windshield repair and replacement.
Ø When performing repairs around the rearview mirror, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Ø Do not hit or apply strong force to the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) or the
area around it. If strong force is applied, stop using the Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS), the High Beam Control System (HBC), and Smart
Brake Support (SBS) and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Ø The direction in which the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is pointed has been
finely adjusted. Do not change the installation position of the Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC) or remove it. Otherwise, it could result in damage or malfunction.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-135
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page269
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (270,1)
NOTE
l In the following cases, the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) cannot detect target objects correctly,
and each system may be unable to operate normally.
l The height of the vehicle ahead is low.
l You drive your vehicle at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.
l Headlights are not turned on during the night or when going through a tunnel.
l In the following cases, the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) may not be able to detect target
objects correctly.
l When driving next to walls with no patterning (including fences and longitudinally striped
walls).
l The taillights of the vehicle ahead are turned off.
l A vehicle is outside the illumination range of the headlights.
l The vehicle is making a sharp curve, or ascending or descending a steep slope.
l Entering or exiting a tunnel.
l Heavy luggage is loaded causing the vehicle to tilt.
l Strong light is shone at the front of the vehicle (back light or high-beam light from on-coming
vehicles).
l There are many light emitters on the vehicle ahead.
l When the vehicle ahead is not equipped with taillights or the taillights are turned off at
nighttime.
l The vehicle ahead has a special shape.
4-136
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page270
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (271,1)
Radar Sensor (Front)í
Your vehicle is equipped with a radar sensor (front).
The following systems also use the radar sensor (front).
l Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
l Distance Recognition Support System (DRSS)
l Smart Brake Support (SBS)
The radar sensor (front) functions by detecting the radio waves reflected off a vehicle
ahead or an obstruction sent from the radar sensor.
The radar sensor (front) is mounted behind the front emblem.
Radar Sensor (Front)
If “Front radar blocked” is displayed in the multi-information display of the instrument
cluster, clean the area around the radar sensor (front).
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-137íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page271
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (272,1)
CAUTION
Heed the following precautions to assure correct operation of each system.
Ø Do not adhere stickers (including transparent stickers) to the surface of the
radiator grille and front emblem in and around the radar sensor (front), and do
not replace the radiator grille and front emblem with any product that is not a
genuine product designed for use with the radar sensor (front).
Ø The radar sensor (front) includes a function for detecting soiling of the radar
sensor's front surface and informing the driver, however, depending on the
conditions, it may require time to detect or it may not detect plastic shopping
bags, ice or snow. If this occurs, the system may not operate correctly, therefore
always keep the radar sensor (front) clean.
Ø Do not install a grille guard.
Ø If the front part of the vehicle has been damaged in a vehicle accident, the
position of the radar sensor (front) may have moved. Stop the system immediately
and always have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Ø Do not use the front bumper to push other vehicles or obstructions such as when
pulling out of a parking space. Otherwise, the radar sensor (front) could be hit
and its position deviated.
Ø Do not remove, disassemble, or modify the radar sensor (front).
Ø For repairs, replacement or paint work around the radar sensor (front), consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Ø Do not modify the suspension. If the suspension are modified, the vehicle's posture
could change and the radar sensor (front) may not be able to correctly detect a
vehicle ahead or an obstruction.
4-138
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page272
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (273,1)
NOTE
l Under the following conditions, the radar sensor (front) may not be able to detect vehicles ahead
or obstructions correctly and each system may not operate normally.
l The rear surface of a vehicle ahead does not reflect radio waves effectively, such as an
unloaded trailer or an automobile with a loading platform covered by a soft top, vehicles with
a hard plastic tailgate, and round-shaped vehicles.
l Vehicles ahead with low vehicle height and thus less area for reflecting radio waves.
l Visibility is reduced due to a vehicle ahead casting off water, snow, or sand from its tires and
onto your windshield.
l The trunk/luggage compartment is loaded with heavy objects or the rear passenger seats are
occupied.
l Ice, snow, or soiling is on the front surface of the front emblem.
l During inclement weather such as rain, snow, or sand storms.
l When driving near facilities or objects emitting strong radio waves.
l Under the following conditions, the radar sensor (front) may not be able to detect vehicles ahead
or obstructions.
l The beginning and end of a curve.
l Roads with continuous curves.
l Narrow lane roads due to road construction or lane closures.
l The vehicle ahead enters the radar sensor's blind spot.
l The vehicle ahead is running abnormally due to accident or vehicle damage.
l Roads with repeated up and down slopes
l Driving on poor roads or unpaved roads.
l The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is extremely short.
l A vehicle suddenly comes close such as by cutting into the lane.
l To prevent incorrect operation of the system, use tires of the same specified size, manufacturer,
brand, and tread pattern on all four wheels. In addition, do not use tires with significantly
different wear patterns or tire pressures on the same vehicle (Including the temporary spare tire).
l If the battery power is weak, the system may not operate correctly.
l When driving on roads with little traffic and few vehicles ahead or obstructions for the radar
sensor (front) to detect, “Radar blocked” may be temporarily displayed, however, this does not
indicate a problem.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-139
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page273
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (274,1)
Laser Sensor (Front)í
Your vehicle is equipped with a laser sensor (front). The laser sensor (front) is positioned
near the rearview mirror and used by the following systems.
l Smart Brake Support (SBS)
l Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
CAUTION
Heed the following precautions to assure correct operation of the system.
Ø Keep the windshield clean at all times.
Ø Do not apply stickers to the surface of the windshield (including transparent
stickers).
Ø If cracks or damage caused by flying gravel or debris is visible near the laser
sensor (front), stop using the system immediately and have your vehicle inspected
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
See the next page on how to turn off the system. Refer to Personalization Features
on page 9-10.
Ø Do not apply a coating agent to the windshield.
Ø When replacing the windshield wipers or windshield, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Ø Never remove the sensor.
Ø A removed sensor will not meet the conditions for a class 1M laser under the IEC
60825-1 specification and therefore eye safety cannot be assured.
Ø Do not peer into the sensor using optical instruments with a magnification
function such as magnifying glasses, and microscopic and objective lenses within
a distance of 100 mm (3.94 in) from the sensor.
4-140
When Driving
íSome models.
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page274
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (275,1)
Laser sensor radiation data
Maximum average power:45 mW
Pulse duration:33 ns
Wavelength:905 nm
Divergence angle (horizontal×vertical):28 degrees×12 degrees
NOTE
l In the following cases, the laser sensor (front) cannot detect vehicles ahead correctly, and each
system may be unable to operate normally.
l The windshield is dirty.
l Elongated luggage or cargo is loaded onto installed roof rails and covers the laser sensor
(front).
l Exhaust gas from the vehicle in front, sand, snow, and water vapor rising from manholes and
grating, and water splashed into the air.
l If there are recognizable cracks or damage caused by flying gravel or debris on the windshield,
always have the windshield replaced. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for replacement.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-141
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page275
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (276,1)
Radar Sensors (Rear)í
Your vehicle is equipped with radar sensors (rear). The following systems also use the
radar sensors (rear).
l Blind Spot Monitoring system (BSM)
l Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
The radar sensors (rear) function by detecting the radio waves reflected off a vehicle
approaching from the rear or an obstruction sent from the radar sensor.
Radar Sensors (Rear)
The radar sensors (rear) are installed inside the rear bumper, one each on the left and right
sides.
Always keep the surface of the rear bumper near the radar sensors (rear) clean so that the
radar sensors (rear) operate normally. Also, do not apply items such as stickers.
Refer to Exterior Care on page 6-62.
CAUTION
If the rear bumper receives a severe impact, the system may no longer operate
normally. Stop the system immediately and have the vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
4-142
When Driving
íSome models.
i-ACTIVSENSE
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page276
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (277,1)
NOTE
l The detection ability of the radar sensors (rear) has limitations. In the following cases, the
detection ability may lower and the system may not operate normally.
l The rear bumper near the radar sensors (rear) has become deformed.
l Snow, ice or mud adheres to the radar sensors (rear) on the rear bumper.
l Under bad weather conditions such as rain, snow and fog.
l Under the following conditions, the radar sensors (rear) cannot detect target objects or it may be
difficult to detect them.
l Stationary objects on a road or a road side such as small, two-wheeled vehicles, bicycles,
pedestrians, animals, and shopping carts.
l Vehicle shapes which do not reflect radar waves well such as empty trailers with a low vehicle
height and sports cars.
l Vehicles are shipped with the direction of the radar sensors (rear) adjusted for each vehicle to a
loaded vehicle condition so that the radar sensors (rear) detect approaching vehicles correctly. If
the direction of the radar sensors (rear) has deviated for some reason, have the vehicle inspected
at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l For repairs or replacement of the radar sensors (rear), or bumper repairs, paintwork, and
replacement near the radar sensors, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l Turn off the system while pulling a trailer or while an accessory such as a bicycle carrier is
installed to the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, the radio waves emitted by the radar will be
blocked causing the system to not operate normally.
l The radar sensors are regulated by the relevant radio wave laws of the country in which the
vehicle is driven. If the vehicle is driven abroad, authorization from the country in which the
vehicle is driven may be required.
When Driving
i-ACTIVSENSE
4-143
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page277
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (278,1)
Cruise Controlí
With cruise control, you can set and automatically maintain any speed of more than about
25 km/h (16 mph).
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under the following conditions:
Using the cruise control under the following conditions is dangerous and could result
in loss of vehicle control.
Ø Hilly terrain
Ø Steep inclines
Ø Heavy or unsteady traffic
Ø Slippery or winding roads
Ø Similar restrictions that require inconsistent speed
qCruise Control Switch
CANCEL switch
OFF switch
ON switch
RES switch
Cruise control
SET+/SET- switch
4-144
When Driving
íSome models.
Cruise Control
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page278
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (279,1)
qActivation/Deactivation
To activate the system, press the ON
switch.
The cruise main indicator light (Amber)
illuminates.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-20.
To deactivate the system, press the OFF
switch.
The cruise main indicator light (Amber)
turns off.
WARNING
Always turn off the cruise control
system when it is not in use:
Leaving the cruise control system in
an activation-ready state while the
cruise control is not in use is
dangerous as the cruise control could
unexpectedly activate if the
activation button is accidentally
pressed, and result in loss of vehicle
control and an accident.
NOTE
When the ignition is switched OFF, the system
status before it was turned off is maintained.
For example, if the ignition is switched OFF
with the cruise control system operable, the
system will be operable when the ignition is
switched ON the next time.
qTo Set Speed
1. Activate the cruise control system by
pressing the ON switch.
The cruise main indicator light
(Amber) illuminates. Refer to Warning/
Indicator Lights on page 4-20.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 25 km/h (16 mph).
3. Set the cruise control by pressing the
SET or SET - switch at the desired
speed. The cruise control is set at the
moment the SET or SET - switch is
pressed. Release the accelerator pedal
simultaneously. The cruise set indicator
light (Green) illuminates.
NOTE
l The cruise control speed setting cannot be
performed under the following conditions:
l (Automatic transaxle)
The selector lever is in the P or N
position.
l (Manual transaxle)
The shift lever is in the neutral position.
l The parking brake is applied.
l Release the SET or SET - switch at the
desired speed, otherwise the speed will
continue increasing while the SET
switch is pressed and held, and continue
decreasing while the SET - switch is pressed
and held (except when the accelerator
pedal is depressed).
l On a steep grade, the vehicle may
momentarily slow down while ascending,
or speed up while descending.
l Cruise control will cancel if the vehicle
speed decreases below 21 km/h (13 mph)
when cruise is activated, such as when
climbing a steep grade.
l Cruise control may cancel at about 15 km/h
(9 mph) below the preset speed (such as
may happen when climbing a long, steep
grade).
When Driving
Cruise Control
4-145
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page279
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (280,1)
For the Type A instrument cluster, the
vehicle speed preset using the cruise
control is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
qTo Increase Cruising Speed
Follow either of these procedures.
To increase speed using cruise control
switch
Press the SET switch and hold it. Your
vehicle will accelerate.
Release the switch at the speed you want.
Press the SET and release it
immediately to adjust the preset speed.
Multiple operations will increase the
preset speed according to the number of
times it is operated.
Increasing speed with a single SET
operation
Meter display for vehicle speed indicated
in km/h: 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
Meter display for vehicle speed indicated
in mph: 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
To increase speed using accelerator
pedal
Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate
to the desired speed. Press the SET or
SET - switch and release it immediately.
NOTE
Accelerate if you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on. Greater speed
will not interfere with or change the set speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator to return to
the set speed.
qTo Decrease Cruising Speed
Press the SET - switch and hold it. The
vehicle will gradually slow.
Release the switch at the speed you want.
Press the SET- switch and release it
immediately to adjust the preset speed.
Multiple operations will decrease the
preset speed according to the number of
times it is operated.
Decreasing speed with a single SEToperation
Meter display for vehicle speed indicated
in km/h: 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
Meter display for vehicle speed indicated
in mph: 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
qTo Resume Cruising Speed at
More Than 25 km/h (16 mph)
If some other method besides the OFF
switch was used to cancel cruising speed
(such as applying the brake pedal) and the
system is still activated, the most recent
set speed will automatically resume when
the RES switch is pressed.
If vehicle speed is below 25 km/h (16
mph), increase the vehicle speed up to 25
km/h (16 mph) or more and press the RES
switch.
4-146
When Driving
Cruise Control
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page280
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (281,1)
qTo Temporarily Cancel
To temporarily cancel the system, use one
of these methods:
l Slightly depress the brake pedal.
l (Manual transaxle)
Depress the clutch pedal.
l Press the CANCEL switch.
If the RESUME switch is pressed when
the vehicle speed is 25 km/h (16 mph) or
higher, the system reverts to the
previously set speed.
NOTE
l If any of the following conditions occur, the
cruise control system is temporarily
canceled.
l The parking brake is applied.
l (Automatic transaxle)
The selector lever is in the P or N
position.
l (Manual transaxle)
The shift lever is in the neutral position.
l When the cruise control system is
temporarily canceled by even one of the
applicable cancel conditions, the speed
cannot be re-set.
l (Automatic transaxle)
The cruise control cannot be cancelled
while driving in manual mode (selector
lever shifted from D to M position).
Therefore, engine braking will not be
applied even if the transaxle is shifted down
to a lower gear. If deceleration is required,
lower the set speed or depress the brake
pedal.
qTo Deactivate
To deactivate the system, press the OFF
switch.
When Driving
Cruise Control
4-147
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page281
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (282,1)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
l The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors the air pressure of all four tires.
If the air pressure of one or more tires is too low, the system warns the driver by
indicating the tire pressure monitoring system warning light in the instrument cluster
(the warning is also indicated in the display on the type A*1 instrument cluster) and
operating a beep sound. The system monitors the tire pressures indirectly using the data
sent from the ABS wheel speed sensors.
To allow the system to operate correctly, the system needs to be initialized with the
specified tire pressure (value on the tire pressure label). Follow the procedure and
perform the initialization.
*1 Refer to Type A on page 4-20.
l For vehicles with the type A*1 instrument cluster, check the vehicle condition or have
the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer according to the indication.
*1 Refer to Type A on page 4-20.
l A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-20.
Refer to Tire Inflation Pressure Warning Beep on page 7-37.
ABS wheel speed sensor
4-148
When Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page282
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (283,1)
CAUTION
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
To avoid false readings, the system samples for a little while before indicating a
problem. As a result it will not instantaneously register a rapid tire deflation or blow
out.
When Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
4-149
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page283
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (284,1)
NOTE
Because this system detects slight changes in tire conditions, the timing of the warning may be faster
or slower in the following cases:
l The size, manufacturer, or the type of tires is different from the specification.
l The size, manufacturer, or the type of a tire is different from the others, or the level of tire wear is
excessively different between them.
l A run-flat tire, studless tire, snow tire, or tire chains are used.
l An emergency tire is used (The tire pressure monitoring system warning light may flash and then
continue illuminating).
l A tire is repaired using the emergency flat tire repair kit.
l The tire pressure is excessively higher than the specified pressure, or the tire pressure is suddenly
lowered for some reason such as a tire burst during driving.
l The vehicle speed is lower than about 15 km/h (9.3 mph) (including when the vehicle is stopped),
or the drive period is shorter than 5 minutes.
l The vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road or a slippery, icy road.
l Hard steering and rapid acceleration/deceleration are repeated such as during aggressive driving
on a winding road.
l Load on the vehicle is applied to a tire such as by loading heavy luggage to one side of the
vehicle.
l System initialization has not been implemented with the specified tire pressure.
qTire Pressure Monitoring System
Initialization
In the following cases, system
initialization must be performed so that
the system operates normally.
l A tire pressure is adjusted.
l Tire rotation is performed.
l A tire or wheel is replaced.
l The battery is replaced or completely
drained.
l The tire pressure monitoring system
warning light is illuminated.
Initialization method
1. Park the car in a safe place and firmly
apply the parking brake.
2. Let the tires cool, then adjust the tire
pressure of all four (4) tires to the
specified pressure indicated on the tire
pressure label located on the door jamb
of the driver's door (door open). Refer
to Tires on page 9-8.
3. Switch the ignition ON.
4-150
When Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page284
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (285,1)
4. While the vehicle is parked, press and
hold the tire pressure monitoring
system set switch and verify that the
tire pressure monitoring system
warning light in the instrument cluster
flashes twice and a beep sound is heard
once.
CAUTION
If the system initialization is
performed without adjusting the tire
pressure, the system cannot detect
the normal tire pressure and it may
not illuminate the tire pressure
monitoring system warning light
even if a tire pressure is low, or it
may illuminate the light even if the
pressures are normal.
Adjust the tire pressure on all four
tires and initialize the system when
the warning light is turned on. If the
warning light turns on for a reason
other than a flat tire, the tire pressure
of all four tires may have decreased
naturally.
The system initialization will not be
performed if the switch is pressed
while the vehicle is being driven.
When Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
4-151
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page285
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (286,1)
Rear View Monitorí
The rear view monitor provides visual images of the rear of the vehicle when reversing.
WARNING
Always drive carefully confirming the safety of the rear and the surrounding
conditions by looking directly with your eyes:
Reversing the vehicle by only looking at the screen is dangerous as it may cause an
accident or a collision with an object. The rear view monitor is only a visual assist
device when reversing the vehicle. The images on the screen may be different from
the actual conditions.
CAUTION
Ø Do not use the rear view monitor under the following conditions: Using the rear
view monitor under the following conditions is dangerous and could result in
injury or vehicle damage or both.
Ø Icy or snow-covered roads.
Ø Tire chains or a temporary spare tire is installed.
Ø The liftgate is not fully closed.
Ø The vehicle is on a road incline.
Ø When the display is cold, images may course across the monitor or the screen and
may be dimmer than usual, which could cause difficulty in confirming the
surrounding conditions of the vehicle. Always drive carefully confirming the safety
of the rear and the surrounding conditions by looking directly with your eyes.
Ø Do not apply excessive force to the camera. The camera position and angle may
deviate.
Ø Do not disassemble, modify, or remove it as it may no longer be waterproof.
Ø The camera cover is made of plastic. Do not apply degreasing agents, organic
solvents, wax, or glass coating agents to the camera cover. If any are spilled on
the cover, wipe off with a soft cloth immediately.
Ø Do not rub the cover excessively, or polish it using an abrasive compound or a
hard brush. The cover may be damaged affecting the image.
4-152
When Driving
íSome models.
Rear View Monitor
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page286
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (287,1)
NOTE
l If water, snow, or mud is stuck on the camera lens, wipe it off using a soft cloth. If it cannot be
wiped off, use a mild detergent.
l If the camera temperature changes rapidly (Hot to cold, cold to hot), the rear view monitor may
not operate correctly.
l When replacing the tires, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Replacing the tires could result in
deviation of the guide lines which appear on the display.
l If the vehicle's front, side, or rear has been involved in a collision, the alignment of the rear view
parking camera (location, installation angle) may have deviated. Always consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
l If “No Video Signal Available” is indicated in the display, there could be a problem with the
camera. Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qRear View Parking Camera Location
Rear View Parking Camera
qSwitching to the Rear View Monitor Display
Shift the shift lever to R with the ignition switched ON to switch the display to the rear
view monitor display.
NOTE
When the shift lever is shifted from R to another shift lever position, the screen returns to the previous
display.
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
4-153
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page287
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (288,1)
qDisplayable Range on the Screen
The images on the screen may be different from the actual conditions.
(Screen display)
(Actual view)
Object
Garnish
Bumper
NOTE
l The displayable range varies depending on the vehicle and road conditions.
l The displayable range is limited. Objects under the bumper or around the bumper ends cannot be
displayed.
l The distance appearing in the displayed image is different from the actual distance because the
rear view parking camera is equipped with a specific lens.
l Some optionally installed vehicle accessories may be picked up by the camera. Do not install any
optional parts that can interfere with the camera view, such as illuminating parts or parts made of
reflective material.
l It may be difficult to see the display under the following conditions, however, it does not indicate a
malfunction.
l In darkened areas.
l When the temperature around the lens is high/low.
l When the camera is wet such as on a rainy day or during periods of high humidity.
l When foreign material such as mud is stuck around the camera.
l When the camera lens reflects sunlight or headlight beams.
l Image display may be delayed if the temperature around the camera is low.
4-154
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page288
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (289,1)
qViewing the Display
Guide lines which indicate the width of the vehicle (yellow) are displayed on the screen as
a reference to the approximate width of the vehicle in comparison to the width of the
parking space you are about to back into.
Use this display view for parking your vehicle in a parking space or garage.
b a a) Vehicle width guide lines (yellow)
Guide lines serve as a reference to the approximate width of the vehicle.
b) Distance guide lines
These guide lines indicate the approximate distance to a point measured from the
vehicle's rear (from the end of the bumper).
The red and yellow lines indicate the points about 50 cm (19 in) for the red line and 100
cm (39.3 in) for the yellow lines from the rear bumper (at the center point of each of the
lines).
CAUTION
The guide lines on the screen are fixed lines. They are not synced to the driver's
turning of the steering wheel. Always be careful and check the area to the vehicle's
rear and the surrounding area directly with your eyes while backing up.
qRear View Monitor Operation
The operation of the rear view monitor when reversing the vehicle varies depending on the
traffic, road, and vehicle conditions. The amount of steering and the timing also varies
depending on conditions, so confirm the surrounding conditions directly with your eyes
and steer the vehicle in accordance with the conditions.
Be well aware of the above cautions prior to using the rear view monitor.
NOTE
Images displayed on the monitor from the rear view parking camera are reversed images (mirror
images).
1. Shift the shift lever to R to switch the display to the rear view monitor display.
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
4-155
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page289
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (290,1)
2. Confirming the surrounding conditions, reverse the vehicle.
(Display condition) (Vehicle condition)
3. After your vehicle begins entering the parking space, continue backing up slowly so that
the distance between the vehicle width lines and the sides of the parking space on the
left and right are roughly equal.
4. Continue to adjust the steering wheel until the vehicle width guide lines are parallel to
the left and right sides of the parking space.
4-156
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page290
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (291,1)
5. Once they are parallel, straighten the wheels and back your vehicle slowly into the
parking space. Continue checking the vehicle's surroundings and then stop the vehicle in
the best possible position. (If the parking space has division lines, check whether the
vehicle width guide lines are parallel to them.)
(Display condition) (Vehicle condition)
6. When the shift lever is shifted from R to another shift lever position, the screen returns
to the previous display.
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
4-157
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page291
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (292,1)
NOTE
Because there may be a difference between the displayed image, such as indicated below, and the
actual conditions when parking, always verify the safety at the rear of the vehicle and the
surrounding area directly with your eyes.
l In the image of the parking space (or garage) displayed below, even though the back end and
distance guide lines appear parallel in the monitor, they may not actually be parallel on the
ground.
l When parking in a space with a division line on only one side of the parking space, the division
line and the vehicle width guide line may appear parallel on the monitor, but they may not
actually be parallel on the ground.
4-158
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page292
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (293,1)
qVariance Between Actual Road Conditions and Displayed Image
Some variance occurs between the actual road and the displayed road. Such variance in
distance perspective could lead to an accident. Note the following conditions that may
cause a variance in distance perspective.
When the vehicle is tilted due to the weight of passengers and load
When the vehicle rear is lowered, the object displayed on the screen appears farther than
the actual distance.
Variance
Object
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
4-159
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page293
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (294,1)
When there is a steep grade behind the vehicle
When there is a steep upgrade (downgrade) behind the vehicle, the object displayed on the
screen appears farther (downgrade: closer) than the actual distance.
Appears
farther than
actual
distance
Appears
closer than
actual
distance
Object at actual
position
Object at actual position
Object on screen
A: Distance between the vehicle and object displayed on the screen.
B: Actual distance between the vehicle and object.
Object on screen
4-160
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page294
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (295,1)
Three-dimensional object on vehicle rear
Because the distance guide lines are displayed based on a flat surface, the distance to the
three-dimensional object displayed on the screen is different from the actual distance.
A
A
C
B
C B
(Actual distance) B>C=A
Sensed distance on screen A>B>C
(Screen display)
(Actual condition)
qPicture Quality Adjustment
WARNING
Always adjust the picture quality of the rear view monitor while the vehicle is
stopped:
Do not adjust the picture quality of the rear view monitor while driving the vehicle.
Adjusting the picture quality of the rear view monitor such as brightness, contrast,
color, and tint while driving the vehicle is dangerous as it could distract your
attention from the vehicle operation which could lead to an accident.
Picture quality adjustment can be done while the shift lever is in reverse (R).
There are four settings which can be adjusted including brightness, contrast, color, and tint.
When adjusting, pay sufficient attention to the vehicle surroundings.
1. Select the icon on the screen to display the tabs.
2. Select the desired tab item.
3. Adjust the brightness, contrast, tint, and color using the slider.
If you need to reset, press the reset button.
4. Select the icon on the screen to close the tab.
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
4-161
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page295
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (296,1)
4-162
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page296
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (297,1)
5 Interior Features
Use of various features for ride comfort, including air-conditioning and audio
system.
Climate Control System ............................................................... 5-2
Operating Tips ........................................................................... 5-2
Vent Operation .......................................................................... 5-3
Manual Type ............................................................................. 5-5
Fully Automatic Type ............................................................... 5-9
Audio System ............................................................................... 5-13
Antenna ................................................................................... 5-13
Operating Tips for Audio System ........................................... 5-13
Audio Set (Type A) ................................................................. 5-21
Audio Set (Type B) ................................................................. 5-32
Audio Control Switch Operation ............................................ 5-51
AUX/USB/iPod mode ............................................................. 5-52
Bluetooth® .................................................................................. 5-69
Bluetooth®í ........................................................................... 5-69
Bluetooth® Hands-Free (Type A)í ........................................ 5-91
Bluetooth® Hands-Free (Type B)í ........................................ 5-98
Bluetooth® Audio (Type A)í .............................................. 5-108
Bluetooth® Audio (Type B)í ............................................... 5-110
Troubleshootingí ................................................................. 5-124
Interior Equipment ................................................................... 5-127
Sunvisors ............................................................................... 5-127
Interior Lights ....................................................................... 5-128
Accessory Sockets ................................................................ 5-130
Cup Holder ............................................................................ 5-132
Bottle Holder ......................................................................... 5-133
Storage Compartments .......................................................... 5-134
5-1íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page297
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (298,1)
Operating Tips
l Operate the climate control system
with the engine running.
l To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the fan control
dial on for a long period of time with
the ignition switched ON when the
engine is not running.
l Clear all obstructions such as leaves,
snow and ice from the hood and the air
inlet in the cowl grille to improve the
system efficiency.
l Use the climate control system to defog
the windows and dehumidify the air.
l The recirculate mode should be used
when driving through tunnels or while
in a traffic jam, or when you would like
to shut off outside air for quick cooling
of the interior.
l Use the outside air mode for ventilation
or windshield defrosting.
l If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows to let warm air escape, then
run the climate control system.
l Run the air conditioner about 10
minutes at least once a month to keep
internal parts lubricated.
l Have the air conditioner checked
before the weather gets hot. Lack of
refrigerant may make the air
conditioner less efficient.
The refrigerant specifications are
indicated on a label attached to the
inside of the engine compartment.
Check the label before refilling the
refrigerant. If the wrong type of
refrigerant is used, it could result in a
serious malfunction of the air
conditioner.
For details, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Label
5-2
Interior Features
Climate Control System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page298
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (299,1)
Vent Operation
qAdjusting the Vents
Directing airflow
To adjust the direction of airflow, move
the adjustment knob.
NOTE
l When using the air conditioner under
humid ambient temperature conditions, the
system may blow fog from the vents. This is
not a sign of trouble but a result of humid
air being suddenly cooled.
l The air vents can be fully opened and
closed by operating the dial.
Side Vents
Open
Knob
Dial
Close
Center Vents
Knob
Interior Features
Climate Control System
5-3
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page299
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (300,1)
qSelecting the Airflow Mode
Dashboard Vents
Dashboard and Floor Vents
Floor Vents
Defroster and Floor Vents
Defroster Vents
5-4
Interior Features
Climate Control System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page300
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (301,1)
Manual Type
A/C switch Air intake selector switch Rear window defogger switch
Mode selector dial Fan control dialTemperature control dial
qControl Switches
Temperature control dial
This dial controls temperature. Turn it
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise
for cold.
NOTE
When the mode is set to or with the fan
control dial in a position other than 0 and the
temperature control dial in the maximum cold
position, the air intake selector switch to the
recirculated air mode and the A/C turns on
automatically.
If A/C is not desired, press the A/C switch to
turn it off.
Fan control dial
This dial allows variable fan speeds.
The fan has seven speeds.
Mode selector dial
Turn the mode selector dial to select
airflow mode (page 5-4).
NOTE
l The mode selector dial can be set at the
intermediate positions ( ) between each
mode. Set the dial to an intermediate
position if you want to split the airflow
between the two modes.
l For example, when the mode selector dial is
at the position between the and
positions, airflow from the floor vent is less
than that of the position.
A/C switch
Press the A/C switch to turn the air
conditioner on. The indicator light on the
switch will illuminate when the fan
control dial is in any position except OFF.
Press the switch once again to turn the air
conditioner off.
NOTE
The air conditioner may not function when the
outside temperature approaches 0 °C (32 °F).
Interior Features
Climate Control System
5-5
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page301
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (302,1)
Air intake selector
This switch controls the source of air
entering the vehicle.
Outside or recirculated air positions can
be selected. Press the switch to select
outside/recirculated air positions.
Recirculated air position (indicator
light illuminated)
Outside air is shut off. Use this position
when going through tunnels, driving in
congested traffic (high engine exhaust
areas) or when quick cooling is desired.
Outside air position (indicator light
turned off)
Outside air is allowed to enter the cabin.
Use this mode for ventilation or
windshield defrosting.
WARNING
Do not use the position in cold or
rainy weather:
Using the position in cold or
rainy weather is dangerous as it will
cause the windows to fog up. Your
vision will be hampered, which could
lead to a serious accident.
qHeating
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. Set the air intake selector to the outside
air position (indicator light turned off).
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
hot position.
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
on the air conditioner.
NOTE
l If the windshield fogs up easily, set the
mode selector dial to the position.
l If cooler air is desired at face level, set the
mode selector dial at the position and
adjust the temperature control dial to
maintain maximum comfort.
l The air to the floor is warmer than air to
the face (except when the temperature
control dial is set at the extreme hot or cold
position).
l In the or position, the air
conditioner is automatically turned on and
the outside air mode is automatically
selected to defrost the windshield. In the
or position, the outside air mode
cannot be changed to the recirculated air
mode.
qCooling (With air conditioner)
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
cold position.
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
4. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing
the A/C switch.
5. After cooling begins, adjust the fan
control dial and temperature control
dial as needed to maintain maximum
comfort.
5-6
Interior Features
Climate Control System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page302
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (303,1)
CAUTION
If the air conditioner is used while
driving up long hills or in heavy
traffic, monitor the engine coolant
temperature warning light to see if it
is illuminated or flashing (page
4-20).
The air conditioner may cause engine
overheating. If the warning light is
illuminated or flashing, turn the air
conditioning off (page 7-18).
NOTE
l When maximum cooling is desired, set the
temperature control dial to the extreme cold
position and set the air intake selector to
the recirculated air mode, then turn the fan
control dial fully clockwise.
l If warmer air is desired at floor level, set
the mode selector dial at the position
and adjust the temperature control dial to
maintain maximum comfort.
l The air to the floor is warmer than air to
the face (except when the temperature
control dial is set at the extreme hot or cold
position).
qVentilation
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. Set the air intake selector to the outside
air position (indicator light turned off).
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
qWindshield Defrosting and Defogging
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
4. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
on the air conditioner.
WARNING
Do not defog the windshield using the
position with the temperature
control set to the cold position:
Using the position with the
temperature control set to the cold
position is dangerous as it will cause
the outside of the windshield to fog
up. Your vision will be hampered,
which could lead to a serious
accident. Set the temperature control
to the hot or warm position when
using the position.
NOTE
l For maximum defrosting, turn on the air
conditioner, set the temperature control dial
to the extreme hot position, and turn the fan
control dial fully clockwise.
l If warm air is desired at the floor, set the
mode selector dial to the position.
l In the or position, the air
conditioner is automatically turned on and
the outside air mode is automatically
selected to defrost the windshield. In the
or position, the outside air mode
cannot be changed to the recirculated air
mode.
Interior Features
Climate Control System
5-7
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page303
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (304,1)
qDehumidifying (With air conditioner)
Operate the air conditioner in cool or cold
weather to help defog the windshield and
side windows.
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
desired position.
2. Set the air intake selector to the outside
air position (indicator light turned off).
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
5. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing
the A/C switch.
NOTE
One of the functions of the air conditioner is
dehumidifying the air and, to use this function,
the temperature does not have to be set to cold.
Therefore, set the temperature control dial to
the desired position (hot or cold) and turn on
the air conditioner when you want to
dehumidify the cabin air.
5-8
Interior Features
Climate Control System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page304
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (305,1)
Fully Automatic Type
Climate control information is displayed on the display.
Airflow display
Temperature setting display (driver)
Mode selector
display
A/C mode display
Temperature setting display (passenger)
Air intake selector
(recirculated air
position)
Air intake selector
(outside air position)
Driver temperature control dial
AUTO switch
Mode selector switchFan control switch
OFF switch
Windshield defroster switch
Rear window defogger switch
Passenger temperature
control dial
DUAL switch
A/C switch
qControl Switches
AUTO switch
By pressing the AUTO switch the
following functions will be automatically
controlled in accordance with the selected
set temperature:
l Airflow temperature
l Amount of airflow
l Selection of airflow mode
l Outside/Recirculated air selection
l Air conditioner operation
NOTE
AUTO switch indicator light
l When on, it indicates auto operation, and
the system will function automatically.
l If any of the following switches are
operated while in auto control, the AUTO
switch indicator turns off.
l Mode selector switch
l Fan control switch
l Windshield defroster switch
The functions for switches other than those
operated in the above continue to operate
in auto control.
OFF switch
Pressing the OFF switch shuts off the
climate control system.
Interior Features
Climate Control System
5-9
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page305
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (306,1)
Temperature control dial
This dial controls temperature. Turn it
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise
for cold.
l When the DUAL switch is off:
Turn the driver temperature control dial
to control the temperature throughout
the entire cabin.
l When the DUAL switch is on:
Turn the driver or front passenger
temperature control dial to
independently control the temperature
on each side of the cabin.
NOTE
l The climate control system changes to the
individual operation mode (DUAL switch
indicator light illuminated) by turning the
front passenger temperature control dial
even when the DUAL switch is off, which
allows individual control of the set
temperature for the driver and front
passenger.
l The temperature units for the temperature
setting display can be changed in
conjunction with the temperature units for
the outside temperature display. Refer to
Outside Temperature Display on page 4-14.
Fan control switch
The fan has seven speeds. The selected
speed will be displayed.
Mode selector switch
The desired airflow mode can be selected
(page 5-4).
NOTE
l With the airflow mode set to the
position and the temperature control dial
set at a medium temperature, heated air is
directed to the feet and air at a comparably
lower temperature will flow through the
central, left and right vents.
l To set the air vent to , press the
windshield defroster switch.
l In the or position, the air
conditioner is automatically turned on and
the outside air mode is automatically
selected to defrost the windshield. In the
or position, the outside air mode
cannot be changed to the recirculated air
mode.
A/C switch
Pressing the A/C switch while the AUTO
switch is turned on will turn off the air
conditioning (cooling/dehumidifying
functions).
The air conditioning can be turned on and
off by pressing the A/C switch while the
fan control switch is on.
NOTE
l The air conditioning operates when the A/C
switch is pressed even if the fan is off.
l The air conditioner may not function when
the outside temperature approaches 0 °C
(32 °F).
Air intake selector
Outside or recirculated air positions can
be selected. Press the switch to select
outside/recirculated air positions.
Recirculated air position ( )
Outside air is shut off. Use this position
when going through tunnels, driving in
congested traffic (high engine exhaust
areas) or when quick cooling is desired.
5-10
Interior Features
Climate Control System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page306
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (307,1)
Outside air position ( )
Outside air is allowed to enter the cabin.
Use this mode for ventilation or
windshield defrosting.
WARNING
Do not use the position in cold or
rainy weather:
Using the position in cold or
rainy weather is dangerous as it will
cause the windows to fog up. Your
vision will be hampered, which could
lead to a serious accident.
DUAL switch
Use the DUAL switch to change the mode
between the individual operation (driver
and passenger) and interconnection
(simultaneous) modes.
Individual operation mode (indicator
light illuminated)
The set temperature can be controlled
individually for the driver and front
passenger.
Interconnection mode (indicator light
turned off)
The set temperature for the driver and
front passenger is controlled
simultaneously.
Windshield defroster switch
Press the switch to defrost the windshield
and front door windows.
qOperation of Automatic Air
Conditioning
1. Press the AUTO switch. Selection of
the airflow mode, air intake selector
and amount of airflow will be
automatically controlled.
2. Use the temperature control dial to
select a desired temperature.
Press the DUAL switch or turn the
front passenger temperature control
dial to control the set temperature
individually for the driver and front
passenger.
To turn off the system, press the OFF
switch.
NOTE
l Setting the temperature to maximum high
or low will not provide the desired
temperature at a faster rate.
l When selecting heat, the system will restrict
airflow until it has warmed to prevent cold
air from blowing out of the vents.
qWindshield Defrosting and Defogging
Press the windshield defroster switch.
In this position, the outside air position is
automatically selected, and the air
conditioner automatically turns on. The
air conditioner will directly dehumidify
the air to the front windshield and side
windows (page 5-4). Airflow amount will
be increased.
Interior Features
Climate Control System
5-11
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page307
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (308,1)
WARNING
Set the temperature control to the hot
or warm position when defogging (
position):
Using the position with the
temperature control set to the cold
position is dangerous as it will cause
the outside of the windshield to fog
up. Your vision will be hampered,
which could lead to a serious
accident.
NOTE
Use the temperature control dial to increase
the air flow temperature and defog the
windshield more quickly.
qSunlight/Temperature Sensor
The fully automatic air conditioner
function measures inside and outside
temperatures, and sunlight. It then sets
temperatures inside the passenger
compartment accordingly.
CAUTION
Do not obstruct either sensor,
otherwise the automatic air
conditioner will not operate properly.
Sunlight sensor
Interior temperature sensor
5-12
Interior Features
Climate Control System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page308
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (309,1)
Antenna
Antenna
Operating Tips for Audio
System
WARNING
Always adjust the audio while the
vehicle is stopped:
Do not adjust the audio control
switches while driving the vehicle.
Adjusting the audio while driving the
vehicle is dangerous as it could
distract your attention from the
vehicle operation which could lead to
a serious accident.
Even if the audio control switches are
equipped on the steering wheel, learn
to use the switches without looking
down at them so that you can keep
your maximum attention on the road
while driving the vehicle.
CAUTION
For the purposes of safe driving,
adjust the audio volume to a level
that allows you to hear sounds
outside of the vehicle including car
horns and particularly emergency
vehicle sirens.
NOTE
l To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the audio system
on for a long period of time when the
engine is not running.
l If a cellular phone or CB radio is used in
or near the vehicle, it could cause noise to
occur from the audio system, however, this
does not indicate that the system has been
damaged.
Interior Features
Audio System
5-13
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page309
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (310,1)
Do not spill any liquid on the audio
system.
Do not insert any objects, other than CDs,
into the slot.
qRadio Reception
AM characteristics
AM signals bend around such things as
buildings or mountains and bounce off the
ionosphere.
Therefore, they can reach longer distances
than FM signals.
Because of this, two stations may
sometimes be picked up on the same
frequency at the same time.
Station 2Station 1
Ionosphere
FM characteristics
An FM broadcast range is usually about
40―50 km (25―30 miles) from the
source. Because of extra coding needed to
break the sound into two channels, stereo
FM has even less range than monaural
(non-stereo) FM.
FM Station
40—50km
(25—30 miles)
Signals from an FM transmitter are similar
to beams of light because they do not
bend around corners, but they do reflect.
Unlike AM signals, FM signals cannot
travel beyond the horizon. Therefore, FM
stations cannot be received at the great
distances possible with AM reception.
AM wave
FM wave
FM wave
100—200 km (60—120 miles)
Ionosphere
Atmospheric conditions can also affect
FM reception. High humidity will cause
poor reception. However, cloudy days
may provide better reception than clear
days.
5-14
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page310
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (311,1)
Multipath noise
Since FM signals can be reflected by
obstructions, it is possible to receive both
the direct signal and the reflected signal at
the same time. This causes a slight delay
in reception and may be heard as a broken
sound or a distortion. This problem may
also be encountered when in close
proximity to the transmitter.
Reflected wave
Direct
Flutter/Skip noise
Signals from an FM transmitter move in
straight lines and become weak in valleys
between tall buildings, mountains, and
other obstacles. When a vehicle passes
through such an area, the reception
conditions may change suddenly, resulting
in annoying noise.
Weak signal noise
In suburban areas, broadcast signals
become weak because of distance from
the transmitter. Reception in such fringe
areas is characterized by sound breakup.
Strong signal noise
This occurs very close to a transmitter
tower. The broadcast signals are
extremely strong, so the result is noise and
sound breakup at the radio receiver.
Station drift noise
When a vehicle reaches the area of two
strong stations broadcasting at similar
frequencies, the original station may be
temporarily lost and the second station
picked up. At this time there will be some
noise from this disturbance.
Station 2
88.3 MHz
Station 1
88.1 MHz
Interior Features
Audio System
5-15
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page311
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (312,1)
qOperating Tips for CD Player
Condensation phenomenon
Immediately after turning on the heater
when the vehicle is cold, the CD or
optical components (prism and lens) in the
CD player may become clouded with
condensation. At this time, the CD will
eject immediately when placed in the unit.
A clouded CD can be corrected simply by
wiping it with a soft cloth. Clouded
optical components will clear naturally in
about an hour. Wait for normal operation
to return before attempting to use the unit.
Handling the CD player
The following precautions should be
observed.
l Do not use deformed or cracked CDs.
The disc may not eject resulting in a
malfunction.
l Do not use non-conventional discs
such as heart-shaped, octagonal discs,
etc. The disc may not eject resulting in
a malfunction.
l If the memory portion of the CD is
transparent or translucent, do not use
the disc.
Transparent
l A new CD may have rough edges on
its inner and outer perimeters. If a disc
with rough edges is used, proper
setting will not be possible and the CD
player will not play the CD. In
addition, the disc may not eject
resulting in a malfunction. Remove the
rough edges in advance by using a ballpoint pen or pencil as shown below. To
remove the rough edges, rub the side of
the pen or pencil against the inner and
outer perimeter of the CD.
l When driving over uneven surfaces,
the sound may jump.
5-16
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page312
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (313,1)
l CDs bearing the logo shown in the
illustration can be played. No other
discs can be played.
l Use discs that have been legitimately
produced. If illegally-copied discs such
as pirated discs are used, the system
may not operate properly.
l Be sure never to touch the signal
surface when handling the CDs. Pick
up a CD by grasping the outer edge or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
l Do not stick paper or tape on the CD.
Avoid scratching the reverse side (the
side without a label). The disc may not
eject resulting in a malfunction.
l Dust, finger smudges, and dirt can
decrease the amount of light reflected
from the signal surface, thus affecting
sound quality. If the CD should
become soiled, gently wipe it with a
soft cloth from the center of the CD to
the edge.
l Do not use record sprays, antistatic
agents, or household spray cleaners.
Volatile chemicals such as benzine and
thinner can also damage the surface of
the CD and must not be used. Anything
that can damage, warp, or fog plastic
should never be used to clean CDs.
l The CD player ejects the CD if the CD
is inserted upside down. Also dirty
and/or defective CDs may be ejected.
l Do not insert cleaning discs in the CD
player.
l Do not insert any disc with a peel-off
seal affixed to it.
l This unit may not be able to play
certain CD-R/CD-RWs made using a
computer or music CD recorder due to
disc characteristics, scratches,
smudges, dirt, etc., or due to dust or
condensation on the lens inside the
unit.
l Storing CDs in the vehicle exposed to
direct sunlight or high temperature may
damage the CD-R/CD-RWs, and make
them unplayable.
l CD-R/CD-RWexceeding 700 MB
cannot be played.
l This unit may not be able to play
certain discs made using a computer
due to the application (writing
software) setting used. (For details,
consult the store where the application
was purchased.)
l It is possible that certain text data, such
as titles, recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW
may not be displayed when musical
data (CD-DA) is playing.
l The period from when a CD-RW is
inserted to when it begins playing is
longer than a normal CD or CD-R.
l Completely read the instruction manual
and cautions for CD-R/CD-RWs.
Interior Features
Audio System
5-17
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page313
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (314,1)
l Do not use discs with cellophane tape
adhering, partially peeled off labels, or
adhesive material exuding from the
edges of the CD label. Also, do not use
discs with a commercially-available
CD-R label affixed. The disc may not
eject resulting in a malfunction.
qOperating Tips for MP3
This unit plays files with the extension
(.mp3) as MP3 files.
CAUTION
Do not use an audio file extension on
files other than audio files. In
addition, do not change the audio file
extension. Otherwise, the unit will
not recognize the file correctly
resulting in noise or a malfunction.
NOTE
Supply of this product only conveys a license
for private, non-commercial use and does not
convey a license nor imply any right to use this
product in any commercial (i.e. revenuegenerating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial,
satellite, cable and/or any other media),
broadcasting/streaming via the Internet,
intranets and/or other networks or in other
electronic content distribution systems, such as
pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications.
An independent license for such use is
required. For details, please visit
http://www.mp3licensing.com.
l This audio system handles MP3 files
that have been recorded on CD-R/CDRW/CD-ROMs.
l When naming an MP3 file, be sure to
add an MP3 file extension (.mp3) after
the file name.
l The number of characters which can be
displayed is restricted.
Specialized glossary
MP3
Abbreviation for “MPEG Audio Layer 3”.
A technical standard for audio
compression as decided by the ISO*1
MPEG working group. Use of MP3
allows for audio data to be compressed to
approximately a tenth of the source data
size.
*1 International Organization for
Standardization
qOperating Tips for WMA
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio
and is the audio compression format used
by Microsoft.
Audio data can be created and stored at a
higher compression ratio than MP3.
This unit plays files with the extension (.
wma) as WMA files.
* Microsoft and Windows Media are
registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation U.S. in the United States
and other countries.
CAUTION
Do not use an audio file extension on
files other than audio files. In
addition, do not change the audio file
extension. Otherwise, the unit will
not recognize the file correctly
resulting in noise or a malfunction.
l WMA files written under specifications
other than the indicated specification
may not play normally or files or folder
names may not display correctly.
5-18
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page314
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (315,1)
l The file extension may not be provided
depending on the computer operating
system, version, software, or settings.
In this case, add the file extension “.
wma” to the end of the file name, and
then write it to the disc.
qOperating Tips for AAC
AAC stands for Advanced Audio Coding,
which is standardized voice compression
established by the ISO*1 working group
(MPEG). Audio data can be created and
stored at a higher compression ratio than
MP3.
This unit plays files with the extensions (.
aac/.m4a/.wav*2) as the AAC files.
*1 International Organization for
Standardization
*2 Type B
CAUTION
Do not use an audio file extension on
files other than audio files. In
addition, do not change the audio file
extension. Otherwise, the unit will
not recognize the file correctly
resulting in noise or a malfunction.
l AAC files written under specifications
other than the indicated specification
may not play normally or files or folder
names may not display correctly.
l The file extension may not be provided
depending on the computer operating
system, version, software, or settings.
In this case, add the file extension “.
aac”, “.m4a”, or “.wav*2” to the end of
the file name, and then write it to the
memory.
*2 Type B
qOperating Tips for OGG
OGG is the audio compression format for
Xiph. Org Foundation.
Audio data can be created and stored at a
higher compression ratio than MP3.
This unit plays files with the extension (.
ogg) as OGG files.
CAUTION
Do not use an audio file extension on
files other than audio files. In
addition, do not change the audio file
extension. Otherwise, the unit will
not recognize the file correctly
resulting in noise or a malfunction.
l OGG files written under specifications
other than the indicated specification
may not play normally or files or folder
names may not display correctly.
l The file extension may not be provided
depending on the computer operating
system, version, software, or settings.
In this case, add the file extension “.
ogg” to the end of the file name, and
then write it to the disc.
qOperating Tips for USB device
This unit plays audio files as follows:
Extension Playback with this unit
.mp3 MP3
.wma WMA
.aac
AAC.m4a
.wav*1
.ogg*1 OGG
*1 Type B
Interior Features
Audio System
5-19
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page315
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (316,1)
CAUTION
Do not use an audio file extension on
files other than audio files. In
addition, do not change the audio file
extension. Otherwise, the unit will
not recognize the file correctly
resulting in noise or a malfunction.
NOTE
l Playback may not be possible depending on
the type and condition of the USB flash
memory even if the audio file complies with
the standard above.
l A copyright protected WMA/AAC file
cannot be played in this unit.
l The order of the music data stored in the
device may differ from the playback order.
l To prevent loss or damage of stored data,
we recommend that you always back up
your data.
l If a device exceeds the maximum electric
current value of 1,000 mA, it may not
operate or recharge when connected.
l Do not pull out the USB device while in the
USB mode (only pull it out while in FM/AM
radio or CD mode).
l The device will not operate if the data is
password protected.
l MP3/WMA/AAC/OGG*1 files written
under specifications other than the
indicated specification may not play
normally or files/folder names may not
display correctly.
*1 Type B
qOperating Tips for iPod
This unit supports playback of music files
recorded to an iPod.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The iPod may not be compatible
depending on the model or OS version. In
this case, an error message is displayed.
CAUTION
Ø Remove the iPod when it is not in
use. Because the iPod is not
designed to withstand excessive
changes in temperature inside the
cabin, it could be damaged or the
battery may deteriorate due to the
excessive temperature or humidity
inside the cabin if it is left in the
vehicle.
Ø If data in the iPod is lost while it is
connected to the unit, Mazda
cannot guarantee recovery of any
lost data.
Ø If the iPod battery is deteriorated,
the iPod may not recharge and
playback may not be possible
when it is connected to the unit.
Ø For details on using the iPod, refer
to the iPod instruction manual.
Ø When connecting the iPod to a
USB port, all commands are made
from the audio unit. iPod control is
not possible.
NOTE
The audio unit cannot display images or
videos stored in an iPod.
5-20
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page316
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (317,1)
Audio Set (Type A)
Power/Volume/Sound Controls ......................................................................... page 5-22
Clock ................................................................................................................. page 5-24
Operating the Radio ........................................................................................... page 5-26
Operating the Compact Disc (CD) Player .......................................................... page 5-28
How to use Auxiliary jack/USB port ................................................................. page 5-31
Error Indications ................................................................................................ page 5-31
Interior Features
Audio System
5-21
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page317
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (318,1)
qPower/Volume/Sound Controls
Power/Volume dial Audio control dial
Audio display
Power ON/OFF
Switch the ignition to ACC or ON. Press
the power/volume dial to turn the audio
system on. Press the power/volume dial
again to turn the audio system off.
Volume adjustment
To adjust the volume, turn the power/
volume dial. Turn the power/volume dial
clockwise to increase volume,
counterclockwise to decrease it.
Audio sound adjustment
1. Press the audio control dial to select the
function. The selected function will be
indicated.
2. Turn the audio control dial to adjust the
selected functions as follows:
Indication
Setting value
Turn
Counterclockwise
Turn
Clockwise
ALC
(Automatic
volume
adjustment)
Level decrease Level increase
BASS
(Low pitch sound)
Decrease bass Increase bass
TREB
(Treble sound)
Decrease treble Increase treble
FADE
(Front/back
volume balance)
Shift the sound
to the front
Shift the sound
to the rear
BAL
(Left/right volume
balance)
Shift the sound
to the left
Shift the sound
to the right
BEEP
(Audio operation
sound)
Off On
BT SETUP*1 Select mode
12Hr 24Hr
(12 Hr/24 Hr time
adjustment)
12Hr
(Flashing)
24Hr
(Flashing)
*1 Depending on the model, this function
may not be available.
5-22
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page318
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (319,1)
NOTE
If not operated for several seconds, the display
returns to the previous display. To reset bass,
treble, fade, and balance, press the audio
control dial for 2 seconds. The unit will beep
and “CLEAR” will be displayed.
ALC (Automatic volume adjustment)
The automatic level control (ALC)
changes the audio volume automatically
according to the vehicle speed. The faster
the vehicle speed, the higher the volume
increases. ALC has ALC OFF and ALC
LEVEL 1 to 7 modes. At ALC LEVEL 7,
the amount that the volume can increase is
at the maximum. Select the mode
according to the driving conditions.
BEEP (Audio operation sound)
The setting for the operation sound when
pressing and holding a button can be
changed. The initial setting is ON. Set to
OFF to mute the operation sound.
BT SETUP modeí
Music and other audio such as voice data
recorded on portable audio devices and
mobile phones available on the market
which are equipped with the Bluetooth®
transmission function can be listened to
via wireless transmission over the
vehicle's speakers. Using the BT SETUP
mode, these devices can be programmed
to the Bluetooth® unit or changed.
Refer to Bluetooth® Preparation (Type A)
on page 5-71.
12Hr 24Hr (12 Hr/24 Hr time
adjustment)
Rotating the audio control dial switches
the display between 12 and 24-hour clock
time.
Refer to Clock on page 5-24.
Interior Features
Audio System
5-23íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page319
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (320,1)
qClock
Hour set button :00 button
Minute set button
Audio control dial
Audio displayClock button
Setting the time
The clock can be set at any time when the
ignition is switched to ACC or ON.
1. To adjust the time, press the clock
button ( ) for about 2 seconds
until a beep is heard.
2. The clock's current time will flash.
Time adjustment
l To adjust the time, press the hour/
minute set button (H, M) while the
clock's current time is flashing.
l The hours advance while the hour
set button (H) is pressed. The
minutes advance while the minute
set button (M) is pressed.
3. Press the clock button ( ) again
to start the clock.
Time resetting
1. Press the clock button ( ) for
about 2 seconds until a beep is heard.
2. Press the:00 button.
3. When the button is pressed, the time
will be reset as follows:
(Example)
12:01―12:29→12:00
12:30―12:59→1:00
NOTE
l When the :00 button is pressed, the seconds
will start at “00”.
l Switching between 12 and 24-hour clock
time:
Press the audio control dial several times
until 12 and 24-hour clock time are
displayed. Turn the audio control dial in
either direction, select the desired clock
setting while the preferred clock time is
flashing.
5-24
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page320
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (321,1)
MEMO
5-25
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page321
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (322,1)
qOperating the Radio
Band selector button Scan button
Seek tuning buttons
Channel preset buttons
Auto memory button
Manual tuning dial
Audio display
Radio ON
Press a band selector button ( ) to
turn the radio on.
Band selection
Successively pressing the band selector
button ( ) switches the bands as
follows: FM1→FM2→AM.
The selected mode will be indicated.
NOTE
If the FM broadcast signal becomes weak,
reception automatically changes from
STEREO to MONO for reduced noise.
Tuning
The radio has the following tuning
methods: Manual, Seek, Scan, Preset
channel, and Auto memory tuning. The
easiest way to tune stations is to set them
on preset channels.
Manual tuning
Turning the manual tuning dial will
change the frequency higher or lower.
Seek tuning
Pressing the seek tuning button ( , )
will cause the tuner to seek a higher or
lower frequency automatically.
NOTE
If you continue to press and hold the button,
the frequency will continue changing without
stopping.
Scan tuning
Press the scan button ( ) to
automatically sample strong stations.
Scanning stops at each station for about 5
seconds. To hold a station, press the scan
button ( ) again during this interval.
Preset channel tuning
The 6 preset channels can be used to store
6 AM and 12 FM stations.
1. To set a channel first select AM, FM1,
or FM2. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press a channel preset button for about
2 seconds until a beep is heard. The
preset channel number or station
frequency will be displayed. The
station is now held in the memory.
5-26
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page322
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (323,1)
3. Repeat this operation for the other
stations and bands you want to store.
To tune one in the memory, select AM,
FM1, or FM2 and then press its
channel preset button. The station
frequency or the channel number will
be displayed.
Auto memory tuning
This is especially useful when driving in
an area where the local stations are not
known.
Press and hold the auto memory button
( ) for about 2 seconds until a beep
is heard; the system will automatically
scan and temporarily store up to 6 stations
with the strongest frequencies in each
selected band in that area.
After scanning is completed, the station
with the strongest frequency will be tuned
and its frequency displayed. Press and
release the auto memory button ( )
to recall stations from the auto-stored
stations. One stored station will be
selected each time and its frequency and
channel number will be displayed.
NOTE
If no stations can be tuned after scanning
operations, “A” will be displayed.
Interior Features
Audio System
5-27
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page323
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (324,1)
qOperating the Compact Disc (CD) Player
CD play button
Scan button
Text button
Track down/Reverse button
Track up/Fast-forward button
File dial
Folder up button
Folder down button
Audio display
CD eject button
CD slot
Random button Play/Pause button
Repeat button
Type Playable data
Music/MP3/WMA/
AAC CD player
l Music data (CD-DA)
l MP3/WMA/AAC file
NOTE
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA) and
MP3/WMA/AAC files, playback of the two or
three file types differs depending on how the
disc was recorded.
Inserting the CD
Insert the CD into the slot, label-side up.
The auto-loading mechanism will set the
CD and begin play.
NOTE
There will be a short lapse before play begins
while the player reads the digital signals on
the CD.
Ejecting the CD
Press the CD eject button ( ) to eject the
CD.
Playback
Press the CD play button ( ) to start
play when a CD is in the unit. If a CD is
not in the unit when the CD play button
( ) is pressed, “NO DISC” will flash on
and off.
Pause
To stop playback, press the Play/Pause
button (5).
Press the button again to resume
playback.
Fast-forward/Reverse
Press and hold the fast-forward button
( ) to advance through a track at high
speed. Press and hold the reverse button
( ) to reverse through a track at high
speed.
Track search
Press the track up button ( ) or turn the
file dial clockwise once to skip forward to
the beginning of the next track.
Press the track down button ( ) or turn
the file dial counterclockwise within a few
seconds after playback begins to track
down to the beginning of the previous
track.
Press the track down button ( ) or turn
the file dial counterclockwise after a few
seconds have elapsed to start playback
from the beginning of the current track.
5-28
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page324
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (325,1)
Folder search (during MP3/WMA/AAC
CD playback)
To change to the previous folder, press the
folder down button ( ), or press the
folder up button ( ) to advance to the
next folder.
Music scan
During music CD playback
This function scans the titles on a CD and
plays 10 seconds of each song to aid you
in finding a song you want to listen to.
Press the scan button ( ) during
playback to start the scan play operation
(the track number will flash). Press the
scan button ( ) again to cancel scan
playback.
During MP3/WMA/AAC CD playback
This function scans the titles in a folder
currently being played and plays 10
seconds of each song to aid you in finding
a song you want to listen to. Press the
scan button ( ) during playback to
start the scan play operation (the track
number will flash).
Press the scan button ( ) again to
cancel scan playback.
NOTE
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback will
resume where scan was selected.
Repeat playback
During music CD playback
1. Press the repeat button (1) during
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. “TRACK RPT” is
displayed ( is displayed next to RPT
at the bottom of the display area).
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
During MP3/WMA/AAC CD playback
(Track repeat)
1. Press the repeat button (1) during
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. “TRACK RPT” is
displayed ( is displayed next to RPT
at the bottom of the display area).
2. To cancel the repeat playback, press the
button again after 3 seconds.
(Folder repeat)
1. Press the repeat button (1) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks in the current folder repeatedly.
“FOLDER RPT” is displayed ( is
displayed next to RPT at the bottom of
the display area).
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
Random playback
Tracks are randomly selected and played.
During music CD playback
1. Press the random button (2) during
playback to play the tracks on the CD
randomly. “DISC RDM” is displayed
( is displayed next to RDM at the
bottom of the display area).
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
During MP3/WMA/AAC CD playback
(Folder random)
1. Press the random button (2) during
playback to play the tracks in the folder
randomly. “FOLDER RDM” is
displayed ( is displayed next to
RDM at the bottom of the display
area).
Interior Features
Audio System
5-29
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page325
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (326,1)
2. To cancel the random playback, press
the button again after 3 seconds.
(CD random)
1. Press the random button (2) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks on the CD randomly. “DISC
RDM” is displayed ( is displayed
next to RDM at the bottom of the
display area).
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
Switching the display
The information displayed on the audio
display changes as follows each time the
text button ( ) is pressed during
playback.
Music CD
Button
Information displayed
on audio display
Track number/Elapsed
time
Track number
Track name
Album name
Artist name
MP3/WMA/AAC CD
Button
Information displayed
on audio display
File number/Elapsed time
Folder number/File
number
File name
Folder name
Album name
Song name
Artist name
NOTE
l The information viewable in the display is
only CD information (such as artist name,
song title) which has been recorded to the
CD.
l This unit cannot display some characters.
Characters which cannot be displayed are
indicated by an asterisk ( ).
Display scroll
Only 13 characters can be displayed at
one time. To display the rest of the
characters of a long title, press and hold
the text button ( ). The display
scrolls the next 13 characters. Press and
hold the text button ( ) again after
the last 13 characters have been displayed
to return to the beginning of the title.
NOTE
The number of characters which can be
displayed is restricted.
Message display
If “CHECK CD” is displayed, it means
that there is some CD malfunction. Check
the CD for damage, dirt, or smudges, and
then properly reinsert it. If the message
appears again, insert another known good
CD. If the message continues to appear,
take the unit to an Authorized Mazda
Dealer for service.
5-30
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page326
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (327,1)
qHow to use Auxiliary jack/USB port
Audio can be heard from the vehicle's
speakers by connecting a commerciallyavailable portable audio unit to the
auxiliary jack.
Use a commercially-available, nonimpedance (3.5 ) stereo mini plug cable.
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer for
details.
In addition, audio can be played from the
vehicle audio device by connecting a USB
device or an iPod to the USB port.
Refer to AUX/USB/iPod mode on page
5-52.
qError Indications
If you see an error indication on the audio
display, find the cause in the chart. If you
cannot clear the error indication, take the
vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Indication Cause Solution
CHECK CD
CD is
inserted
upside
down
Insert the CD properly. If
the error indication
continues to display,
consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
CD is
defective
Insert another CD
properly. If the error
indication continues to
display, consult an
Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Interior Features
Audio System
5-31
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page327
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (328,1)
Audio Set (Type B)
NOTE
The explanation of functions described in this manual may differ from the actual operation, and
the shapes of screens and buttons and the letters and characters displayed may also differ from the
actual appearance.
Additionally, depending on future software updates, the content may successively change without
notice.
Audio Set (Type B) has three different human interfaces.
l Commander switch
l Touch panel
l Voice recognition with steering switch and microphone
Commander switch operation
NOTE
For safety reasons, some operations are disabled while the vehicle is being driven.
Volume dial operation
Volume dial
Press the volume dial to switch the audio MUTE on and off.
Turn the volume dial to adjust the volume. The volume increases by turning the dial
clockwise, and decreases by turning it counterclockwise.
5-32
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page328
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (329,1)
Switches around commander knob
The following operations can be done by pressing the switches around the commander
knob.
: Displays the home screen.
: Displays the Entertainment screen.
: Displays the Navigation screen (Only navigation-equipped vehicles). For operation
of the Navigation screen, refer to the navigation system manual. If the SD card for the
navigation system is not inserted, the compass indicating the direction in which the vehicle
is moving is displayed.
: Displays the Favorites screen. Long-press to store particular items in Favorites.
(Radio, phonebook and destination of the navigation system can be programmed.)
: Returns to previous screen.
Commander knob operation
(Selection of icons on screen)
1. Tilt or turn the commander knob and move the cursor to the desired icon.
2. Press the commander knob and select the icon.
Interior Features
Audio System
5-33
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page329
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (330,1)
NOTE
Long-press operation of the commander knob is also possible for some functions.
Touch panel operation
CAUTION
Do not press the screen strongly or press it with a sharp-pointed object. Otherwise,
the screen could be damaged.
NOTE
For safety reasons, touch panel operation is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
qBasic Operation Method
TOUCH & TAP
1. Touch or tap on the item indicated on the screen.
2. The operation is launched and the next item is displayed.
5-34
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page330
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (331,1)
SLIDE
1. Touch the setting item displaying a slider bar.
2. Touch the slider with your finger and move to the desired level.
SWIPE
1. Touch the screen with your finger and move up or down.
2. Items which were not displayed can be displayed.
Return to previous screen
Touch the .
Displaying the home screen
Touch the .
Interior Features
Audio System
5-35
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page331
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (332,1)
qHome screen
Icon Function
Applications
Information such as average fuel economy, maintenance, and warnings can be verified.
Depending on the grade and specification, the screen display may differ.
Entertainment
Operates audio such as the radio and CDs. The audio source most recently used is
displayed. An audio source which cannot be used at that time is skipped and the previous
audio source is displayed.
To change the audio source, select the icon again.
Communication
Bluetooth® related functions are available.
Navigation
Navigation screen is displayed (vehicles with navigation system).
If the SD card for the navigation system is not inserted, the compass indicating the direction
in which the vehicle is moving is displayed.
The compass may not indicate the correct bearing when the vehicle is stopped or traveling
at a slow speed.
Settings
Overall setting menu (Such as display, sound, Bluetooth® and Language).
Depending on the grade and specification, the screen display may differ.
qVolume/Display/Sound Controls
Volume switch
Commander switch Audio control switch
Volume dial
5-36
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page332
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (333,1)
Volume adjustment
Turn the commander switch volume dial.
The volume switch on the steering switch
can also be pressed.
Display setting
Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Settings screen.
Select the tab to select the item
you would like to change.
Display OFF/Clock
The center display can be turned off.
Select to turn the display
off.
When is
selected the center display turns off and
the clock is displayed.
The center display can be turned back on
as follows:
l Touch the center display.
l Operate the commander switch.
Daytime/nighttime (System) screen
setting
The daytime or nighttime screen can be
selected.
: Switches screen automatically
according to headlight illumination
condition*1
: Daytime screen setting
: Nighttime screen setting
*1 The display is constantly on daytime
screen when the illumination dimmer
is cancelled.
Brightness adjustment
Adjust the center display brightness using
the slider.
Contrast adjustment
Adjust the center display contrast using
the slider.
Display setting reset
All of the screen setting values can be
reset to their initial settings.
1. Select .
2. Select .
Audio sound adjustment
Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Settings screen.
Select the tab to select the item you
would like to change.
Indication Setting value
Bass
(Low pitch sound)
Side: Low pitch
enhancement
Side: Low pitch
reduction
Treble
(Treble sound)
Side: Treble
enhancement
Side: Treble reduction
Fade
(Front/Rear volume
balance)
Front: Front speaker
volume enhancement
Rear: Rear speaker
volume enhancement
Balance
(Left/right volume
balance)
Right: Right speaker
volume enhancement
Left: Left speaker volume
enhancement
ALC*2
(Automatic volume
adjustment)
Off―Adjustment at
seven levels
Centerpoint®*3
(Automatic surround
level adjustment)
On/Off
AudioPilot®*3
(Automatic volume
adjustment)
On/Off
Beep
(Audio operation sound)
On/Off
*2 Standard audio
*3 Bose® Sound System
Interior Features
Audio System
5-37
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page333
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (334,1)
ALC (Automatic volume adjustment)
The automatic level control (ALC) is a
feature that automatically adjusts audio
volume and sound quality according to
the vehicle speed. The volume increases
in accordance with the increase in vehicle
speed, and decreases as vehicle speed
decreases.
Centerpoint®*4 (Automatic surround
level adjustment)
Centerpoint® lets vehicle owners enjoy a
Bose® surround sound experience from
their existing CDs, MP3s and satellite
radio.
Specifically engineered to meet the
unique demands of reproducing surround
sound in a vehicle.
Converts stereo signals to multiple
channels allowing greater precision when
reproducing the sound.
An enhanced algorithm to simultaneously
create a wider, more spacious sound field.
*4 Centerpoint® is a registered trademark
of Bose Corporation.
AudioPilot®*5 (Automatic volume
adjustment)
When driving, background noise can
interfere with enjoying music.
AudioPilot® noise compensation
technology continuously adjusts the music
to compensate for background noise and
vehicle speed.
It reacts only to sustained noise sources
and not intermittent ones, such as speed
bumps.
An enhanced DSP algorithm allows faster
and more effective compensation for
unusual situations, such as driving on a
very rough road or at high speeds.
*5 AudioPilot® is a registered trademark
of Bose Corporation.
5-38
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page334
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (335,1)
qOperating the Radio
Radio ON
Select the icon on the home screen and display the Entertainment screen. When
selecting the desired radio, the following icons are indicated in the lower part of the center
display.
AM/FM Radio
Icon Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the station list.
Select to display the frequencies of up to ten radio stations on the auto
memory preset list.
Select the desired frequency.
Displays the Favorites list. Long-press to store radio station currently being aired.
Switches the on and off. Displays the multi-cast channel list of the
.
You can search for receivable radio stations.
Scanning stops at each station for about five seconds.
Select again to continue receiving the radio station.
You can change the radio frequency manually.
Rotate the commander knob, slide the screen, or touch the radio frequency.
Press or to change the radio frequency one step at a time.
When or is long-pressed, the radio frequency changes continually. It stops when
you remove your hand from the icon or the commander knob.
Launches the iTunes Tagging function (for Apple devices with USB use only). Can be used
when the is on.
Automatic radio station selection.
When long-pressed, the radio frequency changes continually. It stops when you remove
your hand from the icon or the commander knob.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-36.
Interior Features
Audio System
5-39
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page335
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (336,1)
Favorites Radio
Selected stations can be registered for
convenient operation. Up to 50 stations
can be registered. The Favorites list is
common to AM, FM, and satellite radio.
Registering to Favorites
Long-press the icon to register the
current radio station. The registration can
also be performed using the following
procedure.
1. Select the icon to display the
Favorites list.
2. Select .
3. Select .
4. The station is added to the bottom of
the Favorites list.
NOTE
If the battery is disconnected, your Favorites
list will be not deleted.
Selecting radio station from Favorites
1. Select the icon to display the
Favorites list.
2. Select the radio station name or radio
frequency to tune in the radio station.
Deleting from Favorites
1. Select the icon to display the
Favorites list.
2. Select .
3. Select .
4. Select the radio station or radio
frequency you want to delete.
5. Select .
Changing Favorites list order
1. Select the icon to display the
Favorites list.
2. Select .
3. Select .
4. Select a radio station or radio
frequency. The selected radio station
can be moved.
5. Slide the radio station or move it using
the commander switch, then select
.
Radio Broadcast Data System
(RBDS)í
Radio text information display
Radio text information sent from a
broadcasting station is displayed in the
center display.
NOTE
Radio text information is a function of FM
radio. Text information is not displayed in the
following:
l During reception
l Not an RBDS broadcast
l RBDS broadcast, but radio text is not
transmitted from the radio station
Genre Seek
Some FM stations transmit Genre codes
(Program type like a Rock, News, and so
on). This code enables alternative stations
transmitting the same Genre code to be
found quickly.
(To scan for Genre Seek:)
1. Select the icon while in the FM
mode.
2. Select to open the genre list.
5-40
Interior Features
íSome models.
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page336
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (337,1)
3. Select the genre type you want to
select.
4. Select the , icon.
NOTE
To change the desired genre, select the icon.
Ex.)
89.3 is currently being received. With
Rock selected as the Genre, the radio
stations broadcasting Rock are at the
following frequencies.
98.3*1, 98.7, 104.3*1, 107.1
*1 Radio stations with good reception
The frequency changes as follows each
time is pressed.
89.3→98.3→104.3→98.3
NOTE
l Only one Genre can be selected.
l It may not be possible to receive any station
even if the Genre Seek function is used.
l If a program in the selected genre is not
broadcast to a region, reception is not
possible even if the Genre Seek function is
used.
l The Genre Seek function searches for genre
code (program type) which FM analog
broadcasts transmit. specialty
programs (HD2-HD8) cannot be searched
because they are not FM analog
broadcasts.
l If radio stations which are selected by
scanning using the Genre Seek function are
broadcasting stations, they are
changed from analog broadcasts to
broadcasts after a few seconds
if the reception conditions are good. The
genre is displayed after the switch,
however, the genre for FM analog
broadcasts may differ.
HD Radio
What is HD Radio™ Technology and
how does it work?
HD Radio™ Technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
radio product has a special receiver which
allows it to receive digital broadcasts
(where available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts it already receives. Digital
broadcasts have better sound quality than
analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts
provide free, crystal clear audio. For more
information, and a guide to available radio
stations and programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
Benefits of HD Radio™ Technology
(Information)
The song title, artist name, album name
and genre will appear on the screen when
available by the radio station.
(Multicast)
On the FM radio frequency most digital
stations have “multiple” or supplemental
programs on each FM station.
Listening to HD Radio™ Technology
If icon turns on by selecting a radio
station which is an
broadcasting station, the analog broadcast
is switched to an broadcast
automatically after a few seconds and then
received.
If the broadcast is stopped and
changed to an analog broadcast, press
down to turn off .
Multicast channel selection (FM)
If multi-cast channels are available for an
broadcast currently being
received, the multi-cast channel list is
displayed. Select the desired radio station.
Interior Features
Audio System
5-41
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page337
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (338,1)
NOTE
l If an analog broadcast is received once and
is received while HD1 is
selected, the audio unit switches to the
station automatically.
l When the icon is illuminated, there
could be a noticeable difference in sound
quality and volume when a change from
digital to analog signals occurs. If the
sound quality and volume become
noticeably diminished or cut off, select the
icon to turn off ( icon is
not illuminated).
l Once an analog broadcast is received when
HD1 is selected from the Favorite channels,
it is switched to automatically.
If the radio reception conditions are poor,
or HD is off, switching to
broadcasts is not possible.
l When an HD specialty channel (HD2 to
HD8) is selected from the Favorite
channels, “Signal Lost” is displayed and
no audio is output until is
received. If the radio reception conditions
are poor, “Signal Lost” continues to be
displayed.
l If the icon is not illuminated,
information such as song titles of the
station are received, however,
the audio output is analog.
iTunes Tagging (for Apple devices with
USB use only)
By tagging a song currently being aired,
the song can be easily purchased from the
iTunes Store. Up to 100 tags can be
stored.
1. Select the icon. The tag is stored in
the audio unit.
2. Connect the device via USB. The tag is
sent to the connected device
automatically.
3. Synchronize the device with iTunes.
The tagged song can now be purchased
from the iTunes Store.
NOTE
l Both AM and FM can be used.
l Because iTunes Tagging only supports
purchasing from the iTunes Store, direct
downloading from the equipped vehicle
audio is not possible.
l If the available memory for the connected
device is insufficient, the tag is not sent.
l If an error occurs while the tag is being
sent, reconnect the device.
qOperating the Satellite Radioí
What is satellite radio?
With over 130 channels, SiriusXM
Satellite Radio brings you more of what
you love. Get channels and channels of
commercial-free music, plus sports, news,
talk, entertainment and more.
Commercial-free music from nearly
every genre―rock to pop, hip-hop to
country, jazz, classical and more. Plus live
performances and artist-dedicated
channels.
Live sports Play-by-Play & Expert Talk
―every NFL game, every NASCAR®
race, 24/7 sports talk, college sports and
more.
Exclusive entertainment, comedy and
talk ―The biggest names, compelling
talk, hilarious comedy.
World-class news plus local traffic and
weather.
Sign up for SiriusXM Satellite Radio
today!
5-42
Interior Features
íSome models.
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page338
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (339,1)
NOTE
l To listen to SiriusXM, a prior subscription
(fee-based) is required.
l The channels which you can receive depend
on the package you subscribe to.
l Satellite radio is broadcast as Sirius, XM,
and SiriusXM in the U.S.A., and Sirius and
XM in Canada. In this owner’s manual,
only the name SiriusXM is used.
l For traffic and weather channels, map
information is not displayed and only audio
broadcasts can be received.
l Call 888-539-7474 to activate. For more
information, visit www.siriusxm.com.
Satellite radio is only available in regions
providing satellite radio service (some
areas of the United States and Canada).
Contact Authorized Mazda Dealer for
details.
How to Activate Satellite Radio
You must call SiriusXM to activate your
service. Activation is free and takes only a
few minutes.
SiriusXM service uses an ID code to
identify your radio. This code is needed to
activate SiriusXM service, and report any
problems.
Please have the following information
ready:
l Radio ID (8-digit electronic serial no See below for how to find your ESN)
l Valid credit card information (may not
be required at initial sign-up)
Be sure you are parked outside with a
clear view of open sky, you will be
instructed to turn on your radio (in
SiriusXM mode and tuned to channel 184
(Sirius)/1 (XM and SiriusXM)).
Activation typically takes only 2―5
minutes.
Displaying the Radio ID (ESN)
When channel 0 is selected, the radio ID
is displayed. Use the PREVIOUS or
NEXT channel buttons to select channel
0.
Interior Features
Audio System
5-43
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page339
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (340,1)
SiriusXM operation
Select the icon on the home screen to display the Entertainment screen. When is
selected, the following icons are indicated in the bottom part of the center display.
Icon Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the channel list of the current category.
Displays the favorites list. Long-press to store the channel currently being aired.
Refer to Operating the Radio on page 5-39.
Indicates that the parental lock function is in use.
Switching of Lock/Unlock and PIN code setting changes can be performed.
Plays each channel in the current channel list for 5 seconds.
Select again to continue receiving the channel.
Plays the previous channel.
Plays the next channel.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-36.
Selection from channel list
Receivable channels can be displayed on
the channel list screen. You can easily
select the channel you want to listen from
the list. Each category can be also
displayed.
1. Select the icon to display the
channel list.
2. Select a desired channel.
(Select from category list)
1. Select the icon to display the
channel list.
2. Select to display the category
list.
3. Select a desired category.
Parental lock
If a channel is locked, the channel is
muted.
To use the parental lock function, the PIN
code must be initialized first.
By using the session lock, the parental
lock can be enabled or disabled during the
current drive cycle (from when the
ignition is switched on to switched off).
When the session lock is on, the parental
lock is available. When the session lock is
off, the parental lock is temporarily
cancelled.
5-44
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page340
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (341,1)
When canceling the parental lock or
session lock, or when changing the PIN
code, PIN code input is required.
PIN code reset
If the registered code has been forgotten,
reset the code to the default [0000] code.
1. Select the icon.
2. If the selected channel is locked, input
the PIN code to cancel the parental
lock temporarily.
3. Select .
4. Input the default code [0000] using the
number buttons.
5. Select .
6. Input the new PIN code using the
number buttons.
7. Select .
Interior Features
Audio System
5-45
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page341
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (342,1)
qOperating the Compact Disc (CD) Player
CD slotCD eject button
Type Playable data
Music/MP3/WMA/
AAC CD player
l Music data (CD-DA)
l MP3/WMA/AAC file
NOTE
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA) and
MP3/WMA/AAC files, playback of the two or
three file types differs depending on how the
disc was recorded.
Inserting the CD
Insert the CD into the slot, label-side up.
The auto-loading mechanism will set the
CD and begin play.
NOTE
There will be a short lapse before play begins
while the player reads the digital signals on
the CD.
Ejecting the CD
Press the CD eject button ( ) to eject the
CD.
5-46
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page342
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (343,1)
Playback
Select the icon on the home screen with a CD inserted and display the Entertainment
screen. When is selected, the following icons are indicated in the lower part of the
center display.
Icon Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
(Music CD)
Displays the track list of the CD.
Select the track you want to play.
(MP3/WMA/AAC CD)
Displays the top level folder/file list.
Select the folder you want to select.
The files in the selected folder are displayed.
Select the file you want to play.
(MP3/WMA/ACC CDs only)
Displays the file list of the folder currently being played.
Select the song you want to listen to.
(Music CD)
Replays the song currently being played repeatedly.
Select it again to cancel.
(MP3/WMA/AAC CD)
Replays the song currently being played repeatedly.
When selected again, the songs in the folder are played repeatedly.
Select it again to cancel.
(Music CD)
Plays songs on the CD in random order.
Select it again to cancel.
(MP3/WMA/AAC CD)
Plays songs in the folder in random order.
When selected again, the songs on the CD are played in random order.
Select it again to cancel.
(Music CD)
The beginning of each track on a CD is played to aid in searching for a desired track.
When selected again, the operation is canceled and the song currently being played
continues.
(MP3/WMA/AAC CD)
The beginning of each track in a folder is played to aid in searching for a desired track.
When selected again, the operation is canceled and the song currently being played
continues.
If the audio is operated during scan-play, the track being scan-played is played normally.
Then, the audio operation is performed.
If selected within a few seconds of a song which has started to play, the previous song is
selected.
If more than a few seconds have elapsed after a song has begun to play, the song currently
being played is replayed from the beginning.
Long-press to fast reverse. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
Interior Features
Audio System
5-47
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page343
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (344,1)
Icon Function
Plays a CD. When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Advances to the beginning of the next song.
Long-press to fast forward. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-36.
Example of use (When searching for a
song from the top level of an MP3/
WMA/AAC CD)
1. Select the icon and display the
folder/file list at the top level.
2. When the folder is selected, folders/file
lists in the folder are displayed.
3. Select the desired song.
NOTE
l Select to move to a folder one level
higher.
l The appearance of the repeat and shuffle
icons changes depending on the type of
operation in which the function is used.
qHow to use Auxiliary jack/USB port
Audio can be heard from the vehicle's
speakers by connecting a commerciallyavailable portable audio unit to the
auxiliary jack.
Use a commercially-available, nonimpedance (3.5 ) stereo mini plug cable.
In addition, audio can be played from the
vehicle audio device by connecting a USB
device or an iPod to the USB port.
Refer to AUX/USB/iPod mode on page
5-52.
5-48
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page344
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (345,1)
qSettings
NOTE
Depending on the grade and specification, the screen display may differ.
Select the icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen.
Switch the tab and select the setting item you want to change.
You can customize settings in the setup display as follows:
Tab Item Function
Display Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-36.
Safety
Distance Recognition Support System
SBS/SCBS
Other
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
Sound Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-36.
Clock
Adjust Time
Displays the currently set time is displayed.
Press to advance the hour/minute, and select
to move the hour/minute back.
AM/PM can only be selected with the 12-hour
clock display.
GPS Sync
When ON is selected, “Adjust Time” is
disabled.
Time Format
Changes the display between 12 and 24-hour
clock time.
Time Zone Select Selects the time zone.
Daylight Savings Time
Turns the daylight saving time setting on/off.
When ON, the time advances 1 hour. When
OFF, it returns to normal time.
Vehicle
Rain Sensing Wiper
Door Locks
Other
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-10.
Devices Bluetooth®
Refer to Bluetooth® Preparation (Type B) on
page 5-86.
Interior Features
Audio System
5-49
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page345
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (346,1)
Tab Item Function
System
Tool Tips Turns button explanations ON/OFF.
Language Changes the language.
Temperature
Changes the setting between Fahrenheit and
Celsius.
Distance
Changes the setting between miles and
kilometers.
Music Database Update
Used to update Gracenote®. Gracenote is used
with USB Audio, and provides:
1. Supplemental music information
(Such as song name, artist name)
2. Voice recognition assistance for Play Artist
and Play Album
Gracenote can be downloaded from the Mazda
Hands Free Website.
Refer to Gracenote Database (Type B) on page
5-66.
Restore All Factory Settings
Memory and settings are initialized to the
factory settings.
The initialization launches by selecting the
button.
About
Agreements and
Disclaimers
Verify the disclaimer and agree.
Version Information
Can verify the current audio unit OS version
and Gracenote Database version.
qApplications
NOTE
Depending on the grade and specification, the
screen display may differ.
Select the icon on the home screen to
display the Applications screen. The
following information can be verified.
Top screen Item Function
HD
Radio™
Traffic Map
― ―
Fuel
Economy
Monitor
Fuel Consumption
Settings
Refer to Fuel
Economy Monitor
on page 4-84.
Maintenance
Scheduled
Maintenance
Tire Rotation
Oil Change
Refer to
Maintenance
Monitor on page
6-20.
Warning
Guidance
Warnings currently
active can be
verified.
Refer to When
Warning/Indicator
Lights
Illuminate/Flash
on page 7-23.
5-50
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page346
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (347,1)
Audio Control Switch
Operation
Without Bluetooth® Hands-Free
With Bluetooth® Hands-Free
qAdjusting the Volume
To increase the volume, press up the
volume switch ( ).
To decrease the volume, press down the
volume switch ( ).
qSeek Switch
AM/FM radio
Press the seek switch ( , ). The radio
switches to the next/previous stored
station in the order that it was stored.
Press and hold the seek switch ( , )
to seek all usable stations at a higher or
lower frequency whether programmed or
not.
Radio stations which have been
previously stored in the auto memory
tuning (Type A)/favorite radio (Type B)
can be called up by pressing the seek
switch ( , ) while any radio station
stored in the auto memory tuning (Type
A)/favorite radio (Type B) is being
received. Radio stations can be called up
in the order they were stored with each
press of the switch ( , ).
USB Audio/Bluetooth® Audio/CD
Press the seek switch ( ) to skip forward
to the beginning of the next track.
Press the seek switch ( ) within a few
seconds after playback begins to track
down to the beginning of the previous
track.
Press the seek switch ( ) after a few
seconds have elapsed to start playback
from the beginning of the current track.
Press and hold the seek switch ( , )
to continuously switch the tracks up or
down.
Interior Features
Audio System
5-51
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page347
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (348,1)
Pandora®/Aha™/Stitcher™ Radio
(Type B)
Press the seek switch ( ) to skip forward
to the beginning of the next track.
Press and hold the seek switch ( ) to
evaluate the playback of the current song
as “Like”.
Press and hold the seek switch ( ) to
evaluate the playback of the current song
as “Dislike”.
qMute Switchí
Press the mute switch ( ) once to mute
audio, press it again to resume audio
output.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off with the audio
muted, the mute will be canceled. Therefore,
when the engine is restarted, the audio is not
muted. To mute the audio again, press the mute
switch ( ).
AUX/USB/iPod mode
Audio can be heard from the vehicle's
speakers by connecting a commerciallyavailable portable audio unit to the
auxiliary jack.
A commercially-available, non-impedance
(3.5 ) stereo mini plug cable is required.
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer for
details.
In addition, audio can be played from the
vehicle audio device by connecting a USB
device or an iPod to the USB port.
NOTE
(Type B)
The SD card slot is for the navigation system.
For vehicles with the navigation system, the
SD card (Mazda genuine) with stored map
data is inserted into the SD card slot and used.
Type A
Auxiliary jack/USB port
5-52
Interior Features
íSome models.
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page348
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (349,1)
Type B
Auxiliary jack
USB port
How to use AUX mode (Type
A) ......................................... page 5-54
How to use USB mode (Type
A) ......................................... page 5-56
How to use iPod mode (Type
A) ......................................... page 5-60
How to use AUX mode (Type
B) ......................................... page 5-63
How to use USB mode (Type
B) ......................................... page 5-63
WARNING
Do not adjust the portable audio unit
or a similar product while driving the
vehicle:
Adjusting the portable audio unit or
a similar product while driving the
vehicle is dangerous as it could
distract your attention from the
vehicle operation which could lead to
a serious accident. Always adjust the
portable audio unit or a similar
product while the vehicle is stopped.
CAUTION
Ø Always close the auxiliary jack/
USB port lid when it is not in use.
If foreign matter or liquid
penetrates the auxiliary jack/USB
port, it may cause a malfunction.
Ø Depending on the portable audio
device, noise may occur when the
device is connected to the vehicle
accessory socket. (If noise occurs,
do not use the accessory socket.)
NOTE
l This mode may not be usable depending on
the portable audio device to be connected.
l Before using the auxiliary jack/USB port,
refer to the instruction manual for the
portable audio device.
l Use a commercially-available, nonimpedance (3.5 ) stereo mini plug for
connecting the portable audio unit to the
auxiliary jack. Before using the auxiliary
jack, read the manufacturer's instructions
for connecting a portable audio unit to the
auxiliary jack.
l To prevent discharging of the battery, do
not use the auxiliary input for long periods
with the engine off or idling.
l When connecting a device to the auxiliary
jack or USB port, noise may occur
depending on the connected device. If the
device is connected to the vehicle's
accessory socket, the noise can be reduced
by unplugging it from the accessory socket.
Interior Features
Audio System
5-53
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page349
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (350,1)
qHow to connect USB port/
Auxiliary jack
Type A
USB port Auxiliary jack
Type B
USB port Auxiliary jack
Connecting a device
1. If there is a cover on the AUX jack or
USB port, remove the cover.
2. Connect the connector on the device to
the USB port.
Connecting with a connector cable
1. If there is a cover on the AUX jack or
USB port, remove the cover.
2. Connect the device plug/connector
cable to the auxiliary jack/USB port.
WARNING
Do not allow the connection plug cord
to get tangled with the shift lever:
Allowing the plug cord to become
tangled with the shift lever is
dangerous as it could interfere with
driving, resulting in an accident.
CAUTION
Do not place objects or apply force to
the auxiliary jack/USB port with the
plug connected.
NOTE
l Insert the plug into the auxiliary jack/USB
port securely.
l Insert or pull out the plug with the plug
perpendicular to the auxiliary jack/USB
port hole.
l Insert or remove the plug by holding its
base.
qHow to use AUX mode (Type A)
1. Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
2. Press the power/volume dial to turn the
audio system on.
3. Press the USB/AUX button ( ) of the
audio unit to change to the AUX mode.
5-54
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page350
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (351,1)
NOTE
l When the device is not connected to the
auxiliary jack, the mode does not switch to
the AUX mode.
l Adjust the audio volume using the portable
audio device or audio unit.
l Audio adjustments other than audio volume
can only be done using the portable audio
device.
l If the connection plug is pulled out from the
auxiliary jack while in AUX mode, noise
may occur.
Interior Features
Audio System
5-55
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page351
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (352,1)
qHow to use USB mode (Type A)
USB/AUX button
Scan button
Text button
Track down/Reverse button
Track up/Fast-forward button
File dial
Folder up button
Folder down button
Audio display
Random button Play/Pause button
Repeat button
Type Playable data
USB mode MP3/WMA/AAC file
This unit does not support a USB 3.0
device. In addition, other devices may not
be supported depending on the model or
OS version.
Playback
1. Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
2. Press the power/volume dial to turn the
audio system on.
3. Press the USB/AUX button ( ) to
switch to the USB mode and start
playback.
NOTE
l Some devices such as smart phones may
require a setting change to allow operation
using a USB connection.
l When the USB device is not connected, the
mode does not switch to USB mode.
l When there is no playable data in the USB
device, “NO CONTENTS” is flashed.
l Playback of the USB device is in the order
of the folder numbers. Folders which have
no MP3/WMA/AAC files are skipped.
l Do not remove the USB device while in the
USB mode. The data may be damaged.
Pause
To stop playback, press the play/pause
button (5).
Press the button again to resume
playback.
Fast-forward/Reverse
Press and hold the fast-forward button
( ) to advance through a track at high
speed.
Press and hold the reverse button ( ) to
reverse through a track at high speed.
Track search
Press the track up button ( ) or turn the
file dial clockwise once to skip forward to
the beginning of the next track.
Press the track down button ( ) or turn
the file dial counterclockwise within a few
seconds after playback begins to track
down to the beginning of the previous
track.
Press the track down button ( ) or turn
the file dial counterclockwise after a few
seconds have elapsed to start playback
from the beginning of the current track.
5-56
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page352
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (353,1)
Folder search
To change to the previous folder, press the
folder down button ( ), or press the
folder up button ( ) to advance to the
next folder.
Music Scan
This function scans the titles in a folder
currently being played and plays ten
seconds of each song to aid you in finding
a song you want to listen to.
Press the scan button ( ) during
playback to start the scan play operation
(the track number will flash). Press the
scan button ( ) again to cancel scan
playback.
NOTE
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback will
resume where scan was selected.
Repeat playback
Track repeat
1. Press the repeat button (1) during
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. “TRACK RPT” is
displayed ( is displayed next to RPT
at the bottom of the display area).
2. To cancel the repeat playback, press the
button again after 3 seconds.
Folder repeat
1. Press the repeat button (1) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks in the current folder repeatedly.
“FOLDER RPT” is displayed ( is
displayed next to RPT at the bottom of
the display area).
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
Random playback
Tracks are randomly selected and played.
Folder random
1. Press the random button (2) during
playback to play the tracks in the folder
randomly. “FOLDER RDM” is
displayed ( is displayed next to
RDM at the bottom of the display
area).
2. To cancel the random playback, press
the button again after 3 seconds.
All random
1. Press the random button (2) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks in the USB device randomly.
“ALL RDM” is displayed ( is
displayed next to RDM at the bottom
of the display area).
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
Switching the display
The information displayed on the audio
display changes as follows each time the
text button ( ) is pressed during
playback.
Button
Information displayed
on audio display
File number/Elapsed time
Folder number/File
number
File name
Folder name
Album name
Song name
Artist name
Interior Features
Audio System
5-57
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page353
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (354,1)
NOTE
l The information (artist name, music name)
is displayed only when the USB device
information in the USB device has
information which can be displayed on the
screen.
l This unit cannot display some characters.
Characters which cannot be displayed are
indicated by an asterisk ( ).
Display scroll
Only 13 characters can be displayed at
one time. To display the rest of the
characters of a long title, press and hold
the text button ( ). The display
scrolls the next 13 characters. Press and
hold the text button ( ) again after
the last 13 characters have been displayed
to return to the beginning of the title.
NOTE
The number of characters which can be
displayed is restricted.
Error Messages
When the message “CHECK USB” is
displayed, it indicates that there is some
error in the USB device. Verify that the
content recorded in the USB device has
MP3/WMA/AAC files and re-connect
correctly. If the message reappears, have
the unit checked by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
5-58
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page354
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (355,1)
MEMO
5-59
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page355
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (356,1)
qHow to use iPod mode (Type A)
Track down/Reverse button
Track up/Fast-forward button List up button
List down button
Audio display
Random button
Category down button Category up button
Play/Pause button
Repeat button
USB/AUX button
Scan button
Text button
File dial
An iPod may not be compatible
depending on the model or OS version. In
this case, an error message is displayed.
NOTE
The iPod functions on the iPod cannot be
operated while it is connected to the unit
because the unit controls the iPod functions.
Playback
1. Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
2. Press the power/volume dial to turn the
audio system on.
3. Press the USB/AUX button ( ) to
switch to the iPod mode and start
playback.
NOTE
l When an iPod is not connected, the mode
does not switch to the iPod mode.
l When there is no playable data in the iPod,
“NO CONTENTS” is flashed.
l Do not remove the iPod while in the iPod
mode. Otherwise, the data could be
damaged.
Pause
To stop playback, press the play/pause
button (5).
Press the button again to resume
playback.
Fast-forward/Reverse
Press and hold the fast-forward button
( ) to advance through a track at high
speed.
Press and hold the reverse button ( ) to
reverse through a track at high speed.
Track search
Press the track up button ( ) or turn the
file dial clockwise once to skip forward to
the beginning of the next track.
Press the track down button ( ) or turn
the file dial counterclockwise within a few
seconds (depends on iPod software
version) after playback begins to track
down to the beginning of the previous
track.
Press the track down button ( ) or turn
the file dial counterclockwise after a few
seconds (depends on iPod software
version) have elapsed to start playback
from the beginning of the current track.
5-60
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page356
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (357,1)
Category search
Press the category down button (3) to
select the previous category and press the
category up button (4) to select the next
category.
NOTE
The types of categories include Playlist, Artist,
Album, Song, Podcast, Genre, Composer, and
Audio book.
List search
Press the list down button ( ) to select
the previous list and press the list up
button ( ) to select the next list.
NOTE
When the selected category is Song or Audio
book, there is no list.
Music Scan
This function scans the titles in a list
currently being played and plays 10
seconds of each song to aid you in finding
a song you want to listen to.
Press the scan button ( ) during
playback to start the scan play operation
(the track number will flash). Press the
scan button ( ) again to cancel scan
playback.
NOTE
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback will
resume where scan was selected.
Repeat playback
1. Press the repeat button (1) during
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. “TRACK RPT” is
displayed ( is displayed next to RPT
at the bottom of the display area).
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
Random playback
Tracks are randomly selected and played.
Song random
1. Press the random button (2) during
playback to play the tracks in the list
randomly. “SONG RDM” is displayed
( is displayed next to RDM at the
bottom of the display area).
2. To cancel the random playback, press
the button again after 3 seconds.
Album random
1. Press the random button (2) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks in the iPod randomly. “ALBUM
RDM” is displayed ( is displayed
next to RDM at the bottom of the
display area).
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
NOTE
The track number being played randomly is in
the order of the iPod shuffle table.
Switching the display
The information displayed on the audio
display changes as follows each time the
text button ( ) is pressed during
playback.
Button
Information displayed
on audio display
File number/Elapsed time
File number
Category name
Artist name
Album name
Song name
Interior Features
Audio System
5-61
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page357
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (358,1)
NOTE
l The information (artist name, music name)
is displayed only when the iPod has
information which can be displayed.
l This unit cannot display some characters.
Characters which cannot be displayed are
indicated by an asterisk ( ).
Display scroll
13 characters can be displayed at one
time. To display the rest of the characters
of a long title, press and hold the text
button ( ). The display scrolls the
next 13 characters. Press and hold the text
button ( ) again after the last 13
characters have been displayed to return
to the beginning of the title.
NOTE
The number of characters which can be
displayed is restricted.
Error Messages
If the message “CHECK iPod” is
displayed, it indicates that there is a
malfunction in the iPod. Verify that the
content recorded in the iPod has playable
files and connect correctly. If the message
reappears, have the unit checked by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qError Indications (Type A)
If you see an error indication on the
display, find the cause in the chart. If you
cannot clear the error indication, take the
vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Indication Cause Solution
CHECK USB
USB device
malfunction
Verify that the content
recorded in the USB
device has
MP3/WMA/AAC files
and re-connect correctly.
If the error indication
continues to display,
consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
CHECK iPod
iPod
malfunction
Verify that the content
recorded in the iPod has
playable files and
re-connect correctly.
If the error indication
continues to display,
consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
5-62
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page358
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (359,1)
qHow to use AUX mode (Type B)
1. Select the icon on the home screen and display the Entertainment screen.
2. Select to switch to the AUX mode. The following icons are displayed in the lower
part of the center display.
Icon Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-36.
NOTE
l If a device is not connected to the auxiliary jack, the mode does not switch to the AUX mode.
l Adjust the audio volume using the portable audio device, commander switch, or audio control
switch.
l Audio adjustments can also be made using the portable audio device's volume setting.
l If the connection plug is pulled out from the auxiliary jack while in AUX mode, noise may occur.
qHow to use USB mode (Type B)
Type Playable data
USB mode MP3/WMA/AAC/OGG file
This unit does not support a USB 3.0 device. In addition, other devices may not be
supported depending on the model or OS version.
USB devices formatted to FAT32 are supported (USB devices formatted to other formats
such as NTFS are not supported).
Interior Features
Audio System
5-63
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page359
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (360,1)
Playback
1. Select the icon on the home screen and display the Entertainment screen.
2. Select or to switch the USB mode. The following icons are displayed in
the lower part of the center display.
Icon Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Category list is displayed.
Current track list is displayed.
Select a desired track to play it.
Plays the current track repeatedly.
Select it again to play the tracks in the current track list repeatedly.
When selected again, the function is canceled.
Tracks in the current track list are played randomly.
Select it again to cancel.
Starts playing a track similar to the current track using Gracenote's More Like This™.
Select the desired song from the category list to cancel More Like This™.
If selected within a few seconds from the beginning of a song which has started to play, the
previous song is selected.
If more than a few seconds have elapsed, the song currently being played is replayed from
the beginning.
Long-press to fast reverse. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
Track is played. When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Advances to the beginning of the next song.
Long-press to fast forward.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-36.
NOTE
l To move to the desired location on the track, move the slider indicating the playback time.
l The appearance of the repeat and shuffle icons changes depending on the type of operation in
which the function is used.
5-64
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page360
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (361,1)
Category list
Select the icon and display the following category list.
Select a desired category and item.
Category Function
Playlist Displays playlists on the device.
Artist
Displays the artist name list.
All the tracks or tracks for each album of the selected artist can be played.
Album Displays the album name list.
Song All the tracks in the device are displayed.
Genre
Displays the genre list.
All the tracks or tracks per album or artist in the selected genre can be played.
Audiobook
Displays the audiobook list.
Chapters can be selected and played.
Podcast
Displays the podcast list.
Episode can be selected and played.
(Special service for some Apple devices.)
Folder Displays the folder/file list.
Example of use (to play all tracks in
USB device)
(Method 1)
1. Select to display the category list.
2. Select .
All the tracks in the USB device are
displayed.
3. Select a desired track.
The selected track is played. All the
tracks in the USB device can be played
by continuing playback.
NOTE
Only the tracks in the desired category selected
in Step 2 are played.
(Method 2)*1
1. Select to display the category list.
2. Select .
All the folders in the USB device are
displayed.
3. Select .
All the tracks in the USB device are
displayed.
4. Select a desired track.
The selected track is played. All the
tracks in the USB device can be played
by continuing playback.
*1 Can be operated using an Android™
device or USB flash memory.
NOTE
Only the tracks in the desired folder selected in
Step 3 are played.
Interior Features
Audio System
5-65
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page361
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (362,1)
qGracenote Database (Type B)
When a USB device is connected to this unit and the audio is played, the album name,
artist name, genre and title information are automatically displayed if there is a match in the
vehicle's database compilation to the music being played. The information stored in this
device uses database information in the Gracenote music recognition service.
CAUTION
For information related to the most recent Gracenote database which can be used
and how to install it, go to the Mazda Hands Free Website:
http://www.mazdahandsfree.com
Introduction
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is
the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For
more information visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote.
Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more patents owned
by Gracenote apply to this product and service. See the Gracenote website for a nonexhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS,
the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other
countries.
5-66
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page362
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (363,1)
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California
(“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this
application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information,
including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers
or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions.
You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this
application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy,
transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU
AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPTAS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your
license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no
circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information
that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this
Agreement against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to
count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the
web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the
accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the
right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause
that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or
Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new
enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future
and is free to discontinue its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALLWARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT
WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES.
© 2000 to present. Gracenote, Inc.
Interior Features
Audio System
5-67
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page363
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (364,1)
Updating the database
The Gracenote media database can be updated using USB device.
1. Connect a USB device containing the software for updating Gracenote.
2. Select the icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen.
3. Select the tab and select .
4. Select . The list of the update package stored in the USB device and the version
are displayed.
5. Select the package to use the update.
6. Select .
NOTE
Gracenote can be downloaded from the Mazda Hands-free Website.
5-68
Interior Features
Audio System
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page364
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (365,1)
Bluetooth®í
Bluetooth® Hands-Free outline
When a Bluetooth® device (mobile phone) is connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth® unit via
radio wave transmission, a call can be made or received by pressing the talk button, pickup button, or hang-up button on the audio remote control switch, or by operating the center
display. For example, even if a device (mobile phone) is in your coat pocket, a call can be
made without taking the device (mobile phone) out and operating it directly.
Bluetooth® audio outline
When a portable audio unit equipped with the Bluetooth® communication function is
paired to the vehicle, you can listen to music stored on the paired portable audio device
from the vehicle's speakers. It is not necessary to connect the portable audio device to the
vehicle's external input terminal. After programming, operate the vehicle audio control
panel to play/stop the audio.
NOTE
l For your safety, a device can be paired only when the vehicle is parked. If the vehicle starts to
move, the pairing procedure will end. Park the vehicle in a safe place before pairing.
l The communication range of a Bluetooth® equipped device is about 10 meters (32 ft) or less.
l Basic audio operation is available using voice commands even if Bluetooth® is not connected.
CAUTION
Some Bluetooth® mobile devices are not compatible with the vehicle.
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer, Mazda's call center or Web support center for
information regarding Bluetooth® mobile device compatibility:
Ø U.S.A.
Phone:800-430-0153
Web: www.MazdaUSA.com/bluetooth
Ø Canada
Phone:800-430-0153
Web: www.mazdahandsfree.ca
Ø Mexico
Center of Attention to Client (CAC)
Phone:01-800-01-MAZDA
Web: www.mazdamexico.com.mx
Applicable Bluetooth® specification (Recommended)
Type A: Ver. 2.0
Type B: Ver. 1.1/1.2/2.0 EDR/2.1 EDR/3.0 (conformity)
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-69íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page365
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (366,1)
qComponent Parts
Talk button, Pick-up button and Hang-up button
Microphone
Talk button
Hang-up button
Pick-up button
Audio unit
Type A Type B
Microphone
Microphone (Hands-Free)
The microphone is used for speaking voice commands or when making a Hands-Free call.
Talk button, Pick-Up button and Hang-Up button (Hands-Free)
The basic functions of Bluetooth® Hands-Free can be used for such things as making calls
or hanging up using the talk, pick-up and hang-up buttons on the steering wheel.
Commander switch (Type B)
The commander switch is used for volume adjustment and display operation. Tilt or turn
the commander knob to move the cursor. Press the commander knob to select the icon.
Volume adjustment
The power/volume dial of the audio unit*1 or the volume dial of the commander switch*2 is
used to adjust the volume. Turn the dial to the right to increase volume, to the left to
decrease it.
The volume can also be adjusted using the volume button on the steering wheel.
*1 Type A
*2 Type B
NOTE
If the volume is lower compared to other audio modes, increase the volume from the device side.
5-70
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page366
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (367,1)
(Type B)
Conversation volume and the volume of the voice guidance and ringtone can each be set in
advance.
1. Select the icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen.
2. Select .
3. Adjust the and the using the slider.
qBluetooth® Preparation (Type A)
Bluetooth®Hands-Free Preparation
Pairing code setting
The 4-digit pairing code setting for
registration of your cell phone (pairing)
can be set beforehand.
NOTE
The initial setting value is “0000”.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say:[Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say:[Beep] “Pairing options”
5. Prompt:“Select one of the following:
Pair, Edit, Delete, List, or Set Pairing
Code.”
6. Say:[Beep] “Set pairing code”
7. Prompt:“Your current pairing code is
XXXX. Do you want to change it to a
different pairing code?”
8. Say:[Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “Please say a 4-digit pairing
code.”
10. Say: [Beep] “YYYY”
11. Prompt: “YYYY is this correct?”
12. Say:[Beep] “Yes” or “No”
13. If “Yes”, go to Step 14. If “No”, the
procedure returns to Step 9.
14. Prompt: “Your new pairing code is
YYYY. Use this pairing code when
pairing devices to the Hands-Free
system. Do you want to pair a device
now?”
15. Say:[Beep] “Yes” or “No”
16. If “Yes”, the system switches to the
device registration mode. If “No”, the
system returns to standby status.
Device pairing
To use Bluetooth® Hands-Free, the device
equipped with Bluetooth® has to be paired
to the Bluetooth® unit using the following
procedure.
A maximum of seven devices including
Hands-Free mobile phones and
Bluetooth® audio devices can be paired to
one vehicle.
NOTE
If a Bluetooth®device has already been paired
to the vehicle as a Bluetooth® audio device, it
does not need to be paired again when using
the device as a Hands-Free mobile phone.
Conversely, it does not need to be paired again
as a Bluetooth® audio device if it has already
been paired as a Hands-Free mobile phone.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-71
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page367
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (368,1)
1. Activate the Bluetooth® application of
the device.
NOTE
For the operation of the device, refer to its
instruction manual.
2. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
3. Say:[Beep] “Setup”
4. Prompt:“Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
5. Say:[Beep] “Pairing options”
6. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pair, Edit, Delete, List, or Set Pairing
Code.”
7. Say:[Beep] “Pair”
8. Prompt: “Start the pairing process on
your Bluetooth® device. Your pairing
code is 0000 (XXXX). Input this on
your Bluetooth® device when
prompted on the device. See device
manual for instructions.”
9. Using the device, perform a search for
the Bluetooth® device (Peripheral
device).
NOTE
For the operation of the device, refer to its
instruction manual.
10. Select “Mazda” from the device list
searched by the device.
11. Input the 4-digit pairing code to the
device.
12. Prompt:“Please say the name of the
device after the beep.”
13. Say:[Beep] “XXXX - - -” (Say a
“device tag”, an arbitrary name for
the device.) Example: “Stan's device.”
NOTE
Say a paired “device tag” within 10 seconds.
If more than two devices are to be paired, they
cannot be paired with the same or similar
“device tag”.
14. Prompt:“XXXXXX - - - (Ex. “Stan's
device”) (Device tag). Is this
correct?”
15. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
16. Prompt:“Pairing complete”
After a device is registered, the system
automatically identifies the device. By
activating Bluetooth® Hands-Free again,
or by activating Bluetooth® Hands-Free
first after switching the ignition from OFF
to ACC, the system reads out a voice
guidance, “XXXXXX - - - (Ex. “Stan's
device”) (Device tag) is connected”.
NOTE
l When the pairing is completed, the
symbol is displayed.
l Some Bluetooth® audio devices need a
certain amount of time before the symbol
is displayed.
l Device registration can also be done by
operating the audio unit.
l Depending on the device, the registration
status may be lost after a certain period of
time. If this occurs, repeat the entire
process from Step 1.
Registered device read-out
Bluetooth® Hands-Free can read-out the
devices registered to its system.
5-72
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page368
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (369,1)
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say:[Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say:[Beep] “Pairing options”
5. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pair, Edit, Delete, List, or Set Pairing
Code”
6. Say:[Beep] “List”
7. Prompt: “XXXXX..., XXXXX...,
XXXXX... (Ex. Device A, device B,
device C)” (The voice guidance reads
out the device tags registered to the
Hands-Free system.) Press the talk
button with a short press during the
read-out at the desired device, and then
say one of the following voice
commands to execute it.
l “Select phone”: Selects device
(Mobile phone) when the talk button
is short-pressed.
l “Select music player”: Selects
device (Music player) when the talk
button is short-pressed.
l “Edit”: Edits device when the talk
button is short-pressed.
l “Continue”: Continues the list
readout.
l “Delete”: Deletes the registered
device when the talk button is shortpressed.
l “Previous”: Returns to the previous
device in read-out when the talk
button is short-pressed.
8. Prompt:“End of list, would you like to
start from the beginning?”
9. Say: [Beep] “No”
10. Prompt: “Returning to main menu.”
Device selection
If several devices have been paired, the
Bluetooth® unit links the device last
paired. If you would like to link a
different paired device, it is necessary to
change the link. The order of device
priority after the link has been changed is
maintained even when the ignition is
switched off.
(Hands-Free phone)
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt:“Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say:[Beep] “Select phone”
5. Prompt:“Please say the name of the
device you would like to select.
Available devices are XXXXX... (Ex.
device A), XXXXX... (Ex. device B),
XXXXX... (Ex. device C). Which
device please?”
6. Say:[Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. Device
B)”
7. Prompt:“XXXXX... (Ex. Device B). Is
this correct?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-73
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page369
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (370,1)
9. If “Yes”, go to Step 10. If “No”, the
procedure returns to Step 5.
10. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. Device B)
selected.”
(Music player)
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt:“Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Select music player”
5. Prompt: “Please say the name of the
device you would like to select.
Available devices are XXXXX... (Ex.
device A), XXXXX... (Ex. device B),
XXXXX... (Ex. device C). Which
device please?”
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. Device
B)”
7. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. Device B).
Is this correct?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”
9. If “Yes”, go to Step 10. If “No”, the
procedure returns to Step 5.
10. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. Device B)
selected.”
NOTE
l When the selected device connection is
completed, the or symbol is
displayed.
l Some Bluetooth® audio devices need a
certain amount of time before the or
symbol is displayed.
l Device (Music player) selection can also be
done by operating the panel button.
Deleting a device
Registered devices (Mobile phone) can be
deleted individually or collectively.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say:[Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”
5. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pair, Edit, Delete, List, or Set Pairing
Code.”
NOTE
A registered device (Mobile phone) can be
deleted using the registration list.
6. Say:[Beep] “Delete”
7. Prompt: “Please say the name of the
device you would like to delete.
Available devices are XXXXX... (Ex.
device A), XXXXX... (Ex. device B),
XXXXX... (Ex. device C), or all.
Which device please?”
8. Say: [Beep] “X” (Say the number of
the device to be deleted.)
NOTE
Say “All” to delete all devices (Mobile phone).
9. Prompt:“Deleting XXXXX... (Ex.
device B...) (Registered device tag). Is
this correct?”
10. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
5-74
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page370
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (371,1)
11. Prompt: “Deleted”
Registered device editing
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt:“Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say:[Beep] “Pairing options”
5. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pair, Edit, Delete, List, or Set Pairing
Code.”
6. Say:[Beep] “Edit”
7. Prompt:“Please say the name of the
device you would like to edit.
Available devices are XXXXX... (Ex.
device A), XXXXX... (Ex. device B),
XXXXX... (Ex. device C). Which
device please?”
8. Say: [Beep] “X” (Say the number of
the device to be edited.)
9. Prompt: “New name please?”
10. Say:[Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. Device
C)” (Speak a “device tag” an arbitrary
name for the device.)
11. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. device C)
(Device tag), is this correct?”
12. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
13. Prompt: “New name saved.”
Bluetooth® Audio Preparation
Bluetooth® audio device set-up
Bluetooth® audio pairing, changes,
deletions, and display of paired device
information can be performed.
1. The mode changes as follows each
time the audio control dial is pressed.
Select “BT SETUP”.
*
*
* Depending on the mode selected, the
indication changes.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-75
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page371
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (372,1)
2. Turn the audio control dial and select a
desired mode.
Display Mode Function
PAIR
DEVICE
Pairing mode
Bluetooth® audio
device pairing
LINK
CHANGE
Link change
mode
Changing link to
Bluetooth® audio
device
PAIR
DELETE
Pairing
deletion mode
Deleting link to
Bluetooth® audio
device
DEVICE
INFO
Device
information
display mode
Displaying vehicle's
Bluetooth® unit
information
3. Press the audio control dial to
determine the mode.
Bluetooth® audio device pairing
Any Bluetooth® audio device must be
paired to the vehicle's Bluetooth® unit
before it can be listened to over the
vehicle's speakers.
A maximum of seven devices including
Bluetooth® audio devices and Hands-Free
mobile phones can be paired to one
vehicle.
NOTE
l If a Bluetooth® device has already been
paired to the vehicle as a Hands-Free
mobile phone, it does not need to be paired
again when using the device as a
Bluetooth® audio device. Conversely, it
does not need to be paired again as a
Hands-Free mobile phone if it has already
been paired as a Bluetooth® audio device.
l Device registration can also be done using
voice recognition.
Concerning the operation of a Bluetooth®
audio device itself, refer to its instruction
manual.
Some Bluetooth® audio devices have PIN
codes (four digits). Refer to the audio
device's instruction manual because the
pairing procedure differs depending on
whether it has a PIN code or not.
Pairing a Bluetooth® audio device
which has a four-digit PIN code
1. Using the audio control dial, select the
pairing mode “PAIR DEVICE” in the
“BT SETUP” mode. (Refer to
“Bluetooth® audio device set-up” for
details.)
2. Press the audio control dial to
determine the mode. After “ENTER
PIN” is displayed on the audio display
for three seconds, “PIN 0000” is
displayed and the PIN code can be
input.
5-76
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page372
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (373,1)
3. Input the PIN code of your Bluetooth®
audio device by pressing channel
preset buttons 1 to 4 while “PIN 0000”
is displayed.
Press channel preset button 1 to input
the first digit, 2 for the second, 3 for
the third, and 4 for the forth. For
example, if the PIN code were “4213”
press channel preset button 1 four
times (1, 2, 3, 4), button 2 twice (1, 2),
button 3 once (1), and button 4 three
times (1, 2, 3). If the “PIN 0000”
display disappears before finishing the
PIN code input, repeat the procedure
from Step 1.
NOTE
Some devices accept only a particular pairing
code (Usually, “0000” or “1234”).
If pairing cannot be completed, refer to the
owner's manual of your mobile device, and try
those numbers if necessary.
4. Press the audio control dial while the
input PIN code is displayed.
“PAIRING” flashes on the audio
display.
5. Operate the Bluetooth® audio device
and set it to the pairing mode while
“PAIRING” is flashing.
6. When the pairing is completed, and
“PAIR SUCCESS” are displayed after
about 10-30 seconds, after which
“PAIR SUCCESS” continues to be
displayed for three seconds, and then
the unit returns to the normal display.
NOTE
l Some Bluetooth® audio devices need a
certain amount of time before the symbol
is displayed.
l If the pairing failed, “Err” flashes for three
seconds .
l Pairing cannot be performed while the
vehicle is moving. If you attempt to perform
pairing while the vehicle is moving, “PAIR
DISABLE” is displayed .
l If seven Bluetooth® audio devices have
already been paired to the vehicle, pairing
cannot be performed and “MEMORY
FULL” is displayed. Delete one paired
device to pair another one.
Pairing a Bluetooth® audio device
which does not have a four-digit PIN
code
1. Using the audio control dial, select the
pairing mode “PAIR DEVICE” in the
“BT SETUP” mode. (Refer to
“Bluetooth® audio set up” for details.)
2. Press the audio control dial to
determine the mode. After “ENTER
PIN” is displayed on the audio display
for three seconds, “PIN 0000” is
displayed and the PIN code can be
input.
3. Press the audio control dial while “PIN
0000” is displayed. “PAIRING” flashes
on the audio display.
4. Operate the Bluetooth® audio device
and set it to the pairing mode while
“PAIRING” is flashing.
5. As the Bluetooth® audio device
requires a PIN code, input “0000”.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-77
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page373
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (374,1)
6. When the pairing is completed, and
“PAIR SUCCESS” are displayed after
about 10-30 seconds, after which
“PAIR SUCCESS” continues to be
displayed for three seconds, and then
the unit returns to the normal display.
NOTE
l If pairing cannot be completed, try “1234”
instead. Refer to the owner's manual of
your mobile device for the right PIN code.
l Some Bluetooth® audio devices need a
certain amount of time before the symbol
is displayed.
l If the pairing failed, “Err” flashes for three
seconds.
l Pairing cannot be performed while the
vehicle is moving. If you attempt to perform
pairing while the vehicle is moving, “PAIR
DISABLE” is displayed .
l If seven Bluetooth® audio devices have
already been paired to the vehicle, pairing
cannot be performed and “MEMORY
FULL” is displayed. Delete one paired
device to pair another one.
Device selection
If several devices have been paired, the
Bluetooth® unit links the device last
paired. If you would like to link a
different paired device, it is necessary to
change the link. The order of device
priority after the link has been changed is
maintained even when the ignition is
switched off.
1. Using the audio control dial, select the
link change mode “LINK CHANGE”
in the “BT SETUP” mode. (Refer to
“Bluetooth® audio device set-up” for
details.)
2. Press the audio control dial to
determine the mode.
3. The name of the currently linked
Bluetooth® audio device is displayed.
If no Bluetooth® audio device is
currently linked, the name of the first
device among the paired devices is
displayed.
4. Turn the audio control dial to select the
name of the device you would like to
link.
Device name 1
Device name 2
Device name 3
Device name 4
Device name 5
Device name 6
Device name 7
5. Press the audio control dial to select the
device you would like to link. The
symbol disappears, and “PAIRING”
flashes in the audio display.
NOTE
When “GO BACK” is selected and the audio
control dial is pressed, the display returns to
“LINK CHANGE”.
5-78
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page374
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (375,1)
6. If the link to the desired device is
successful, the symbol is displayed
again, together with “LINK
CHANGED”. “LINK CHANGED” is
displayed for three seconds, then it
returns to the normal display.
NOTE
l Some Bluetooth® audio devices need a
certain amount of time before the symbol
is displayed.
l If a Hands-Free type mobile phone has
been the most recently paired device, the
Bluetooth® unit links this device. If you
would like to use a Bluetooth® audio type
device which has been previously paired to
the Bluetooth® unit, the link must be
changed to this device.
l If an error occurs while trying to link a
device, “Err” flashes in the audio display
for three seconds, and the display returns to
“LINK CHANGE”. If this occurs, check the
pairing status of the Bluetooth® audio
device and the location of the device in the
vehicle (not in the trunk or a metal-type
box), and then try the link operation again.
l Device selection can also be done using
voice recognition.
How to confirm the device currently
linked
Switch to the link-change mode. (Refer to
“Changing the link to a Bluetooth® audio
device”)
The device name displayed first is the
device which is currently linked.
Deleting a device
1. Using the audio control dial, select the
pairing delete mode “PAIR DELETE”
in the “BT SETUP”mode. (Refer to
“Bluetooth® audio device set-up” for
details.)
2. Press the audio control dial to
determine the mode.
3. The name of the first device among the
paired devices is displayed.
4. Rotate the audio control dial and select
the name of the paired device you
would like to delete.
Device name 1
Device name 2
Device name 3
Device name 4
Device name 5
Device name 6
Device name 7
NOTE
Only the names of paired devices can be
displayed. If only one device is paired, only the
name for this device is displayed.
5. If a selection other than “GO BACK”
is made and the audio control dial is
pressed, “SURE ? NO” is displayed.
6. Rotate the audio control dial clockwise
and switch the display to “SURE ?
YES”.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-79
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page375
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (376,1)
NOTE
The display changes as follows depending on
whether the audio control dial is rotated
clockwise or counterclockwise.
_Clockwise: “SURE ? YES” displayed
_Counterclockwise: “SURE ? NO” displayed
7. Press the audio control dial to delete
the selected device.
NOTE
Select “GO BACK” and press the audio
control dial to return to the “PAIR DELETE”
display.
8. “PAIR DELETED” is displayed for
three seconds after the deletion is
completed, and then it returns to the
normal display.
NOTE
If an error occurs while trying to delete the
paired device, “Err” flashes in the display for
three seconds and the display returns to
“LINK DELETE”.
Bluetooth® audio device information
display
1. Using the audio control dial, select the
pair device information display mode
“DEVICE INFO” in the “BT SETUP”
mode. (Refer to “Bluetooth® audio
device set-up” for details.)
2. Press the audio control dial to
determine the mode.
3. The name of the Bluetooth® unit
device is displayed.
4. Rotate the audio control dial to select
the information for the Bluetooth® unit
which you would like to view.
Device name
BT address
NOTE
When “GO BACK” is selected and the audio
control dial is pressed, the display returns to
“DEVICE INFO”.
qAvailable Language (Type A)
The available languages are English,
Spanish, and Canadian French. If the
language setting is changed, all of the
voice guidance and voice input
commands are done in the selected
language.
NOTE
l If the language setting is changed, device
registration is maintained.
l Phonebook records are not cleared, but
each language has a separate phonebook.
Therefore, entries created in one language
will need to be re-entered in the phonebook
of the new language.
l Do these steps before you start driving.
These less used functions are too
distracting to undertake while driving until
you are fully familiar with the system.
5-80
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page376
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (377,1)
(Method 1)
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say:[Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Language”
5. Prompt: “Select a language: English,
French, or Spanish.”
6. Say: [Beep] “French” (Speak the
desired language: “English”, “French”
or “Spanish”)
NOTE
Other language settings can also be made
while in the current setting by saying the name
of the language in the native pronunciation.
7. Prompt:“French (Desired language)
selected. Is this correct?”
8. Say:[Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “French (Desired language)
selected” (Spoken in the newly selected
language).
(Method 2)
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “French” (Say the desired
language: “English”, “French” or
“Spanish”). (Change the desired
language by saying the language
name.)
NOTE
Other language settings can also be made
while in the current setting by saying the name
of the language in the native pronunciation.
3. Prompt: “Would you like to change
the language to French (Desired
language)?”
4. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
5. Prompt: “Please wait. Switching to
French phonebook. French selected”
(Spoken in the newly selected
language).
qVoice Recognition (Type A)
In this section, the basic operation of the
voice recognition is explained.
Activating Voice Recognition
To Activate the Main Menu: Press the
pick-up button or talk button with a short
press.
Ending Voice Recognition
Use one of the following methods:
l Press and hold the talk-button.
l Press the hang-up button.
Skipping Voice Guidance (for faster
operation)
Press and release the talk-button.
NOTE
l The Bluetooth® Hands-Free system is
operable several seconds after the ignition
is switched to ACC or ON (requires less
than 15 seconds).
l When operating the audio unit or the A/C
while using Bluetooth® Hands-Free, the
beep sounds or voice guidance (audio unit)/
cannot be heard.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-81
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page377
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (378,1)
Tutorial
The tutorial explains how to use
Bluetooth® Hands-Free. To activate the
tutorial, do the following:
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say:[Beep] “Tutorial”
3. Follow the prompts to receive the
appropriate voice guidance
instructions.
Commands useable anytime during
voice recognition
“Help” or “Go Back” are commands
which can be used at anytime during
voice recognition.
Help function use
The help function informs the user of all
the available voice commands under the
current conditions.
1. Say: [Beep] “Help”
2. Follow the prompts to receive the
appropriate voice guidance
instructions.
Returning to previous operation
This command is for returning to the
previous operation while in the voice
recognition mode.
Say: [Beep] “Go Back”
To prevent a deterioration in the voice
recognition rate and voice quality, the
following points should be observed:
l The voice recognition cannot be
performed while voice guidance or
the beep sound is operating. Wait
until the voice guidance or the beep
sound is finished before saying your
commands.
l Dialects or different wording other than
Hands-Free prompts cannot be
recognized by voice recognition. Speak
in the wording specified by the voice
commands.
l It is not necessary to face the
microphone or approach it. Speak the
voice commands while maintaining a
safe driving position.
l Do not speak too slow or too loud.
l Speak clearly, without pausing between
words or numbers.
l Close the windows and/or the
moonroofto reduce loud noises from
outside the vehicle, or turn down the
airflow of the air-conditioning system
while Bluetooth® Hands-Free is being
used.
l Make sure the vents are not directing
air up towards the microphone.
NOTE
If the voice recognition performance is not
satisfactory.
Refer to Voice Recognition Learning Function
(Speaker Enrollment) (Type A) on page 5-84.
Refer to Troubleshooting on page 5-124.
qSecurity Setting (Type A)
If a passcode is set, the system cannot be
activated unless the passcode is input.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
Passcode setting
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say:[Beep] “Setup”
5-82
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page378
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (379,1)
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language,passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say:[Beep] “Passcode”
5. Prompt: “Passcode is disabled. Would
you like to enable it?”
6. Say:[Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt:“Please say a 4-digit passcode.
Remember this passcode. It will be
required to use this system.”
8. Say: [Beep] “XXXX” (Say a desired 4digit passcode, “PCode”.)
9. Prompt:“Passcode XXXX (Passcode,
PCode). Is this correct?”
10. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
11. Prompt:“Passcode is enabled.”
Using Bluetooth® Hands-Free with a
passcode
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Prompt: “Hands-Free system is
locked. State the passcode to
continue.”
3. Say: [Beep] “XXXX” (Say the set
passcode “PCode”.)
4. If the correct passcode is input, voice
guidance “XXXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
device”) (Device tag) is connected” is
announced.
If the passcode is incorrect, voice
guidance “XXXX (4-digit passcode,
Pcode) incorrect passcode, please try
again” is announced.
Canceling the passcode
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say:[Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language,passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say:[Beep] “Passcode”
5. Prompt:“Passcode is enabled. Would
you like to disable it?”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt:“Passcode is disabled.”
Confirmation Prompts
The confirmation prompt confirms the
command content to the user before
advancing to the operation requested by
the user. When this function is turned on,
the system reads out the voice input
command previously received and
confirms whether the command is correct
before advancing to the command
execution.
When the confirmation prompt function is
turned on: (Ex. “Calling John's device. Is
this correct?”)
When the confirmation prompt function is
turned off: (Ex. “Calling John's device.”)
NOTE
If the confirmation prompt function is turned
off when making an emergency call, the system
reads out and confirms the command before
executing it.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-83
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page379
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (380,1)
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
language,passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Confirmation prompts”
5. Prompt: “Confirmation prompts are
on/off. Would you like to turn
confirmation prompts off/on?”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt: “Confirmation prompts are
off/on.”
qVoice Recognition Learning Function
(Speaker Enrollment) (Type A)
The voice recognition learning function
enables voice recognition appropriate to
the characteristics of the user's voice. If
the recognition of the voice input
commands to the system is not adequate,
this function can largely improve the
system's voice recognition of the user. If
your voice can be recognized sufficiently
without using this function, you may not
realize the added benefit of the function.
To register your voice, the voice input
command list must be read out. Read out
the list when the vehicle is parked.
Perform the registration in as quiet a place
as possible (page 5-81). The registration
must be performed completely. The
required time is a few minutes. The user
needs to be seated in the driver's seat with
the voice input command list for voice
recognition learning open to the page
indicated below.
When voice recognition learning is
done for the first time
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Voice training”
3. Prompt: “This operation must be
performed in a quiet environment while
the vehicle is stopped. See the owner's
manual for the list of required training
phrases. Press and release the talk
button when you are ready to begin.
Press the hang-up button to cancel at
any time.”
4. Press the talk button with a short press.
5. The voice guidance reads out the voice
input command number (refer to the
voice input command list for voice
recognition learning). (Ex. “Please read
phrase 1”)
6. Say: [Beep] “0123456789” (Say the
voice input command for voice
recognition learning (1 to 8) according
to the voice guidance.)
7. Prompt: “Speaker enrollment is
complete.”
NOTE
If an error occurred in the voice recognition
learning, re-learning can be done by pressing
the talk button with a short press.
Voice recognition re-learning
If voice recognition learning has already
been done.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say:[Beep] “Voice training”
5-84
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page380
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (381,1)
3. Prompt: “Enrollment is enabled/
disabled. Would you like to disable/
enable or retrain?”
4. Say: [Beep] “Retrain”
5. Prompt: “This operation must be
performed in a quiet environment while
the vehicle is stopped. See the owner's
manual for the list of required training
phrases. Press and release the talk
button when you are ready to begin.
Press the hang-up button to cancel at
any time.”
6. Press the talk button with a short press.
7. The voice guidance reads out the voice
input command number (refer to the
voice input command list for voice
recognition learning). (Ex. “Please read
phrase 1”)
8. Say: [Beep] “0123456789” (Say the
voice input command for voice
recognition learning (1 to 8) according
to the voice guidance.)
9. Prompt: “Speaker enrollment is
complete.”
NOTE
If an error occurred in the voice recognition
learning, re-learning can be done by pressing
the talk button with a short press.
Voice input command list for voice
recognition learning
When reading out, the following points
must be observed:
l Read out the numbers one at a time
correctly and naturally. (For example,
“1234” must be read out “one, two,
three, four” not “twelve, thirty four”.)
l Do not read out parentheses. “ (” and
hyphens “_” are used for separating
numbers in a phone number.
Ex.
“ (888) 555-1212” must be spoken “Eight, eight,
eight, five, five, five, one, two, one, two.”
Phrase Command
1 0123456789
2 (888) 555-1212
3 Call
4 Dial
5 Setup
6 Cancel
7 Continue
8 Help
NOTE
l The applicable phrase appears in the audio
display.
l After user voice registration is completed,
voice guidance “Speaker enrollment is
complete” is announced.
Voice recognition learning on/off
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Voice training”
3. Prompt: “Enrollment is enabled/
disabled. Would you like to disable/
enable or retrain?”
4. Say: [Beep] “Disable” or “Enable”
5. When “Disable” is spoken, the voice
recognition learning is turned off.
When “Enable” is spoken, the voice
recognition learning is turned on.
6. Prompt: “Speaker Enrollment is
disabled/enabled.”
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-85
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page381
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:33 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (382,1)
qBluetooth® Preparation (Type B)
Device pairing
To use Bluetooth® audio and Hands-Free,
the device equipped with Bluetooth® has
to be paired to the unit using the
following procedure. A maximum of
seven devices including Bluetooth® audio
devices and Hands-Free mobile phones
can be paired.
NOTE
The Bluetooth® system may not operate for 1
or 2 minutes after the ignition is switched to
ACC or ON. However, this does not indicate a
problem. If the Bluetooth® system does not
connect automatically after 1 or 2 minutes
have elapsed, make sure that the Bluetooth®
setting on the device is normal and attempt to
reconnect the Bluetooth® device from the
vehicle side.
Pairing Procedure
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Settings screen.
2. Select the tab.
3. Select .
4. Turn the Bluetooth® setting on.
5. Select to display the
message and switch to the device
operation.
6. Using your device, perform a search
for the Bluetooth® device (Peripheral
device).
7. Select “Mazda” from the device list
searched by the device.
8. (Device with Bluetooth® version 2.0)
Input the displayed 4-digit pairing code
into the device.
(Device with Bluetooth® version 2.1
or higher)
Make sure the displayed 6-digit code
on the audio is also displayed on the
device, and touch the .
Connection permission and phonebook
access permission for your mobile
device may be required depending on
the mobile device.
9. If pairing is successful, the functions of
the device connected to Bluetooth® are
displayed.
10. (Devices compatible with Mazda Email/SMS function)
SMS (Short Message Service)
messages, and E-mail for the device
are downloaded automatically. A
download permission operation for
your device may be required
depending on the device.
NOTE
When Call history and messages are
downloaded automatically, each automatic
download setting must be on. Refer to
Communication Settings on page 5-107.
After a device is registered, the system
automatically identifies the device. By
activating Bluetooth® Hands-Free again,
or by activating Bluetooth® Hands-Free
first after switching the ignition from OFF
to ACC, the device connection condition
is indicated in the center display.
5-86
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page382
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (383,1)
IMPORTANT note about pairing and
automatic reconnection:
l If pairing is redone on the same
mobile phone device, first clear
“Mazda” displayed on the
Bluetooth® setting screen of the
mobile device.
l When the OS of the device is updated,
the pairing information may be deleted.
If this happens, reprogram the pairing
information to the Bluetooth® unit.
l Before you pair your device, make sure
that Bluetooth® is “ON”, both on your
phone and on the vehicle.
Device selection
If several devices have been paired, the
Bluetooth® unit links the device last
paired. If you would like to link a
different paired device, it is necessary to
change the link. The order of device
priority after the link has been changed is
maintained even when the ignition is
switched off.
Connecting other devices
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Settings screen.
2. Select the tab.
3. Select .
4. Turn the Bluetooth® setting on.
5. Select the name of the device you
would like to connect.
6. selection
Connects both devices as Hands-Free
and Bluetooth® audio.
selection
Connects as a Hands-Free device.
selection
Connects as Bluetooth® audio.
NOTE
The following functions can be used for the
Hands-Free or audio.
l Hands-Free: Phone calls and E-mail/SMS
l Audio: Bluetooth® audio, Pandora®, Aha™,
Stitcher™ radio
Disconnecting a device
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Settings screen.
2. Select the tab.
3. Select .
4. Turn the Bluetooth® setting on.
5. Select the device name which is
currently connected.
6. Select .
Deleting a device
Selecting and deleting devices
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Settings screen.
2. Select the tab.
3. Select .
4. Turn the Bluetooth® setting on.
5. Select the device name which you
would like to delete.
6. Select .
7. Select .
Deleting all devices
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Settings screen.
2. Select the tab.
3. Select .
4. Select .
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-87
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page383
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (384,1)
5. Select .
6. Select .
Changing PIN code
PIN code (4 digits) can be changed.
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Settings screen.
2. Select the tab.
3. Select .
4. Select .
5. Select .
6. Input the new PIN code to be set.
7. Select .
qAvailable Language (Type B)
The Bluetooth® Hands-Free System
applies to the following languages:
l English
l Spanish
l French
Refer to Settings on page 5-49.
qVoice Recognition (Type B)
In this section, the basic operation of the
voice recognition is explained.
Activating Voice Recognition
Press the talk button.
Ending Voice Recognition
Use one of the following methods:
l Press the hang-up button.
l Say, “Cancel”.
l Operate the commander switch or the
center display (only when vehicle is
stopped).
Skipping Voice Guidance (for faster
operation)
Press and release the talk button.
Troubleshooting for Voice Recognition
If you do not understand an operation
method while in the voice recognition
mode, say “Tutorial” or “Help”.
Commands useable anytime during
voice recognition
“Go Back” and “Cancel” are commands
which can be used at anytime during
voice recognition.
Returning to previous operation
To return to the previous operation, say,
“Go Back” while in voice recognition
mode.
Cancel
To put the Bluetooth® Hands-Free system
in standby mode, say, “Cancel” while in
voice recognition mode.
To prevent a deterioration in the voice
recognition rate and voice quality, the
following points should be observed:
l The voice recognition cannot be
performed while voice guidance or
the beep sound is operating. Wait
until the voice guidance or the beep
sound is finished before saying your
commands.
l Phone related commands are available
only when your phone is connected via
Bluetooth®. Make sure your phone is
connected via Bluetooth® before you
operate phone related voice commands.
l Music play commands, such as Play
Artist and Play Album can be used
only in USB audio mode.
l Do not speak too slowly or loudly (no
loud voice).
5-88
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page384
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (385,1)
l Speak clearly, without pausing between
words or numbers.
l Dialects or different wording other than
Hands-Free prompts cannot be
recognized by voice recognition. Speak
in the wording specified by the voice
commands.
l It is not necessary to face the
microphone or approach it. Speak the
voice commands while maintaining a
safe driving position.
l Close the windows and/or the
moonroof to reduce loud noises from
outside the vehicle, or turn down the
airflow of the air-conditioning system
while Bluetooth® Hands-Free is being
used.
l Make sure the vents are not directing
air up towards the microphone.
NOTE
If the voice recognition performance is not
satisfactory.
Refer to Troubleshooting on page 5-124.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-89
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page385
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (386,1)
qAudio Operation Using Voice Recognition (Type B)
Main audio operation
The below commands are examples of the available commands.
When the talk button is pressed and the following command is spoken out, the audio can
be operated. The commands in the () can be omitted. The specified name and number are
put into the {}.
Voice command Function
Corresponding audio
source
(Go to/Play) AM (Radio) Switches the audio source to AM radio. All
(Go to/Play) FM (Radio) Switches the audio source to FM radio. All
(Go to/Play) Bluetooth (Audio) Switches the audio source to Bluetooth® audio. All
(Go to/Play) Pandora Switches the audio source to Pandora®. All
(Go to/Play) Aha (Radio) Switches the audio source to Aha™. All
(Go to/Play) Stitcher Switches the audio source to Stitcher™ Radio. All
(Go to/Play) USB 1 Switches the audio source to USB 1. All
(Go to/Play) USB 2 Switches the audio source to USB 2. All
Play Playlist {Playlist name} Plays the selected playlist. USB
Play Artist {Artist name} Plays the selected artist. USB
Play Album {Album name} Plays the selected album. USB
Play Genre {Genre name} Plays the selected genre. USB
Play Folder {Folder name} Plays the selected folder. USB
NOTE
l Some commands cannot be used depending on devices and use conditions.
l If the Bluetooth® device, USB, or AUX is not connected, the related commands cannot be used.
5-90
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page386
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (387,1)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free
(Type A)í
qMaking a Call
Phonebook Usage
Telephone calls can be made by saying
the name of a person (voice tag) whose
phone number has been registered in
Bluetooth® Hands-Free in advance. Refer
to Phonebook registration.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say:[Beep] “Call”
3. Prompt: “Name please.”
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's
phone”)” (Say a voice tag registered in
the phonebook.)
5. Prompt: “Calling XXXXX... (Ex.
“John's phone”) XXXX (Ex. “at
home”). Is this correct?” (Voice tag and
phone number location registered in
phonebook).
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt: “Dialing”
NOTE
The “Call” command and the voice tag can be
combined. Ex. In Step 2, say, “Call John's
phone”, then, Steps 3 and 4 can be skipped.
Phonebook registration
Phone numbers can be registered to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free phonebook.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
New entry, edit, list names, delete,
erase all or import contact.”
4. Say:[Beep] “New entry”
5. Prompt: “Name please.”
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”)” (Say a voice tag for the name
registered.)
7. Prompt: “Adding XXXXX... (Ex.
“Mary's phone”) (Registered voice
tag). Is this correct?”
8. Say:[Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “Home, Work, Mobile, or
Other?”
10. Say: [Beep] “Mobile” (Say “Home” ,
“Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”, for the
desired location to be registered.)
11. Prompt: “Mobile (Location to be
registered). Is this correct?”
12. Say:[Beep] “Yes”
13. Prompt: “Number, please.”
14. Say:[Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX”
(Say the phone number to be
registered.)
15. Prompt: “XXXXXXXXXXX
(Phone number registration). After the
beep, continue to add numbers, or say
Go-Back to re-enter the last entered
numbers, or press the Pick-Up button
to save the number.”
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-91íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page387
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (388,1)
16. (Registration)
Press the pick-up button or say
“Enter”, then go to Step 17.
(Adding/inputting telephone
number)
Say, “XXXX” (desired telephone
number), then go to Step 15.
(Telephone number correction)
Say, “Go Back”. The prompt replies,
“Go Back. The last entered numbers
have been removed.”. Then go back
to Step 13.
17. Prompt: “Number saved. Would you
like to add another number for this
entry?”
18. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”.
19. If “Yes”, an additional phone number
registration can be made for the same
entry.
If “No”, the system returns to standby
status.
(Import contact)
Phonebook data from your device (Mobile
phone) can be sent and registered to your
Bluetooth® Hands-Free phonebook using
Bluetooth®.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say:[Beep] “Phonebook”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
New entry, edit, list names, delete,
erase all or import contact.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Import contact”
5. Prompt: “The Hands-Free System is
ready to receive a contact from a
phone. Only a home, a work, and a
mobile number can be imported, This
process requires operation of a mobile
phone. refer to the phone's manual for
more information”
6. Device (Mobile phone) operation:
Select one entry from the phonebook
and send it using Bluetooth®.
7. Prompt: “X (Number of locations
which include data) numbers have been
imported. What name would you like
to use for these numbers?”
8. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”)” (Say a voice tag for the name
registered.)
9. Prompt: “Adding XXXXX... (Ex.
“Mary's phone”) (Voice tag). Is this
correct?”
10. Say:[Beep] “Yes”
11. Prompt: “Number saved. Would you
like to import another contact?”
12. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”
13. If “Yes”, the procedure proceeds to
Step 5.
If “No”, the system returns to standby
status.
Editing phonebook
The data registered to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free phonebook can be edited.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
5-92
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page388
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (389,1)
2. Say:[Beep] “Phonebook”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
New entry, edit, list names, delete,
erase all or import contact.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Edit”
5. Prompt: “Please say the name of the
entry you would like to edit or say,
“List names”.”
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”)” (Say the voice tag for the
registered name to be edited in the
phonebook.)
7. Prompt: “Home, Work, Mobile, or
Other?”
8. Say:[Beep] “Home” (Say the
registered location to be edited:
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or
“Other”.)
9. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”) (Registered voice tag) XXXX
(Ex. “Home”) (Registered location). Is
this correct?”
10. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
11. Prompt: “The current number is
XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex. “555-1234”)
(Currently registered number). New
number, please.”
NOTE
If there was no previous phone number
registered to a location (Ex. “Work”), the
prompt will only read out “Number, please”
12. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX
(Ex. “555-5678”)” (Say the new
phone number to be registered.)
13. Prompt: “XXXXXXXX (Telephone
number) After the beep, continue to
add numbers, or say Go-Back to reenter the last entered numbers, or
press the Pick-Up button to save the
number.”
14. (Number Change)
Press the pick-up button, then go to
Step 15.
(Adding/inputting telephone
number)
Say, “XXXX” (desired telephone
number), then go to Step 13.
(Telephone number correction)
Say, “Go Back”. The prompt replies,
“Go Back. The last entered numbers
have been removed. Number,
please.”. Then go back to Step 12.
15. Prompt: “Number changed.”
Phonebook data deletion
(Erasing individual phonebook data)
Individual data registered to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free phonebook can be
cleared.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
New entry, edit, list names, delete,
erase all or import contact.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Delete”
5. Prompt: “Please say the name of the
entry you would like to delete or say,
“List names”. ”
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-93
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page389
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (390,1)
6. Say:[Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's
phone”)” (Say the registered voice tag
to be deleted from the phonebook.)
7. Prompt: “Deleting XXXXX... (Ex.
“John's phone”) (Registered voice tag)
Home (Registered location). Is this
correct?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's
phone”) (Registered voice tag) Home
(Registered location) deleted.”
(Complete deletion of the phonebook
data)
All data registered to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free phonebook can be erased.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
New entry, edit, list names, delete,
erase all or import contact.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Erase all”
5. Prompt: “Are you sure you want to
erase everything from your Hands-Free
system phonebook?”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt: “You are about to delete
everything from your Hands-Free
system phonebook. Do you want to
continue?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “Please wait, erasing the
Hands-Free system phonebook.”
10. Prompt: “Hands-Free system
phonebook erased.”
Read-out of names registered to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free phonebook
Bluetooth® Hands-Free can read out the
list of names registered to its phonebook.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say:[Beep] “Phonebook”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
New entry, edit, list names, delete,
erase all or import contact.”
4. Say: [Beep] “List names”
5. Prompt: “XXXXX..., XXXXX...,
XXXXX... (Ex. “John's phone”, Mary's
phone, Bill's phone)” (Voice guidance
reads out the voice tags registered to
the phonebook.)
Press the talk button with a short press
during the read-out at the desired name,
and then say one of the following voice
commands to execute it.
l “Continue”: Continues the list
readout.
l “Call”: Calls the registered
phonebook data when the talk
button is short-pressed.
l “Edit”: Edits the registered
phonebook data when the talk
button is short-pressed.
l “Delete”: Deletes the registered
phonebook data when the talk
button is short-pressed.
l “Previous”: Returns to the previous
phonebook data in read-out when
the talk button is short-pressed.
5-94
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page390
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (391,1)
6. Prompt: “End of list, would you like
to start from the beginning?”
7. Say: [Beep] “No”
8. The procedure returns to Step 3.
Redial Function
Redialing the number of the person
previously dialed using the phone is
possible.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Redial”
3. Prompt: “Dialing”
Telephone Number Input
NOTE
Practice this while parked until you are
confident you can do it while driving in a nontaxing road situation. If you are not completely
comfortable, make all calls from a safe
parking position, and only start driving when
you can devote your full attention to driving.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say:[Beep] “Dial”
3. Prompt: “Number, please”
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX
(Telephone number)”
5. Prompt: “XXXXXXXXXXX.
(Telephone number) After the beep,
continue to add numbers, or say GoBack to re-enter the last entered
numbers, or press the Pick-Up button
to execute dialing.”
6. (Dialing)
Press the pick-up button or say “Dial”,
then go to Step 7.
(Adding/inputting telephone
number)
Say, “XXXX” (desired telephone
number), then go to Step 5.
(Telephone number correction)
Say, “Go Back”. The prompt replies,
“Go Back. The last entered numbers
have been removed.”. Then go back to
Step 3.
7. Prompt: “Dialing”
NOTE
The “Dial” command and a telephone number
can be combined. Ex. In Step 2, say, “Dial
123-4567” then, Steps 3 and 4 can be skipped.
Emergency calls
A call can be made to the emergency
phone number (911: U.S.A./Canada, 066:
Mexico) using the voice input command.
It may not function properly in some areas
in Mexico.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Emergency”
3. - U.S.A./Canada vehicles - Prompt:
“Dialing “911”, is this correct?”
- Mexico vehicles - Prompt: “Dialing
“066”, is this correct?”
4. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
5. Prompt: “Dialing”
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-95
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page391
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (392,1)
qReceiving an Incoming Call
1. Prompt: “Incoming call, press the
pick-up button to answer”
2. To accept the call, press the pick-up
button.
To reject the call, press the hang-up
button.
qHanging Up a Call
Press the hang-up button during the call.
A beep sound will confirm that call is
ended.
qMute
The microphone can be muted during a
call.
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Mute”
3. Prompt: “Microphone muted”
Canceling mute
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Mute off”
3. Prompt: “Microphone unmuted”
qTransferring a Call from HandsFree to a Device (Mobile Phone)
Communication between the Hands-Free
unit and a device (Mobile phone) is
canceled, and the line can be switched to a
standard call using a device (Mobile
phone).
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say:[Beep] “Transfer call”
3. Prompt: “Transferred call to phone”
qTransferring a Call from a Device
(Mobile Phone) to Hands-Free
Communication between devices (Mobile
phone) can be switched to Bluetooth®
Hands-Free.
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Transfer call”
3. Prompt: “Transferred call to HandsFree system”
qCall interrupt
A call can be interrupted to receive an
incoming call from a third party.
Switch to a new incoming call using the
following methods.
Method 1
1. Press the pick-up button.
2. Prompt: “Swapping calls.”
Method 2
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Swap calls”
3. Prompt:“Swapping calls.”
NOTE
l To refuse an incoming call, press the hangup button.
l After receiving a new incoming call, the
previous call is placed on hold.
Switching calls
Switching back to the previous call can
also be done.
Method 1
1. Press the pick-up button.
2. Prompt: “Swapping calls.”
5-96
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page392
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (393,1)
Method 2
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Swap calls”
3. Prompt: “Swapping calls.”
Three-way call function
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Join calls”
3. Prompt: “Joining calls”
Making a call using a telephone
number
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Dial”
3. Prompt: “Number, please”
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX
(Telephone number)”
5. Prompt: “XXXXXXXXXXX.
(Telephone number) After the beep,
continue to add numbers, or say GoBack to re-enter the last entered
numbers, or press the Pick-Up button
to execute dialing.”
6. (Dialing)
Press the pick-up button or say “Dial”,
then go to Step 7.
(Adding/inputting telephone
number)
Say, “XXXX” (desired telephone
number), then go to Step 5.
(Telephone number correction)
Say, “Go Back”. The prompt replies,
“Go Back. The last entered numbers
have been removed.”. Then go back to
Step 3.
7. Prompt: “Dialing”
Making calls using the phonebook
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Call”
3. Prompt: “Name please.”
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's
phone”)” (Say a voice tag registered in
the phonebook.)
5. Prompt: “Calling XXXXX... (Ex.
“John's phone”) XXXX (Ex. “at
home”). Is this correct?” (Voice tag and
phone number location registered in
phonebook).
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt:“Dialing”
Redialing function
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Redial”
3. Prompt:“Dialing”
Ending the current call
Press the hang-up button during the call.
qDTMF (Dual Tone MultiFrequency Signal) Transmission
This function is used when transmitting
DTMF via the user's voice. The receiver
of a DTMF transmission is generally a
home telephone answering machine or a
company's automated guidance call center
(When you send tone signals back
according to the voice guidance
recording).
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say:[Beep] “XXXX... send” (Say
DTMF code)
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-97
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page393
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (394,1)
3. Prompt: “Sending XXXX... (DTMF
code)” Bluetooth® Hands-Free
(Type B)í
qMaking a Call
Phonebook Usage
Telephone calls can be made by saying
the contact name in the downloaded
phonebook or the name of a person whose
phone number has been registered in the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free. Refer to Import
contact (Download Phonebook).
1. Press the talk button.
2. Wait for the beep sound.
3. Say:“Call XXXXX... (Ex. “John”)
Mobile”.
4. Follow the voice guidance to place the
call.
Screen operation
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select to display the contact
list.
3. Select the contact you would like to
call to display the details for the
contact.
4. Select the desired phone number to
make the call.
Import contact (Download Phonebook)
Phonebook data from your device (Mobile
phone) can be sent and registered to your
Bluetooth® Hands-Free phonebook using
Bluetooth®.
5-98
Interior Features
íSome models.
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page394
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (395,1)
(Automatic downloading)
The “Auto Download Contacts” setting
must be on. When Hands-Free is
connected to the device, the phonebook is
downloaded automatically.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-107.
(Manually downloading)
If the “Auto Download Contacts” setting
is off, download the phonebook using the
following procedure.
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select to display the contact
list.
3. Select .
4. Select or
to switch to the
device operation.
5. If is selected, select
.
6. Download will be started from the
mobile phone.
NOTE
l If “Import All Contacts” is performed after
saving the phonebook to the Bluetooth®
unit, the phonebook will be overwritten.
l A maximum of 1000 contacts can be
registered to the phonebook.
l Phonebook, incoming/outgoing call record,
and favorite memories are exclusive to each
mobile phone to protect privacy.
Favorites Contacts
A maximum of 50 contacts can be
registered. It will take less time to make a
call after registering the telephone
number. In addition, you do not have to
look for the person you want to call in the
phonebook.
Registering to your favorites
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select to display the favorites
list.
3. Select .
4. Select or
.
5. Select from the displayed list.
NOTE
When “Add New Contact” is selected,
information such as the selected person’s name
is also registered. In addition, when “Add New
Contact Details” is selected, only the
telephone number of the selected person is
registered.
Making a call from your favorites
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select to display the favorites
list.
3. (Only one phone number is
registered to contact)
Select the contact information you
would like to call. Go to Step 5.
(Multiple phone numbers are
registered to contact)
Select the contact you would like to
call to display the screen indicating the
details for the contact. Go to Step 4.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-99
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page395
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (396,1)
4. Select the phone number you would
like to call.
5. Select .
Deleting from your favorites
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select to display the favorites
list.
3. Select .
4. Select .
5. Select the contact information which
you would like to delete.
6. Select .
Changing the display order of your
favorites list
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select to display the favorites
list.
3. Select .
4. Select .
5. The contact can be moved after it is
selected.
6. Slide the contact or move it using the
commander switch, then select .
Changing contact name of your
favorites
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select to display the favorites
list.
3. Select .
4. Select .
5. Select the contact to display the
keyboard screen.
6. If a new name is input and is
selected, the contact name is stored.
NOTE
If the contact is long-pressed when the
favorites list is displayed, the contact
information can be edited (deleted, moved).
Telephone Number Input
NOTE
Practice this while parked until you are
confident you can do it while driving in a nontaxing road situation. If you are not completely
comfortable, make all calls from a safe
parking position, and only start driving when
you can devote your full attention to driving.
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. When is pressed, the dial
pad is displayed.
3. Input the telephone number using the
dial pad.
4. Select to make the call.
Numeral or symbol entry
Use the dial pad.
Long-press the to input .
Select to delete the currently input
value.
Long-press to delete all input values.
Redial Function
Makes a call to the last person called
(latest person on outgoing call record)
from the mobile phone/vehicle.
1. Press the talk button.
2. Wait for the beep sound.
3. Say: “Redial”
5-100
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page396
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (397,1)
Call back Function
Makes a call to the last person who called
your (latest person on incoming call
record) mobile phone/vehicle.
1. Press the talk button.
2. Wait for the beep sound.
3. Say: “Call back”
Mobile 911 (U.S.A./Canada only)
If the vehicle is involved in a moderate to
severe collision, a call is made
automatically to 911 from the connected
device. The “Emergency Assistance Call”
setting must be on.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-107.
CAUTION
Though the system can be set to not
call 911, doing so will defeat the
purpose of the system. Mazda
recommends that the Mobile 911
system remain activated.
NOTE
l Mobile 911 is a secondary function of the
audio entertainment system. Therefore, the
mobile 911 function does not assure that
the call is always made to 911 after an
accident occurs.
l A Hands-Free device must be paired and
connected. The 911 operator can verify the
vehicle's position information using the
Hands-Free device GPS if equipped.
The 911 operator can verify the vehicle’s
position information.
1. If the vehicle is involved in a moderate
to severe collision, notification of the
call to 911 is made via audio and
screen display. To cancel the call, press
or hang-up
button within 10 seconds.
2. If or hangup button is not pressed within 10
seconds, the call is made to 911
automatically.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-101
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page397
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (398,1)
qReceiving an Incoming Call
When an incoming call is received, the incoming call notification screen is displayed. The
“Incoming Call Notifications” setting must be on.
Refer to Communication Settings on page 5-107.
To accept the call, press the pick-up button on the audio control switch or select on
the screen.
To reject the call, press the hang-up button on the audio control switch or select on
the screen.
The following icons are displayed on the screen during a call. Icons which can be used
differ depending on use conditions.
Icon Function
Displays the Communication menu.
Ends the call.
Transferring a call from Hands-Free to a mobile phone
Communication between the Bluetooth® unit and a device (mobile phone) is canceled, and
an incoming call will be received by the device (mobile phone) like a standard call.
Transferring a call from a device (mobile phone) to Hands-Free
Communication between devices (mobile phone) can be switched to Bluetooth®
Hands-Free.
Mute
The microphone can be muted during a call.
When selected again, the mute is canceled.
A call is made to other person during a call and a 3-way call can be made. Select the contact
from the following to make a call.
: Call History is displayed.
: The phonebook is displayed.
: The dial pad is displayed. Input the phone number.
The device may be unusable depending on the contractual content.
The call on hold is made to make a 3-way call.
The device may be unusable depending on the contractual content.
Switches the call on hold.
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Signal) Transmission
This function is used when transmitting DTMF via the dial pad. The receiver of a DTMF
transmission is generally a home telephone answering machine or a company's automated
guidance call center.
Input the number using a dial pad.
5-102
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page398
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (399,1)
NOTE
l If the ignition is switched off during a
Hands-Free call, the line is transferred to
the device (Mobile phone) automatically.
l If the DTMF code has two or more digits or
symbols, each one must be transmitted
individually.
qCall Interrupt
A call can be interrupted to receive an
incoming call from a third party.
When is selected or the pickup button on the steering wheel is pressed,
the current call is held and the system
switches to the new incoming call.
When is selected, the current
call is ended and the system switches to
the new incoming call (GSM network
only).
When is selected or the hang-up
button on the steering wheel is pressed, an
incoming call is refused.
NOTE
l The function may not be available
depending on the contractual content of the
mobile device.
l The function may not be operable
depending on the type of the telephone
network and the mobile device.
qReceiving and Replying to
Messages (available only with Email/SMS compatible phones)
SMS (Short Message Service) messages,
and E-mail received by connected devices
can be downloaded, displayed, and played
(read by the system).
Additionally, replies can also be made to
calls and messages in the received
messages.
Downloading messages
Up to 20 new messages can be
downloaded and displayed from a
connected device.
NOTE
For e-mail, 20 messages for each account can
be downloaded.
(Automatic downloading)
The “Auto Download Email” (E-mail) or
“Auto Download Text Message” (SMS)
setting must be on. A message is
downloaded automatically when the
Bluetooth® unit is connected to the
device.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-107.
(Manually downloading)
When the “Auto Download Email” (Email) or “Auto Download Text Message”
(SMS) setting is off, the message is
downloaded using the following
procedure.
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select or to display
the Inbox.
3. Select .
4. Download will be started from the
mobile phone.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-103
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page399
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (400,1)
NOTE
l Attached data is not downloaded.
l Messages up to 1 kilobyte (e-mail)/140bytes (SMS) can be downloaded.
l A message list is created for each device.
l If the connected device does not correspond
to MAP 1.0, the AT command is used to
download. The downloaded message
indicates that it is already read.
l Downloading using the AT command may
not function depending on the connected
device.
Receiving messages
(Method 1)
When a device receives a message, a
message received notification is
displayed. The “Email Notifications” (Email) or “Text Notifications” (SMS)
setting must be on.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-107.
Select and display the message.
(Method 2)
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select and display the new
message list for e-mail and SMS.
3. Select the message you would like to
display.
5-104
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page400
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (401,1)
The following icons are displayed in the lower part of the details on the message. Icons
which can be used differ depending on use conditions.
Icon Function
Displays the Communication menu.
Displays the inbox.
Plays back a message.
When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Displays the previous message.
Displays the next message.
Only replies to the sender of the currently displayed message.
Select the sentence on the displayed reply screen and select the sentence for sending from
the preset message.
Select .
(Only E-mail)
Replies to all members including CC.
Select the sentence on the displayed reply screen and select the sentence for sending from
the preset message.
Select .
Makes a call to a person who sent a message.
For E-mail, this function may not work depending on the device.
Deletes a message.
The messages stored in a device is also deleted.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-105
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page401
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (402,1)
NOTE
Up to three preset messages can be selected.
Example of use (verify unread E-mail)
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select to display the inbox.
3. Select the unread message displayed in
bold.
4. The details of the message are
displayed and replying to the message,
making a call, or playback can be
performed.
Changing account for displaying (Email only)
1. Select .
2. Select the account which you would
like to display. Only the messages for
the selected account are displayed in
the inbox.
Editing preset messages
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select .
3. Select .
4. Select the preset message which you
would like to edit. The keyboard screen
is displayed.
5. When the message is input and is
selected, the message is stored as a
preset message.
NOTE
l Select the icon to change the language.
l Select the icon to switch between
capitalized and lower-case characters.
l Select the icon to return to the previous
screen without storing the edit.
5-106
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page402
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (403,1)
qCommunication Settings
Select the icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen.
Select to change the setting.
Item Setting Function
Bluetooth® ―
Go to Bluetooth® setting menu.
Refer to Bluetooth® Preparation (Type B) on page 5-86.
Incoming Call
Notifications
On/Off Notifies when an incoming call is received.
Auto Download Text
Message
On/Off
Downloads SMS automatically when the Bluetooth® unit is connected
to the device.
Text Notifications On/Off Notifies when a new SMS is received.
Auto Download
Email*1
On/Off
Downloads E-mail automatically when the Bluetooth® unit is
connected to the device.
Email Notifications On/Off Notifies when a new Email is received.
Auto Download Call
History
On/Off
Downloads Call History automatically when the Bluetooth® unit is
connected to the device.
Auto Download
Contacts*1
On/Off
Downloads the phonebook automatically when the Bluetooth® unit is
connected to the device.
Ringtone Car/Phone/Off Changes the ringtone setting.
Phone Volume
Adjusts using
the slider.
Adjusts the conversation volume.
VR and Ringtone
Adjusts using
the slider.
Adjusts the voice guidance and ringtone volume.
Contacts Display
Order
First Name, Last
Name
Displays the contact information in alphabetical order of the first name.
Last Name, First
Name
Displays the contact information in alphabetical order of the last name.
Edit Preset Messages ―
Edits the preset message.
Refer to Receiving and Replying to Messages
(available only with E-mail/SMS compatible phones) on page 5-103.
Emergency Assistance
Call
On/Off Mobile Utilizes the Mobile 911 function.
Restore Factory
settings
― Initializes all Communication Settings.
*1 Depending on the device, it may be necessary to acquire download permission on the
device side.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-107
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page403
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (404,1)
Bluetooth® Audio (Type A)í
Applicable Bluetooth® specification
(Recommended)
Ver. 2.0
Response profile
l A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile) Ver. 1.0/1.2
l AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control
Profile) Ver. 1.0/1.3
A2DP is a profile which transmits only
audio to the Bluetooth® unit. If your
Bluetooth® audio device corresponds only
to A2DP, but not AVRCP, you cannot
operate it using the control panel of the
vehicle's audio system. In this case, only
the operations on the mobile device are
available the same as when a portable
audio device for a non-compliant
Bluetooth® device is connected to the
AUX terminal.
Function A2DP
AVRCP
Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.3
Playback ― X X
Pause ― X X
File (Track) up/down ― X X
Reverse ― ― X
Fast-forward ― ― X
Text display ― ― X
X: Available
―: Not available
NOTE
l The battery consumption of Bluetooth®
audio devices increases while Bluetooth® is
connected.
l If a general mobile phone device is USB
connected during music playback over the
Bluetooth® connection, the Bluetooth®
connection is disconnected. For this reason,
you cannot have music playback over a
Bluetooth® connection and music playback
using a USB connection at the same time.
l The system may not operate normally
depending on the Bluetooth® audio device.
qHow to Use the Bluetooth®
Audio System
Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode
To listen to music or voice audio recorded
to a Bluetooth® audio device, switch to
the Bluetooth® audio mode to operate the
audio device using the audio system
control panel. Any Bluetooth® audio
device must be paired to the vehicle's
Bluetooth® unit before it can be used.
Refer to Bluetooth® Preparation (Type A)
on page 5-71.
1. Turn on the Bluetooth® audio device's
power.
2. Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
Make sure that the “ ” symbol is
displayed in the audio display. The
symbol is not displayed if an un-paired
Bluetooth® audio device is being used
or the vehicle's Bluetooth® unit has a
malfunction.
NOTE
Some Bluetooth® audio devices need a certain
amount of time before the “ ” symbol is
displayed.
5-108
Interior Features
íSome models.
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page404
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (405,1)
3. Press the USB/AUX button ( ) to
switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode
and start playback.
If the current device version is lower
than AVRCP Ver. 1.3: “BTAudio” is
displayed.
If the current device is AVRCP Ver. 1.3:
The playback time is displayed.
NOTE
l If the Bluetooth® audio device does not
begin playback, press the Play/Pause
button (5).
l If a call is received on a Hands-Free mobile
phone during playback from the Bluetooth®
audio device, the playback is stopped.
Playback from the Bluetooth® audio device
resumes after the call ends.
Playback
1. To listen to a Bluetooth® audio device
over the vehicle's speaker system,
switch the mode to Bluetooth® audio
mode. (Refer to “Switching to
Bluetooth® audio mode”)
2. To stop playback, press the Play/Pause
button (5).
3. Press the button again to resume
playback.
Selecting a file (track)
Selects the next file (track)
Short-press the track up button ( ) or
turn the file dial clockwise.
Selects the beginning of the current file
(track)
Short-press the track down button ( )
or turn the file dial counterclockwise.
Fast-forward/Reverse (AVRCP Ver.
1.3)
Fast-forward
Press and hold the fast-forward button
( ).
Reverse
Press and hold the reverse down button
( ).
Switching the display (AVRCP Ver. 1.3)
The information displayed on the audio
display changes as follows each time the
text button ( ) is pressed during
playback.
Button
Information displayed
on audio display
Elapsed time
Album name
Song name
Artist name
NOTE
l If title information is not available, “NO
TITLE” is displayed.
l This unit cannot display some characters.
Characters which cannot be displayed are
indicated by an asterisk ( ).
Display scroll
Only 13 characters can be displayed at
one time. To display the rest of the
characters of a long title, press and hold
the text button ( ). The display
scrolls the next 13 characters. Press and
hold the text button ( ) again after
the last 13 characters have been displayed
to return to the beginning of the title.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-109
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page405
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (406,1)
qBluetooth® Audio Device
Information Display
If a Bluetooth® audio device is connected,
the following information is displayed in
the audio display.
AVRCP Ver.
lower than 1.3
AVRCP
Ver. 1.3
Device name X X
Title ― X
Artist name ― X
Album name ― X
File number ― X
Playback time ― X
Folder number ― ―
X: Available
―: Not available
NOTE
Some information may not display depending
on the device, and if the information cannot be
displayed, “NO TITLE” is indicated.
Bluetooth® Audio (Type B)í
Applicable Bluetooth® specification
(Recommended)
Ver. 1.1/1.2/2.0 EDR/2.1 EDR/3.0
(conformity)
Response profile
l A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile) Ver. 1.0/1.2
l AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control
Profile) Ver. 1.0/1.3/1.4
A2DP is a profile which transmits only
audio to the Bluetooth® unit. If your
Bluetooth® audio device corresponds only
to A2DP, but not AVRCP, you cannot
operate it using the control panel of the
vehicle's audio system. In this case, only
the operations on the mobile device are
available the same as when a portable
audio device for a non-compliant
Bluetooth® device is connected to the
AUX terminal.
Function A2DP
AVRCP
Ver.
1.0
Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.4
Playback X X X X
Pause X X X X
File (Track)
up/down
― X X X
Reverse ― ― X X
Fast-forward ― ― X X
Text display ― ― X X
Repeat ― ―
Depends on
device
Depends on
device
Shuffle ― ―
Depends on
device
Depends on
device
Scan ― ―
Depends on
device
Depends on
device
Folder
up/down
― ― ―
Depends on
device
X: Available
―: Not available
5-110
Interior Features
íSome models.
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page406
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (407,1)
NOTE
l The battery consumption of Bluetooth®
audio devices increases while Bluetooth® is
connected.
l If a general mobile phone device is USB
connected during music playback over the
Bluetooth® connection, the Bluetooth®
connection is disconnected. For this reason,
you cannot have music playback over a
Bluetooth® connection and music playback
using a USB connection at the same time.
l The system may not operate normally
depending on the Bluetooth® audio device.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-111
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page407
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (408,1)
qHow to Use the Bluetooth® Audio System
Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode
To listen to music or voice audio recorded to a Bluetooth® audio device, switch to the
Bluetooth® audio mode to operate the audio device using the audio system control panel.
Any Bluetooth® audio device must be paired to the vehicle's Bluetooth® unit before it can
be used.
Refer to Bluetooth® Preparation (Type B) on page 5-86.
1. Turn on the Bluetooth® audio device's power.
2. Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
3. Select the icon on the home screen and display the Entertainment screen.
4. When is selected, switches to the Bluetooth® audio mode to begin playback.
NOTE
l If Bluetooth® audio is used after using Pandora®, Aha™ or Stitcher™ radio, the application on
the mobile device has to be closed first.
l If the Bluetooth® audio device does not begin playback, select the icon.
l If the mode is switched from Bluetooth® audio mode to another mode (radio mode), audio
playback from the Bluetooth® audio device stops.
5-112
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page408
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (409,1)
Playback
To listen to a Bluetooth® audio device over the vehicle's speaker system, switch the mode
to Bluetooth® audio mode. (Refer to “Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode”)
After switching to the Bluetooth® audio mode, the following icons are displayed in the
lower part of the display. Icons which can be used differ depending on the version of the
Bluetooth® audio device which you are currently using.
Icon Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
(AVRCP Ver. 1.4 only)
Displays the top level folder/file list.
Select the folder which you want to select.
The files in the selected folder are displayed.
Select the file you want to play.
(AVRCP Ver. 1.3 or higher)
Replays the song currently being played repeatedly.
When selected again, the songs in the folder are played repeatedly.
Select it again to cancel.
Icons change when the song is repeated or the folder is repeated.
(AVRCP Ver. 1.3 or higher)
Plays songs in the folder in random order.
When selected again, the songs on the device are played in random order.
Select it again to cancel.
Icons change during folder shuffle or device shuffle.
Scans the titles in a folder and plays the beginning of each song to aid in finding a desired
song.
When selected again, the beginning of each song on the device is played.
When selected again, the operation is canceled and the song currently being played
continues.
Returns to the beginning of the previous song.
Long-press to fast reverse. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
Plays the Bluetooth® audio. When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Advances to the beginning of the next song.
Long-press to fast forward. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-36.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-113
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page409
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (410,1)
Example of use (When searching for a
song from the top level of a device)
1. Select the icon and display the
folder/file list at the top level.
2. When the folder is selected, folders/file
lists in the folder are displayed. When
the playlist is selected, the file list is
displayed.
3. Select the desired song.
NOTE
Select to move to a folder one level higher.
qBluetooth® Audio Device
Information Display
If a Bluetooth® audio device is connected,
the following information is displayed in
the center display.
AVRCP Ver.
lower than 1.3
AVR-
CP
Ver.
1.3
AVRCP Ver.
1.4 or
higher
Device name X X X
Remaining
battery
charge of
device
X X X
Song name ― X X
Artist name ― X X
Album name ― X X
Playback
time
― X X
Genre name ― X X
Album art
image
― ― ―
X: Available
―: Not available
NOTE
Some information may not display depending
on the device, and if the information cannot be
displayed, “Unknown - - -” is indicated.
5-114
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page410
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (411,1)
qHow to Use Pandora®*1í
Pandora® is free personalized Internet radio. Simply enter a favorite artist, track, genre, and
Pandora® will create a personalized station that plays their music and more like it. Rate
songs by giving thumbs-up and thumbs-down feedback to further refine your station,
discover new music and help Pandora® play only music you like.
*1 Pandora®, the Pandora® logo, and the Pandora® trade dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission.
NOTE
To operate Pandora® from your Bluetooth® device, perform the following in advance:
l Create Pandora® account on the Web.
l Create Pandora® station using Pandora® application.
l Install Pandora® application on your device.
Playback
Select the icon on the home screen and display the Entertainment screen. When
is selected, the following icons are indicated in the bottom part of the center
display.
Icon Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the station list.
Use to switch to other stations.
Thumbs-Down
Press the icon to tell Pandora® not to play this track.
Thumbs-Up
Press the icon to tell Pandora® “you like this track” and it helps to bring in more tracks
like it to your station.
Bookmarking
Bookmarks the song or artist currently being played.
Plays the track. When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Goes to the next song.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-36.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-115íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page411
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (412,1)
NOTE
l The skip function may not be available
depending on the device.
l The number of skips is limited by
Pandora®.
l If the icon is selected when the skip song
function is running, the next song is
skipped.
Selection from station list
Selection can be made from a
programmed radio station list.
1. Select the icon.
2. Select the desired radio station.
NOTE
When is selected, songs randomly
selected from the radio station list are played.
Selecting the sort method
The displayed order of the station list can
be changed.
1. Select the icon.
2. Select .
3. Select to display in the order
starting from the newly created station.
4. Select to display in alphabetical
order.
NOTE
The displayed order of cannot be
changed.
Bookmarking
You can bookmark song or artist to check
out later on the Web.
1. Select the icon.
2. Select to bookmark the
song.
3. Select to bookmark the
artist.
5-116
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page412
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (413,1)
qHow to Use Aha™*1
Aha is an application which can be used to enjoy various Internet content such as Internet
radio and podcasts.
Stay connected to your friends activities by getting updates from Facebook and Twitter.
Using the location-based service, nearby services and destinations can be searched or realtime local information can be obtained.
For details on Aha, refer to “http://www.aharadio.com/”.
*1 Aha, the Aha logo, and the Aha trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Harman International Industries, Inc., used with permission.
NOTE
l The service content provided by Aha varies depending on the country in which the user resides. In
addition, the service is not available in some countries.
l To operate Aha from your Bluetooth® device, perform the following in advance:
l Install the Aha application to your device.
l Create an Aha account for your device.
l Log onto Aha using your device.
l Select the preset station on your device.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-117
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page413
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (414,1)
Playback
Select the icon on the home screen and display the Entertainment screen. When is
selected, the following icons are displayed at the bottom of the center display. The
displayed icon differs depending on the selected station.
In addition, icons other than the following icons may be displayed.
Icon Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the main menu.
Use to switch to other stations.
Displays the content list.
Use to switch to other desired content on the station.
Shout
Records voice.
Records voice and posts it as playable audio to Facebook and other social stations.
Like*2
Evaluates the current content as “Like”.
Dislike*2
Evaluates the current content as “Dislike”.
Reverses for 15 seconds.
Map (vehicles with navigation system)
Displays the destination searched by the location based services on the navigation system.
Call
A call can be made to the telephone number of a shop searched using the Location Based
Services. Available when a device is connected as a Hands-Free.
Returns to the previous content.
Pauses playback of the content. When selected again, playback resumes.
Goes to the next content.
5-118
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page414
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (415,1)
Icon Function
Fast-forwards for 30 seconds.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-36.
*2 Some stations may use alternate variations of Like and Dislike, based on station type or provider.
Main menu
Select the icon.
Switch the tab and select the station category.
Tab Function
Presets
Displays the preset station list set on the device.
Select the preset station name to play the station content.
Nearby
Select the desired station.
Guidance is provided to the searched destination near the vehicle's position.
You can designate desired categories previously set using the filter setting on
your device.
NOTE
The available Location Based Services may differ because the services depend on the content
provided by Aha™.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-119
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page415
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (416,1)
Example of use (Location Based
Services)
1. Select the desired station from the
Nearby tab on the main menu.
The destination name or address
playback starts in the order of the
destination name list.
2. When the icon is selected, the
currently displayed destination is
displayed on the navigation system
(vehicles with navigation system).
3. When the icon is selected, a phone
call is placed to the currently displayed
destination.
4. Select the icon and display the
content list.
Selection of other destinations from the
list can be made.
Shout
Some social stations, such as Facebook or
Caraoke, support the ability to record and
share voice messages using the “Shout”
function.
1. Select the icon and start the
countdown (3, 2, 1, 0). Recording
starts when the countdown reaches
zero.
2. Records voice.
3. Select and store/post the
recording.
NOTE
l Recordable time varies depending on the
station (Max. 30 seconds).
l Recording stops automatically when the
recordable time has elapsed. You can then
post or delete the recording.
5-120
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page416
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (417,1)
qHow to Use Stitcher™*1 Radio
What is Stitcher™ Radio?
Stitcher™ radio is an application which can be used to listen to Internet radio or stream
podcasts.
Recommended content is automatically selected by registering content which you put into
your favorites, or by pressing the Like or Dislike button.
For details on Stitcher™ Radio, refer to “http://stitcher.com/”.
*1 Stitcher™, the Stitcher™ logo, and the Stitcher™ trade dress are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Stitcher, Inc., used with permission.
NOTE
To operate Stitcher™ Radio from your Bluetooth® device, perform the following in advance:
l Install the Stitcher™ Radio application to your device.
l Create a Stitcher™ Radio account for your device.
l Log onto Stitcher™ Radio using your device.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-121
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page417
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (418,1)
Playback
Select the Entertainment screen and display the icon on the home screen. When
is selected, the following icons are indicated in the bottom part of the center
display.
Icon Function
Displays the Entertainment menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the station list.
Use to switch to other stations.
Dislike
Evaluates the current program as “Dislike”.
Like
Evaluates the current program as “Like”.
Adds the current station to your favorites or deletes the current station from your favorites.
Reverses for 30 seconds.
Plays the station. Select it again to pause playback.
Goes to the next station.
Displays sound settings to adjust audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-36.
5-122
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page418
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (419,1)
Station list
1. Select the icon and display the station list.
Favorites station name: Select to display the program registered to your favorites.
Category name: A recommended category selected from your favorites by
Stitcher™ is displayed. Select it to display the category program.
2. Select the program name to play it.
Add to your favorites
If the current program has not been
registered to your favorites, it can be
registered to your favorites.
1. Select the icon to display the
favorites station which the registration
can be added.
2. Select the station name which you want
to register.
3. Select to add the program to the
selected favorites station.
NOTE
l Multiple favorites stations can be selected
and registered.
l Favorites stations registered by oneself as
well those set by default are displayed.
Delete from your favorites
If the current program has already been
registered to your favorites, the program
can be deleted from your favorites.
1. Select the icon.
2. The program is automatically deleted
from the favorites station.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-123
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page419
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (420,1)
Troubleshootingí
Mazda Bluetooth® Hands-Free Customer Service
If you have any problems with Bluetooth®, contact our toll-free customer service center.
l U.S.A.
Phone:800-430-0153 (Toll-free)
Web: www.MazdaUSA.com/bluetooth
l Canada
Phone:800-430-0153 (Toll-free)
Web: www.mazdahandsfree.ca
l Mexico
Center of Attention to Client (CAC)
Phone:01-800-01-MAZDA (Toll-free)
Web: www.mazdamexico.com.mx
Bluetooth® Device pairing, connection problems
Symptom Cause Solution method
Unable to perform pairing ―
First make sure the device is
compatible with the Bluetooth® unit,
and then check whether the
Bluetooth® function and the Find
Mode/Visible setting*1 on the device
are turned on. If pairing is still not
possible after this, contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer or Mazda
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Customer
Service.
Pairing cannot be performed again
The pairing information paired to the
Bluetooth® unit or device is not
recognized correctly.
Perform pairing using the following
procedure.
l Clear “Mazda” stored in the
device.
l Perform pairing again.
Unable to perform pairing The Bluetooth® function and the
Find Mode/Visible setting*1 on the
device may turn off automatically
after a period of time has elapsed
depending on the device.
Check whether the Bluetooth®
function and the Find Mode/Visible
setting*1 on the device are turned on
and pairing or reconnect.
Does not connect automatically
when starting the engine
Automatically connects, but then
disconnects suddenly
Disconnects intermittently
The device is in a location in which
radio wave interference can occur
easily, such as inside a bag in a rear
seat, in a rear pocket of a pair of
pants.
Move the device to a location in
which radio wave interference is less
likely to occur.
Does not connect automatically
when starting the engine
The pairing information is updated
when the device OS is updated.
Perform pairing again.
*1 Setting which detects the existence of a device external to the Bluetooth® unit
5-124
Interior Features
íSome models.
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page420
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (421,1)
NOTE
l When the OS of the device is updated, the pairing information may be deleted. If this happens,
reprogram the pairing information to the Bluetooth® unit.
l If you pair your phone which has already been paired to your vehicle more than once in the past,
you need to delete “Mazda” on your mobile device. Then, execute the Bluetooth® search on your
mobile device once again, and pair to a newly detected “Mazda”.
l Before you pair your device, make sure that Bluetooth® is “ON”, both on your phone and on the
vehicle.
Voice recognition related problems
Symptom Cause Solution method
Poor voice recognition l Excessive, slow speech.
l Excessive, forceful speech
(shouting).
l Speaking before the beep sound
has ended.
l Loud noise
(speaking or noise from outside/
inside vehicle).
l Airflow from A/C is blowing
against the microphone.
l Speaking in off-standard
expressions (dialect).
Regarding the causes indicated on
the left, be careful with how you
speak. In addition, when numbers are
spoken in a sequence, recognition
ability will improve if no stop is
placed between the numbers.
False recognition of numbers
Poor voice recognition
There is a malfunction in the
microphone.
A poor connection or malfunction
with the microphone may have
occurred. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Phone-related voice recognition is
disabled
There is a problem with the
connection between the Bluetooth®
unit and the device.
If there is any malfunction after
checking the pairing situation, check
for device pairing or connection
problems.
Names in the phonebook are not
easily recognized
The Bluetooth® system is under a
condition in which recognition is
difficult.
By carrying out the following
measures, the rate of recognition will
improve.
l Clear memory from the
phonebook which is not used
very often.
l Avoid shortened names, use full
names.
(Recognition improves the longer
the name is. By not using names
such as “Mom”, “Dad”, recognition will improve.)
When operating the audio, a song
name is not recognized
Song names cannot be recognized by
voice.

You want to skip guidance ―
Guidance can be skipped by quickly
pressing and releasing the Talk
button.
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
5-125
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page421
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (422,1)
Regarding problems with calls
Symptom Cause Solution method
When starting a call, vehicle noise
from the other party can be heard
For about three seconds after starting
a call, the Bluetooth® unit's Noise
Suppression function requires time to
adapt to the call environment.
This does not indicate a problem
with the device.
The other party cannot be heard or
the speaker's voice is quiet
The volume is set at zero or low. Increase the volume.
Other problems
Symptom Cause Solution method
The indication for the remaining
battery is different between the
vehicle and the device
The indication method is different
between the vehicle and the device.

When a call is made from the
vehicle, the telephone number is
updated in the incoming/outgoing
call record but the name does not
appear
The number has not been registered
into the phonebook.
If the number has been registered
into the phonebook, the
incoming/outgoing call record is
updated by the name in the
phonebook when the engine is
restarted.
The cell phone does not synchronize
with the vehicle regarding the
incoming/outgoing call record
Some types of cell phones do not
synchronize automatically.
Operate the cell phone for
synchronization.
It takes a long time to complete the
function for changing the language
A maximum of 60 seconds is
required.

5-126
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page422
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (423,1)
Sunvisors
When you need a sunvisor, lower it for
use in front or swing it to the side.
Sunvisor
qSide Extension Sunvisorsí
The visor extender extends the sunvisor's
range of sun shading.
To use, pull it out.
CAUTION
When moving the sunvisor, retract
the visor extender to its original
position. Otherwise, the visor
extender could hit the rearview
mirror.
qVanity Mirrors
To use the vanity mirror, lower the
sunvisor.
If your vehicle is equipped with a vanity
mirror light, it will illuminate when you
open the cover.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, the vanity mirror will only
illuminate in the tilt range shown below.
off
off
on Interior Features
Interior Equipment
5-127íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page423
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (424,1)
Interior Lights
Overhead Lights
Switch
Position
Overhead Lights
Light off
l Light is on when any door is open
l Light is on or off when the
illuminated entry system is on
Light on
NOTE
The rear map lights also turn on and off when
the overhead light switch is operated.
Front Map Lights
When the overhead light switch is in the
door or off position, press the lens to
illuminate the front map lights, and then
press the lens again to turn them off.
NOTE
The front map lights will not turn off even if the
lens is pressed in the following cases:
l The overhead light switch is in the ON
position.
l The overhead light switch is in the door
position with the door open.
l The illuminated entry system is on.
Rear Map Lights
When the overhead light switch is in the
door or off position, press the lens to
illuminate a rear map light, and then press
the lens again to turn it off.
NOTE
l Once the rear map lights have been turned
off, they will turn on and off depending on
the position to which the overhead light is
switched.
l The rear map lights will not turn off even if
the lens is pressed in the following cases:
l The overhead light switch is ON.
l The overhead light switch is in the door
position with the door open.
l The illuminated entry system is on.
5-128
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page424
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (425,1)
Luggage Compartment Lights
Switch
Position
Luggage Compartment Light
Light off
Light on when the liftgate is open
qIlluminated Entry System
The overhead lights turn on when any of
the following operations is done with the
overhead light switch in the DOOR
position and the ignition switched off.
l Turn on for about 30 seconds when the
driver's door is unlocked.
l Turn on for about 15 seconds when a
door is opened with a key left in the
vehicle and then the door is closed.
l Turn on for about 5 seconds when a
door is opened from the outside with a
key being carried and then the door is
closed.
The overhead lights turn on for about 15
seconds when the ignition is switched off
with the overhead light switch in the
DOOR position.
The overhead lights turn off immediately
in the following cases:
l The ignition is switched on and all
doors are closed.
l The driver's door is locked.
NOTE
l Battery saver
If any door is left open with the overhead
light switch in the DOOR position, or the
liftgate is left open, the overhead light or
luggage compartment light turns off after
about 30 minutes to prevent battery
depletion.
l The operation of the illuminated entry
system can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
5-129
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page425
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (426,1)
Accessory Sockets
Only use genuine Mazda accessories or
the equivalent requiring no greater than
120 W (DC 12 V, 10 A).
Frontí
The ignition must be switched to ACC or
ON.
Center, Rear
The accessory sockets can be used
regardless of whether the ignition is on or
off.
5-130
Interior Features
íSome models.
Interior Equipment
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page426
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (427,1)
CAUTION
Ø To prevent accessory socket
damage or electrical failure, pay
attention to the following:
Ø Do not use accessories that
require more than 120 W (DC 12
V, 10 A).
Ø Do not use accessories that are
not genuine Mazda accessories
or the equivalent.
Ø Close the cover when the
accessory socket is not in use to
prevent foreign objects and
liquids from getting into the
accessory socket.
Ø Correctly insert the plug into
the accessory socket.
Ø Do not insert the cigarette
lighter into the accessory
socket.
Ø Noise may occur on the audio
playback depending on the device
connected to the accessory socket.
Ø Depending on the device
connected to the accessory socket,
the vehicle's electrical system may
be affected, which could cause the
warning light to illuminate.
Disconnect the connected device
and make sure that the problem is
resolved. If the problem is
resolved, disconnect the device
from the socket and switch the
ignition off. If the problem is not
resolved, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
To prevent discharging of the battery, do not
use the socket for long periods with the engine
off or idling.
Connecting the accessory socket
1. Open the lid.
2. Pass the connection plug cord through
the cutout of the console and insert the
plug into the accessory socket.
Plug
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
5-131
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page427
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (428,1)
Cup Holder
WARNING
Never use a cup holder to hold hot
liquids while the vehicle is moving:
Using a cup holder to hold hot liquids
while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. If the contents spill, you
could be scalded.
Do not put anything other than cups or
drink cans in cup holders:
Putting objects other than cups or
drink cans in a cup holder is
dangerous.
During sudden braking or
maneuvering, occupants could be hit
and injured, or objects could be
thrown around the vehicle, causing
interference with the driver and the
possibility of an accident. Only use a
cup holder for cups or drink cans.
qFront
NOTE
When using the cup holder to hold a smallsized cup (height about 100 mm (4 in)), the cup
can be taken out of the cup holder easily by
using the spacer.
Spacer Spacer
5-132
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page428
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (429,1)
qRearí
The rear cup holder is on the rear center
armrest.
Bottle Holder
Bottle holders are on the inside of the
doors.
Bottle holder
CAUTION
Do not use the bottle holders for
containers without caps. The
contents may spill when the door is
opened or closed.
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
5-133íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page429
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (430,1)
Storage Compartments
WARNING
Keep storage boxes closed when
driving:
Driving with the storage boxes open
is dangerous. To reduce the
possibility of injury in an accident or
a sudden stop, keep the storage
boxes closed when driving.
Do not put articles in storage spaces
with no lid:
Putting articles in storage spaces
with no lid is dangerous as they
could be thrown around the cabin if
the vehicle is suddenly accelerated
and cause injury depending on how
the article is stored.
CAUTION
Do not leave lighters or eyeglasses in
the storage boxes while parked under
the sun. A lighter could explode or
the plastic material in eyeglasses
could deform and crack from high
temperature.
qOverhead Console
This console box is designed to store
eyeglasses or other accessories.
Push and release to open.
qGlove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull the
latch toward you.
To close the glove compartment, firmly
press in the center of the glove
compartment lid.
5-134
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page430
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (431,1)
qCenter Console
To open, release the latch and pull up the
lid.
Storage tray
The storage tray can be removed.
Storage tray
qCargo Securing Loops
WARNING
Make sure luggage and cargo is
secured before driving:
Not securing cargo while driving is
dangerous as it could move or be
crushed during sudden braking or a
collision and cause injury.
Use the loops in the luggage compartment
to secure cargo with a rope or net. The
tensile strength of the loops is 196 N (20
kgf, 44 lbf). Do not apply excessive force
to the loops as it will damage them.
qRear Coat Hooks
WARNING
Never hang heavy or sharp objects on
the assist grips and coat hooks:
Hanging heavy or sharp-ended
objects such as a coat hanger from
the assist grips or coat hooks is
dangerous as they can fly off and hit
an occupant in the cabin if a curtain
air bag was to deploy, which could
result in serious injury or death.
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
5-135
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page431
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (432,1)
Always hang clothes on the coat hooks
and the assist grips without hangers.
Coat hook
5-136
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page432
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (433,1)
6 Maintenance and Care
How to keep your Mazda in top condition.
Essential Information ................................................................... 6-2
Introduction ............................................................................... 6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ................................................................ 6-4
Scheduled Maintenance (U.S.A., Canada, and Puerto Rico) .... 6-4
Scheduled Maintenance (Mexico) ........................................... 6-13
Maintenance Monitor .............................................................. 6-20
Owner Maintenance ................................................................... 6-22
Owner Maintenance Precautions ............................................. 6-22
Hood ....................................................................................... 6-24
Engine Compartment Overview .............................................. 6-26
Engine Oil ............................................................................... 6-27
Engine Coolant ....................................................................... 6-29
Brake/Clutch Fluid .................................................................. 6-31
Washer Fluid ........................................................................... 6-31
Body Lubrication .................................................................... 6-32
Wiper Blades ........................................................................... 6-33
Battery ..................................................................................... 6-37
Key Battery Replacement ....................................................... 6-39
Tires ........................................................................................ 6-41
Light Bulbs ............................................................................. 6-46
Fuses ....................................................................................... 6-56
Appearance Care ........................................................................ 6-62
Exterior Care ........................................................................... 6-62
Interior Care ............................................................................ 6-68
6-1
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page433
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (434,1)
Introduction
Be extremely careful and prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your vehicle
when using this manual for inspection and maintenance.
If you are unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you to have a reliable
and qualified service shop perform the work, preferably an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for your vehicle.
Without this expertise and the parts that have been designed and made especially for your
Mazda, inadequate, incomplete, and insufficient servicing may result in problems. This
could lead to vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.
For expert advice and quality service, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
To continue warranty eligibility and to protect your investment, it is your responsibility to
properly maintain your vehicle according to factory recommended schedules outlined in
this manual. As part of this you must keep your maintenance records, receipts, repair orders
and any other documents as evidence this maintenance was performed. You must present
these documents, should any warranty coverage disagreement occur. Failure to do so can
result in your warranty being voided either in whole or in part.
This evidence may consist of the following:
l The Mazda Scheduled Maintenance Record, refer to the Warranty Booklet, must be
completely filled out showing mileage, repair order number, date for each service, and
signed by a qualified automotive service technician who service vehicles.
l Original copies of repair orders or other receipts that include the mileage and date the
vehicle was serviced. Each receipt should be signed by a qualified automotive service
technician.
l For self maintenance, a statement that you completed the maintenance yourself,
displaying mileage and the date the work was performed. Also, receipts for the
replacement parts (fluid, filters, etc.) indicating the date and mileage must accompany
this statement.
NOTE
If you elect to perform maintenance yourself or have your vehicle serviced at a location other than an
Authorized Mazda Dealer, Mazda requires that all fluids, parts and materials must meet Mazda
standards for durability and performance as described in this manual.
Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as opposed to defective
materials or authorized Mazda workmanship, will not be honored.
6-2
Maintenance and Care
Essential Information
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page434
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (435,1)
Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda's original equipment may
perform maintenance. But we recommend that it always be done by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer using genuine Mazda parts.
Maintenance and Care
Essential Information
6-3
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page435
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (436,1)
Scheduled Maintenance (U.S.A., Canada, and Puerto Rico)
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions
(severe driving conditions) apply.
l Repeated short-distance driving
l Driving in dusty conditions
l Driving with extended use of brakes
l Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used
l Driving on rough or muddy roads
l Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation
l Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates
l Driving in extremely hot conditions
l Driving in mountainous conditions continually
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2. (Puerto Rico and Canada residents follow Schedule 2.)
Engine oil flexible maintenance is available for U.S.A. and Puerto Rico residents whose
vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions apply.
l Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation such as police car, taxi or driving
school car
l Driving in dusty conditions
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2 with engine oil fixed maintenance.
The onboard computer in your vehicle calculates the remaining oil life based on engine
operating conditions when selecting flexible maintenance. Mazda Genuine 0W-20 Oil and
Castrol® 0W-20 Oil are required to achieve optimum calculation performance.
NOTE
After the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended
intervals.
6-4
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page436
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (437,1)
qSchedule 1
U.S.A. residents - Engine oil flexible maintenance interval
Use when the maintenance monitor for “Oil Change” is set to “Flexible”. For details, see maintenance
monitor (page 6-20).
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first.
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
×1000 km 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128
×1000 miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ENGINE
Drive belts I I
Engine oil & filter*1
Replace when wrench indicator light is ON.
(Max interval:12 months/16,000 km (10,000 miles))
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine coolant*2
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years.
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter
Replace when any equivalent timing of replacing engine oil.
(Max interval:36 months/60,000 km (37,500 miles))
Fuel lines and hoses*3 I I I I
Hoses and tubes for emission*3 I I
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles).
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I
Disc brakes I I I I I I I I
Tire (Rotation)*4 Rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles).
Steering operation and linkages I I I I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I I I I
Rear differential oil *5*6
Transfer oil *6
Driveshaft dust boots I I I I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T T T
Exhaust system and heat shields I I
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
6-5
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page437
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (438,1)
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first.
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
×1000 km 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128
×1000 miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter
Replace when any equivalent timing of replacing engine oil.
(Max interval:24 months/48,000 km (30,000 miles))
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year or within 16,000 km (10,000 miles) since last
engine oil and filter change. The system must be reset whenever replacing the engine oil regardless of the
message/wrench indicator light display.
*2 Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
*3 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*4 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
*5 If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the rear differential oil at
every 48,000 km (30,000 miles).
a) Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
b) Driving in dusty, sandy or wet conditions
c) Extended periods of idling or low speed operation
d) Repeated short trips of less than 16 km (10 miles)
*6 If this component has been submerged in water, the oil should be replaced.
6-6
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page438
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (439,1)
U.S.A. residents - Fixed maintenance interval
Use when the maintenance monitor for “Oil Change” is set to “Fixed”. For details, see maintenance monitor
(page 6-20).
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first.
Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48
×1000 km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
×1000 miles 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60
ENGINE
Drive belts I
Engine oil & filter R R R R R R R R
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine coolant*1
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years.
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter R
Fuel lines and hoses*2 I I
Hoses and tubes for emission*2 I
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles).
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I
Disc brakes I I I I
Tire (Rotation)*3 Rotate every 12,000 km (7,500 miles).
Steering operation and linkages I I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I I
Rear differential oil *4*5
Transfer oil *5
Driveshaft dust boots I I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T
Exhaust system and heat shields Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
6-7
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page439
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (440,1)
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first.
Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48
×1000 km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
×1000 miles 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter R R
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
*4 If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the rear differential oil at
every 48,000 km (30,000 miles).
a) Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
b) Driving in dusty, sandy or wet conditions
c) Extended periods of idling or low speed operation
d) Repeated short trips of less than 16 km (10 miles)
*5 If this component has been submerged in water, the oil should be replaced.
6-8
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page440
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (441,1)
qSchedule 2
U.S.A. (severe driving conditions) and Puerto Rico residents
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first.
Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
×1000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96
×1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
ENGINE
Drive belts I
Engine oil & filter
Flexible*1
Replace when wrench indicator light is ON.
(Max interval:12 months/16,000 km (10,000 miles))
Fixed R R R R R R R R R R R R
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine coolant*2
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years.
Engine coolant level I I I I I I I I I I I I
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter
U.S.A.
(severe driving
conditions)
R
Puerto Rico R R
Fuel lines and hoses*3 I I
Hoses and tubes for emission*3 I
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles).
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights I I I I I I I I I I I I
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I
Brake and clutch fluid level I I I I I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes I I I I
Tire (Rotation)*4 Rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles).
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear*4 I I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering operation and linkages I I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I I
Rear differential oil *5*6
Transfer oil *6
Driveshaft dust boots I I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T
Exhaust system and heat shields Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years.
All locks and hinges L L L L L L L L L L L L
Washer fluid level I I I I I I I I I I I I
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
6-9
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page441
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (442,1)
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first.
Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
×1000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96
×1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years.
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Engine oil flexible maintenance is available for U.S.A. and Puerto Rico residents whose vehicle is operated
mainly where none of the following conditions apply.
l Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation such as police car, taxi or driving school car
l Driving in dusty conditions
If any do apply, follow fixed maintenance.
The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year or within 16,000 km (10,000 miles) since last
engine oil and filter change. The system must be reset whenever replacing the engine oil regardless of the
message/wrench indicator light display.
*2 Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
*3 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*4 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
*5 If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the rear differential oil at
every 48,000 km (30,000 miles).
a) Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
b) Driving in dusty, sandy or wet conditions
c) Extended periods of idling or low speed operation
d) Repeated short trips of less than 16 km (10 miles)
*6 If this component has been submerged in water, the oil should be replaced.
6-10
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page442
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (443,1)
Canada residents
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first.
Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
×1000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96
×1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
ENGINE
Drive belts I
Engine oil & filter R R R R R R R R R R R R
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine coolant*1
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years.
Engine coolant level I I I I I I I I I I I I
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter I I I I I I R I I I I I
Fuel lines and hoses*2 I I
Hoses and tubes for emission*2 I
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles).
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights I I I I I I I I I I I I
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I
Brake and clutch fluid level I I I I I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes I I I I
Tire (Rotation)*3 Rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles).
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear*3 I I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering operation and linkages I I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I I
Rear differential oil *4*5
Transfer oil *5
Driveshaft dust boots I I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T
Exhaust system and heat shields Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years.
All locks and hinges L L L L L L L L L L L L
Washer fluid level I I I I I I I I I I I I
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
6-11
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page443
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (444,1)
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first.
Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
×1000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96
×1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years.
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
*4 If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the rear differential oil at
every 48,000 km (30,000 miles).
a) Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
b) Driving in dusty, sandy or wet conditions
c) Extended periods of idling or low speed operation
d) Repeated short trips of less than 16 km (10 miles)
*5 If this component has been submerged in water, the oil should be replaced.
6-12
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page444
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (445,1)
Scheduled Maintenance (Mexico)
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions
apply.
l Repeated short-distance driving
l Driving in dusty conditions
l Driving with extended use of brakes
l Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used
l Driving on rough or muddy roads
l Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation
l Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates
l Driving in extremely hot conditions
l Driving in mountainous conditions continually
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2.
NOTE
After the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended
intervals.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
6-13
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page445
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (446,1)
qSchedule 1
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72
×1000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
ENGINE
Drive belts I I I
Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R R R
Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system I I I
Engine coolant*1
Replace at first 200,000 km or 10 years; after that, every
100,000 km or 5 years
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter R R R R R R
Fuel lines and hoses I*2 I*2 I
Hoses and tubes for emission I*2 I*2 I
Fuel filter Replace every 60,000 km
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs Replace every 120,000 km
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I
Brake and clutch fluid level I I I I I I I I I
Brake fluid R R R
Disc brakes I I I I I I I I I I I I
Tire (Rotation)*3 Rotate every 10,000 km
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear*3 I I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering operation and linkages I I I I I I I I I I I I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I I I I I I
Rear differential oil *4*5
Transfer oil *5
Driveshaft dust boots I I I I I I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T T T T T
Exhaust system and heat shields I I I I I I
All locks and hinges L L L L L L L L L L L L
Washer fluid level I I I I I I I I I I I I
6-14
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page446
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (447,1)
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72
×1000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter R R R
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
*4 If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the rear differential oil at
every 45,000 km.
a) Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
b) Driving in dusty, sandy or wet conditions
c) Extended periods of idling or low speed operation
d) Repeated short trips of less than 16 km
*5 If this component has been submerged in water, the oil should be replaced.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
6-15
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page447
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (448,1)
qSchedule 2
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
×1000 km 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
ENGINE
Drive belts I
Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R R R
Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system I
Engine coolant*1
Replace at first 200,000 km or 10 years; after that, every
100,000 km or 5 years
Engine coolant level I I I I I I I I I I I I
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter C R C R C R
Fuel lines and hoses I*2
Hoses and tubes for emission I*2
Fuel filter Replace every 60,000 km
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs Replace every 120,000 km
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights I I I I I I I I I I I I
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I
Brake and clutch fluid level I I I I I
Brake fluid R
Disc brakes I I I I I I
Tire (Rotation)*3 Rotate every 10,000 km
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear*3 I I I I I I
Steering operation and linkages I I I I I I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I I I
Rear differential oil *4*5
Transfer oil *5
Driveshaft dust boots I I I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T T
Exhaust system and heat shields I I I
All locks and hinges L L L L L L
Washer fluid level I I I I I I
6-16
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page448
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (449,1)
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
×1000 km 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter R R R
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
C: Clean
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
*4 If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the rear differential oil at
every 45,000 km.
a) Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
b) Driving in dusty, sandy or wet conditions
c) Extended periods of idling or low speed operation
d) Repeated short trips of less than 16 km
*5 If this component has been submerged in water, the oil should be replaced.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
6-17
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page449
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (450,1)
(Cont.)
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Months 39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72
×1000 km 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
ENGINE
Drive belts I I
Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R R R
Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system I I
Engine coolant*1
Replace at first 200,000 km or 10 years; after that, every
100,000 km or 5 years
Engine coolant level I I I I I I I I I I I I
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter C R C R C R
Fuel lines and hoses I*2 I*2
Hoses and tubes for emission I*2 I*2
Fuel filter Replace every 60,000 km
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs Replace every 120,000 km
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights I I I I I I I I I I I I
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I
Brake and clutch fluid level I I I I
Brake fluid R R
Disc brakes I I I I I I
Tire (Rotation)*3 Rotate every 10,000 km
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear*3 I I I I I I
Steering operation and linkages I I I I I I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I I I
Rear differential oil *4*5
Transfer oil *5
Driveshaft dust boots I I I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T T
Exhaust system and heat shields I I I
All locks and hinges L L L L L L
Washer fluid level I I I I I I
6-18
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page450
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (451,1)
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first
Months 39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72
×1000 km 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter R R R
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
C: Clean
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use of FL-22 is recommended when replacing engine coolant. Using engine coolant other than FL-22 may
cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) initialization must be performed so that the system operates
normally (if equipped).
*4 If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the rear differential oil at
every 45,000 km.
a) Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
b) Driving in dusty, sandy or wet conditions
c) Extended periods of idling or low speed operation
d) Repeated short trips of less than 16 km
*5 If this component has been submerged in water, the oil should be replaced.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
6-19
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page451
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (452,1)
Maintenance Monitor
qMaintenance Monitor (Type A)
“Oil Change” with a flexible setting*1 is available. Consult your Authorized Mazda Dealer
when you want to change the setting*2. Once the system turns on, the wrench indicator
light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated when remaining oil life becomes less than
500 km (300 mile), or remaining days are less than 15 (whichever comes first).
Reset method
Press and hold the TRIP button with the ignition switched off, then switch it on. Keep
pressing the TRIP button for more than 5 seconds. The master warning light will flash for a
few seconds when the reset is completed.
*1 The flexible setting is available in the United States and Puerto Rico. Based on the
engine operating conditions, the onboard computer in your vehicle calculates the
remaining oil life. Mazda Genuine 0W-20 oil and Castrol® 0W-20 oil are required to
achieve optimum calculation performance.
*2 Once the Flexible Oil Maintenance Setting is selected, the system must be reset
whenever replacing the engine oil.
qMaintenance Monitor (Type B)
1. Select the icon on the home screen to display the “Applications” screen.
2. Select the “Maintenance” to display the maintenance list screen.
6-20
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page452
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (453,1)
3. Switch the tab and select the setting item you want to change.
You can customize settings in the setup display as follows:
Tab Item Explanation
Scheduled
Setting Notification can be switched on/off.
Time (months) Displays the time or distance until maintenance is due.
Select this item to set the maintenance period.
“Scheduled Due!” is displayed in red and the wrench indicator
light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated when the
remaining distance is less than 500 km or 250 mile, or the
remaining number of days is less than 15 (whichever comes first).
Distance (mile or km)
Reset
Resets the time and distance to the initial values.
Once the system turns on, it needs to be reset whenever carrying
out maintenance.
Tire Rotation
Setting Notification can be switched on/off.
Distance (mile or km)
Displays the distance until tire rotation is due.
Select this item to set the tire rotation distance.
“Tire Rotation Due!” is displayed in red and the wrench indicator
light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated when the
remaining distance is less than 500 km or 250 mile.
Reset
Resets the remaining distance to the initial value.
Once the system turns on, it needs to be reset whenever rotating
the tires.
Oil Change
Setting Interval
Oil replacement period can be selected from the flexible setting or
fixed setting, or it can be set to non-display.
The flexible setting is available only in the United States and
Puerto Rico. Once engine oil flexible maintenance is selected, the
vehicle calculates the remaining oil life based on the engine
operating conditions. The vehicle lets you know when an oil
change is due by illuminating the wrench indicator light in the
instrument cluster. Mazda Genuine 0W-20 oil and Castrol® 0W-20
oil are required to achieve optimum performance.
Distance (mile or km)
(Displays only in fixed
setting)
Displays the distance until the oil replacement is due.
Select this item to set the oil replacement distance.
“Oil Change Due!” is displayed in red and the wrench indicator
light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated when the
remaining distance is less than 500 km or 250 mile.
Oil life (%)
(Displays only in flexible
setting)
Displays the engine oil life until the oil replacement is due.
“Oil Change Due!” is displayed in red and the wrench indicator
light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated when the
remaining oil life distance is less than 500 km (300 mile), or
remaining days are less than 15 (whichever comes first).
Reset
In flexible setting: Resets the remaining oil life to 100 %.
In fixed setting: Resets the remaining distance to the initial value.
Once the Flexible Oil Maintenance Setting is selected, the system
must be reset whenever replacing the engine oil.
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
6-21
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page453
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (454,1)
Owner Maintenance Precautions
The owner or a qualified service technician should make these vehicle inspections at the
indicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable operation.
Bring any problem to the attention of an Authorized Mazda Dealer or qualified service
technician as soon as possible.
When Refueling
l Brake and clutch fluid level (page 6-31)
l Engine coolant level (page 6-29)
l Engine oil level (page 6-28)
l Washer fluid level (page 6-31)
At Least Monthly
Tire inflation pressures (page 6-42)
At Least Twice a Year (For Example, Every Spring and Fall)
You can do the following scheduled maintenance items if you have some mechanical
ability and a few basic tools and if you closely follow the directions in this manual.
l Engine coolant (page 6-29)
l Engine oil (page 6-27)
Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only
for items that are easy to perform.
As explained in the Introduction (page 6-2), several procedures can be done only by a
qualified service technician with special tools.
Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage.
Refer to Introduction (page 6-2) for owner's responsibility in protecting your investment.
For details, read the separate Mazda Warranty statement provided with the vehicle. If you
are unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
There are strict environmental laws regarding the disposal of waste oil and fluids. Please
dispose of your waste properly and with due regard to the environment.
We recommend that you entrust the oil and fluid changes of your vehicle to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
6-22
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page454
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (455,1)
WARNING
Do not perform maintenance work if you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or
the proper tools and equipment to do the work. Have maintenance work done by a
qualified technician:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle is dangerous if not done properly. You
can be seriously injured while performing some maintenance procedures.
If you must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain that you
remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all
neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling
fan which may turn on unexpectedly:
Working under the hood with the engine running is dangerous. It becomes even
more dangerous when you wear jewelry or loose clothing.
Either can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury.
Switch the ignition to off and make sure the fan is not running before
attempting to work near the cooling fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it is running is dangerous. The fan could
continue running indefinitely even if the engine has stopped and the engine
compartment temperature is high. You could be hit by the fan and seriously injured.
Do not leave items in the engine compartment:
After you have finished checking or doing servicing in the engine compartment, do
not forget and leave items such as tools or rags in the engine compartment.
Tools or other items left in the engine compartment could cause engine damage or a
fire leading to an unexpected accident.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-23
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page455
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (456,1)
Hood
WARNING
Always check that the hood is closed
and securely locked:
A hood that is not closed and
securely locked is dangerous as it
could fly open while the vehicle is
moving and block the driver's vision
which could result in a serious
accident.
qOpening the Hood
1. With the vehicle parked, pull the
release handle to unlock the hood.
Release handle
2. Insert your hand into the hood opening,
slide the latch lever to the right, and lift
up the hood.
3. Grasp the support rod in the padded
area and secure it in the support rod
hole indicated by the arrow to hold the
hood open.
Pad
Clip
Clip
Support rod
6-24
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page456
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (457,1)
qClosing the Hood
1. Check under the hood area to make
certain all filler caps are in place and
all loose items (e.g. tools, oil
containers, etc.) have been removed.
2. Lift the hood, grasp the padded area on
the support rod, and secure the support
rod in the clip. Verify that the support
rod is secured in the clip before closing
the hood.
Clip
ClipClip
3. Lower the hood slowly to a height of
about 20 cm (7.9 in) above its closed
position and then let it drop.
CAUTION
When closing the hood, do not push
it excessively such as by applying
your weight. Otherwise, the hood
could be deformed.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-25
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page457
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (458,1)
Engine Compartment Overview
Windshield washer fluid reservoir
Engine oil-filler cap
Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir
Engine oil dipstick
Battery
Engine coolant reservoir
Fuse block
Cooling system cap
6-26
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page458
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (459,1)
Engine Oil
NOTE
Changing the engine oil should be performed
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Refer to Introduction (page 6-2) for owner's
responsibility in protecting your investment.
qRecommended Oil
U.S.A. and CANADA
Use SAE 0W-20 engine oil.
Mazda Genuine Oil is used in your Mazda
vehicle. Mazda Genuine 0W-20 Oil is
required to achieve optimum fuel
economy.
For maintenance service, Mazda
recommends Mazda Genuine Parts and
Castrol® (U.S.A. only).
(ILSAC)
Only use SAE 0W-20 oil
“Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the
American Petroleum Institute (API).
Oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system
protection standards and fuel economy
requirements of the International
Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S.
and Japanese automobile manufacturers.
806040200–40 –20
30
100
4020100–10–20–30–40
Except U.S.A. and CANADA
Use SAE 5W-30 engine oil.
Oil container labels provide important
information.
A chief contribution this type of oil makes
to fuel economy is reducing the amount of
fuel necessary to overcome engine
friction.
For maintenance service, Mazda
recommends Mazda Genuine Parts and
Castrol® (Mexico only).
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-27
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page459
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (460,1)
(ILSAC)
(Mexico)
Use SAE 5W-30 engine oil. If SAE 5W30 engine oil is not available, use SAE
5W-20 engine oil.
The quality designation SM, or ILSAC
must be on the label.
806040200–40 –20
30
100
4020100–10–20–30–40
qInspecting Engine Oil Level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on a level
surface.
2. Warm up the engine to normal
operating temperature.
3. Turn it off and wait at least 5 minutes
for the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and
reinsert it fully.
Full
OK
Low
5. Pull it out again and examine the level.
The level is normal if it is between
Low and Full.
If it is near or below Low, add enough
oil to bring the level to Full.
CAUTION
Do not add engine oil over Full. This
may cause engine damage.
6. Make sure the O-ring on the dipstick is
positioned properly before reinserting
the dipstick.
7. Reinsert the dipstick fully.
6-28
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page460
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (461,1)
Engine Coolant
qInspecting Coolant Level
WARNING
Do not use a match or live flame in the
engine compartment. DO NOT ADD
COOLANT WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT:
A hot engine is dangerous. If the
engine has been running, parts of the
engine compartment can become
very hot. You could be burned.
Carefully inspect the engine coolant
in the coolant reservoir, but do not
open it.
Switch the ignition to off and
make sure the fan is not running before
attempting to work near the cooling
fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it
is running is dangerous. The fan
could continue running indefinitely
even if the engine has stopped and
the engine compartment temperature
is high. You could be hit by the fan
and seriously injured.
Do not remove either cooling
system cap when the engine and
radiator are hot:
When the engine and radiator are
hot, scalding coolant and steam may
shoot out under pressure and cause
serious injury.
NOTE
Changing the coolant should be done by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Inspect the antifreeze protection and
coolant level in the coolant reservoir at
least once a year―at the beginning of the
winter season―and before traveling
where temperatures may drop below
freezing.
Inspect the condition and connections of
all cooling system and heater hoses.
Replace any that are swollen or
deteriorated.
The coolant should be at full in the
radiator and between the F and L marks
on the coolant reservoir when the engine
is cool.
If it is at or near L, add enough coolant to
the coolant reservoir to provide freezing
and corrosion protection and to bring the
level to F.
Securely tighten the coolant reservoir tank
cap after adding coolant.
CAUTION
Ø Radiator coolant will damage
paint.
Rinse it off quickly if spilled.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-29
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page461
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (462,1)
Ø Use only soft (demineralized)
water in the coolant mixture.
Water that contains minerals will
cut down on the coolant's
effectiveness.
Ø Do not add only water. Always
add a proper coolant mixture.
Ø The engine has aluminum parts
and must be protected by an
ethylene-glycol-based coolant to
prevent corrosion and freezing.
Ø DO NOT USE coolants Containing
Alcohol, methanol, Borate or
Silicate.
These coolants could damage the
cooling system.
Ø DO NOT MIX alcohol or methanol
with the coolant. This could
damage the cooling system.
Ø Do not use a solution that
contains more than 60%
antifreeze.
This would reduce effectiveness.
Ø If the “FL22” mark is shown on or
near the cooling system cap, use of
FL-22 is recommended when
replacing engine coolant. Using
engine coolant other than FL-22
may cause serious damage to the
engine and cooling system.
If the coolant reservoir is empty or new
coolant is required frequently, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
6-30
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page462
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (463,1)
Brake/Clutch Fluid
qInspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid Level
WARNING
If the brake/clutch fluid level is low,
have the brakes inspected:
A low brake/clutch fluid level is
dangerous.
A low level could indicate brake
lining wear or a brake system leak
which could cause the brakes to fail
and lead to an accident.
The brakes and clutch draw fluid from the
same reservoir.
Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir
regularly. It should be kept between the
MAX and MIN lines.
The level normally drops with
accumulated distance, a condition
associated with wear of brake and clutch
linings. If it is excessively low, have the
brake/clutch system inspected by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Washer Fluid
qInspecting Washer Fluid Level
WARNING
Use only windshield washer fluid or
plain water in the reservoir:
Using radiator antifreeze as washer
fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the
windshield, it will dirty the
windshield, affect your visibility, and
could result in an accident.
Using Washer Fluid Without Anti-freeze
Protection in Cold Weather:
Operating your vehicle in
temperatures below 4 degrees C (40
degrees F) using washer fluid without
anti-freeze protection is dangerous
as it could cause impaired windshield
vision and result in an accident. In
cold weather, always use washer
fluid with anti-freeze protection.
NOTE
State or local regulations may restrict the use
of volatile organic compounds (VOCs), which
are commonly used as anti-freeze agents in
washer fluid. A washer fluid with limited VOC
content should be used only if it provides
adequate freeze resistance for all regions and
climates in which the vehicle will be operated.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-31
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page463
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (464,1)
Inspect fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir; add fluid if necessary.
L
F
OK
The top of the float should be between F
and L.
Use plain water if washer fluid is
unavailable.
But use only washer fluid in cold weather
to prevent it from freezing.
NOTE
Front and rear washer fluid is supplied from
the same reservoir.
Body Lubrication
All moving points of the body, such as
door and hood hinges and locks, should
be lubricated each time the engine oil is
changed. Use a nonfreezing lubricant on
locks during cold weather.
Make sure the hood's secondary latch
keeps the hood from opening when the
primary latch is released.
6-32
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page464
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (465,1)
Wiper Blades
CAUTION
Ø Hot waxes applied by automatic
car washers have been known to
affect the wiper's ability to clean
windows.
Ø To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
Ø When the wiper lever is in the
AUTO position and the ignition is
switched ON, the wipers may
move automatically in the
following cases:
Ø If the windshield above the rain
sensor is touched.
Ø If the windshield above the rain
sensor is wiped with a cloth.
Ø If the windshield is struck with
a hand or other object.
Ø If the rain sensor is struck with
a hand or other object from
inside the vehicle.
Be careful not to pinch hands or
fingers as it may cause injury, or
damage the wipers. When
washing or servicing your Mazda,
make sure the wiper lever is in the
OFF position.
Contamination of either the windshield or
the blades with foreign matter can reduce
wiper effectiveness. Common sources are
insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments
used by some commercial car washes.
If the blades are not wiping properly,
clean the window and blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent; then rinse
thoroughly with clean water. Repeat if
necessary.
qReplacing Windshield Wiper Blades
When the wipers no longer clean well, the
blades are probably worn or cracked.
Replace them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
and other components, do not try to
sweep the wiper arm by hand.
NOTE
When raising both windshield wiper arms,
raise the driver's side wiper arm first. When
lowering the wiper arms, slowly lower the
wiper arm from the passenger's side first while
supporting it with your hand. Forcefully
lowering the wiper arms could damage the
wiper arm and blade, and may scratch or
crack the windshield.
1. Raise the wiper arm.
2. Open the clip and slide the blade
assembly in the direction of the arrow.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the windshield
let the wiper arm down easily, do not
let it slap down on the windshield.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-33
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page465
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (466,1)
3. Pull down the blade rubber and slide it
out of blade holder.
4. Remove the metal stiffeners from each
blade rubber and install them in the
new blade.
CAUTION
Ø Do not bend or discard the
stiffeners. You need to use them
again.
Ø If the metal stiffeners are
switched, the blade's wiping
efficiency could be reduced.
So do not use the driver's side
metal stiffeners on the passenger's
side, or vice versa.
Ø Be sure to reinstall the metal
stiffeners in the new blade rubber
so that the curve is the same as it
was in the old blade rubber.
5. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.
Then install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
qReplacing Rear Window Wiper
Blade
When the wiper no longer cleans well, the
blade is probably worn or cracked.
Replace it.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper arm
and other components, do not move
the wiper by hand.
6-34
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page466
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (467,1)
1. Remove the cover and raise the wiper
arm.
2. Firmly rotate the wiper blade to the
right until it unlocks, then remove the
blade.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the rear
window, do not let the wiper arm fall
on it.
3. Pull down the blade rubber and slide it
out of the blade holder.
4. Remove the metal stiffeners from the
blade rubber and install them in the
new blade.
CAUTION
Do not bend or discard the stiffeners.
You need to use them again.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-35
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page467
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (468,1)
5. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.
Then install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
6-36
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page468
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (469,1)
Battery
WARNING
Wash hands after handling the battery and related accessories:
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Read the following precautions carefully before using the battery or inspecting
to ensure safe and correct handling:
Always wear eye protection when working near the battery:
Working without eye protection is dangerous. Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID
which could cause blindness if splashed into your eyes. Also, hydrogen gas produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode.
Wear eye protection and protective gloves to prevent contact with battery
fluid:
Spilled battery fluid is dangerous.
Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause serious injuries if it gets in
eyes, or on the skin or clothing. If this happens, immediately flush your eyes with
water for 15 minutes or wash your skin thoroughly and get medical attention.
Always keep batteries out of the reach of children:
Allowing children to play near batteries is dangerous. Battery fluid could cause
serious injuries if it gets in the eyes or on the skin.
Keep flames and sparks away from open battery cells and do not allow metal
tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative ( ) terminal of the battery when
working near a battery. Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact the vehicle
body:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. Keep all flames including
cigarettes and sparks away from open battery cells.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-37
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page469
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (470,1)
Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.
NOTE
Before performing battery maintenance, remove the battery cover.
qBattery Maintenance
To get the best service from a battery:
l Keep it securely mounted.
l Keep the top clean and dry.
l Keep terminals and connections clean,
tight, and coated with petroleum jelly
or terminal grease.
l Rinse off spilled electrolyte
immediately with a solution of water
and baking soda.
l If the vehicle will not be used for an
extended time, disconnect the battery
cables and charge the battery every six
weeks.
qBattery Replacement
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer for a
battery replacement purchase.
6-38
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page470
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (471,1)
Key Battery Replacement
If the buttons on the transmitter are
inoperable and the operation indicator
light does not flash, the battery may be
dead.
Replace with a new battery before the
transmitter becomes unusable.
CAUTION
Ø Make sure the battery is installed
correctly. Battery leakage could
occur if it is not installed correctly.
Ø When replacing the battery, be
careful not to touch any of the
internal circuitry and electrical
terminals, bend the electrical
terminals, or get dirt in the
transmitter as the transmitter
could be damaged.
Ø There is the danger of explosion if
the battery is not correctly
replaced.
Ø Dispose of used batteries
according to the following
instructions.
Ø Insulate the plus and minus
terminals of the battery using
cellophane or equivalent tape.
Ø Never disassemble.
Ø Never throw the battery into
fire or water.
Ø Never deform or crush.
Ø Replace only with the same type
battery (CR2025 or equivalent).
The following conditions indicate that the
battery power is low:
l The KEY indicator light (green) flashes
in the instrument cluster for about 30
seconds after the engine is turned off
(for vehicles with a type A meter,
messages are displayed in the
instrument cluster).
l The system does not operate and the
operation indicator light on the
transmitter does not flash when the
buttons are pressed.
l The system's operational range is
reduced.
Replacing the battery at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer is recommended to prevent
damage to the key. If replacing the battery
by yourself, follow the instruction below.
Replacing the key battery
1. Press the knob and pull out the
auxiliary key.
Knob
2. Twist a tape-wrapped flathead
screwdriver in the direction of the
arrow and open the cover slightly.
Cover
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-39
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page471
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (472,1)
3. Insert the tape-wrapped flathead
screwdriver into the gap and slide it in
the direction of the arrow.
Cover
Gap
4. Twist the flathead screwdriver in the
direction of the arrow and remove the
cover.
Cover
5. Remove the battery cap, then remove
the battery.
6. Insert a new battery with the positive
pole facing up, and then cover the
battery with the battery cap.
7. Close the cover.
8. Reinsert the auxiliary key.
6-40
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page472
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (473,1)
CAUTION
Ø Be careful not to allow the rubber
ring shown in the figure to be
scratched or damaged.
Ø If the rubber ring detaches,
reattach it before inserting a new
battery.
Rubber ring
Tires
For reasons of proper performance, safety,
and better fuel economy, always maintain
recommended tire inflation pressures and
stay within the recommended load limits
and weight distribution.
WARNING
Using Different Tire Types:
Driving your vehicle with different
types of tires is dangerous. It could
cause poor handling and poor
braking; leading to loss of control.
Except for the limited use of the
temporary spare tire, use only the
same type tires (radial, bias-belted,
bias-type) on all four wheels.
Using Wrong-Sized Tires:
Using any other tire size than what is
specified for your Mazda (page 9-8)
is dangerous. It could seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clearance, tire
clearance, and speedometer
calibration. This could cause you to
have an accident. Use only tires that
are the correct size specified for your
Mazda.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-41
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page473
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (474,1)
qTire Inflation Pressure
WARNING
Always inflate the tires to the correct
pressure:
Overinflation or underinflation of
tires is dangerous. Adverse handling
or unexpected tire failure could result
in a serious accident.
Refer to Tires on page 9-8.
Use only a Mazda-genuine tire valve
cap:
Use of a non-genuine part is
dangerous as the correct tire air
pressure cannot be maintained if the
tire valve becomes damaged. If the
vehicle is driven under this condition,
the tire air pressure will decrease
which could result in a serious
accident. Do not use any part for the
tire valve cap that is not a Mazdagenuine part.
Inspect all tire pressures monthly
(including the spare) when the tires are
cold. Maintain recommended pressures
for the best ride, handling, and minimum
tire wear.
Refer to the specification charts (page
9-8).
After adjusting the tire pressure,
initialization of the tire pressure
monitoring system is necessary to make
the system operate normally.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Initialization on page 4-150.
NOTE
l Always check tire pressure when tires are
cold.
l Warm tires normally exceed recommended
pressures. Do not release air from warm
tires to adjust the pressure.
l Underinflation can cause reduced fuel
economy, uneven and accelerated tire wear,
and poor sealing of the tire bead, which
will deform the wheel and cause separation
of tire from rim.
l Overinflation can produce a harsh ride,
uneven and accelerated tire wear, and a
greater possibility of damage from road
hazards.
Keep your tire pressure at the correct
levels. If one frequently needs inflating,
have it inspected.
qTire Rotation
WARNING
Rotate tires periodically:
Irregular tire wear is dangerous. To
equalize tread wear for maintaining
good performance in handling and
braking, rotate the tires according to
the scheduled maintenance charts.
Refer to Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.
6-42
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page474
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (475,1)
During rotation, inspect them for correct
balance.
Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY)
spare tire in rotation.
Forward
Also, inspect them for uneven wear and
damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused
by one or a combination of the following:
l Incorrect tire pressure
l Improper wheel alignment
l Out-of-balance wheel
l Severe braking
After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to
specification (page 9-8) and inspect the
lug nuts for tightness.
After adjusting the tire pressure,
initialization of the tire pressure
monitoring system is necessary to make
the system operates normally.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Initialization on page 4-150.
CAUTION
Rotate unidirectional tires and radial
tires that have an asymmetrical tread
pattern or studs only from front to
rear, not from side to side. Tire
performance will be reduced if
rotated from side to side.
qReplacing a Tire
WARNING
Always use tires that are in good
condition:
Driving with worn tires is dangerous.
Reduced braking, steering, and
traction could result in an accident.
Replace all four tires at the same time:
Replacing just one tire is dangerous.
It could cause poor handling and
poor braking resulting in loss of
vehicle control. Mazda strongly
recommends that you replace all four
tires at the same time.
If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator
will appear as a solid band across the
tread.
Replace the tire when this happens.
New tread
Tread wear indicator
Worn tread
You should replace the tire before the
band crosses the entire tread.
After adjusting the tire pressure,
initialization of the tire pressure
monitoring system is necessary to make
the system operates normally.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Initialization on page 4-150.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-43
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page475
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (476,1)
NOTE
Tires degrade over time, even when they are
not being used on the road. It is recommended
that tires generally be replaced when they are
6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions can
accelerate the aging process. You should
replace the spare tire when you replace the
other road tires due to the aging of the spare
tire. The period in which the tire was
manufactured (both week and year) is
indicated by a 4-digit number.
Refer to Tire Labeling on page 8-25.
qTemporary Spare Tire
Inspect the temporary spare tire at least
monthly to make sure it is properly
inflated and stored.
NOTE
The temporary spare tire condition gradually
deteriorates even if it has not been used.
The temporary spare tire is easier to
handle because of its construction which
is lighter and smaller than a conventional
tire. This tire should be used only for an
emergency and only for a short distance.
Use the temporary spare tire only until the
conventional tire is repaired, which should
be as soon as possible.
Refer to Tires on page 9-8.
CAUTION
Ø Do not use your temporary spare
tire rim with a snow tire or a
conventional tire. Neither will
properly fit and could damage
both tire and rim.
Ø The temporary spare tire has a
tread life of less than 5,000 km
(3,000 miles). The tread life may
be shorter depending on driving
conditions.
Ø The temporary spare tire is for
limited use, however, if the tread
wear solid-band indicator
appears, replace the tire with the
same type of temporary spare
(page 6-44).
NOTE
Tires degrade over time, even when they are
not being used on the road. It is recommended
that tires generally be replaced when they are
6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions can
accelerate the aging process. You should
replace the spare tire when you replace the
other road tires due to the aging of the spare
tire. The period in which the tire was
manufactured (both week and year) is
indicated by a 4-digit number.
Refer to Tire Labeling on page 8-25.
qReplacing a Wheel
WARNING
Always use wheels of the correct size
on your vehicle:
Using a wrong-sized wheel is
dangerous. Braking and handling
could be affected, leading to loss of
control and an accident.
6-44
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page476
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (477,1)
CAUTION
A wrong-sized wheel may adversely
affect:
Ø Tire fit
Ø Wheel and bearing life
Ø Ground clearance
Ø Snow-chain clearance
Ø Speedometer calibration
Ø Headlight aim
Ø Bumper height
Ø Tire Pressure Monitoring System
NOTE
l When replacing a wheel, make sure the new
one is the same as the original factory
wheel in diameter, rim width, and offset
(inset/outset).
l For details, contact an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Proper tire balancing provides the best
riding comfort and helps reduce tread
wear. Out-of-balance tires can cause
vibration and uneven wear, such as
cupping and flat spots.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-45
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page477
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (478,1)
Light Bulbs
With LED headlights
With halogen headlights
Rear side-marker lights
Rear turn signal lights
Brake lights/Taillights
License plate lights
Headlights (Low beam)
High-mount brake light
Rear side-marker lights
Rear turn signal lights
Brake lights/Taillights
License plate lights
High-mount brake light
Side turn
signal lights
Front turn signal lights/
Front side-marker lights
Headlights (High beam)/
Daytime running lights
Headlights (Low beam)
Front turn signal lights/
Parking lights (Front sidemarker lights)
Fog lights
Rear map lights
Overhead light (Front)/
Map lights
Luggage compartment light
Vanity mirror lights
Rear map lights
Overhead light (Front)/
Map lights
Luggage compartment light
Vanity mirror lights
Daytime running lights/
Parking lights
Fog lights
Some models.
Side turn
signal lights
Headlights (High beam)
Taillights (Liftgate side)
Taillights (Liftgate side)
Reverse lights
Reverse lights
Taillights
6-46
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page478
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (479,1)
WARNING
Never touch the glass portion of a
halogen bulb with your bare hands and
always wear eye protection when
handling or working around the bulbs:
When a halogen bulb breaks, it is
dangerous. These bulbs contain
pressurized gas. If one is broken, it
will explode and serious injuries
could be caused by the flying glass.
If the glass portion is touched with
bare hands, body oil could cause the
bulb to overheat and explode when
lit.
Always keep halogen bulbs out of the
reach of children:
Playing with a halogen bulb is
dangerous. Serious injuries could be
caused by dropping a halogen bulb
or breaking it some other way.
CAUTION
When removing the lens or lamp unit
using a flathead screwdriver, make
sure that the flathead screwdriver
does not contact the interior
terminal. If the flathead screwdriver
contacts the terminal, a short circuit
may occur.
NOTE
l To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
l If the halogen bulb is accidentally touched,
it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol
before being used.
l Use the protective cover and carton for the
replacement bulb to dispose of the old bulb
promptly and out of the reach of children.
qReplacing Exterior Light Bulbs
Headlights (With LED headlights)
Low-beam bulbs, High-beam bulbs,
Daytime running lights/Parking lights
The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a
single unit because it is an integrated unit.
The LED bulb has to be replaced with the
unit. We recommend an Authorized
Mazda Dealer when the replacement is
necessary.
Headlights (With halogen headlights)
Low-beam bulbs, High-beam bulbs/
Daytime running lights
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Lift the hood.
3. (Right side)
Remove the windshield washer fluid
reservoir from the guide.
Windshield washer
fluid reservoir
Guide
4. Disconnect the connector from the unit
by pressing the tab on the connector
with your finger and pulling the
connector downward.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-47
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page479
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:34 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (480,1)
Low-beam bulbs
High-beam bulbs/Daytime running
lights
5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly to
remove it. Carefully remove the bulb
from its socket in the reflector by
gently pulling it straight backward out
of the socket.
Low-beam bulbs
High-beam bulbs/Daytime running
lights
6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Front turn signal lights/Front sidemarker lights (With LED headlights)
Front turn signal lights/Parking lights
(Front side-marker lights) (With
halogen headlights)
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. If you are changing the right bulb, start
the engine, turn the steering wheel all
the way to the right, and turn off
engine. If you are changing the left
bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left.
6-48
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page480
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (481,1)
3. Pull the center of each plastic retainer
and remove the retainers.
Installation
Removal
4. Turn the screw counterclockwise and
remove it, and then partially peel back
the mudguard.
5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
6. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
7. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Fog lights (With LED headlights)
The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a
single unit because it is an integrated unit.
The LED bulb has to be replaced with the
unit. We recommend an Authorized
Mazda Dealer when the replacement is
necessary.
Fog lights (With halogen headlights)í
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. If you are changing the right bulb, start
the engine, turn the steering wheel all
the way to the right, and turn off
engine. If you are changing the left
bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-49íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page481
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (482,1)
3. Pull the center of each plastic retainer
and remove the retainers.
Installation
Removal
4. Turn the screw counterclockwise and
remove it, and then partially peel back
the mudguard.
5. Disconnect the connector from the unit
by pressing the tab on the connector
with your finger and pulling the
connector downward.
6. Turn the socket and bulb assembly to
remove it. Carefully remove the bulb
from its socket in the reflector by
gently pulling it straight back out of the
socket.
7. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Side-turn signal lights
The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a
single unit because it is an integrated unit.
The LED bulb has to be replaced with the
unit. We recommend an Authorized
Mazda Dealer when the replacement is
necessary.
6-50
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page482
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (483,1)
Brake lights/Taillights, Rear sidemarker lights, Taillights, Rear turn
signal lights, Reverse lights (With LED
headlights)
Brake lights/Taillights, Rear sidemarker lights, Taillights
The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a
single unit because it is an integrated unit.
The LED bulb has to be replaced with the
unit. We recommend an Authorized
Mazda Dealer when the replacement is
necessary.
Rear turn signal lights, Reverse lights
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Remove the cover with a clothwrapped flathead screwdriver to the
cover.
Rear turn signal lights
Reverse lights
3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
Rear turn signal lights
Reverse lights
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-51
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page483
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (484,1)
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Brake lights/Taillights, Rear turn signal
lights, Rear side-marker lights,
Taillights (Liftgate side), Reverse lights
(With halogen headlights)
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Remove the cover with a clothwrapped flathead screwdriver to the
cover.
Brake lights/Taillights, Rear turn signal
lights, Rear side-marker lights
Taillights (Liftgate side), Reverse lights
3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
Brake lights/Taillights
Rear turn signal lights
Rear side-marker lights
6-52
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page484
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (485,1)
Taillights (Liftgate side)
Reverse lights
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
High-mount brake light
The LED bulb cannot be replaced as a
single unit because it is an integrated unit.
The LED bulb has to be replaced with the
unit. We recommend an Authorized
Mazda Dealer when the replacement is
necessary.
License plate lights
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Wrap a flathead screwdriver with a soft
cloth to prevent damage to the lens,
and then remove the lens by carefully
prying on the edge of the lens with a
flathead screwdriver.
3. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
qReplacing Interior Light Bulbs
Overhead light (Front)/Map lights,
Rear map lights, Vanity mirror lightsí
1. Wrap a small flathead screwdriver with
a soft cloth to prevent damage to the
lens, and then remove the lens by
carefully prying on the edge of the lens
with the flathead screwdriver.
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-53íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page485
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (486,1)
Overhead light (Front)/Map lights
Rear map lights
Vanity mirror lights
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
6-54
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page486
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (487,1)
Luggage compartment light
1. Wrap a small flathead screwdriver with
a soft cloth to prevent damage to the
lens and remove the lens unit by
carefully prying on the edge of the lens
unit with the flathead screwdriver.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb by pressing the tab on
the connector with your finger and
pulling the connector.
CAUTION
When replacing the bulb always
disconnect the connector first.
Otherwise, electric and electronic
devices could be shorted.
3. Insert the flathead screwdriver into the
gap between the lens and the lens unit,
and then slide the screwdriver to detach
the lens.
4. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-55
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page487
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (488,1)
Fuses
Your vehicle's electrical system is
protected by fuses.
If any lights, accessories, or controls do
not work, inspect the appropriate circuit
protector. If a fuse has blown, the inside
element will be melted.
If the same fuse blows again, avoid using
that system and consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
qFuse Replacement
Replacing the fuses on the vehicle's left
side
If the electrical system does not work,
first inspect the fuses on the vehicle's left
side.
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and other switches are off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the fuse straight out with the fuse
puller provided on the fuse block
located in the engine compartment.
4. Inspect the fuse and replace it if it is
blown.
Normal Blown
5. Insert a new fuse of the same amperage
rating, and make sure it fits tightly. If it
does not fit tightly, have an expert
install it. We recommend an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If you have no spare fuses, borrow one
of the same rating from a circuit not
essential to vehicle operation, such as
the AUDIO or OUTLET circuit.
6-56
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page488
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (489,1)
CAUTION
Always replace a fuse with a genuine
Mazda fuse or equivalent of the same
rating. Otherwise you may damage
the electric system.
6. Reinstall the cover and make sure that
it is securely installed.
Replacing the fuses under the hood
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the fuses in
the cabin are normal, inspect the fuse
block under the hood. If a fuse is blown, it
must be replaced. Follow these steps:
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and other switches are off.
2. Remove the fuse block cover.
3. If any fuse but the MAIN fuse is
blown, replace it with a new one of the
same amperage rating.
Normal Blown
WARNING
Do not replace the main fuse by
yourself. Have an Authorized Mazda
Dealer perform the replacement:
Replacing the fuse by yourself is
dangerous because the MAIN fuse is
a high current fuse. Incorrect
replacement could cause an electrical
shock or a short circuit resulting in a
fire.
4. Reinstall the cover and make sure that
it is securely installed.
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-57
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page489
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (490,1)
qFuse Panel Description
Fuse block (Engine compartment)
DESCRIPTION
FUSE
RATING
PROTECTED COMPONENT
1 ADD FAN GE 30 A Cooling fan
2 IG2 30 A For protection of various circuits
3 INJECTOR 30 A Engine control system
4 FAN DE 40 A ―
5 P.WINDOW1 30 A Power windows
6 ― ― ―
7 ADD FAN DE 40 A ―
8 EVVT 20 A Engine control system
9 DEFOG 40 A Rear window defogger
10 DCDC DE 40 A ―
11 FAN GE 30 A Cooling fan
12 EPB L 20 A Electric parking brake (LH)
13 AUDIO 40 A Audio system
14 EPB R 20 A Electric parking brake (RH)
15 ENG.MAIN 40 A Engine control system
16 ABS/DSC M 50 A ABS, Dynamic stability control system
17 50 A For protection of various circuits
6-58
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page490
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (491,1)
DESCRIPTION
FUSE
RATING
PROTECTED COMPONENT
18 WIPER 20 A Front window wiper and washer
19 HEATER 40 A Air conditioner
20 DCDC REG 30 A ―
21 ENGINE.IG1 7.5 A Engine control system
22 C/U IG1 15 A For protection of various circuits
23
H/L LOW L
HID L
15 A Headlight low beam (LH)
24 H/L LOW R 15 A Headlight low beam (RH)
25 ENGINE3 15 A Engine control system
26 ENGINE2 15 A Engine control system
27 ENGINE1 15 A Engine control system
28 AT 15 A Transaxle control systemí, Ignition switch
29 H/CLEAN 20 A ―
30 A/C 7.5 A Air conditioner
31 AT PUMP 15 A Transaxle control systemí
32 STOP 10 A Brake lights
33 R.WIPER 15 A Rear window wiper
34 H/L HI 20 A Headlight high beam
35 HID R 15 A ―
36 FOG 15 A Fog lightsí
37 7.5 A Engine control system
38 AUDIO2 7.5 A Audio system
39 GLOW SIG 5 A ―
40 METER2 7.5 A ―
41 METER1 10 A Instrument cluster
42 SRS1 7.5 A Air bag
43 BOSE 25 A Bose® Sound System-equipped modelí
44 AUDIO1 15 A Audio system
45 ABS/DSC S 30 A ABS, Dynamic stability control system
46 FUEL PUMP 15 A Fuel system
47 FUELWARM 25 A ―
48 TAIL 15 A Taillights, License plate lights
49 FUEL PUMP2 25 A ―
50 HAZARD 25 A
Hazard warning flashers, Turn signal lights, Parking lights
(Front side-marker lights)
51 DRL 15 A Daytime running lightsí
52 R.OUTLET2 15 A Accessory sockets
53 HORN 15 A Horn
54 ROOM 15 A Overhead light
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-59íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page491
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (492,1)
Fuse block (Left side)
DESCRIPTION
FUSE
RATING
PROTECTED COMPONENT
1 P.SEAT D 30 A Power seatí
2 P.WINDOW3 30 A ―
3 R.OUTLET3 15 A Accessory sockets
4 P.WINDOW2 25 A Power windows
5 SRS2/ESCL 15 A ―
6 D.LOCK 25 A Power door locks
7 SEAT WARM 20 A Seat warmerí
8 SUNROOF 10 A Moonroofí
9 F.OUTLET 15 A Accessory sockets
10 MIRROR 7.5 A Power control mirror
11 R.OUTLET1 15 A ―
12 ― ― ―
13 ― ― ―
14 ― ― ―
15 ― ― ―
16 ― ― ―
17 M.DEF 7.5 A Mirror defoggerí
18 ― ― ―
19 ― ― ―
6-60
Maintenance and Care
íSome models.
Owner Maintenance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page492
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (493,1)
DESCRIPTION
FUSE
RATING
PROTECTED COMPONENT
20 AT IND 7.5 A AT shift indicatorí
21 P.SEAT P 30 A Power seatí
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6-61íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page493
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (494,1)
Exterior Care
The paintwork on your Mazda represents
the latest technical developments in
composition and methods of application.
Environmental hazards, however, can
harm the paint's protective properties, if
proper care is not taken.
Here are some examples of possible
damage, with tips on how to prevent
them.
Etching Caused by Acid Rain or
Industrial Fallout
Occurrence
Industrial pollutants and vehicle emissions
drift into the air and mix with rain or dew
to form acids. These acids can settle on a
vehicle's finish. As the water evaporates,
the acid becomes concentrated and can
damage the finish.
And the longer the acid remains on the
surface, the greater the chance is for
damage.
Prevention
It is necessary to wash and wax your
vehicle to preserve its finish according to
the instructions in this section. These
steps should be taken immediately after
you suspect that acid rain has settled on
your vehicle's finish.
Damage Caused by Bird Dropping,
Insects, or Tree Sap
Occurrence
Bird droppings contain acids. If these are
not removed they can eat away the clear
and color base coat of the vehicle's
paintwork.
When insects stick to the paint surface
and decompose, corrosive compounds
form. These can erode the clear and color
base coat of the vehicle's paintwork if
they are not removed.
Tree sap will harden and adhere
permanently to the paint finish. If you
scratch the sap off while it is hard, some
vehicle paint could come off with it.
Prevention
It is necessary to have your Mazda
washed and waxed to preserve its finish
according to the instructions in this
section. This should be done as soon as
possible.
Bird droppings can be removed with a
soft sponge and water. If you are traveling
and these are not available, a moistened
tissue may also take care of the problem.
The cleaned area should be waxed
according to the instructions in this
section.
Insects and tree sap are best removed with
a soft sponge and water or a commercially
available chemical cleaner.
Another method is to cover the affected
area with dampened newspaper for one to
two hours. After removing the newspaper,
rinse off the loosened debris with water.
Water Marks
Occurrence
Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water can
contain harmful minerals such as salt and
lime. If moisture containing these
minerals settles on the vehicle and
evaporates, the minerals will concentrate
and harden to form white rings. The rings
can damage your vehicle's finish.
6-62
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page494
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (495,1)
Prevention
It is necessary to wash and wax your
vehicle to preserve its finish according to
the instructions in this section. These
steps should be taken immediately after
you find water marks on your vehicle's
finish.
Paint Chipping
Occurrence
Paint chipping occurs when gravel thrown
in the air by another vehicle's tires hits
your vehicle.
How to avoid paint chipping
Keeping a safe distance between you and
the vehicle ahead reduces the chances of
having your paint chipped by flying
gravel.
NOTE
l The paint chipping zone varies with the
speed of the vehicle. For example, when
traveling at 90 km/h (56 mph), the paint
chipping zone is 50 m (164 ft).
l In low temperatures a vehicle's finish
hardens. This increases the chance of paint
chipping.
l Chipped paint can lead to rust forming on
your Mazda. Before this happens, repair the
damage by using Mazda touch-up paint
according to the instructions in this section.
Failure to repair the affected area could
lead to serious rusting and expensive
repairs.
Follow all label and container directions
when using a chemical cleaner or polish.
Read all warnings and cautions.
qMaintaining the Finish
Washing
CAUTION
Ø When the wiper lever is in the
AUTO position and the ignition is
switched ON, the wipers may
move automatically in the
following cases:
Ø If the windshield above the rain
sensor is touched or wiped with
a cloth.
Ø If the windshield is struck with
a hand or other object from
either outside or inside the
vehicle.
Keep hands and scrapers clear of
the windshield when the wiper
lever is in the AUTO position and
the ignition is switched ON as
fingers could be pinched or the
wipers and wiper blades damaged
when the wipers activate
automatically.
If you are going to clean the
windshield, be sure the wipers are
turned off completely―this is
particularly important when
clearing ice and snow―when it is
most likely that the engine is left
running.
Ø Do not spray water in the engine
compartment. Otherwise, it could
result in engine-starting problems
or damage to electrical parts.
Ø When washing and waxing the
vehicle, be careful not to apply
excessive force to any single area
of the vehicle roof or the antenna.
Otherwise, you could dent the
vehicle or damage the antenna.
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
6-63
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page495
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (496,1)
To help protect the finish from rust and
deterioration, wash your Mazda
thoroughly and frequently, at least once a
month, with lukewarm or cold water.
If the vehicle is washed improperly, the
paint surface could be scratched. Here are
some examples of how scratching could
occur.
Scratches occur on the paint surface
when:
l The vehicle is washed without first
rinsing off dirt and other foreign
matter.
l The vehicle is washed with a rough,
dry, or dirty cloth.
l The vehicle is washed at a car wash
that uses brushes that are dirty or too
stiff.
l Cleansers or wax containing abrasives
are used.
NOTE
l Mazda is not responsible for scratches
caused by automatic car washes or
improper washing.
l Scratches are more noticeable on vehicles
with darker paint finishes.
To minimize scratches on the vehicle's
paint finish:
l Rinse off any dirt or other foreign
matter using lukewarm or cold water
before washing.
l Use plenty of lukewarm or cold water
and a soft cloth when washing the
vehicle. Do not use a nylon cloth.
l Rub gently when washing or drying the
vehicle.
l Take your vehicle only to a car wash
that keeps its brushes well maintained.
l Do not use abrasive cleansers or wax
that contain abrasives.
CAUTION
Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may damage
the protective coating; also, cleaners
and detergents may discolor or
deteriorate the paint.
Pay special attention to removing salt,
dirt, mud, and other foreign material from
the underside of the fenders, and make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial fallout, and similar deposits can
damage the finish if not removed
immediately. When prompt washing with
plain water is ineffective, use a mild soap
made for use on vehicles.
Thoroughly rinse off all soap with
lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow
soap to dry on the finish.
After washing the vehicle, dry it with a
clean chamois to prevent water spots from
forming.
6-64
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page496
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (497,1)
WARNING
Dry off brakes that have become wet
by driving slowly, releasing the
accelerator pedal and lightly applying
the brakes several times until the brake
performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is
dangerous. Increased stopping
distance or the vehicle pulling to one
side when braking could result in a
serious accident. Light braking will
indicate whether the brakes have
been affected.
When using an automatic car wash
l Retract the door mirrors.
l The automatic car wash brushes could
reduce the paint lustre or hasten paint
deterioration.
When using a high water pressure car
wash
High water temperature and high water
pressure car washers are available
depending on the type of car wash
machine. If the car washer nozzle is put
too close to the vehicle, the force of the
spray could damage or deform the
molding, affect the sealability of parts,
and allow water to penetrate the interior.
Keep a sufficient space (30 cm (12 in) or
more) between the nozzle and the vehicle.
In addition, do not spend too much time
spraying the same area of the vehicle, and
be very careful when spraying between
gaps in doors and around windows.
Waxing
Your vehicle needs to be waxed when
water no longer beads on the finish.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing it. In addition to the vehicle body,
wax the metal trim to maintain its luster.
1. Use wax which contains no abrasives.
Waxes containing abrasive will remove
paint and could damage bright metal
parts.
2. Use a good grade of natural wax for
metallic, mica, and solid colors.
3. When waxing, coat evenly with the
sponge supplied or a soft cloth.
4. Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth.
NOTE
A spot remover to remove oil, tar, and similar
materials will usually also take off the wax.
Rewax these areas even if the rest of the
vehicle does not need it.
qRepairing Damage to the Finish
Deep scratches or chips on the finish
should be repaired promptly. Exposed
metal quickly rusts and can lead to major
repairs.
CAUTION
If your Mazda is damaged and needs
metal parts repaired or replaced,
make sure the body shop applies
anti-corrosion materials to all parts,
both repaired and new. This will
prevent them from rusting.
qBright-Metal Maintenance
l Use tar remover to remove road tar and
insects. Never do this with a knife or
similar tool.
l To prevent corrosion on bright-metal
surfaces, apply wax or chrome
preservative and rub it to a high luster.
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
6-65
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page497
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (498,1)
l During cold weather or in coastal areas,
cover bright-metal parts with a coating
of wax or preservative heavier than
usual. It would also help to coat them
with noncorrosive petroleum jelly or
some other protective compound.
CAUTION
Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may result in
damage to the protective coating and
cause discoloration or paint
deterioration.
qUnderbody Maintenance
Road chemicals and salt used for ice and
snow removal and solvents used for dust
control may collect on the underbody. If
not removed, they will speed up rusting
and deterioration of such underbody parts
as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust
system, even though these parts may be
coated with anti-corrosive material.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and
wheel housings with lukewarm or cold
water at the end of each winter. Try also
to do this every month.
Pay special attention to these areas
because they easily hide mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet
down the road grime without removing
it.
The lower edges of doors, rocker panels,
and frame members have drain holes that
should not be clogged. Water trapped
there will cause rusting.
WARNING
Dry off brakes that have become wet
by driving slowly, releasing the
accelerator pedal and lightly applying
the brakes several times until the brake
performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is
dangerous. Increased stopping
distance or the vehicle pulling to one
side when braking could result in a
serious accident. Light braking will
indicate whether the brakes have
been affected.
qAluminumWheel Maintenanceí
A protective coating is provided over the
aluminum wheels. Special care is needed
to protect this coating.
CAUTION
Do not use any detergent other than
mild detergent. Before using any
detergent, verify the ingredients.
Otherwise, the product could discolor
or stain the aluminum wheels.
6-66
Maintenance and Care
íSome models.
Appearance Care
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page498
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (499,1)
NOTE
l Do not use a wire brush or any abrasive
cleaner, polishing compound, or solvent on
aluminum wheels. They may damage the
coating.
l Always use a sponge or soft cloth to clean
the wheels.
Rinse the wheels thoroughly with lukewarm
or cold water. Also, be sure to clean the
wheels after driving on dusty or salted
roads to help prevent corrosion.
l Avoid washing your vehicle in an automatic
car wash that uses high-speed or hard
brushes.
l (19-inch wheel vehicle)
If your aluminum wheels lose luster, apply
wax which contains no polishing powder.
qPlastic Part Maintenance
l When cleaning the plastic lenses of the
lights, do not use gasoline, kerosene,
rectified spirit, paint, thinner, highly
acidic detergents, or strongly alkaline
detergents. Otherwise, these chemical
agents can discolor or damage the
surfaces resulting in a significant loss
in functionality. If plastic parts become
inadvertently exposed to any of these
chemical agents, flush with water
immediately.
l If plastic parts such as the bumpers
become inadvertently exposed to
chemical agents or fluids such as
gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery
fluid, it could cause discoloration,
staining, or paint peeling. Wipe off any
such chemical agents or fluids using a
soft cloth immediately.
l High water temperature and high water
pressure car washers are available
depending on the type of high pressure
car washer device. If the car washer
nozzle is put too close to the vehicle or
aimed at one area for an extended
period of time, it could deform plastic
parts or damage the paint.
l Do not use wax containing compounds
(polish). Otherwise, it could result in
paint damage.
l In addition, do not use an electrical or
air tool to apply wax. Otherwise, the
frictional heat generated could result in
deformation of plastic parts or paint
damage.
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
6-67
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page499
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (500,1)
Interior Care
WARNING
Do not spray water in the cabin:
Splashing water on electrical parts
such as the audio unit and switches
is dangerous as it could cause a
malfunction or a fire.
qDashboard Precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume
and cosmetic oils from contacting the
dashboard. They will damage and discolor
the dashboard. If these solutions get on
the dashboard, wipe them off
immediately.
CAUTION
Do not use glazing agents.
Glazing agents contain ingredients
which may cause discoloration,
wrinkling, cracks and peeling.
Instrument panel top (soft pad)
l Extremely soft material is used for the
soft pad surface. When cleaning, it is
recommended that you use a clean
towel dampened in a mild detergent to
remove soiling.
l If the soft pad surface is rubbed
harshly, it could result in the surface
being damaged leaving white scratch
marks.
qCleaning the Upholstery and
Interior Trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl with a leather-and-vinyl
cleaner.
Leatherí
Remove dust and sand first using a
vacuum cleaner or other means, then wipe
dirt off using a soft cloth with a leather
cleaner or a soft cloth soaked in mild
soap.
Wipe off the remaining cleaner or soap
using a cloth soaked in clean water and
wrung out well.
Remove moisture with a dry, soft cloth
and allow the leather to further dry in a
well-ventilated, shaded area. If the leather
gets wet such as from rain, also remove
moisture and dry it as soon as possible.
6-68
Maintenance and Care
íSome models.
Appearance Care
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page500
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (501,1)
NOTE
l Because genuine leather is a natural
material, its surface is not uniform and it
may have natural scars, scratches, and
wrinkles.
l To maintain the quality for as long as
possible, periodical maintenance, about
twice a year, is recommended.
l Sand and dust on the seat surface may
damage the overcoat of the genuine leather
surfaces and accelerate wear.
l Greasy soiling on genuine leather may
cause molding and stains.
l Rubbing hard with a stiff brush or cloth
may cause damage.
l Do not wipe the leather using alcohol,
chlorine bleach, or organic solvents such as
thinner, benzene, or gasoline. Otherwise, it
may cause discoloration or stains.
l If the seats get wet, promptly remove
moisture with a dry cloth. Remaining
moisture on the surface may cause
deterioration such as hardening and
shrinkage.
l Exposure to direct sunlight for long periods
may cause deterioration and shrinkage.
When parking the car under direct sunlight
for long periods, shade the interior using
sunshades.
l Do not leave vinyl products on the seats for
long periods as they may affect the leather
quality and coloring. If the cabin
temperature becomes hot, the vinyl may
deteriorate and adhere to the genuine
leather.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean it with a mild soap solution good
for upholstery and carpets. Remove fresh
spots immediately with a fabric spot
cleaner.
To keep the fabric looking clean and
fresh, take care of it. Otherwise its color
will be affected, it can be stained easily,
and its fire-resistance may be reduced.
CAUTION
Use only recommended cleaners and
procedures. Others may affect
appearance and fire-resistance.
Panel
When the interior panels need to be
cleaned, use soft material such as a soft
cloth soaked in clean water and wrung out
well and lightly wipe off dirt from the
surface. If a panel requires further
cleaning, use the following procedure.
1. Wipe dirt off using a soft cloth soaked
in mild detergent (about 5% solution).
2. Wipe off any remaining detergent
using a cloth soaked in clean water and
wrung out well.
NOTE
l Do not wipe leather parts using alcohol,
chlorine bleach, or organic solvents such as
thinner, benzene, or gasoline. Otherwise, it
may cause discoloration or stains.
l Scratches or nicks on the panels and
metallic trim resulting from the use of a
hard brush or cloth may not be repairable.
l Be particularly careful when cleaning high
lustre panels and metallic trim as they can
be easily scratched.
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
6-69
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page501
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (502,1)
qCleaning the Lap/Shoulder Belt
Webbing
Clean the webbing with a mild soap
solution recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Follow instructions. Do not
bleach or dye the webbing; this may
weaken it.
After cleaning the belts, thoroughly dry
the belt webbing and make sure there is
no remaining moisture before retracting
them.
WARNING
Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer
replace damaged seat belts
immediately:
Using damaged seat belts is
dangerous. In a collision, damaged
belts cannot provide adequate
protection.
qCleaning the Window Interiors
If the windows become covered with an
oily, greasy, or waxy film, clean them
with glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the container.
CAUTION
Ø Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the window glass. It could
damage the thermal filaments
and the antenna lines.
Ø When washing the inside of the
window glass, use a soft cloth
dampened in lukewarm water,
gently wiping the thermal
filaments and the antenna lines.
Use of glass cleaning products
could damage the thermal
filaments and the antenna lines.
qCleaning the Floor Mats
Rubber floor mats should be cleaned with
mild soap and water only.
WARNING
Do not use rubber cleaners, such as tire
cleaner or tire shine, when cleaning
rubber floor mats:
Cleaning the rubber floor mats with
rubber cleaning products makes the
floor mats slippery.
This may cause an accident when
depressing the accelerator, brake, or
clutch (Manual transaxle) pedal or
when getting in or out of the vehicle.
After removing the floor mats for
cleaning, always reinstall them
securely.Refer to Floor Mat on page 3-43.
6-70
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page502
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (503,1)
7 If Trouble Arises
Helpful information on what to do if a problem arises with the vehicle.
Parking in an Emergency ............................................................. 7-2
Parking in an Emergency .......................................................... 7-2
Flat Tire ......................................................................................... 7-3
Spare Tire and Tool Storage ...................................................... 7-3
Changing a Flat Tire ................................................................. 7-7
Battery Runs Out ........................................................................ 7-14
Jump-Starting .......................................................................... 7-14
Emergency Starting .................................................................... 7-17
Starting a Flooded Engine ....................................................... 7-17
Push-Starting ........................................................................... 7-17
Overheating ................................................................................. 7-18
Overheating ............................................................................. 7-18
Emergency Towing ..................................................................... 7-20
Towing Description ................................................................. 7-20
Tiedown Hooksí .................................................................... 7-21
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds ..................... 7-23
When Warning/Indicator Lights Illuminate/Flash ................... 7-23
Warning Sound is Activated ................................................... 7-34
When Liftgate Cannot be Opened ............................................. 7-39
When Liftgate Cannot be Opened ........................................... 7-39
7-1íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page503
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (504,1)
Parking in an Emergency
The hazard warning lights should always
be used when you stop on or near a
roadway in an emergency.
The hazard warning lights warn other
drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard
and that they must take extreme caution
when near it.
Depress the hazard warning flasher switch
and all the turn signals will flash. The
hazard warning indicator lights in the
instrument cluster flash simultaneously.
NOTE
l The turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning lights are on.
l Check local regulations about the use of
hazard warning lights while the vehicle is
being towed to verify that it is not in
violation of the law.
7-2
If Trouble Arises
Parking in an Emergency
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page504
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (505,1)
Spare Tire and Tool Storage
Spare tire and tools are stored in the locations illustrated in the diagram.
Except Mexico
Spare tire
Spare tire hold-down bolt
Tire hold-down bolt
JackLug wrench
Jack lever
Tiedown eyelet (Short type)
Tiedown eyelet (Long type)
Some models.
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
7-3
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page505
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (506,1)
Mexico
Spare tire
Spare tire hold-down bolt
Jack
Lug wrench
Jack lever
Tiedown eyelet (Short type) Tiedown eyelet (Long type)
7-4
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page506
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (507,1)
qJack
To remove the jack
1. Open the trunk board.
2. Secure the trunk board by attaching the
hook to the head restraint.
Without luggage compartment cover
With luggage compartment cover
3. Remove the jack.
To secure the jack
Perform the removal procedure in reverse.
Maintenance
l Always keep the jack clean.
l Make sure the moving parts are kept
free from dirt or rust.
l Make sure the screw thread is
adequately lubricated.
qSpare Tire
Your Mazda has a temporary spare tire.
The temporary spare tire is lighter and
smaller than a conventional tire, and is
designed only for emergency use and
should be used only for VERY short
periods. Temporary spare tires should
NEVER be used for long drives or
extended periods.
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
7-5
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page507
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (508,1)
WARNING
Do not install the temporary spare tire
on the front wheels (driving wheels):
Driving with the temporary spare tire
on one of the front driving wheels is
dangerous. Handling will be affected.
You could lose control of the vehicle,
especially on ice or snow bound
roads, and have an accident. Move a
regular tire to the front wheel and
install the temporary spare tire to the
rear.
CAUTION
Ø When using the temporary spare
tire, driving stability may decrease
compared to when using only the
conventional tire. Drive carefully.
Ø To avoid damage to the temporary
spare tire or to the vehicle, observe
the following precautions:
Ø Do not exceed 80 km/h (50
mph).
Ø Avoid driving over obstacles.
Also, do not drive through an
automatic car wash. This tire's
diameter is smaller than a
conventional tire, so the ground
clearance is reduced.
Ø Do not use a tire chain on this
tire because it will not fit
properly.
Ø Do not use your temporary
spare tire on any other vehicle,
it has been designed only for
your Mazda.
Ø Use only one temporary spare
tire on your vehicle at the same
time.
To remove the spare tire
1. Open the trunk board.
2. Secure the trunk board by attaching the
hook to the head restraint.
Without luggage compartment cover
With luggage compartment cover
7-6
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page508
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (509,1)
3. Turn the spare tire hold-down bolt
counterclockwise.
Spare tire hold-down bolt
To secure the spare tire
Store the spare tire in the reverse order of
removal. After storing, verify that the
spare tire is stored securely.
Changing a Flat Tire
NOTE
If the following occurs while driving, it could
indicate a flat tire.
l Steering becomes difficult.
l The vehicle begins to vibrate excessively.
l The vehicle pulls in one direction.
If you have a flat tire, drive slowly to a
level spot that is well off the road and out
of the way of traffic to change the tire.
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder of a
busy road is dangerous.
WARNING
Be sure to follow the directions for
changing a tire:
Changing a tire is dangerous if not
done properly. The vehicle can slip off
the jack and seriously injure
someone.
No person should place any portion
of their body under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
Never allow anyone inside a vehicle
supported by a jack:
Allowing someone to remain in a
vehicle supported by a jack is
dangerous. The occupant could cause
the vehicle to fall resulting in serious
injury.
NOTE
Make sure the jack is well lubricated before
using it.
1. Park on a level surface off the right-ofway and firmly set the parking brake.
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic
transaxle in Park (P), a manual
transaxle in Reverse (R) or 1, and turn
off the engine.
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
7-7
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page509
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (510,1)
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle
and away from the vehicle and traffic.
5. Remove the jack, tool, and spare tire
(page 7-3).
6. Block the wheel diagonally opposite
the flat tire. When blocking a wheel,
place a tire block both in front and
behind the tire.
NOTE
When blocking a tire, use rocks or wood blocks
of sufficient size if possible to hold the tire in
place.
qRemoving a Flat Tire
1. If your vehicle is equipped with steel
wheels, pry off the center cap with the
beveled end of the jack lever.
CAUTION
Use the jack lever when removing the
center cap. Using your hands to
remove it may cause an injury. In
addition, using a tool other than the
jack lever may cause damage to the
wheel or the center cap.
2. Loosen the lug nuts by turning them
counterclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any lug nuts until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
3. Place the jack on the ground.
7-8
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page510
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (511,1)
4. Turn the jack screw in the direction
shown in the figure and adjust the jack
head so that it is close to the jack-up
position.
Jack head
5. Place the jack under the jack-up
position closest to the tire being
changed with the jack head squarely
under the jack-up point.
Jacking position
6. Continue raising the jack head
gradually by rotating the screw with
your hand until the jack head is
inserted into the jack-up position.
Tire blocks
Jacking position
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
7-9
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page511
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (512,1)
WARNING
Use only the front and rear jacking
positions recommended in this manual:
Attempting to jack the vehicle in
positions other than those
recommended in this manual is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off
the jack and seriously injure or even
kill someone. Use only the front and
rear jacking positions recommended
in this manual.
Do not jack up the vehicle in a position
other than the designated jack-up
position or place any objects on or
under the jack:
Jacking up the vehicle in a position
other than the designated jack-up
position or placing objects on or
under the jack is dangerous as it
could deform the vehicle body or the
vehicle could fall off the jack
resulting in an accident.
Use only the jack provided with your
Mazda:
Using a jack that is not designed for
your Mazda is dangerous. The vehicle
could slip off the jack and seriously
injure someone.
Never place objects under the jack:
Jacking the vehicle with an object
under the jack is dangerous. The jack
could slip and someone could be
seriously injured by the jack or the
falling vehicle.
7. Insert the jack lever and attach the lug
wrench to tire jack.
8. Turn the jack handle clockwise and
raise the vehicle high enough so that
the spare tire can be installed. Before
removing the lug nuts, make sure your
Mazda is firmly in position and that it
cannot slip or move.
7-10
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page512
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (513,1)
WARNING
Do not jack up the vehicle higher than
is necessary:
Jacking up the vehicle higher than is
necessary is dangerous as it could
destabilize the vehicle resulting in an
accident.
Do not start the engine or shake the
vehicle while it is jacked up:
Starting the engine or shaking the
vehicle while it is jacked up is
dangerous as it could cause the
vehicle to fall off the jack resulting in
an accident.
Never go under the vehicle while it is
jacked up:
Going under the vehicle while it is
jacked up is dangerous as it could
result in death or serious injury if the
vehicle were to fall off the jack.
9. Remove the lug nuts by turning them
counterclockwise; then remove the
wheel and center cap.
qLocking Lug Nuts
If your vehicle has Mazda optional
antitheft wheel lug nuts, one on each
wheel will lock the tires and you must use
a special key to unlock them. This key
will attach to the lug wrench. Register
them with the lock manufacturer by filling
out the card provided in the glove
compartment and mailing it in the
accompanying envelope. If you lose this
key, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer
or use the lock manufacturer's order form,
which is with the registration card.
Accessory wheel locks cannot be used on
steel wheels. This includes situations
when the spare tire is installed. If the
spare tire is installed, one of the original
lug nuts (which should still be in the
vehicle) must be installed in place of the
wheel lock.
Special keyAntitheft lug nut
To remove an antitheft lug nut
1. Obtain the special key for the antitheft
lug nut.
2. Place the special key on top of the
antitheft lug nut, and be sure to hold
the key square to it. If you hold the key
at an angle, you may damage both key
and nut. Do not use a power impact
wrench.
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
7-11
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page513
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (514,1)
3. Place the lug wrench on top of the key
and apply pressure. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise.
To install the antitheft lug nut
1. Place the special key on top of the nut,
and be sure to hold the key square to it.
If you hold the key at an angle, you
may damage both key and nut. Do not
use a power impact wrench.
2. Place the lug wrench on top of the
special key, apply pressure, and turn it
clockwise.
Nut tightening torque
N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf)
108―147
(12―14, 80―108)
qMounting the Spare Tire
1. Remove dirt and grime from the
mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub, including the hub bolts, with a
cloth.
WARNING
Make sure the mounting surfaces of
the wheel, hub and lug nuts are clean
before changing or replacing tires:
When changing or replacing a tire,
not removing dirt and grime from the
mounting surfaces of the wheel, hub
and hub bolts is dangerous. The lug
nuts could loosen while driving and
cause the tire to come off, resulting in
an accident.
2. Mount the spare tire.
3. Install the lug nuts with the beveled
edge inward; tighten them by hand.
WARNING
Do not apply oil or grease to lug nuts
and bolts and do not tighten the lug
nuts beyond the recommended
tightening torque:
Applying oil or grease to lug nuts and
bolts is dangerous. The lug nuts
could loosen while driving and cause
the tire to come off, resulting in an
accident. In addition, lug nuts and
bolts could be damaged if tightened
more than necessary.
7-12
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page514
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (515,1)
4. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise
and lower the vehicle. Use the lug
wrench to tighten the nuts in the order
shown.
If you are unsure of how tight the nuts
should be, have them inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Nut tightening torque
N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf)
108―147
(12―14, 80―108)
WARNING
Always securely and correctly tighten
the lug nuts:
Improperly or loosely tightened lug
nuts are dangerous. The wheel could
wobble or come off. This could result
in loss of vehicle control and cause a
serious accident.
Be sure to reinstall the same nuts you
removed or replace them with metric
nuts of the same configuration:
Because the wheel studs and lug nuts
on your Mazda have metric threads,
using a non-metric nut is dangerous.
On a metric stud, it would not secure
the wheel and would damage the
stud, which could cause the wheel to
slip off and cause an accident.
5. (Aluminum wheel equipped vehicle)
Remove the center cap by tapping it
with the lug wrench.
6. Store the damaged tire, using the tire
hold-down bolt to hold it in place.
Tire hold-down bolt
7. Remove the tire blocks and store the
tools and jack.
8. Check the inflation pressure. Refer to
Tires on page 9-8.
9. Have the flat tire repaired or replaced
as soon as possible.
WARNING
Do not drive with any tires that have
incorrect air pressure:
Driving on tires with incorrect air
pressure is dangerous. Tires with
incorrect pressure could affect
handling and result in an accident.
When you check the regular tires' air
pressure, check the spare tire, too.
NOTE
To prevent the jack and tool from rattling, store
them properly.
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
7-13
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page515
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (516,1)
Jump-Starting
Jump-starting is dangerous if done incorrectly. So follow the procedure carefully. If you
feel unsure about jump-starting, we strongly recommend that you have a competent service
technician do the work.
WARNING
Follow These Precautions Carefully:
To ensure safe and correct handling of the battery, read the following precautions
carefully before using the battery or inspecting it.
Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact any other metal object that
could cause sparks:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. When working near a
battery, do not allow metal tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative ( )
terminal of the battery.
Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery
cells:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.
Do not jump-start a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level:
Jump-starting a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level is dangerous. It may
rupture or explode, causing serious injury.
Connect the negative cable to a good ground point away from the battery:
Connecting the end of the second jumper cable to the negative ( ) terminal of the
discharged battery is dangerous.
A spark could cause the gas around the battery to explode and injure someone.
Route the jumper cables away from parts that will be moving:
Connecting a jumper cable near or to moving parts (cooling fans, belts) is dangerous.
The cable could get caught when the engine starts and cause serious injury.
7-14
If Trouble Arises
Battery Runs Out
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page516
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (517,1)
CAUTION
Use only a 12 V booster system. You can damage a 12 V starter, ignition system, and
other electrical parts beyond repair with a 24 V power supply (two 12 V batteries in
series or a 24 V motor generator set).
Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.
Jumper cables
Booster battery
Discharged battery
1. Remove the battery cover.
2. Make sure the booster battery is 12 V
and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
3. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow both vehicles to
touch. Turn off the engine of the
vehicle with the booster battery and all
unnecessary electrical loads in both
vehicles.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence as in the illustration.
l Connect one end of a cable to the
positive terminal on the discharged
battery (1).
l Attach the other end to the positive
terminal on the booster battery (2).
l Connect one end of the other cable
to the negative terminal of the
booster battery (3).
l Connect the other end to the ground
point indicated in the illustration
away from the discharged battery
(4).
If Trouble Arises
Battery Runs Out
7-15
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page517
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (518,1)
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and run it a few minutes. Then start the
engine of the other vehicle.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect the
cables in the reverse order described in
the illustration.
7. If the battery cover has been removed,
install it in the reverse order of
removal.
NOTE
Verify that the covers are securely installed.
7-16
If Trouble Arises
Battery Runs Out
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page518
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (519,1)
Starting a Flooded Engine
If the engine fails to start, it may be
flooded (excessive fuel in the engine).
Follow this procedure:
1. If the engine does not start within five
seconds on the first try, wait ten
seconds and try again.
2. Make sure the parking brake is on.
3. Depress the accelerator all the way and
hold it there.
4. Depress the clutch pedal (Manual
transaxle) or the brake pedal
(Automatic transaxle), then press the
push button start. If the engine starts,
release the accelerator immediately
because the engine will suddenly rev
up.
5. If the engine fails to start, crank it
without depressing the accelerator.
If the engine still does not start using the
above procedure, have your vehicle
inspected by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Push-Starting
Do not push-start your Mazda.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it:
Towing a vehicle to start it is
dangerous. The vehicle being towed
could surge forward when its engine
starts, causing the two vehicles to
collide. The occupants could be
injured.
CAUTION
Do not push-start a vehicle that has
a manual transaxle. It can damage
the emission control system.
NOTE
You cannot start a vehicle with an automatic
transaxle by pushing it.
If Trouble Arises
Emergency Starting
7-17
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page519
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (520,1)
Overheating
If the High engine coolant temperature
warning light illuminates, the vehicle
loses power, or you hear a loud knocking
or pinging noise, the engine is probably
too hot.
WARNING
Switch the ignition to off and
make sure the fan is not running before
attempting to work near the cooling
fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it
is running is dangerous. The fan
could continue running indefinitely
even if the engine has stopped and
the engine compartment temperature
is high. You could be hit by the fan
and seriously injured.
Do not remove either
cooling system cap when the engine
and radiator are hot:
When the engine and radiator are
hot, scalding coolant and steam may
shoot out under pressure and cause
serious injury.
Open the hood ONLY after steam is no
longer escaping from the engine:
Steam from an overheated engine is
dangerous. The escaping steam could
seriously burn you.
If the High engine coolant temperature
warning light illuminates:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
park off the right-of-way.
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic
transaxle in park (P), a manual
transaxle in neutral.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Turn off the air conditioner.
5. Check whether coolant or steam is
escaping from the engine compartment.
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment:
Do not go near the front of the vehicle.
Stop the engine.
Wait until the steam dissipates, then
open the hood and start the engine.
If neither coolant nor steam is
escaping:
Open the hood and idle the engine until
it cools.
CAUTION
If the cooling fan does not operate
while the engine is running, the
engine temperature will increase.
Stop the engine and call an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
6. Make sure the cooling fan is operating,
then turn off the engine after the
temperature has decreased.
7. When cool, check the coolant level.
If it is low, look for coolant leaks from
the radiator and hoses.
7-18
If Trouble Arises
Overheating
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page520
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (521,1)
If you find a leak or other damage, or if
coolant is still leaking:
Stop the engine and call an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Cooling system cap
Coolant reservoir
Cooling fan
If you find no problems, the engine is
cool, and no leaks are obvious:
Carefully add coolant as required (page
6-29).
CAUTION
If the engine continues to overheat or
frequently overheats, have the
cooling system inspected. The engine
could be seriously damaged unless
repairs are made. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If Trouble Arises
Overheating
7-19
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page521
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (522,1)
Towing Description
We recommend that towing be done only
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing are necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
Particularly when towing a AWD vehicle,
where all the wheels are connected to the
drive train, proper transporting of the
vehicle is absolutely essential to avoid
damaging the drive system. Government
and local laws must be followed.
Wheel dollies
A towed 2WD vehicle should have its
drive wheels (front wheels) off the
ground. If excessive damage or other
conditions prevent this, use wheel dollies.
When towing a 2WD vehicle with the rear
wheels on the ground, release the parking
brake.
A towed AWD vehicle must have all its
wheels off the ground.
WARNING
Always tow a AWD vehicle with all four
wheels off the ground:
Towing a AWD vehicle with either the
front or rear wheels on the ground is
dangerous as the drive train could be
damaged, or the vehicle could trail
away from the tow truck and cause
an accident. If the drive train has
been damaged, transport the vehicle
on a flat bed truck.
7-20
If Trouble Arises
Emergency Towing
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page522
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (523,1)
CAUTION
Ø Do not tow the vehicle pointed
backward with driving wheels on
the ground. This may cause
internal damage to the transaxle.
Ø Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. This could damage
your vehicle. Use wheel-lift or
flatbed equipment.
Tiedown Hooksí
CAUTION
Do not use the front and rear
tiedown eyelets for towing the
vehicle.
They have been designed only for
securing the vehicle to a transport
vessel during shipping.
Using the eyelets for any other
purpose could result in the vehicle
being damaged.
qTiedown Hooks
1. Remove the tiedown eyelet and the lug
wrench from the luggage compartment
(page 7-3).
2. Wrap a flathead screwdriver or similar
tool with a soft cloth to prevent
damage to a painted bumper, and open
the cap located on the front or rear
bumper.
Front
If Trouble Arises
Emergency Towing
7-21íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page523
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (524,1)
Rear
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force as it may
damage the cap or scratch the
painted bumper surface.
NOTE
Remove the cap completely and store it so as
not to lose it.
3. Securely install the tiedown eyelet
using the lug wrench.
Front
Towing eyelet
(Long type)
Lug wrench
Rear
Tiedown eyelet
(Short type)
Lug wrench
4. Hook the tying rope to the tiedown
eyelet.
CAUTION
If the tiedown eyelet is not securely
tightened, it may loosen or disengage
from the bumper when tying the
vehicle. Make sure that the tiedown
eyelet is securely tightened to the
bumper.
7-22
If Trouble Arises
Emergency Towing
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page524
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (525,1)
When Warning/Indicator
Lights Illuminate/Flash
If any warning light turns on/flashes, take
appropriate action for each light. There is
no problem if the light turns off, however
if the light does not turn off or turns on/
flashes again, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
(Vehicles with type B audio)
The warning contents can be verified on
the audio.
1. Select the icon on the home screen
to display the applications screen.
2. Select the “Warning Guidance”.
qIf the master warning light
illuminates
Type A
Displays when notification of the system
malfunctions is required.
Check the message indicated in the
display and consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
(Display example)
Displays as follows:
Master
warning
light
Indication in display and master
warning light in instrument cluster are
illuminated at same time
This indicates a malfunction with the
vehicle system. Check the message
indicated in the display and consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer. For details,
refer to the explanations for the warning/
indicator lights, in the warning/indicator
lights section, which match the symbol in
the upper part of the display. If a message
is not indicated in the display, operate the
INFO switch to display the “Warning”
screen.
Type B
The light illuminates continuously if any
one of the following occurs. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l There is a malfunction in the battery
management system.
l There is a malfunction in the brake
switch.
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
7-23
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page525
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (526,1)
qIf the brake system warning light
illuminates
When the light turns on
If the brake system warning light remains
turned on even though the electric parking
brake is released, the brake fluid may be
low or there could be a problem with the
brake system. Park the vehicle in a safe
place immediately and contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
When the light is flashing
The light flashes if the electric parking
brake has a malfunction.
If the light remains flashing even if the
electric parking brake switch is operated,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as
soon as possible.
WARNING
Do not drive with the brake system
warning light illuminated. Contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the
brakes inspected as soon as possible:
Driving with the brake system
warning light illuminated is
dangerous. It indicates that your
brakes may not work at all or that
they could completely fail at any
time. If this light remains
illuminated, after checking that the
parking brake is fully released, have
the brakes inspected immediately.
CAUTION
In addition, the effectiveness of the
braking may diminish so you may
need to depress the brake pedal more
strongly than normal to stop the
vehicle.
qIf the antilock brake system
(ABS) warning light illuminates
If the ABS warning light stays on while
you're driving, the ABS control unit has
detected a system malfunction. If this
occurs, your brakes will function normally
as if the vehicle had no ABS.
Should this happen, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
l When the engine is jump-started to charge
the battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABS
warning light may illuminate. If this occurs,
it is the result of the weak battery and does
not indicate an ABS malfunction.
Recharge the battery.
l The brake assist system does not operate
while the ABS warning light is illuminated.
7-24
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page526
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (527,1)
qIf the brake system warning light
and the ABS warning light
illuminate simultaneously
If the electronic brake force distribution
control unit determines that some
components are operating incorrectly, the
control unit may illuminate the brake
system warning light and the ABS
warning light simultaneously. The
problem is likely to be the electronic
brake force distribution system.
WARNING
Do not drive with both the ABS warning
light and brake warning light
illuminated. Have the vehicle towed to
an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have
the brakes inspected as soon as
possible:
Driving when the brake system
warning light and ABS warning light
are illuminated simultaneously is
dangerous.
When both lights are illuminated, the
rear wheels could lock more quickly
in an emergency stop than under
normal circumstances.
qIf the electric parking brake
warning light illuminates
The warning light illuminates when the
system has a malfunction. Have your
vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
qIf the charging system warning
indication/warning light is indicated
If the warning light/indication illuminates
while driving, it indicates a malfunction
of the alternator or of the charging system.
Drive to the side of the road and park off
the right-of-way. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving when the
charging system warning light is
illuminated because the engine could
stop unexpectedly.
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
7-25
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page527
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (528,1)
qIf the engine oil warning indication/
warning light is indicated
This warning light indicates low engine
oil pressure.
CAUTION
Do not run the engine if the oil
pressure is low. Otherwise, it could
result in extensive engine damage.
If the light illuminates while driving:
1. Drive to the side of the road and park
off the right-of-way on level ground.
2. Turn off the engine and wait 5 minutes
for the oil to drain back into the oil
pan.
3. Inspect the engine oil level (page 6-28).
If it's low, add the appropriate amount
of engine oil while being careful not to
overfill.
CAUTION
Do not run the engine if the oil level
is low. Otherwise, it could result in
extensive engine damage.
4. Start the engine and check the warning
light.
If the light remains illuminated even
though the oil level is normal or after
adding oil, stop the engine immediately
and have your vehicle towed to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qIf the check engine light
illuminates or flashes
If this light illuminates while driving, the
vehicle may have a problem. It is
important to note the driving conditions
when the light illuminated and consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The check engine light may illuminate in
the following cases:
l The fuel tank level being very low or
approaching empty.
l The engine's electrical system has a
problem.
l The emission control system has a
problem.
l (U.S.A. and Canada)
The fuel-filler cap is missing or not
tightened securely.
If the check engine light remains on, or it
flashes continuously, do not drive at high
speeds and consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible.
7-26
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page528
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (529,1)
qIf the high engine coolant
temperature warning light (red)
illuminates or flashes
The light flashes when the engine coolant
temperature is extremely high, and
illuminates when the engine coolant
temperature increases further.
Handling Procedure
Flashing light
Drive slowly to reduce engine load until
you can find a safe place to stop the
vehicle and wait for the engine to cool
down.
Illuminated light
This indicates the possibility of
overheating. Park the vehicle in a safe
place immediately and stop the engine.
Refer to Overheating (page 7-18).
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle with the high
engine coolant temperature warning
light illuminated. Otherwise, it could
result in damage to the engine.
qIf the lane departure warning
system (LDWS) OFF Indication/
Indicator Light is indicatedí
Type A
If the indication remains displayed even
though the LDWS switch has been
operated, it indicates a problem in the
system. Have your vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Type B
A problem in the system may be indicated
under the following conditions. Have your
vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
l The light does not turn on when the
ignition is switched ON.
l It remains illuminated even though the
LDWS switch has been switched off.
CAUTION
Ø Always use tires for all wheels that
are of the specified size, and the
same manufacture, brand, and
tread pattern. In addition, do not
use tires with significantly
different wear patterns on the
same vehicle. If such improper
tires are used, the LDWS may not
operate normally.
Ø When an emergency spare tire is
used, the system may not operate
normally.
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
7-27íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page529
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (530,1)
qIf the AWD warning indication/
warning light is indicated
Type A
The warning indication will display under
the following conditions;
l There is an abnormality with the AWD
system.
l There is too much difference in tire
radius between the front and rear
wheels.
l The differential oil temperature is
abnormally high.
l There is a continuous large difference
between front and rear wheel rotation,
such as when trying to pull away from
an icy surface or when trying to
remove the vehicle from mud, sand or
similar conditions.
When “ 4WD system malfunction ” is
indicated
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
When “ 4WD system high-load” is
indicated
Park the vehicle in a safe place. After a
few moments, if the indication disappears,
you can resume driving. If the indication
does not disappear, contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Type B
The warning light will illuminate or flash
under the following conditions:
l Illuminates when there is an
abnormality with the AWD system.
l Illuminates if there is too much
difference in tire radius between the
front and rear wheels.
l Flashes when the differential oil
temperature is abnormally high.
l Flashes when there is a continuous
large difference between front and rear
wheel rotation, such as when trying to
pull away from an icy surface or when
trying to remove the vehicle from mud,
sand or similar conditions.
When illuminated
If the AWD warning light illuminates,
contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
When flashing
Park the vehicle in a safe place. After a
few moments, if the warning light stops
flashing, you can resume driving. If the
light does not stop flashing, contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qIf the automatic transaxle warning
indication/warning light is indicated
Type A/Type B
The light/indication illuminates when the
transaxle has a problem.
7-28
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page530
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (531,1)
CAUTION
If the automatic transaxle warning
light/warning indication illuminates,
the transaxle has an electrical
problem. Continuing to drive your
Mazda in this condition could cause
damage to your transaxle. Consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon
as possible.
qIf the power steering malfunction
warning indication/indicator light
is indicated
Type A/Type B
The power steering malfunction indicator
light/warning indication illuminates or
flashes if there is a malfunction with the
power steering while the engine is
running.
If the indicator light/warning indication
illuminates or flashes, park the vehicle in
a safe place immediately and stop the
engine.
If the indicator light/warning indication
does not turn off even if the engine is
restarted afterwards, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
l If the indicator light/warning indication
illuminates or flashes, the power steering
will not operate normally. If this happens,
the steering wheel can still be operated,
however, the operation may feel heavy
compared to normal, and the steering
wheel could vibrate when turning.
l Repeatedly jerking the steering wheel left
and right while the vehicle is stopped or
moving extremely slowly will cause the
power steering system to go into protective
mode which will make the steering feel
heavy, but this does not indicate a problem.
If this occurs, park the vehicle safely and
wait several minutes for the system to
return to normal.
qIf the air bag/front seat belt
pretensioner system warning light
illuminates or flashes
A system malfunction is indicated if the
warning light constantly flashes,
constantly illuminates or does not
illuminate at all when the ignition is
switched ON. If any of these occur,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as
soon as possible. The system may not
operate in an accident.
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
7-29
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page531
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (532,1)
WARNING
Never tamper with the air bag/
pretensioner systems and always have
an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform
all servicing and repairs:
Self-servicing or tampering with the
systems is dangerous. An air bag/
pretensioner could accidentally
activate or become disabled causing
serious injury or death.
qIf the tire pressure monitoring
system warning light flashes
If the tire pressure monitoring system has
a malfunction, the tire pressure warning
light flashes for about 1 minute when the
ignition is switched ON and then
continues illuminating. Have your vehicle
checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer
as soon as possible.
qIf the KEY warning indication/
warning light (red) is indicated
Type A
“Keyless System malfunction” is
displayed
This message is displayed if the advanced
keyless entry & push button start system
has a problem.
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
CAUTION
If the above message is indicated, or
the push button start indicator light
(amber) flashes, the engine may not
start. If the engine cannot be started,
try starting it using the emergency
operation for starting the engine, and
have the vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
Refer to Emergency Operation for
Starting the Engine on page 4-8.
“Ignition is on” is displayed
This message is displayed when the
driver's door is opened without switching
the ignition off.
7-30
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page532
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (533,1)
“Key not detected” is displayed
This message is displayed when any of
the following operations is performed
with the key out of the operational range
or placed in areas inside the cabin where it
is difficult for the key to be detected.
l The push button start is pressed with
the ignition switched off
l The ignition is switched on
l All doors are closed without switching
the ignition off
Type B
If any malfunction occurs in the keyless
entry system, it illuminates continuously.
CAUTION
If the key warning indicator light
illuminates or the push button start
indicator light (amber) flashes, the
engine may not start. If the engine
cannot be started, try starting it
using the emergency operation for
starting the engine, and have the
vehicle inspected at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to Emergency Operation for
Starting the Engine on page 4-8.
qIf the high beam control system
(HBC) warning light (amber)
flashesí
This light turns on if there is a
malfunction in the high beam control
system (HBC). Have your vehicle
inspected by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
qIf the wrench indication/indicator
light is indicated
Type A
Perform maintenance in accordance with
the message.
Type B
The wrench indicator light illuminates
when the engine oil replacement period is
reached.
If the light is illuminated, replace the
engine oil.
Refer to Engine Oil on page 6-27.
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
7-31íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page533
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (534,1)
qIf the traction control system
(TCS)/dynamic stability control
(DSC) indicator light illuminates
If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC or the
brake assist system may have a
malfunction and they may not operate
correctly. Take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
l In addition to the indicator light flashing, a
slight lugging sound will come from the
engine. This indicates that the TCS/DSC is
operating properly.
l On slippery surfaces, such as fresh snow, it
will be impossible to achieve high rpm
when the TCS is on.
qIf the traction control system (TCS)
OFF indicator light illuminates
If the light remains illuminated and the
TCS is not switched off, take your vehicle
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer. The DSC
may have a malfunction.
qIf the low engine coolant
temperature indicator light (blue)
does not turn off
If the low engine coolant temperature
indicator light remains illuminated after
the engine has been sufficiently warmed
up, the temperature sensor could have a
malfunction. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
qIf the turn signal/hazard warning
indicator light illuminates or flashes
at an abnormally high speed
If an indicator light flashes abnormally,
one of the turn signal bulbs may be
burned out. Consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
7-32
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page534
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (535,1)
qIf the security indicator light
illuminates or flashes
If the engine does not start with the
correct key, and the security indicator
light keeps illuminating or flashing, the
system may have a malfunction. Consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qIf the Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC) Warning Light
(Amber) illuminatesí
The warning light turns on if there is a
malfunction in the system while the
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
system is on. Have your vehicle inspected
at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qIf the blind spot monitoring
(BSM) system OFF indication/
indicator light illuminatesí
Type A
If the indication remains displayed even
though the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
switch has been operated, it indicates a
problem in the system. Have your vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Type B
A problem in the system may be indicated
under the following conditions. Have your
vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
l The light does not turn on when the
ignition is switched ON.
l It remains illuminated even though the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch
has been switched off.
l It turns on while driving the vehicle.
NOTE
If the vehicle is driven on a road with less
traffic and few vehicles that the radar sensors
can detect, the system may pause (The Blind
Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indication/
indicator light in the instrument cluster
illuminates). However, it does not indicate a
malfunction.
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
7-33íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page535
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (536,1)
qIf the lights-on indicator light flashes
The light continues to flash if the lighting
system has a malfunction. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qIf the LED headlight warning
light illuminatesí
This light illuminates if there is a
malfunction in the LED headlight. Have
your vehicle inspected by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Warning Sound is Activated
qLights-On Reminder
When the time setting for the auto
headlight off function is set to OFF
(lights on reminder warning sound is
enabled)
When the light switch is in the
position, the ignition is switched to ACC
or OFF, and the driver's door is opened,
the warning sound alerts the driver that
the headlights have not been turned off.
NOTE
When the ignition is switched to ACC, the
ignition not switched off (STOP) warning beep
takes priority over the lights on reminder
warning sound. The volume of the lights not off
warning sound can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
When the time setting for the auto
headlight off function is not set to OFF
(lights on reminder warning sound is
disabled)
When the light switch is not in the OFF
position and the ignition is switched OFF,
the auto headlight off function operates
and the headlights turn off after a certain
amount of time has elapsed. At this time,
the lights on reminder warning sound
does not activate even if the driver's door
is opened.
NOTE
The time until the lights turn off after the
ignition is switched OFF can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
7-34
If Trouble Arises
íSome models.
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page536
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (537,1)
qAir Bag/Front Seat Belt
Pretensioner System Warning Beep
If a malfunction is detected in the air bag/
front seat belt pretensioner systems and
the warning light illumination, a warning
beep sound will be heard for about 5
seconds every minute.
The air bag and seat belt pretensioner
system warning beep sound will continue
to be heard for approximately 35 minutes.
Have your vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the air
bag/front seat belt pretensioner system
warning beep sounding:
Driving the vehicle with the air bag/
front seat belt pretensioner system
warning beep sounding is dangerous.
In a collision, the air bags and the
front seat belt pretensioner system
will not deploy and this could result
in death or serious injury.
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer
to have the vehicle inspected as soon
as possible.
qSeat Belt Warning Beep
Except Mexico
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition is switched ON, a beep
sound will be heard for about 6 seconds.
If the driver or the front passenger's seat
belt is not fastened and the vehicle is
driven at a speed faster than about 20
km/h (12 mph), a beep sound will be
heard again for a specified period of time.
Until a seat belt is fastened or a given
period of time has elapsed, the beep sound
will not stop even if the vehicle speed
falls below 20 km/h (12 mph).
NOTE
l To allow the front passenger occupant
classification sensor to function properly,
do not place and sit on an additional seat
cushion on the front passenger's seat. The
sensor may not function properly because
the additional seat cushion could cause
sensor interference.
l If a small child is seated on the front
passenger's seat, the warning beep may not
operate.
Mexico
If the vehicle speed exceeds about 20
km/h (12 mph) with the driver or front
passenger's seat belt unfastened, a
warning beep sounds continuously. If the
seat belt remains unfastened, the beep
sound stops once and then continues for
about 90 seconds. The beep stops after the
driver or front passenger's seat belt is
fastened.
Until a seat belt is fastened or a given
period of time has elapsed, the beep sound
will not stop even if the vehicle speed
falls below 20 km/h (12 mph).
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
7-35
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page537
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (538,1)
NOTE
l Placing heavy items on the front
passenger's seat may cause the front
passenger's seat belt warning function to
operate depending on the weight of the
item.
l To allow the front passenger seat weight
sensor to function properly, do not place
and sit on an additional seat cushion on the
front passenger's seat. The sensor may not
function properly because the additional
seat cushion could cause sensor
interference.
l If a small child is seated on the front
passenger's seat, the warning beep may not
operate.
qIgnition Not Switched Off
(STOP) Warning Beep
If the driver's door is opened while the
ignition is switched to ACC, a continuous
beep sound will be heard to notify the
driver that the ignition has not been
switched off (STOP) (for vehicles with a
type A meter, messages are displayed in
the instrument cluster). Left in this
condition, the keyless entry system will
not operate, the car cannot be locked, and
the battery power will be depleted.
qKey Removed from Vehicle
Warning Beep
Under the following conditions, a beep
sound will be heard and the KEY warning
light (red) will flash continuously when
the ignition has not been switched off to
notify the driver that the key has been
removed (for vehicles with a type A
meter, messages are displayed in the
instrument cluster). The KEY warning
light (red) will stop flashing when the key
is back inside the vehicle (for vehicles
with a type A meter, messages are
displayed in the instrument cluster):
The ignition has not been switched off
and all the doors are closed after
removing the key from the vehicle. (A
beep sound will be heard 6 times.)
NOTE
Because the key utilizes low-intensity radio
waves, the Key Removed From Vehicle
Warning may activate if the key is carried
together with a metal object or it is placed in a
poor signal reception area.
qRequest Switch Inoperable
Warning Beep (With the
advanced keyless function)
If the request switch is pressed under the
following conditions while the key is
being carried, a beep will be heard for
about 2 seconds to indicate that the front
doors and the liftgate can not be locked.
l A door or the liftgate is open (door ajar
included).
l The ignition has not been switched to
off.
7-36
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page538
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (539,1)
qKey Left-in-luggage Compartment
Warning Beep (With the advanced
keyless function)
If the key is left in the luggage
compartment with all doors locked and
the liftgate closed, a beep sound is heard
for about 10 seconds to remind the driver
the key has been left in the luggage
compartment. If this happens, open the
liftgate by pressing the electric liftgate
opener and remove the key. A key
removed from the luggage compartment
may not function because its functions
may have been temporarily suspended. To
restore the key function, perform the
applicable procedure (page 3-8).
qKey Left-in-vehicle Warning Beep
(With the advanced keyless function)
When any door is opened from the
outside while the key is inside the vehicle,
the closed doors are locked. All the doors
are automatically unlocked by closing the
open door and the beep sound is heard for
about 10 seconds to notify the driver that
the key has been left in the vehicle.
If this happens, the doors and the liftgate
lock but the functions of the key left in the
vehicle cabin may be temporarily
suspended.
Perform the applicable procedure to
restore the functions of the key (page 3-8).
qTire Inflation Pressure Warning
Beep
The warning beep sound will be heard for
about 3 seconds when there is any
abnormality in tire inflation pressures
(page 4-148).
qLane Departure Warning Soundí
While the system is operating, if the
system determines that the vehicle may
depart from the lane, it sounds a warning
sound.
NOTE
l The volume of the LDWS warning sound
can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
l The type of the LDWS warning sound can
be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-10.
qBlind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
System Warning Beepí
Driving forward
The warning beep operates when the turn
signal lever is operated to the side where
the BSM warning light is illuminated.
NOTE
A personalized function is available to change
the BSM warning beep sound volume. Refer to
Personalization Features on page 9-10.
Reversing
If a moving object such as a vehicle or
two-wheeled vehicle approaches on the
left or right from behind your vehicle, the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning
sound is activated.
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
7-37íSome models.
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page539
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (540,1)
qMazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) System Warningsí
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) system warnings notify the
driver of system malfunctions and
cautions on use when required.
Check based on the beep sound.
Cautions What to check
The beep sounds 1 time
while the Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC)
is operating
The vehicle speed is
slower than 25 km/h
(16 mph) and the Mazda
Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) system has been
canceled.
The beep continues to
sound while the vehicle
is being driven.
The distance between
your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead is too
close. Verify the safety of
the surrounding area and
reduce vehicle speed.
When the Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC)
is operating, the beep
sounds and the Mazda
Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) warning light
(amber) in the instrument
cluster turns on.
A malfunction in the
system may be indicated.
Have your vehicle
inspected at an
Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
qCollision warningí
If there is the possibility of a collision
with a vehicle ahead, the beep sounds
continuously and a warning is indicated in
the display.
qPower Steering Warning Buzzer
If the power steering system has a
malfunction, the power steering
malfunction light turns on or flashes and
the buzzer operates at the same time.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-20.
qElectric Parking Brake Warning
Beep
The warning buzzer is activated under the
following conditions:
l The vehicle is driven with the electric
parking brake applied.
l The electric parking brake switch is
pulled while the vehicle is driven.
7-38
If Trouble Arises
íSome models.
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page540
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (541,1)
When Liftgate Cannot be
Opened
If the vehicle battery is dead or there is a
malfunction in the electrical system and
the liftgate can not be opened, perform the
following procedure as an emergency
measure to Open it:
1. Remove the cap on the interior surface
of the liftgate with a flathead
screwdriver.
Cap
2. Turn the lever to the right to unlock the
liftgate.
Lever
After performing this emergency measure,
have the vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
If Trouble Arises
When Liftgate Cannot be Opened
7-39
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page541
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (542,1)
7-40
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page542
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (543,1)
8 Customer Information and ReportingSafety Defects
Important consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.
Customer Assistance ............................... 8-2
Customer Assistance (U.S.A.) ............ 8-2
Customer Assistance (Canada) ........... 8-7
Customer Assistance (Puerto Rico) ... 8-10
Customer Assistance (Mexico) ......... 8-11
Mazda Importer/Distributors ............... 8-13
Importer/Distributor .......................... 8-13
Reporting Safety Defects ....................... 8-14
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.A.) .... 8-14
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada) ... 8-15
Warranty ................................................ 8-16
Warranties for Your Mazda ............... 8-16
Outside the United States/Canada ..... 8-17
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign
Country (Except United States and
Canada) ............................................. 8-18
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and
Accessories ....................................... 8-19
Cell Phones ............................................. 8-20
Cell Phones Warning ......................... 8-20
Event Data Recorder ............................. 8-21
Event Data Recorder (U.S.A. and
Canada) ............................................. 8-21
Recording of Vehicle Data .................... 8-22
Recording of Vehicle Data ................ 8-22
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System
(UTQGS) ................................................ 8-23
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System
(UTQGS) .......................................... 8-23
Tire Information (U.S.A.) ..................... 8-25
Tire Labeling ..................................... 8-25
Location of the Tire Label
(Placard) ............................................ 8-31
Tire Maintenance .............................. 8-34
Vehicle Loading ................................ 8-37
Steps for Determining the Correct Load
Limit ................................................. 8-43
Declaration of Conformity .................... 8-44
Declaration of Conformity ................ 8-44
Service Publications .............................. 8-54
Service Publications .......................... 8-54
8-1
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page543
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (544,1)
Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle
in top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
NOTE
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary restraint
system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in accordance with a
certified physician, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer. For more information, go to NHTSA
website www.safercar.gov (VEHICLE SHOPPERS → Air Bags→ Air Bag FAQs → Air Bag
Deactivation).
qSTEP 1: Contact Your Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue.
l If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES,
SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of
the dealership or the OWNER.
l If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary
restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in
accordance with a certified physician, go to STEP 2.
qSTEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your dealership
management or it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the
supplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical
conditions in accordance with a certified physician, you can reach Mazda North American
Operations by one of the following ways.
Log on: at www.mazdaUSA.com
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in
the U.S., can be found here.
E-mail: click on “Contact Us” located on the “Inside Mazda” tab, or at the bottom of the
page at www.mazdaUSA.com
By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500
8-2
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page544
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (545,1)
By letter at:
Attn: Customer Assistance
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618-2922
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734
In order to serve you efficiently and effectively, please help us by providing the following
information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda Distributor.
qSTEP 3: Contact Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Mazda North American Operations realizes that mutual agreement on some issues may not
be possible. As a final step to ensure that your concerns are being fairly considered, Mazda
North American Operations has agreed to participate in a dispute settlement program
administered by the Better Business Bureau (BBB) system, at no cost to you the consumer.
BBB AUTO LINE works with consumers and the manufacturer in an attempt to reach a
mutually acceptable resolution of any warranty related concerns. If the BBB is not able to
facilitate a settlement they will provide an informal hearing before an arbitrator.
You are required to resort to BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies under the Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. § 2301 et seq. To the
extent permitted by the applicable state “Lemon Law”, you are also required to resort to
BBB AUTO LINE before exercising any rights or seeking remedies under the “Lemon
Law”. If you choose to seek remedies that are not created by the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or the applicable state “Lemon Law”, you are not required to first use BBB AUTO
LINE.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
8-3
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page545
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (546,1)
The whole process normally takes 40 days or less. The arbitration decision is not binding
on you or Mazda unless you accept the decision. For more information about BBB AUTO
LINE, including current eligibility standards, please call 1-800-955-5100 or visit the BBB
website at www.lemonlaw.bbb.org.
Being truly committed to customer satisfaction is more than a phrase with Mazda. We hope
to satisfy every customer directly, but if there is ever a question about our decision, Mazda
believes in providing a fast, fair and free method such as the BBB AUTO LINE to ensure
Mazda delivers on our commitment to do the right thing for our customers!
qCalifornia Customers
1. Mazda North American Operations participates in BBB AUTO LINE, a mediation/
arbitration program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus [4200
Wilson Boulevard, Arlington, Virginia 22203] through local Better Business Bureaus.
BBB AUTO LINE and Mazda have been certified by the Arbitration Certification
Program of the California Department of Consumer Affairs.
2. If you have a problem arising under a Mazda written warranty, we encourage you to
bring it to our attention. If we are unable to resolve it, you may file a claim with BBB
AUTO LINE. Claims must be filed with BBB AUTO LINE within six (6) months after
the expiration of the warranty.
3. To file a claim with BBB AUTO LINE, call 1-800-955-5100. There is no charge for the
call.
4. In order to file a claim with BBB AUTO LINE, you will have to provide your name and
address, the brand name and vehicle identification number (VIN) of your vehicle, and a
statement of the nature of your problem or complaint. You will also be asked to provide:
the approximate date of your acquisition of the vehicle, the vehicle's current mileage, the
approximate date and mileage at the time any problem(s) were first brought to the
attention of Mazda or one of our dealers, and a statement of the relief you are seeking.
5. BBB AUTO LINE staff may try to help resolve your dispute through mediation. If
mediation is not successful, or if you do not wish to participate in mediation, claims
within the program's jurisdiction may be presented to an arbitrator at an informal
hearing. The arbitrator's decision should ordinarily be issued within 40 days from the
time your complaint is filed; there may be a delay of 7 days if you did not first contact
Mazda about your problem, or a delay of up to 30 days if the arbitrator requests an
inspection/report by an impartial technical expert or further investigation and report by
BBB AUTO LINE.
8-4
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page546
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (547,1)
6. You are required to use BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or
remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793.22. You are also required to
use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by Title I of
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22 or Title I of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
7. California Civil Code Section 1793.2 (d) requires that, if Mazda or its representative is
unable to repair a new motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle's applicable express
warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, Mazda may be required to replace or
repurchase the vehicle. California Civil Code Section 1793.22 (b) creates a presumption
that Mazda has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within 18 months from delivery to the buyer or 18,000
miles on the vehicle's odometer, whichever occurs first, one or more of the following
occurs:
l The same nonconformity [a failure to conform to the written warranty that
substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle] results in a condition that
is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven AND the
nonconformity has been subject to repair two or more times by Mazda or its agents
AND the buyer or lessee has directly notified Mazda of the need for the repair of the
nonconformity; OR
l The same nonconformity has been subject to repair 4 or more times by Mazda or its
agents AND the buyer has notified Mazda of the need for the repair of the
nonconformity; OR
l The vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of nonconformities by Mazda or its
agents for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days after delivery of the
vehicle to the buyer.
NOTICE TO Mazda AS REQUIRED ABOVE SHALL BE SENT TO THE
FOLLOWING ADDRESS:
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618
ATTN: Customer Mediation
8. The following remedies may be sought in BBB AUTO LINE: repairs, reimbursement
for money paid to repair a vehicle or other expenses incurred as result of a vehicle
nonconformity, repurchase or replacement of your vehicle, and compensation for
damages and remedies available under Mazda's written warranty or applicable law.
9. The following remedies may not be sought in BBB AUTO LINE: punitive or multiple
damages, attorneys' fees, or consequential damages other than as provided in California
Civil Code Section 1794 (a) and (b).
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
8-5
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page547
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (548,1)
10. You may reject the decision issued by a BBB AUTO LINE arbitrator. If you reject the
decision, you will be free to pursue further legal action. The arbitrator's decision and
any findings will be admissible in a court action.
11. If you accept the arbitrator's decision, Mazda will be bound by the decision, and will
comply with the decision within a reasonable time not to exceed 30 days after we
receive notice of your acceptance of the decision.
12. Please call BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100 for further details about the program.
8-6
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page548
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (549,1)
Customer Assistance (Canada)
qSatisfaction Review Process
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is of primary concern to Mazda. All Authorized
Mazda Dealers have both the knowledge and tools to keep your Mazda in top condition. In
our experience, any questions, problems, or complaints regarding the operation of your
Mazda or any other general service transactions are most effectively resolved by your
dealer. If the cause of your dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal
dealership procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps:
qSTEP 1: Contact the Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with a member of dealership management. If the Service Manager has
already reviewed your concerns, contact the owner of the dealership or its General
Manager.
qSTEP 2: Contact the Mazda Regional Office
If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the dealer Service Manager to arrange for
you to meet the local Mazda Service Representative. If more expedient, contact Mazda
Canada Inc. Regional Office nearest you for such arrangements. Regional Office address
and phone numbers are shown (page 8-9).
qSTEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department
If still not substantially satisfied, contact the Customer Relations Department, Mazda
Canada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada TEL:1 (800) 2634680.
Provide the Department with the following information:
1. Your name, address and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Refer to the “Vehicle Identification Labels” page
of section 9 of this manual for the location of the VIN.
4. Purchase date
5. Present odometer reading
6. Your dealer's name and location
7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction
The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service Representative, will review
the case to determine if everything possible has been done to ensure your satisfaction.
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
8-7
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page549
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (550,1)
Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases requires the use of
your Mazda dealer's service facilities, personnel and equipment. We urge you to follow the
above three steps in sequence for most effective results.
qMediation/Arbitration Program
Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda's Customer
Satisfaction Program. If after exhausting the procedures in this manual your concern is still
not resolved, you have another option.
Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered by the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will advise you about
how your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an independent third party through
binding arbitration.
Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our dealers.
Mazda's participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable contribution to our achieving that
goal. There is no charge for using CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as the
award is binding on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.
qCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)
If a specific item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an owner,
Mazda, and/or one of its dealers (that all parties cannot agree upon), the owner may wish to
use the services offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling
and preparing for their arbitration hearings. However, before you can proceed with
CAMVAP you must follow your Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.
8-8
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page550
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (551,1)
CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories.
Consumers wishing to obtain further information about the Program should contact the
Provincial Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan Office at:
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
235 Yorkland Boulevard, suite 300
North York, Ontario
M2J 4Y8
http://camvap.ca
Provincial Administrators may be reached locally as listed below:
Province/Territory CAMVAP Number
British Columbia & Yukon Territories 1 (800) 207-0685
Alberta & Northwest Territories 1 (800) 207-0685
Saskatchewan 1 (800) 207-0685
Manitoba 1 (800) 207-0685
Ontario 1 (800) 207-0685
Atlantic Canada 1 (800) 207-0685
Quebec 1 (800) 207-0685
qRegional Offices
REGIONAL OFFICES COVERING AREAS
MAZDA CANADA INC.
WESTERN REGION
5011 275 STREET
LANGLEY, BRITISH COLUMBIA
V4W 0A8
(778) 369-2100
1 (800) 663-0908
ALBERTA,
BRITISH COLUMBIA,
MANITOBA,
SASKATCHEWAN,
YUKON
MAZDA CANADA INC.
CENTRAL REGION
55 VOGELL ROAD,
RICHMOND HILL,
ONTARIO, L4B 3K5
1 (800) 263-4680
ONTARIO,
NEW BRUNSWICK,
NOVA SCOTIA,
PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND,
NEWFOUNDLAND
MAZDA CANADA INC.
QUEBEC REGION
6111 ROUTE TRANSCANADIENNE
POINTE CLAIRE, QUEBEC
H9R 5A5
(514) 694-6390
QUEBEC
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
8-9
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page551
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (552,1)
Customer Assistance (Puerto Rico)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all Authorized
Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top
condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
qSTEP 1
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS,
SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL
MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER.
qSTEP 2
If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please contact your
area's Mazda representative (Indicated on the next page).
Please help us by providing the following information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
8-10
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page552
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (553,1)
Customer Assistance (Mexico)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle
in top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
qContact Your Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue.
l If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES,
SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of
the dealership or the OWNER.
l If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary
restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical condition in
accordance with a certified physician you must contact your dealership in order to avoid
the potential loss of the warranty of your vehicle which may occur if some third party is
hired by the customer to make any modifications to this system.
Log on: at www.MazdaMexico.com.mx
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in
Mexico, can be found here.
E-mail: click on “Contactanos” at the top of the page at www.MazdaMexico.com.mx
By phone at: 01 800 01 MAZDA (62932)
By letter at:
Attn: Customer Assistance
Mazda Motor de Mexico
Mario Pani #150, PB Col. Lomas de Santa Fe
Mexico, D.F. C.P. 05300
Del. Cuajimalpa de Morelos
Tel: Customer Assistance
01 800 01 MAZDA (62932).
In order to serve you efficiently and effectively, please help us by providing the following
information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
8-11
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page553
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (554,1)
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
8-12
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
CX-5_8DV2-EA-14K_Edition3 Page554
Thursday, February 26 2015 5:35 PM
Form No.8DV2-EA-14K
Black plate (555,1)
Importer/Distributor
qU.S.A.
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618-2922 U.S.A.
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734 U.S.A.
TEL:1 (800) 222-5500 (in U.S.A.)
(949) 727-1990 (outside U.S.A.)
qCANADA
Mazda Canada Inc.
55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill,
Ontario, L4B